1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide

Title page

1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Issue 1 August 2016

Legal notice Legal notice

Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. The information presented is subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies contained herein. © 2016 Nokia. Conformance statement

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the guidelines in this document, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the expense of the user. Security Statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Nokia cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access. Limited Warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Nokia Account Team.

Contents About this document xxiii Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xxiii What's new ................................................................................................................................................................................. xxiii xxiii Intended Audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxiv xxiv How to Use this Information Product ................................................................................................................................ xxv Conventions

............................................................................................................................................................................... xxv xxv

Related information .................................................................................................................................................................. xxv xxv

1

Technical support

.................................................................................................................................................................. xxviii xxviii

How to comment

................................................................................................................................................................... xxviii xxviii

Introduction Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1-1 The 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool .............................................................................................................. 1-2 1-2 EPT Features in Release 9.0 Functionality

2

................................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1-4

............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-22 1-22

EPT Installation and Setup Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2-1 Required Equipment ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2 2-2 Installing the EPT Software

.................................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2-3

Uninstalling the EPT ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-12 2-12 Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

..................................................................................................................................... 2-15 2-15

Launching the EPT Application ........................................................................................................................................ 2-22 2-22 Closing the EPT Application .............................................................................................................................................. 2-30 2-30

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS iii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

EPT User Interface Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3-1 Menus and Tool Bar ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3-2 Information Bar ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-14 3-14 Map Legend .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-15 3-15

4

Design Process Workflow Design Process

5

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4-1

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5-1 Network Parameters ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2 5-2 Sites

............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-49 5-49

Segments .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-78 5-78 Network Elements .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-91 5-91 Nodes ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-110 5-110 6

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6-1 Links .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6-2 Spans ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-37 6-37 Glass-Throughs L2 Switch Errors

7

....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-39 6-39

.................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-40 6-40

.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-43 6-43

Traffic Definition and Configuration Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 7-1 Elements of Traffic Definitions in the EPT ..................................................................................................................... 7-2 7-2 Trails and Services

................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4 7-4

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links .................................................................................................................... 7-39 7-39 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS iv 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Design Automation and Verification Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8-1 Design Options

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8-2

Running a Design

..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4 8-4

Removing a Design .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8 8-8 Verifying a Network Design ............................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8-10 Price Files .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-14 8-14 Running an Incremental Design ........................................................................................................................................ 8-16 8-16 Importing and Exporting a Design ................................................................................................................................... 8-23 8-23 Merging Network Designs .................................................................................................................................................. 8-25 8-25 9

1830 PSS Commissioning 1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT .............................................................................................................. 9-1 9-1 1830 PSS Portable Provisioning Tool

10

............................................................................................................................ 9-11 9-11

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT GMPLS Concepts in the EPT ............................................................................................................................................ 10-1 10-1 GMPLS Configuration GMPLS Auditing

......................................................................................................................................................... 10-5 10-5

................................................................................................................................................................. 10-13 10-13

GMPLS Design Conversion 11

............................................................................................................................................ 10-24 10-24

Reports Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1 11-1

EPT Reports .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11-3 Bill of Materials Report ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-4 11-4 Equipment View ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-7 11-7 Installation Report

............................................................................................................................................................... 11-10 11-10

Network Information

......................................................................................................................................................... 11-16 11-16

Network Parameters Report

............................................................................................................................................. 11-17 11-17

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS v 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Site Report .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11-18 11-18 Rack Report ............................................................................................................................................................................ 11-19 11-19 Link Report

............................................................................................................................................................................ 11-20 11-20

Fiber Report

........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-21 11-21

OT-OT Link Report ............................................................................................................................................................. 11-23 11-23 OA and DCM Report .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-24 11-24 Shelf Report

........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-25 11-25

Trails Report

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-26 11-26

Services Report ..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-28 11-28 BOL WDM Routing Report ............................................................................................................................................. 11-29 11-29 BOL Physical Layer Report

............................................................................................................................................. 11-30 11-30

Trail Routing Report ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-31 11-31 Packet Demands/Routing Report

................................................................................................................................... 11-33 11-33

Packet Connections Report ............................................................................................................................................... 11-34 11-34 Systems Report

..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-35 11-35

L1 Configuration Report Errors Report

................................................................................................................................................... 11-36 11-36

......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-37 11-37

GMPLS Reports

................................................................................................................................................................... 11-38 11-38

Physical Layer Report

........................................................................................................................................................ 11-49 11-49

Custom Physical Layer Report ........................................................................................................................................ 11-51 11-51 Statistics Report .................................................................................................................................................................... 11-65 11-65 Card Inventory Report ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-73 11-73 Design Status Details

......................................................................................................................................................... 11-75 11-75

Power Management Report .............................................................................................................................................. 11-76 11-76 Channel Utilization Report ............................................................................................................................................... 11-78 11-78 GMPLS Commissioning Report ..................................................................................................................................... 11-79 11-79 Target Power Offset Commissioning Report ............................................................................................................. 11-80 11-80 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS vi 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Utilization Interface Report ............................................................................................................................ 11-82 11-82 12

Importing Network Data Import Network Data ............................................................................................................................................................ 12-1 12-1

13

EPT Tutorials Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1 13-1

1588v2 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 13-3 13-3 1621SLE Long Spans

........................................................................................................................................................ 13-13 13-13

Designing Submarine Links ............................................................................................................................................. 13-19 13-19 Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 13-22 13-22 Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration ..................................................................................... 13-26 13-26 OPS Protection ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13-29 13-29 Cascading OTs

..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-31 13-31

1DPPM24 Aggregation ...................................................................................................................................................... 13-34 13-34 MC LAG Configuration .................................................................................................................................................... 13-36 13-36 ROADM Configurations ................................................................................................................................................... 13-37 13-37 IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration ............................................................................................................... 13-39 13-39 WTOCM OSNR Measurements ..................................................................................................................................... 13-43 13-43 Smart SFPs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 13-46 13-46 11QCUPC 10G EPT trail Segments .............................................................................................................................. 13-47 13-47 4DPA4 Configuration

........................................................................................................................................................ 13-49 13-49

Alien Signal Configuration

.............................................................................................................................................. 13-56 13-56

Shelf Packing and Placement

.......................................................................................................................................... 13-60 13-60

Network Element Physical Configuration Editing Project Configuration

.................................................................................................. 13-67 13-67

......................................................................................................................................................... 13-68 13-68

GMPLS-Enabled Network Upload

............................................................................................................................... 13-73 13-73

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS vii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Troubleshooting the EPT Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1 14-1

Error and Warning Types ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-2 14-2 Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings ..................................................................................................................... 14-4 14-4 Demand and Design Errors ................................................................................................................................................. 14-9 14-9 Creating Systems Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-17 14-17 Import and Export Errors .................................................................................................................................................. 14-18 14-18 15

EPT Specificity Special Notices ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-1 15-1

Glossary Index

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS viii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of tables 1

Document changes since Release 8.2, Issue 2, March 2016

................................................................... xxiii

2

Information products related to 1830 PSS ....................................................................................................... xxv

2-1

Minimum Requirements to Install EPT ............................................................................................................. 2-2

2-2

Design Options Window ....................................................................................................................................... 2-27

3-1

File Menu Descriptions

3-2

Action Menu Descriptions

..................................................................................................................................... 3-4

3-3

Reports Menu Descriptions

................................................................................................................................... 3-6

3-4

Audit Menu Descriptions ........................................................................................................................................ 3-8

3-5

Help Menu Descriptions

3-6

Toolbar Icon Descriptions

3-7

Site Icon Descriptions

5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)

5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

5-3

Network Parameters (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

5-5

Site Details ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-51 5-51

5-6

Universal Shelf Power Filter Default Options (Power Filter Definition Tab)

5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab) ........................................................................ 5-55

5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

5-9

Segment Parameters

5-10

Network Element Parameters

5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

5-12

Node Parameters

........................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3-3

......................................................................................................................................... 3-8 .................................................................................................................................... 3-11

........................................................................................................................................... 3-15 3-15 ............................................... 5-5

....................................................................... 5-15

............................................................................. 5-33

...................................................................................... 5-37

.................................. 5-53

........................................................................................ 5-68

............................................................................................................................................... 5-81 5-81 ............................................................................................................................. 5-92 .............................................................................................................. 5-96

................................................................................................................................................... 5-111 5-111

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS ix 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of tables ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

6-2

Link Attributes Selection Parameters

6-3

CWDM Link Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-19

6-4

Single Channel Link Parameters

7-1

Channel Spacing Rules ............................................................................................................................................ 7-3 7-3

7-2

Trail Parameters

7-3

Service Parameters

7-4

Packet Connection Parameters

7-5

Packet Demand Parameters

7-6

OT-OT Packet Link Parameters

8-1

Verify Network Parameters

8-2

Changing Project States

8-3

Merge Toolbar Button Descriptions

10-1

Trail Restoration with Protection

10-2

GMPLS Failure Scope Parameters

10-3

Audit Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 10-14 10-14

11-1

OSP Fiber Connections (A-End Only) .......................................................................................................... 11-14

11-2

OSP Fiber Connections (A-End)

..................................................................................................................... 11-15

11-3

OSP Fiber Connections (B-End)

..................................................................................................................... 11-15

11-4

........................................................................................................................................ 6-7 .............................................................................................................. 6-13

....................................................................................................................... 6-22

......................................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7-6 ................................................................................................................................................. 7-15 7-15 ........................................................................................................................... 7-42

................................................................................................................................. 7-45 ......................................................................................................................... 7-52

................................................................................................................................. 8-11

........................................................................................................................................ 8-18 8-18 ................................................................................................................. 8-25

...................................................................................................................... 10-3 ................................................................................................................... 10-9

..................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-55 11-55

11-5

Create Specs Parameters (Statistics)

13-1

Cascading Configurations

.............................................................................................................. 11-67

................................................................................................................................. 13-31

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS x 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures 1-1

Interworking between CDC ROADMs and Legacy

................................................................................. 1-13

1-2

WT-XFP Options ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-17 1-17

1-3

Nodal Configuration Matrix ................................................................................................................................ 1-18

2-1

Mac Hostname

2-2

Welcome to the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard Window

2-3

Setup Window (Legal Notice)

2-4

Setup Window ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-7 2-7

2-5

Completing the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard Window ............................................................................... 2-8

2-6

1830 EPT Desktop Icon

2-7

1830 EPT Desktop Icon (Large)

2-8

Mac Desktop Icon

2-9

EPT Setup Wizard Window ................................................................................................................................. 2-10

2-10

Applications

2-11

Confirmation Window (Confirm Uninstall)

2-12

(Deinstallation in Progress)

2-13

Confirmation Window (Successful Uninstall) .............................................................................................. 2-14

2-14

EPT Startup

2-15

Design Options Window ....................................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-16

License Invalid Error

............................................................................................................................................. 2-24 2-24

2-17

License Expired Error

........................................................................................................................................... 2-25

2-18

License Error Window

.......................................................................................................................................... 2-26

2-19

Warning Window (Exiting EPT)

3-1

File Menu ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3-2

............................................................................................................................................................ 2-4 2-4 .............................................................................. 2-5

.............................................................................................................................. 2-6

.......................................................................................................................................... 2-8 .......................................................................................................................... 2-9

..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2-9

.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-11 2-11 .................................................................................................. 2-12

................................................................................................................................. 2-13

............................................................................................................................................................... 2-23 2-23

....................................................................................................................... 2-31

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xi 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2

Action Menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4 3-4

3-3

Reports Menu (Non-GMPLS Network)

3-4

Reports Menu (GMPLS and Commissioning) ................................................................................................ 3-6

3-5

Audit Menu

3-6

Help Menu .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8 3-8

3-7

Design History Window

3-8

About 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Window

3-9

License Request Window

3-10

Information Bar (Standard)

3-11

Information Bar (GMPLS Designs)

3-12

Network Map

4-1

Network Design Flowchart

5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)

5-2

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab, Scrolled)

5-3

Network Parameters Window (GMPLS Designs)

5-4

Network Parameters Window (GMPLS Designs, Scrolled)

5-5

Warning Window: Overwrite Customer Default Confirmation

5-6

Network Parameters Window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

5-7

Network Parameters Window (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

5-8

Network Parameters Window (Equipment Options Tab)

5-9

Site Icon (Unequipped)

5-10

Site Icon (Equipped)

5-11

Site Details Window ............................................................................................................................................... 5-50 5-50

5-12

Site Parameters Window (Power Filter Definition Tab)

5-13

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab) ........................................................................ 5-55

5-14

Site Parameters Window (Equipment Definition Tab)

5-15

Site Details

............................................................................................................ 3-5

.................................................................................................................................................................. 3-8 3-8

.......................................................................................................................................... 3-9 ..................................................................... 3-10

..................................................................................................................................... 3-11 ................................................................................................................................. 3-14 ................................................................................................................. 3-14

............................................................................................................................................................ 3-15 3-15 .................................................................................................................................... 4-2 ............................................... 5-3 ............................ 5-4

......................................................................................... 5-4 ...................................................................... 5-5 ............................................................. 5-14 ..................................................... 5-15

........................................................... 5-33

......................................................................... 5-37

......................................................................................................................................... 5-49

.............................................................................................................................................. 5-49

........................................................................... 5-52

.............................................................................. 5-67

............................................................................................................................................................... 5-77 5-77

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-16

Warning Window (Delete Site)

.......................................................................................................................... 5-77

5-17

Segment Connection

5-18

Segments

5-19

Segment Details Window

5-20

Segments Used Error

............................................................................................................................................. 5-87

5-21

Line Protection Paths

............................................................................................................................................. 5-88 5-88

5-22

Warning Window (Delete One Segment)

5-23

Warning Window (Delete Multiple Segments)

5-24

Create Network Element Window

................................................................................................................... 5-92

5-25

Network Element Details Window

................................................................................................................... 5-96

5-26

Change Shelf Type Confirmation Window

5-27

Create Shelf Window

5-28

NE Preferences Window

5-29

Network Elements

5-30

Network Element Details Window ................................................................................................................. 5-108

5-31

Warning Window (Delete NE) ......................................................................................................................... 5-109

5-32

Add Node Details Window (Standard)

5-33

Schematic Editor View

....................................................................................................................................... 5-118 5-118

5-34

Schematic Preferences

........................................................................................................................................ 5-119 5-119

5-35

Font Options

5-36

Add Line Button

5-37

Icon Selection on Schematic Window

5-38

Schematic View (Displaying Highlighted Card Name) .......................................................................... 5-121

5-39

Warning Window (Unsaved Schematic)

5-40

Finished Schematic View ................................................................................................................................... 5-123

5-41

Run Design Icon

5-42

Node List

.............................................................................................................................................. 5-78 5-78

................................................................................................................................................................... 5-79 5-79 ..................................................................................................................................... 5-80

....................................................................................................... 5-89 ............................................................................................ 5-89

................................................................................................. 5-104

.......................................................................................................................................... 5-104 .................................................................................................................................... 5-105

............................................................................................................................................... 5-107 5-107

......................................................................................................... 5-110

........................................................................................................................................................... 5-119 5-119 ................................................................................................................................................... 5-120 5-120 .......................................................................................................... 5-120

...................................................................................................... 5-122

................................................................................................................................................... 5-124 5-124

................................................................................................................................................................. 5-124 5-124

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xiii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-43

Node Details (Schematic View)

...................................................................................................................... 5-125

5-44

Edit CDC A/D Blocks Window

....................................................................................................................... 5-126

5-45

Warning Window (Delete Node) ..................................................................................................................... 5-127

6-1

Create DWDM-Flex Link Window

6-2

Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window (with Coherent/Custom Guardband)

6-3

Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window

6-4

Create DWDM-100GHz Link Window

6-5

Link Attributes Selection Window .................................................................................................................... 6-12

6-6

Create CWDM-2F Link Window (Two PSS-4 NEs)

6-7

CWDM/SCHAN Warning

6-8

Create Single Channel Link Window

6-9

Links List

6-10

DWDM Link Details Window (100 GHz) ..................................................................................................... 6-25

6-11

DWDM Link Details Window (50 GHz)

6-12

CWDM Link Details Window ............................................................................................................................ 6-27

6-13

SCHAN Link Details Window

6-14

Routing Window ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-31 6-31

6-15

Calculate DCMs Window

6-16

Calculate OSC SFP Confirmation Window ................................................................................................... 6-33

6-17

Optimize Amplifier Power Window ................................................................................................................. 6-34

6-18

WTOCM Cannot Be Changed

6-19

Warning Window (Delete Link)

6-20

Spans ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-37 6-37

6-21

Span Details

6-22

View Glass-Throughs

6-23

Editing L-2 Pack Window .................................................................................................................................... 6-41

6-24

L2 Switch List

................................................................................................................... 6-4 ...................................... 6-5

.............................................................................................................. 6-6 ........................................................................................................... 6-7

................................................................................. 6-19

................................................................................................................................... 6-21 .............................................................................................................. 6-22

................................................................................................................................................................... 6-24 6-24

....................................................................................................... 6-26

........................................................................................................................... 6-28

.................................................................................................................................... 6-32

........................................................................................................................... 6-35 ........................................................................................................................ 6-36

.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-38 6-38 ............................................................................................................................................ 6-39

.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-42 6-42

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xiv 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-25

All Errors .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-43 6-43

6-26

Errors Information Tab (Context Menu) ......................................................................................................... 6-44

6-27

Error Detail ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-44 6-44

6-28

WSS Overhead ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-46 6-46

6-29

Physical Layer Report

6-30

RAMAN Tilt Exceeds Maximum Value

6-31

RAMAN Tilt Risk Flowchart

7-1

EPT Design Protection Schemes for Trails and Services ............................................................................ 7-2

7-2

Create Trail Window

7-3

Create Trail Window (Clustering Enabled) ...................................................................................................... 7-6

7-4

Create Service Window

7-5

Warning Window (Delete Trail Route)

7-6

Trail Routing Window

7-7

Trail Routing Window (GMPLS Designs) ..................................................................................................... 7-22

7-8

Site Selection Window

7-9

Trail Routing Solutions Window

7-10

OT Selection Window (Details from Either Node)

7-11

OT Selection Window (Details from Intermediate Node) ........................................................................ 7-25

7-12

OT Selection (CDC-F Design Options)

7-13

Trail Routing Window (Channel Selection)

7-14

Cascaded Trail Routing Solutions Window ................................................................................................... 7-28

7-15

Route Path Accepted

7-16

Demand Routing Window

7-17

Channel Utilization Details Window

7-18

Trails

7-19

Services ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7-33

7-20

Edit Trail Window ................................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7-34

........................................................................................................................................... 6-47 6-47 ......................................................................................................... 6-48

............................................................................................................................. 6-49

............................................................................................................................................... 7-5 7-5

........................................................................................................................................ 7-15 7-15 ........................................................................................................... 7-21

........................................................................................................................................... 7-21

.......................................................................................................................................... 7-23 7-23 ....................................................................................................................... 7-24 .................................................................................... 7-25

.......................................................................................................... 7-26 .................................................................................................. 7-27

.............................................................................................................................................. 7-29 7-29 ................................................................................................................................... 7-30 ............................................................................................................... 7-32

........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7-33

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xv 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-21

Edit Service Window

............................................................................................................................................. 7-35 7-35

7-22

Card View: Trail/Service n Window

7-23

(Expanded Card View)

7-24

Packet Demand Illustration

7-25

Diagram of Packet Flows and Connection Ports

7-26

Create Packet Connection Window

7-27

Packet Connections

7-28

Create Packet Demand Window

7-29

Packet Demand Routing Window

..................................................................................................................... 7-49

7-30

Packet Demand Routing Window

..................................................................................................................... 7-50

7-31

Routed Packet Demand ......................................................................................................................................... 7-50

7-32

Packet Demands

7-33

OT-OT Packet Link Window

7-34

OT-OT Packet Links

7-35

OT-OT Trail Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 7-54

7-36

Edit OT-OT Trail Connection Window

8-1

Run Design Options Window

8-2

Design Status Window ............................................................................................................................................. 8-6 8-6

8-3

Design Completed Window (Success) ............................................................................................................... 8-6

8-4

Design Completed Window (Incomplete)

8-5

Design Completed Window (Failure)

8-6

Remove Auto Design Window

8-7

Remove Whole Design Window (Incremental) .............................................................................................. 8-8

8-8

Verify Network Window ....................................................................................................................................... 8-11

8-9

Network Verification Confirmation Window ................................................................................................ 8-12

8-10

Network Update Confirmation Window ......................................................................................................... 8-12

8-11

Pricing Options Window (Default)

................................................................................................................ 7-36

.......................................................................................................................................... 7-37 ................................................................................................................................. 7-40 ......................................................................................... 7-40

.................................................................................................................. 7-41

................................................................................................................................................ 7-44 7-44 ........................................................................................................................ 7-45

...................................................................................................................................................... 7-51 7-51 .............................................................................................................................. 7-52

.............................................................................................................................................. 7-54 7-54

........................................................................................................... 7-55

............................................................................................................................... 8-5

........................................................................................................ 8-6

................................................................................................................ 8-7

............................................................................................................................. 8-8

................................................................................................................... 8-14

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xvi 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-12

Current Project Window

....................................................................................................................................... 8-19

8-13

Project Window

8-14

View Projects

8-15

Merge Window (Initial)

8-16

Merge Window (Completed)

8-17

Merge Window (Renaming) ................................................................................................................................ 8-30

8-18

Merge Window (Renaming Successful)

9-1

Partial Commissioning Warning

9-2

System Error Message (Invalid System) ........................................................................................................... 9-4

9-3

System Error Message (Used Link) .................................................................................................................... 9-4

9-4

System Error Message (Wrong Node)

9-5

System Details Window

9-6

Create Commissioning Files Window (Unsaved) .......................................................................................... 9-6

9-7

Create Commissioning Files Window (File Not Yet Created)

9-8

Create Commissioning Files Window ................................................................................................................ 9-8

9-9

Systems

9-10

Warning Window (Delete System) ...................................................................................................................... 9-9

10-1

Create Shared Risk Group Window

10-2

View SRGs

10-3

GMPLS Failure Scope Window

10-4

Audit Tab (Pending)

10-5

Audit Tab Menu

10-6

Run Status Window

10-7

GPC Routes Not Allowed Warning Window .............................................................................................. 10-16

10-8

Audit Scenarios Tab (Status Change - Valid)

10-9

Create Audit Scenario Window

....................................................................................................................................................... 8-20 8-20

............................................................................................................................................................ 8-20 8-20 ........................................................................................................................................ 8-28 .............................................................................................................................. 8-29

......................................................................................................... 8-31

.......................................................................................................................... 9-3

............................................................................................................... 9-5

.......................................................................................................................................... 9-5 9-5

.................................................................. 9-7

......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9 9-9

................................................................................................................. 10-6

................................................................................................................................................................ 10-7 10-7 ........................................................................................................................ 10-8

............................................................................................................................................ 10-13

.................................................................................................................................................... 10-15 10-15 ............................................................................................................................................. 10-15

............................................................................................. 10-16

....................................................................................................................... 10-17

10-10 Audit Scenarios Tab (RTS Added)

................................................................................................................. 10-17

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xvii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-11 Show Regen Window

.......................................................................................................................................... 10-20

10-12 3R Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-21 10-21 10-13 Confirmation Window (Delete 3R)

................................................................................................................ 10-22

10-14 Convert GMPLS Design Confirmation 10-15 GMPLS Conversion Completed

........................................................................................................ 10-27

..................................................................................................................... 10-27

11-1

Bill of Materials Report

........................................................................................................................................ 11-4 11-4

11-2

Invalid Design Warning (Before BOM Generation)

11-3

Equipment View

11-4

Equipment View Close-Up

11-5

Installation Report

11-6

Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA

11-7

Node Details

11-8

LINE_IN and LINE_OUT ................................................................................................................................. 11-13

11-9

Network Information Window

...................................................................................................................................................... 11-7 11-7 ................................................................................................................................. 11-8

................................................................................................................................................ 11-10 11-10 ............................................................................................... 11-12

........................................................................................................................................................... 11-13 11-13

11-10 Network Parameters Report 11-11

.................................................................................. 11-5

......................................................................................................................... 11-16

.............................................................................................................................. 11-17

Site Report ............................................................................................................................................................... 11-18 11-18

11-12 Rack Report

............................................................................................................................................................ 11-19 11-19

11-13 Link Report

............................................................................................................................................................. 11-20 11-20

11-14 Fiber Report

............................................................................................................................................................ 11-21 11-21

11-15 Fiber Report (Scrolled)

....................................................................................................................................... 11-22

11-16 OT-OT Link Report .............................................................................................................................................. 11-23 11-17 OA and DCM Report ........................................................................................................................................... 11-24 11-18 OA and DCM Report (Scrolled) ...................................................................................................................... 11-24 11-19 Shelf Report

............................................................................................................................................................ 11-25 11-25

11-20 Trails Report

........................................................................................................................................................... 11-26 11-26

11-21 Services Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-28 11-28 11-22 Trail Routing Report

............................................................................................................................................ 11-31 11-31

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xviii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-23 Trail Routing Report (Page 2)

.......................................................................................................................... 11-32

11-24 Packet Demands/Routing Report 11-25 Packet Connections Report 11-26 Systems Report

............................................................................................................................... 11-34

...................................................................................................................................................... 11-35 11-35

11-27 L1 Configuration Report 11-28 Errors Report

.................................................................................................................... 11-33

.................................................................................................................................... 11-36

.......................................................................................................................................................... 11-37 11-37

11-29 Audit Summary Report ....................................................................................................................................... 11-39 11-30 Setup Report 11-31 SRG Report

........................................................................................................................................................... 11-41 11-41

............................................................................................................................................................. 11-43 11-43

11-32 Failure Scope Report

.......................................................................................................................................... 11-44

11-33 GMPLS Routing Report

.................................................................................................................................... 11-45

11-34 GMPLS Routing Report (Scrolled Once)

.................................................................................................... 11-45

11-35 GMPLS Routing Report (Scrolled Twice)

.................................................................................................. 11-46

11-36 GMPLS Failure Analysis Report 11-37 Restoration Regen Report 11-38 Physical Layer Report

................................................................................................................... 11-47

................................................................................................................................. 11-48

......................................................................................................................................... 11-49

11-39 Maximum Sheets Error Window ..................................................................................................................... 11-56 11-40 Delete Sheet Confirmation Window

.............................................................................................................. 11-56

11-41 Sheet Name Required for Report Creation Error Window

.................................................................... 11-57

11-42 X axis Header Required for Report Creation Error Window ................................................................ 11-57 11-43 A Chart Formatted Report Cannot Exceed 14 Attributes Error Window 11-44 Manage Specs Window

......................................... 11-57

...................................................................................................................................... 11-59

11-45 Delete CPLR Confirmation Window ............................................................................................................. 11-60 11-46 PLR Viewer Window ........................................................................................................................................... 11-61 11-47 Manage Specs Window

...................................................................................................................................... 11-70

11-48 Card Inventory Report

........................................................................................................................................ 11-73

11-49 Card Inventory Report (CDC-F)

..................................................................................................................... 11-74

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xix 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-50 Design Status Details Window ......................................................................................................................... 11-75 11-51 Power Management Report ............................................................................................................................... 11-76 11-52 No Data for Power Commissioning

............................................................................................................... 11-77

11-53 Schematic View of Sample Configuration

.................................................................................................. 11-77

11-54 Channel Utilization Report ................................................................................................................................ 11-78 11-55 GMPLS Commissioning Report

..................................................................................................................... 11-79

11-56 WTOCMx Calibration Report .......................................................................................................................... 11-80 11-57 Target Power Offset Commissioning Report

.............................................................................................. 11-81

11-58 Selected Links Channel Utilization Window .............................................................................................. 11-82 11-59 Trail Channel Utilization Window .................................................................................................................. 11-83 11-60 Channel Utilization Interface Report ............................................................................................................. 11-84 12-1

Upload Window (Import Network Data) ........................................................................................................ 12-4

12-2

Upload: FilenameWindow ................................................................................................................................ 12-5

12-3

Discrepancy Report (NE Tab)

12-4

Discrepancy Report (Span Tab)

12-5

Discrepancy Report (Verify Tab) ....................................................................................................................... 12-8

13-1

PTPCTL/PTPIO Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network

13-2

Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window

13-3

Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPCL Selected)

.......................................................... 13-5

13-4

Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPIO Selected)

........................................................... 13-6

13-5

Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (Segment Selected)

13-6

PTPCL Client Ports

13-7

PTP Errors .................................................................................................................................................................. 13-7 13-7

13-8

PTP Warnings

13-9

11DPE12A Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network

............................................................................................................................ 12-6 ......................................................................................................................... 12-7

.................................................................... 13-4

............................................................................................... 13-5

....................................................... 13-6

................................................................................................................................................ 13-6 13-6

........................................................................................................................................................... 13-7 13-7 ............................................................................... 13-8

13-10 Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (11DPE12A Selected) 13-11 View L2 Switch (11DPE12A Demands)

.................................................. 13-9

........................................................................................................ 13-9

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xx 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13-12 11DPE12A L2 Pack Removal Warning ........................................................................................................ 13-10 13-13 PTPCTL/PTPIO/11DPE12A Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network 13-14 Map (Segment Display--Initial)

.......................................... 13-11

...................................................................................................................... 13-14

13-15 Create DWDM-50 GHz WTOCMx Window (1621SLE-50GHz) ...................................................... 13-15 13-16 1621SLE Supported Channel Configuration

.............................................................................................. 13-16

13-17 Map (Segment Display--Final)

........................................................................................................................ 13-17

13-18 1621SLE Link - Manual Route

....................................................................................................................... 13-18

13-19 Routing - Packet Link 13-20 Link Diverse Routes

......................................................................................................................................... 13-24

............................................................................................................................................ 13-25 13-25

13-21 Routing Demands with Dual Homed Protection ....................................................................................... 13-26 13-22 Routing Demands with Dual Homed Protection at the Source and Destination

........................... 13-27

13-23 Routing Demands with Diverse Path Protection ....................................................................................... 13-27 13-24 Dual Hub Node with a Single Card and a Single Router (PSS-4)

...................................................... 13-36

13-25 Example of Design ............................................................................................................................................... 13-37 13-37 13-26 OCS – DWDM – DWDM with 10AN10G and 11QPA4 ....................................................................... 13-48 13-27 OCS – DWDM – DWDM with 24ANM and 11DPM12

....................................................................... 13-48

13-28 Protection/Service Network Design ............................................................................................................... 13-49 13-29 Example Network Design .................................................................................................................................. 13-50 13-30 4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration (Equipment View) ............................................................... 13-51 13-31 Routing Across Same Path (4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration) 13-32 Diverse Routing (4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration)

........................................... 13-51

............................................................... 13-52

13-33 Routing Window (Selecting Site 1 to Site 2) .............................................................................................. 13-52 13-34 Routing Window (Routing Solutions) ........................................................................................................... 13-53 13-35 OT Selection Window (Selecting 1(1)-17-L1(4DPA4))

......................................................................... 13-53

13-36 OCS to DWDM to DWDM (1 of 2)

.............................................................................................................. 13-57

13-37 OCS to DWDM to DWDM (2 of 2)

.............................................................................................................. 13-58

13-38 Regeneration of 10AN10G and MVAC

....................................................................................................... 13-58

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxi 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13-39 DWDM to OCS to DWDM

.............................................................................................................................. 13-59

13-40 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 1)

.............................................................................................. 13-60

13-41 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 2)

.............................................................................................. 13-61

13-42 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 3)

.............................................................................................. 13-62

13-43 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 4)

.............................................................................................. 13-63

13-44 Degree 8 Node (All) 13-45 Degree 7 Node

............................................................................................................................................ 13-64

...................................................................................................................................................... 13-65 13-65

13-46 Projects A and B

.................................................................................................................................................... 13-69 13-69

13-47 Adding a Segment to a Project

........................................................................................................................ 13-70

13-48 Site Map for Projects A and B .......................................................................................................................... 13-70

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

About this document About this document

Purpose

The 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide provides a detailed description of the EPT application and how to use it for network design. What's new

The major changes introduced in this issue of the document are described in the following paragraphs. Document changes from the previous software releases

The document changes since the 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide Release 8.2, Issue 2 are shown in the following table. Table 1

Document changes since Release 8.2, Issue 2, March 2016

Location

Change

Chapter 1 - Introduction

Added new feature list for EPT Release 9.0 (see “EPT Features in Release 9.0” (p. 1-4)).

Chapter 2 - EPT Installation and Setup

Updated software upgrade considerations (see “Software Upgrade to Release 9.0” (p. 2-15)) and hardware requirements (see “Required Equipment” (p. 2-2)).

Chapter 3 - EPT User Interface

Added new menu items for Merge and GMPLS Design Conversion, and two BOL options (see “Menus and Tool Bar” (p. 3-2)).

Chapter 5 - Site Topology Definition and Configuration

Updated the Network Parameters, Sites, Network Elements and Nodes sections to add new parameters (see “Network Parameters” (p. 5-2), “Sites” (p. 5-49), “Network Elements” (p. 5-91) and “Nodes” (p. 5-110)) . Added port monitoring for Network Elements.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxiii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 1

Document changes since Release 8.2, Issue 2, March 2016

(continued)

Location

Change

Chapter 6 - Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Updated OA/DCM Selection panel for DWDM Link configuration and additional functionality (see “Links” (p. 6-2)).

Chapter 8 - Design Automation and Verification

Added new procedure to merge two EPT design files (see “Merging Network Designs” (p. 8-25)).

Chapter 10 - 1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

Added new functionality to GMPLS Auditing for 3Rs (see “View, Modify or Delete Regen (3R)” (p. 10-21)) and added guidelines for to place regenerators in manual routing for GMPLS designs (see “GMPLS Concepts in the EPT” (p. 10-1)).

Chapter 11 - Reports

Added new Rack Report, BOL WDM Routing Report, BOL Physical Layer Report, and removed Virtual Demand Routing Report (see “Rack Report” (p. 11-19). Updated Bill of Materials Report, Network Information Report, Link Report, Trail Report, and Site Report (see Chapter 11, “Reports”).

Chapter 12 - Importing Network Data

Updated details for “Import Network Data” (p. 12-1).

Chapter 13 - EPT Tutorials

Added a Submarine Link tutorial (see “Designing Submarine Links” (p. 13-19)) and updated procedure details for optical line renumbering (see “Network Element Physical Configuration Editing” (p. 13-67) respectively).

Chapter 15 - EPT Specificity

Updated ID_102 (see Chapter 15, “EPT Specificity”).

Intended Audience

EPT users are Customer Capacity Planning Organizations, Customer Route Planners, Nokia Customer and Network Designers, Network installers and commissioners. They will use this tool to design the network equipment configurations and to design traffic services through the network.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxiv 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In summary, this guide is intended for individuals responsible for: •

network designs

• • •

pre-sales technical support and engineering installation, turn-up and commissioning technical support

• •

customer capacity planning organizations customer route planning

How to Use this Information Product

This document is divided into 15 chapters. Refer to the Contents section to locate specific information by chapter. Conventions

The following conventions are used in this document: Parameter

Allowed Values

Bold typeface

Identifies menu selections and command names.

Constant-width typeface

Identifies keyboard input and system generated responses.

Italic typeface

Denotes titles of documents, filenames, and directories. Also used in decision tables.



Represents variable text input that the user enters, or variable text output.

Related information Table 2

Information products related to 1830 PSS

Document title

Document code

1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Safety Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TAZZQ

Provides users of 1830 PSS with the relevant information and safety guidelines to protect against personal injury. Furthermore, the Safety Guide is useful to prevent material damage to the equipment. The Safety Guide must be read by the responsible technical personnel before performing relevant work on the system. The valid version of the document must always be kept close to the equipment. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Portable Planning Tool (PPT) User Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TBZZA

Provides instructions for use and describes the features of the 1830 Portable Provisioning Tool.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxv 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2

Information products related to 1830 PSS

(continued)

Document title

Document code

1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 9.0 User Provisioning Guide

3KC-13514-JAAA-TCZZA

Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations for 1830 PSS-4. The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative tasks. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 User Provisioning Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TCZZA

Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative tasks. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 24x (PSS-24x) Release 9.0 User Provisioning Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-SCZZA

Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations for 1830 PSS-24x. The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative tasks. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA

Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations for the EPT. The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and commissioning tasks. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide (Switching Applications)

8DG-63269-JAAA-TFZZA

Describes the external TL1 interface for 1830 PSS-36/64 in terms of TL1 command, responses, and notification definitions. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide (Photonic Applications)

8DG-63269-JAAA-TGZZA

Describes the external TL1 interface for 1830 PSS-4, 1830 PSS-8, 1830 PSS-16II, 1830 PSS-16/32, and 1830 PSS-24x. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Command Line Interface Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-THZZA

Provides information about the Command Line Interface (CLI) for 1830 PSS-4, 1830 PSS-8, 1830 PSS-16II, 1830 PSS-16/32, and 1830 PSS-24x. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Command Line Interface Guide (OCS Packet Applications)

8DG-63269-JAAA-SHZZA

Provides information about the Command Line Interface (CLI) for 1830 PSS-36/64. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

3KC-13514-JAAA-TJZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-4. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 8 (PSS-8) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-SLZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-8. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 16II (PSS-16II) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-SMZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-16II. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 16/32 (1830 PSS-16/32) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TJZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-16/32. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxvi 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2

Information products related to 1830 PSS

(continued)

Document title

Document code

1830 Photonic Service Switch 24x (PSS-24x) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-SJZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-24x. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36 (PSS-36) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TKZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-36. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 64 (PSS-64) Release 9.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TLZZA

A step-by-step guide to install and turn-up 1830 PSS-64. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TMZZA

Provides detailed information about possible alarm messages for 1830 PSS. It also provides procedures for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and component replacement. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Quick Reference Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TNZZA

Provides users of 1830 PSS a streamlined, easy-to-use navigation aid to facilitate the use of the system. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 DCN Planning and Engineering Guide (Photonics Applications)

8DG-63269-JAAA-TPZZA

Provides information for the planning and configuration of a Data Communication Network (DCN) for photonic applications, that is for 1830 PSS-4, 1830 PSS-8, 1830 PSS-16II, 1830 PSS-16/32, and 1830 PSS-24x. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 9.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

3KC-13514-JAAA-TQZZA

Presents a detailed overview of 1830 PSS-4, describes its applications, gives planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical specifications. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TQZZA

Presents a detailed overview of 1830 PSS-8, 1830 PSS-16II, 1830 PSS-16/32, and 1830 PSS-36/64 describes its applications, gives planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical specifications. 1830 Photonic Service Switch 24x (PSS-24x) Release 9.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-SQZZA

Presents a detailed overview of 1830 PSS-24x, describes its applications, gives planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical specifications. 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 DCN Planning and Engineering Guide (Switching Applications)

8DG-63269-JAAA-TRZZA

Provides information for the planning and configuration of a Data Communication Network (DCN) for switching applications, that is for 1830 PSS-36 and 1830 PSS-64 systems (OCS). 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 GMPLS/GMRE Guide

8DG-63269-JAAA-TWZZA

Contains information about the GMPLS Routing Engine (GMRE) of the 1830 PSS; it provides a high-level functional overview of the GMRE and describes the steps to plan and set up a GMRE-controlled network.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxvii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2

Information products related to 1830 PSS

(continued)

Document title

Document code

1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 9.0 Electronic Documentation Library

8DG-63269-JAAA-TZZZA

Contains all documents related to 1830 PSS in multiple electronic formats: epub, mobi, html, and pdf.

Support Portal

The Support Portal (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/web/support) provides technical support, as well as documentation and software ordering. Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. See the Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact information. How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline ([email protected]).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS xxviii 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1

Introduction 1

Overview Purpose

This chapter describes the features and functionality. Contents The 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool

1-2

EPT Features in Release 9.0

1-4

Functionality

1-22

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

The 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Introductioon to 1830 PSS EPT

The 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) is a software tool for automated design and planning of photonic networks based on the 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS portfolio of WDM products. The EPT is one key component of Nokia’s Zero Touch Photonics networking innovation, which enables easier operations, accelerated time-to-market and optimized total cost of ownership (TCO) of wavelength services. The EPT runs on a windows-based platform and employs a graphical user interface (GUI) to simplify the network design process. EPT integration with the 1830 PSS management systems and WaveTracker OA&M support both initial system turn-up as well as incremental network growth. The 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-36 and PSS-64 are supported by Nokia 1390 Network Planning Tool (NPT). The Nokia 1390 NPT application provides integrated planning and design capabilities for the Nokia 1830 PSS family equipment. Nokia 1390 NPT has the capability to plan across both the photonic and electrical layers. The complete 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS Engineering Planning Tool (EPT) is embedded within the Nokia 1390 NPT. For further information on Nokia 1390 NTP, refer to the latest Nokia 1390 Network Planning Tool (NPT) User Guide. Note: The 1830 Engineering and Planning (EPT) tool should be used to design the equipment and commissioning data for the network. It is important that traffic is entered into the EPT design before the network design is complete and before the commissioning file is created, as traffic type and amount affects choices such as inclusion of the optional egress Line Driver, DCM Type, power targets for the Software Control of Transmission (SCOT), and so on. In particular, factors such as the type of Optical Transponder (OT), whether alien optics interfaces would be used, and whether OPS protection is needed for demands in the future should be considered at design time. New traffic designs can be added after the network is deployed, but may require power adjustments, equipment additions, or equipment type changes. Equipment additions and type changes may be service affecting. Purpose of the 1830 PSS EPT

The EPT is used for network planning, design, installation and commissioning as described in this section. Network Planning (Customer Capacity Planning Organizations, Customer Route Planners, Customer and Nokia Network Designers)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

The 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Design: • • • • •

Design Optical Amplifiers, DCMs, ILAs, DGEs to meet the performance needs of the network/demands/NEs Design Network Elements, filters, OTs, etc. based on demands and equipment preferences specified Design/verify the Demand performance/reach and the need for regeneration on demands Design/verify that specified failure scenarios in a GMPLS network can be restored Bill of Materials Report: Lists all parts needed: acronym, description, Nokia Part Number (part number), and price (optional).

Network Installation •

Installation Report: Lists each pack-port to pack-port connection, the jumper type to use, and any attenuators needed

Network Commissioning •

Calculates the target power, gain, tilt, and other information, and sends it to the NE in the Commissioning File or Commissioning Report

• •

Sends the feasibility data that NE GMPLS uses for restoration routing Sends basic shelf/card/inter-pack connection provisioning, loss, and other information to the NE

Supported Releases

Release 9.0 PSS-4, PSS-8, PSS-16, PSS-16II, PSS-24x and PSS-32 are supported in EPT Release 9.0. The EPT is synchronized with 1830 PSS generic releases; EPT designs apply to only the matched 1830 PSS release. The feature set of the 1830 PSS is available for users within the EPT design environment.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EPT Features in Release 9.0 PSS-24x Support including 2UC400-compatible, 4UC400-compatible and 130SCUPH-compatible and 2UC400-compatible and 4UC400-compatible Support for FOADMs

• •

•

• •

•

•

Support 1830 PSS-24x 10T Switched DWDM Shelf. These are switching shelves that are not compatible with today’s 1830 I/O packs. From the NE’s perspective, the PSS-24x is a shelf that can be intermingled with other shelf types (PSS8, 32, 16II and even 16). It can be located in the same rack as another PSS-32 shelf, for example. 1390 NPT fully supports the 24X, including BOM, equipment view, and rack placement. The PSS-24x shelves are only allowed as extensions to PSS-32 and PSS-16II master shelves. In R9.0.1, EPT forbids a PSS-8 or a PSS-16 from being a master shelf. Shelf reservations only apply for legal master shelves, the PSS-32 or PSS-16II. EPT does not show the PSS-24x in the Equipment View. The PSS-24x’s are entities residing in separate rack(s). Support signals from the 2UC400-compatible and 4UC400-compatible on the PSS-24x and the 130SCUPH on the PSS-64/-36. The PSS-24x shelf and the 130SCUPH also support signals from the D5X500. Allows 2UC400-compatible and 4UC400-compatible on FOADMs. Some assumptions made for this feature: – PSS-24x shelf is treated by EPT as an OCS shelf, similar to how it handles the PSS-36 and PSS-64. Management of the OCS shelves is the responsibility of 1390 NPT. – EPT currently allows the user to skip shelves, meaning that after the master shelf (always shelf #1), the next sub-shelf could be #2 through #24, and it could be of any type (PSS-8, 16, 16II or 32). So, in this example the PSS-24x could be shelf #3 in the chain of shelves. – Shelf 1 may not be a PSS-24x. EPT does not allow the PSS-24x as a shelf 1 even though the NE supports this. – 1390 NPT provides the shelf and slot number of the uplink cards, which is needed for EPT to put the connecting cables into the BOM and for the Installation Report. EPT restrictions: – EPT does not keep track of PDUs – Jumpers are all custom for the uplink cards – – – –

EPT does not keep track of attenuators. There are only 2 uplink cards from the PSS-24x; neither need an attenuator. EPT does not keep track of PSS-24x shelf covers or rack doors. No BOM support (no fan, no power filters, and so on). EPT does not handle the client cards or the switch EPT does not change how it handles fiber storage trays

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– –

EPT does not change EC LAN cable handling EPT does support the signals from the uplink cards (2UC400, 4UC400, and 130SCUPH), but EPT does not carry any other information about them like placement in the PSS-24x shelf, except shelf/slot location.

D5X500 R9.0.1 Feature List OTU4 Client Support

EPT R9.0.1 supports the following pluggables for the D5X500 for all OT modes: • •

C4CLR4d: Supported in R8.2 for D5X500 (10505) client signal types: 100G LAN PHY & OTM-0.4 C4CLR4e: Previously supported on 260SCX2 only (11100 for D5X500 in R9.0.1) client signal types:100G LAN PHY Note: EPT supported OTU4 client signals in R8.2. The NE did not. Note: NE supported C4CLR4e in R8.2. EPT did not. The D5X500 does not support a mix of 100GbE and OTU4 client signal types in the NE. This is not restricted in EPT R8.2. EPT R9.0.1 continues to allow mixing of 100GbE and OTU4 clients on the same D5X500 pack.

New Modulation Formats (QPSK and SPQPSK)

EPT supports two new modulation formats (OT Modes) for the D5X500 in R9.0.1: • •

QPSK (Mode 3) SPQPSK (Mode 4)

Both modulation formats support only OTU4 line rates for a total line rate of 260G for the OT. In R9.0.1, the modulation format used on the L1 and L2 ports are the same. A new line type is supported in R9.0.1 for the D5X500. Line ports now support: •

OTU4x2 (used only for 8QAM, 16QAM, and 8QAM-SC)

•

OTU4 (new – used only for QPSK and SPQPSK)

In R9.0.1, the line type used on the L1 and L2 ports are the same. Client Port Mapping

The D5X500 in R9.0.1 support a fixed client port to line port mapping. When the port type is set to OTU4x2, it sets up the following fixed transmission paths inside the card: • •

Signals from client port C1 and client port C2 are sent to L1. Signals from client port C3 and client port C4 are sent to L2.

•

Client port C5 is not used.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When the port type is set to OTU4, it sets up the following fixed transmission paths inside the card: • • •

The signal from client port C1 is sent to L1. The signal from client port C3 is sent to L2. Client ports C2, C4, and C5 are not used.

Protection, GMPLS, FEC

Protection types supported: • • • • •

Unprotected Diverse Path Dual Homed Y-Cable OPS Single Interface (GMPLS disabled, not Configurations D/D’/D”)

All D5X500 OT modes are supported in GMPLS networks in R9.0.1. All OT modes support the SDFEC-G2 FEC type. D5X500 PSS shelves

The NE supports the D5X500 in the following shelves: • • •

PSS-32 PSS-16II PSS-8

All OT modes are supported in the 3 above shelf types. (EPT has supported all 3 shelf types since R8.2). Unidirectional Regeneration

Since the D5X500 has two line ports, unidirectional regeneration should be supported with a single D5X500 OT. The D5X500 may also be used as a 3R regeneration in GMPLS networks. The regeneration can be any OT mode, but only support regeneration of signals using the same OT mode. Photonic Line Support on CDC-F and C-F

The D5X500 when configured with a modulation format of 8QAM,16QAM, QPSK or SPQPSK support the following node configurations: • •

CDC-F C-F (former AC-D-C)

•

C-F Add/Drop Block as a separate NE connected to a WR8-88AF in a different site

EPT does not restrict the usage of the D5X500 with any modulation format in these configurations. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Photonic line support on DFOADM, CWR8, WR8-88A/F, CWR8-88, Configurations D/D’/D” and IROADMF/IROADMV

The D5X500, when configured with a modulation format of QPSK or 16QAM, supports the following node configurations: • •

100GHz DFOADM CWR8

The D5X500, when configured with a modulation format of 8QAM,16QAM, QPSK or SPQPSK, supports the following node configurations: • • •

IROADMF IROADMV Configurations D/D’/D”

• •

WR8-88A/WR8-88AF CWR8-88

Dispersion pre-compensation on the L1, L2 line ports

Not supported by EPT. Cascade Configuration with 112SDX11

D5X500 supports a cascaded OT configuration with 112SDX11. • •

D5X500 uses the C4CLR4d pluggable on its client port. 112SDX11 uses the C113G4Cd pluggable on its line port.

• •

This cascade support Unprotected, Diverse Path, and Dual Homed protection types. This cascade is supported in PSS-32, PSS-16II and PSS-8 shelf types. All D5X500 OT modes are supported. The 112SDX11 is supported in CDC-F nodes as a cascade.

•

Support for 44 Gbaud in 100GHz TOADMs and FOADMs

EPT limits the maximum number of SFD44s in cascade (i.e. in a path) to 8 for OTs that support ADD3 and ADD2L in DFOADM nodes. This includes: •

D5X500 8QAM and SPQPSK

•

2UC400 8QAM and SPQPSK

EPT supports these modulation formats in 100GHz TOADM and FOADM. EPT R8.2.2 supports 8QAM with 100GHz TOADM and FOADM. For R9.0.1, both 8QAM and SPQPSK (44Gbaud) is supported for 100GHz FOADM and TOADM, consistently with NE. The other modulation formats are 32Gbaud and they are supported in 50GHz grid.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Node Scalability

Single-site/multi-node (NE) clusters provide flexible and scalable growth options: • • • •

• • •

Multiple independent 1830 NEs participate in a “cluster” arrangement NEs with SWDM optical line resources (Optical Node NEs) perform auto power management for OT line ports on other SWDM NEs (OT NEs) Flexible mixing of Optical Node and OT NEs (OCS Tributary NEs can be connected to Optical Node NEs as well in a “cluster” fashion from some releases) Supported shelves from Optical Node and OT NEs: – Main shelves: PSS-32, PSS-16II (equipped with 32EC2) – Extension shelves: : PSS-32, PSS-16II, PSS-16, PSS-8, PSS-24X Each 24-shelf maximum size NE is managed separately, via its own management interface All the cluster NEs at a location should be directly cabled together in circular daisy chain fashion WLT on and auto power-managed lines only

Single Blade with WR20 as DGE

The single WR20-TFM DGE uses only one WR20-TFM card instead of two to equalize channels. The WR20-TFM card contains two WSSs. One WSS is used per direction of transmission. The WR20-TFM DGE node is comprised of the following cards: • •

Line drivers, ingress and egress for each degree A single WR20-TFM

The following cards provide monitoring and diagnostic functions: WTOCMA or WTOCM-F card can monitor up to two degrees. Additional cards, such as OTDR and RA2P, can also be used with this DGE node. Special breakout cables, providing fiber connectivity between MPO ports on the WR20-TFM and LD ports, are also used. To connect the WR20-TFM to the line amps, a special MPO-LC breakout fiber is required. It is a unique simplex 2.3m length cable with two APNs for EIA/ANSI and ETSI shelves. On Network Parameter/Site/Multiple Site windows, a new option for single blade DGE is displayed, which is used by auto-design to select which type of DGE should be created. New option of possible DGE type is extended also in Node Detail panel.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The single Blade WR20-TFM DGE is non-upgradable (this as the already supported Dual Blade WR20-TFM DGE via previous “Optimize DGE”). Upgrading the node to an OADM node would require service interruption and re-configuration of the node. NE software routes channels through from an incoming degree to the exit degree as individual channels. Colorless IROADM for Add/Drop All Coherent Channels

This functionality extends the support of IROADM to carry coherent channels, bypassing the fixed grid SFDs. The configuration connects the add/drop ports of the IROADM to the PSC1-6, supporting up to 18 coherent OTs per direction (36 OTs total) in a two-dimensional IROADM system. The new IROADM configuration is a PSC (IROADM+PSC): “pure” colorless IROADM configuration, only PSCs are attached. It is valid in R9.0.1 to have a composite CLS IROADM with a PSC on one optical line and SFD on another. The restriction is that the same IROADM degree cannot have PSC and SFD together on it as described in GMPLS L0 CP Support for Metro Applications CLS IROADMs; this is not supported in GMPLS. Flex Grid Phase 1, PM-8QAM and SPQPSK signals permitted through WR8-88AF ROADM lines in DWDM-FLEX links

This feature refers to the second part of Phase 1 (the first part was in Release 8.2). In Release 9.0.1 the signals that this applies to are: •

D5X500 OT PM-8QAM and SPQPSK mode (modulation) signals

•

2UC400 “off shelf uplink card” as a 2UC400-compatible, PM-8QAM and SPQPSK modes

InRelease 9.0.1 the PM-8QAM/SPQPSK modulation format signals are 62.5GHz wide and correspond to the following modes on the Trail/Services window: •

PM-8QAM (introduced in Release 8.2)

•

SPQPSK (introduced in Release 9.0.1)

This functionality has the following dependencies: 1. DWDM-FLEX Link support between WR20-TFM ROADM and WR8-88AF ROADM 2. SPQPSK on the D5X500 3. SPQPSK and PM-8QAM on the 2UC400-compatible signal PM-8QAM and SPQPSK mode signal routing is enhanced to allow routing through the WR8-88AF ROADM lines, on DWDM-FLEX link types only. This signal is not permitted to add or drop on the WR8-88A ROADM lines (even for regeneration). .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In Release 9.0.1 EPT retains the restriction that WR20-TFM and WR20-TF ROADMs are only permitted in DCM-free (or externally verified) networks. Channel Adjacency Restriction: The routing of these signals in Release 9.0.1 requires that neighboring channels, 50 GHz from the center channel used for the route, are unused for the length of the route. The routing of trails using these OT/Mode combinations are available in GMPLS-enabled and disabled networks, on: 1. DWDM-FLEX EPT Link types, given the channel adjacency restriction above, with the following endpoint nodes: •

WR20-TF/M ROADMs or WR20-TF/M ROADM (DGE)* (EPT R.2.2) (as already supported in previously releases): Add/drop, Thru, Regen • WR8-88AF ROADM lines (Release 9.0.1) - Through only 2. DWDM-100GHz EPT Link Types on CWR8/CWR8B TOADMs support add/drop, through and regen (EPT R.2.2 The EPT DWDM-FLEX links above may have ILAs or GlassThroughs (splices) in them. *In the above, ROADM (DGE) refers to a ROADM with the Optimized as DGE flag set or the new Release 9.0.1 single WR20-TFM card DGE. This functionality also has an implication/restriction for the routing of ordinary 50 GHz wide signals on a DWDM-FLEX link: these signals must be designed only within 100 GHz of the center frequency of a PM-8QAM/SPQPSK 62.5 GHz routed channel. EPT does not require a separate width parameter (75 GHz or 62.5 GHz). EPT: • • •

restricts adjacent channels in the design, designs FLEX equipment on the routes (or alter/restrict route paths), designs FLEX Link types (or alter/restrict route paths)

as required for the width of the signal it is designing. In Release 9.0.1 the center frequencies remain the same as in previous releases, for all link types. R9.0.1 Interworking Configurations

The supported configurations can be arranged into the following groups: •

10G Protection

•

OT Interworking: – 1UD200 Interworking – Compatible OTs Interworking

•

D5X500 Cascading

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

•

PSS-24X OTs: – PSS-24x OT Interworking – PSS-24x OT Protection –

PSS-24x OT Regeneration

10G Protection

This group contains three configurations. Two of these configurations were already supported prior to R9.0.1 The remaining configuration requires the 11DPM8 to interwork with 11QCUPC-compatible. OT Interworking

This group contains new interworking requirements for 1UD200 and 130SCUPCcompatible. D5X500 Cascading

EPT R9.0.1 supports a D5X500 cascaded with a 112SDX11 OT. The D5X500 uses the dual rate pluggable (C4CLR4d) on the client port for cascaded OT configurations. Up to 4 112SDX11 OTs can be cascaded onto a single D5X500 OT in PM-8QAM or PM-16QAM mode. A maximum of two 112SDX11 OTs can be cascaded using QPSK or SPQPSK modes. Note: Although the 112SDX11 is not a coherent OT, it can be used in DCU Free networks as a cascaded OT because it is not line facing. PSS-24X OTs

These configurations are covered by the functionalities described in “PSS-24x Support including 2UC400-compatible, 4UC400-compatible and 130SCUPH-compatible and 2UC400-compatible and 4UC400-compatible Support for FOADMs” (p. 1-4). The unsupported configurations can be arranged into the following groups: • •

Remote Aggregation 11DPM4M

• • •

Line Side Facing 20P200 PSS-24X Cascading ADM Protection

•

Remote Aggregation with OCS Shelves

130SCA1 and 130SCX10 Support on WR20-TF and WR20-TFM ROADMs

The 130SCA1 and 130SCX10 are supported add/dropped (connected with) a WR20-TF ROADM PSC1-6 card and/or a WR20-TFM ROADM MCS8-16 card, in GMPLS-enabled and GMPLS-disabled networks.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In EPT the 130SCA1/130SCX10 cards are supported in PSS-8 shelves while the WR20-TFM, MCS8-16, AAR-8A cards are not – so the NE with the WR20-TFM node may have a PSS-8 in it but the various cards are kept in the shelves that support them only. In R9.0.1 the NE does not support this feature: •

in PSS-8 or PSS-16II shelves

• •

with GMPLS on WR20-TF cards

Interworking between CDC ROADMs and Legacy WR8-based ROADMs with C-band Link Combinations | Solution Configuration Interworking (WR20TFM CDC-F - Legacy CWR8-88 lines) | Solution Configuration Interworking (WR20TF - WR20TFM lines) | Solution Configuration Interworking (IROADMF - ILA, ROADM, TOADM, CDC-F, C-F, 1D FOADM)

This feature expands the WR20-TFM ROADM line interworking support at span and link endpoints. 1. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM line ←→ legacy WR8-88A/WR8-88AF ROADM lines (includes GMPLS-enabled networks) 2. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM line ←→ Legacy CWR8-88 TOADM line (not in an AnyDirection Add/Drop Block) 3. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM line ←→ legacy WR20-TF ROADM line (non-GMPLS) 4. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM line ←→ legacy DFOADM line (with ITLB, that is, with 50 GHz channel spacing support, do not preclude in EPT). Note: There is no Auto Design OA Selection algorithm which supports both DFOADMs and unidirectional amps, this restriction remains. 5. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM line ←→ legacy WR2-88 ROADM (with ITLB for 50 GHz channnel spacing support, do not preclude in EPT) 6. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM Line ←→ ILA (all amplifiers and Raman, PB1) or glass-through 7. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM Line ←→ Single Blade WR20-TFM DGE 8. WR20-TFM CDC-F ROADM Line ←→ IROADMV/IROADMF ROADM (50 GHz channel spacing)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 1-1 Interworking between CDC ROADMs and Legacy

In Figure 1-1, “Interworking between CDC ROADMs and Legacy ” (p. 1-13), NE1 and NE2 are in separate EPT Sites. EPT auto-design does not automatically add additional WR20-TFM ROADMs. Attenuation might be needed between the two ROADMs to: •

prevent overloading the input to the ingress amplifier in the CDC-F ROADM if the WR8-88A(F) ROADM uses an egress amplifier.

•

prevent OSC overload, even if the WR8-88A(F) ROADM does not have an egress amplifier.

Solution Configuration Interworking (WR20TF - Legacy WR8-88 lines)

Supported in EPT R8.2. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Solution Configuration Interworking (WR20TF - Legacy CWR8-88 lines)

Supported in EPT R8.2. Solution Configuration Interworking (IROADM - Legacy OTS line) Support AHPHG, AHPLG, A2325A on AC-D-C (C-F) Architecture

EPT models this (for submarine link configurations) as a DWDM-FLEX or DWDM-50GHz Link type, with no OSC, between two WR20-TF ROADMs (no restriction on ROADM degree count is enforced by EPT). EPT does not support a special flag for this link to indicate it is a submarine link. GMPLS L0 CP Support for Metro Applications CLS IROADMs

•

In GMPLS designs: support only ROADMs with the exception of 1621SLE Link (ROADM + DFOADM in the same NE)

•

Support interworking with legacy ROADM configurations (D,D’,D”) and CDC-F nodes. – AC-D-C (C-F) nodes are not currently supported in GMPLS by both NE and EPT – Support PSS-32,PSS-16,PSS-8,PSS16-II as master and extension shelves – – –

Support of colored directional architecture (SFDs) architecture (No PSCs) in IROADM nodes. Support of single matrix per node: mixed node WR-xx/IROADM is not supported Resource Administrative coloring is still not yet supported by EPT.

In R9.0.1 EPT GMPLS designs support only one IROADM architecture: the one that foresees add/drop using SFD filters connected via ITL unit. Client/Line are supported by GMPLS in GMPLS designs assuming that trails that are part of a ring cannot be neither protected nor restorable. .--- Trails should also be manually routed otherwise we will not show them create ring option. Trails that do not satisfy requirements above are not added to a ring. Modifications of trails in such a way that the above requirements are not satisfy cause the removal of the trail from the ring and also the removal of the route. 4UC400-compatible and 130SCUPH-compatible cannot be regenerated in GMPS designs. The conversion from non-GMPLS to GMPLS design is not done in case a design contains IROADMs with PSC1-6 add drop blocks.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commissioning File Interface with CPB App within OMS

The Commissioning File Interface in R9.0.1 is a new format and the interface is with the new CPB App within OMS Release 14. The old Commissioning File Interface with the old standalone CPB or older versions of the OMS releases is no longer supported. Upload Application from OMS (Without Upload of Trails and Services)

In R9.0.1 discrepancy reports are supported, while the Traffic Upload is not (it will return in R9.1). GMPLS Support of Network Evolution (Supporting Projects)

Support of network evolution – only Current and Deployed projects are supported in GMPLS designs (not Future). Projects allow incremental or phased design and growth of an installed network’s design. Highlights: • •

Restoration routing is project-less (it is always calculated on whole design) Restoration regenerators can be deleted – Only restoration regenerators in the current project can be removed if not used in a nominal path – Deleting deployed regenerators is not allowed

•

Restoration regenerators can be un-deployed – All restoration regenerators can be removed from a deployed project. They are automatically placed back in the current project. – Nominal regenerators can be removed only by removing trail (or its routing)

Greenfield: •

• •

Nominal regenerators are placed by EPT GMPLS Engine as part of the automatic routing of a trail as well as by manual routing, restoration regenerators are created by a dedicated panel on a given NE. Restoration regenerators can be created automatically by EPT GMPLS Engine, in addition to creation by the panel. User-defined regenerators are reused by EPT GMPLS Engine as much as possible on both nominal and/or restoration routes Only restoration regenerators can be manually removed from the design

Brownfield: Run design options 1 and 2 preserve regenerators placed by user and try to reuse deployed regenerators. Option 3 will remove user-defined regenerators if not deployed or used. EPT GMPLS Engine can use a user-defined restoration 3R that is optically compatible with a trail, even if the 3R is not the pack that EPT GMPLS Engine would place by default. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrade EPT Design from Non-GMRE to GMRE and Vice Versa

The EPT supports a network design upgrade from non-GMRE to GMRE and downgrade from GMRE to non-GMRE. A new Convert Design option on the Action menu will convert the design to GMRE or non-GMRE depending on the current design. The EPT will check that configurations are valid before doing the conversion. It is strongly recommended to perform a backup of the of the original file before applying a non-GMPLS to GMPLS (and vice versa) conversion. Channels already assigned don’t move. New channels are added using current channel assignment plan (not necessarily the one that was used before the upgrade/downgrade). An upgraded design may not follow the GMPLS channel plan. The design state will change to “Incomplete” and the user are prompted to execute a Run Design with option 2 recommended (see Step 1). As new trails are added to the GMPLS design, Run Design option 2 will need to be done to recalculate restoration and feasibility. For a detailed list of prerequisites to converting a design to or from GMPLS, refer to “Prerequisites When Upgrading From non-GMPLS to GMPLS” (p. 10-24) and “Prerequisites When Downgrading From GMPLS to non-GMPLS” (p. 10-26). Allow Mixing of Standard Noise OT’s on Colored Ports, While Also Supporting Enhanced OT’s on Colorless Ports

EPT R9.0.1 allows the mixing of OTs as follows: •

Any mix of OTs (Standard OT, Low Noise OT, No Noise OT) can be placed on the colored ports (SFD) of a configuration D, D’’, D‘, ROADM, IROADM with SFD, and TOADM.

•

Only OT of Noise Class coherent with choice set in Network Parameter “Amplified OT Usage” can be placed on the colorless ports of the configuration D, D’, D’‘ ROADM. “Amplified OT Usage” does not apply to the colorless ports of the TOADM because only No Noise OTs are allowed in regular TOADMs.

•

The e-rules for these No Noise and Low Noise OTs are not degraded by the presence of the standard OTs in the colored ports.

•

Allow mixing of Standard noise OTs on colored ports do not apply to IROADM with PSC, CDC-F, C-F node types because they do not have SFD colored ports.

This functionality is not applicable to GMPLS in R9.0.1. Merging Two EPT Files in a Single File

EPT allows the merge of a second EPT design file into an open EPT file (primary file). The two files to be merged must be created using the same build number as the installation of EPT. Older files must be opened and saved to update the build number for that design.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The new Merge menu option is available from the File menu after setting Network Parameters, which automatically prompts the user for the secondary file and Destination file naming definition. 10353-50: Integrated WT-XFP Key Encoding and Optional WT

The target of this functionality is the first introduction of the embedded WT technology inside the XFP DWDM TUNABLE Z-CHIRP line pluggable. •

• •

XL-64TCW is XFP with WT encoding capability introduced for a number of transponder cards in prior releases – without encoding capability used = XL-64TCW + fVOA configuration fVOA = fast variable optical attenuator: can perform wavelength tracker encoding and power control functions sVOA = slow variable optical attenuator, perform only power control function

Applies to 11DPM8 and 12P120 on shelves PSS-4, PSS-8, PSS-16II, PSS-32, (EPT also supports PSS-16 while the NE does not. ). No GMPLS support. Additional options implemented in EPT R9.0.1 are shown in Figure 1-2, “WT-XFP Options” (p. 1-17). Figure 1-2 WT-XFP Options

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In some optical nodes and network design situation is possible to avoid any optical attenuation or deploy a Fixed Attenuator LBO. This attenuator is remarked via a specific message following an automatic power level check. In the BOM is reported the ATTEN-TBD (Attenuator value TBD upon Link Test) item. The Create Trail window contains the parameter “DWDM Line Pluggable,” which has the new option XL-64TCWint, with the same BOM acronym, description, and APN. In case of the Fixed (that is, nothing or ATTEN-TBD) attenuator preference, EPT provides the best solution looking at the Nodal configuration and related matrix in Figure 1-3, “Nodal Configuration Matrix” (p. 1-18) and some warning messages. Figure 1-3 Nodal Configuration Matrix

Note: Electronic, variable = sVOA in the BOM Fixed = nothing or ATTEN-TBD in the BOM LBO=Line Build Out, also called an attenuator (ATTEN-TBD in the BOM) EPT Support for Designs with Nodes and Trails that Mix Unamplified and Amplified Spans

This feature updates the power setting of channels propagating over unamplified spans. Current power setting forces all the channels to be launched into the fiber at a the same optical power (flat power spectrum), thus most of the channels are attenuated to the power of the channel with the lower power value. This constraint is needed when optical amplifiers are present to regulate the power divergence. However, channels running over unamplified spans can run at a higher power setting. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Node Renaming and Synchronization

This feature allows a node that is renamed by NPT to retain its name in EPT after Line Design. Run Design option 2 (see Step 1) will keep NE names and SID that have been modified by EPT or NPT (also for Network Element in "Auto" status). Node names for nodes in "Auto" status are calculated by Run Design option 2 and 3 based on the new NE name. A network element is treated as “user modified” if NPT or a user changes NE attributes that need to be preserved. A “user modified” NE will not be deleted when the user or NPT removes auto-designed equipment (Run Design option 2). If the user or NPT forces the NE to be deleted by doing a run design with removing both user and auto-designed equipment (Run Design option 3), shelf reservations and other saved NE attributes are deleted. Removal of Virtual Demands in EPT

From EPT R9.0.1 on, virtual demands are no longer supported. Upon opening an EPT design file that contains virtual demands, an error message is displayed and the EPT design is not loaded or imported. You must remove the virtual demands using a previous release of EPT. Removal of PSS-1 Support

From EPT R9.0.1 PSS-1 is no longer supported. Upon opening an EPT design file that contains a PSS-1 NE, an error message is displayed and the EPT design is not loaded or imported. You must remove the PSS-1 using a previous release of EPT. Removal of 130SNQ10

From EPT R9.0.1, the 130SNQ10 OT is no longer supported. Upon opening an EPT design file if the source or destination OT for any trail is 130SNQ10, an error message is displayed and the EPT design is not loaded or imported. You must modify the OT type or remove the trail with the 130SNQ10 using a previous release of EPT. EPT support of Windows Server 2012

Refer to “Required Equipment” (p. 2-2). EPT on MAC

Refer to “Required Equipment” (p. 2-2).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

General Features

The following list is a summary of the EPT general features. •

Design options, including: – CWDM/DWDM networks connecting including mixed CWDM/DWDM – Fully Automatic, Manual, and mixed network synthesis – Design Optimization based on Cost or Performance – FOADM, TOADM, ROADM, Multi-directional and Colorless networks – – –

FOADM, TOADM, ROADM, Multi-directional/Colorless, and GMPLS networks Dispersion Managed, Dispersion Free, and Banded Design Automatic/Manual Traffic routing and channel assignment

– Design Entry using Integrated GUI or tabular entry via Microsoft Excel. – Phased/Project Design – Node Insertion Network Element Design Options: – Simplex and duplex Equipment controllers – – – –

•

• •

Full Rack Line Isolation Option Split Shelf Network Element Design Circuit pack placement and frame types Extension shelf preference

– Power Options: DC, AC, Power Distribution Unit (PDU) selection – Rack selection (ANSI, ETSI, NEBS) Network design with user-configurable parameters, including: Fiber Support – SSMF, ELEAF, and TW-RS – TW+, TW-classic, LS, and DSF fiber support for DCU-Free designs – 8 to 88 channel support Traffic Modeling: – Any-to-Any connectivity analysis Transmission Modeling: – Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) – – – –

Non-Linear Transmission Penalty Chromatic Dispersion Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) Filter Penalty

– –

Cross Talk Penalty Transponder Dynamic Range

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

EPT Features in Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– – – •

Network-specific configurable parameters, including: – Fiber loss per km/mile – Configurable connector loss – – – – –

•

End of life span margin Additional OSNR margin Polarization Dependent Dispersion Dispersion Slope Asymmetric Fiber properties

– End of life span margin – Additional OSNR margin Output reports, including: – – – –

•

Optical Supervisory Channel Performance Fiber Capacity Channel Assignment

Bill of Materials Shelf and Frame view of equipment Detailed traffic routing Installation and commissioning instructions including cabling

– Optical margin analysis – Q-Factor Estimate for 100G Coherent Transmission Integration with 1830 PSS management systems – Import deployed network configuration including traffic matrix and amplifier settings – – –

Calculates and downloads amplifier settings including power, gain, tilt, and WaveTracker power levels Sets network specific Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) Full and Partial Systems commissioning Target Feasibility/Optical Impairment Lookup tables)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

Functionality

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Functionality EPT Design Process

The following steps summarize the network design process using the EPT (see Chapter 5, “Site and Topology Definition and Configuration” for details). 1. Define the EPT Network Parameters: • Network Parameters and Defaults • Distance Units (Kilometers/miles) • Equipment protection • Default fiber type and characteristics • • •

Default maximum system capacity Select WTOCM Usage GMPLS enabling option (select GMPLS or non-GMPLS network)

• Segment Capacity • Banded/unrestricted channel assignment for 100/40G coherent OT • Extended Temperature Range Sites Auto-Design and Verification: • OA Selection Algorithm • Dispersion Compensation • DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys • DWDM Loss Margin • Connector Loss Amplifier Auto-placement: • Standard or Override Cost-Optimized amplifier choices • High Performance Amplifier Choices • Allow Raman Pre-Amplification for Spans greater than Equipment Options: • Shelf Width • PSS-32 Fan Capacity 2. Define the Sites (Site Details): Power Filter Definition • Any Power Constraints for the Site Automatic Design Definition • OADM type • Max DWDM Lines •

ROADM Preferences (Filter Constraints)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

Functionality

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Set Pass Through Node Options (For Appropriate Amplifier Selection Option) • Set Shelf Preference (for Node Type) 3. Define Fiber Connectivity: • • •

Fiber Characteristics (type, distance) Optional Fiber Characteristics (Loss, Chromatic Dispersion, PMD) WTOCM Selection

4. Define traffic patterns • For GMPLS designs define (SRG) Shared Risk Group and GMPLS Failure Scope 5. Run Automatic Design Synthesis 6. Create reports 7. Divide the network into downloadable systems for automatic commissioning 8. Create the commissioning file(s) The set of commissioning files (an XML file for each system) is downloaded to the 1830 PSS management system. These files drive the commissioning wizard during system turn-up. See the current Nokia 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for more details.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Introduction

Functionality

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 1-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

2

EPT Installation and Setup 2

Overview Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to install, uninstall, upgrade, launch, and exit the EPT application. Contents Required Equipment

2-2

Installing the EPT Software

2-3

Uninstalling the EPT

2-12

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

2-15

Launching the EPT Application

2-22

Closing the EPT Application

2-30

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Required Equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Required Equipment Hardware and Software Requirements

The EPT is distributed on CD as a self installing executable. All required software is included in the installation. The following hardware and software are required on the PC before you begin installing the EPT application. Note: The Windows Server 2012 configuration is only for 1830 EPT embedded in 1390 NTP. Table 2-1

Minimum Requirements to Install EPT

Attribute

MAC/MacBook

Windows 7

Processor

Windows Server 2012

2.5 GHz

RAM

•

4 GB with normal launcher

(See Note 1)

•

8 GB with the large design launcher for large GMPLS networks

Disk space Video

16 GB

20 GB Desktop MAC: 1920 x 1080

1024 x 768

MacBook: 1280 x 800 Operating System

MAC Version 10.8.4, 10.9.5, 10.11

Software

Any MAC-compatible spreadsheet application

(See Note 2)

Windows 7 – Enterprise edition (Service Pack 1 or greater)

Windows Server 2012 (64-bit)

Microsoft Office Excel 2010 or Excel 2007

Notes:

1.

To launch the EPT, at least 256 MB of contiguous physical free memory are needed. If this memory is not available, you may must stop background processes to free RAM, or increase the quantity of RAM in the PC for both MAC and Windows 7.

2.

Using a Viewer is sufficient to read reports. Excel is mandatory only to create .xls files for import and export Excel functionality.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Installing the EPT Software Purpose

This procedure provides instructions for installing the EPT software on a PC or Mac. Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, see Table 2-1, “Minimum Requirements to Install EPT” (p. 2-2) for hardware and software requirements. If there is any existing version of the on the PC, it must be uninstalled before installing a new version (see “Uninstalling the EPT” (p. 2-12)). Note: EPT Release 9.0.1 does not support GMPLS designs with the Mac OS. Microsoft Visual C++

RWA dll requires the Microsoft Visual C++ 2012 Redistributable Package to be installed on your computer. You can install it by executing the vcredist_x86.exe file in the runtimeInstaller folder located in the EPT installation directory. For example, if you have installed EPT in the directory C:\Users\smith\Nokia\1830 PSS EPT R9.0.0 you can find vcredist_x86.exe in the C:\Users\smith\Nokia\1830 PSS EPT R9.0.1\runtimeInstaller directory. Mac Installation Prerequisites

• •

EPT .dmg file from CD-ROM or website Static Host name: The Mac hostname must be set to a static value to avoid invalidation of the EPT license. Setting the System Host name requires Administrator privileges. 1. Select System Preferences > Sharing. 2. Click the Edit. 3. Enter the desired host name (see Figure 2-1, “Mac Hostname” (p. 2-4)). 4. De-select Use dynamic global name. 5. Click OK > Save.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-1 Mac Hostname

Alternatively, the hostname can be set by system administrators from the Terminal by entering the scutil --set HostName [NewHostName] command. Installing the EPT on a PC

Complete the steps below to install the EPT on the PC from your software CD. (Software can also be downloaded from the Nokia Online Customer Support Site (OLCS) or through your Local Customer Support.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If auto-run is enabled on the PC, the InstallShield Wizard for EPT will run automatically. Otherwise, right-click on the CD-ROM drive in the Windows explorer to run the 1830 EPT R9.0.1 installation program “1830 PSS EPT R9.0.1.exe” that is located in the “\InstallEPT” directory

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The splash page is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

When the Install4j Wizard for EPT is displayed, select Next. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Figure 2-2 Welcome to the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard Window

When the Welcome window is displayed (see Figure 2-2, “Welcome to the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard Window” (p. 2-5)), click Next. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

The legal notice is displayed (see Figure 2-3, “Setup Window (Legal Notice)” (p. 2-6)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-3 Setup Window (Legal Notice)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Figure 2-4 Setup Window

In the destination folder, the 1830EPT_LargeDesign.exe program will be installed in the destination folder where EPT is installed (My Computer > C > Users > Username > Nokia > 1830EPT_LargeDesign). This file must be used to launch EPT with a memory footprint suitable for large GMPLS designs. Note: It is not recommended to select either the Program File directory or a sub-directory of Program File subdirectory as the installation folder. EPT must have read/write access to the installation directories. In Windows 7, this access is not granted to normal users for security reasons. Click Next.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Figure 2-5 Completing the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard Window

When the installation is complete, the Completing the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard window is displayed (see Figure 2-5, “Completing the 1830 PSS EPT Setup Wizard Window” (p. 2-8)). Click Finish. Result: Two EPT icons are displayed on the PC desktop (see Figure 2-6, “1830 EPT

Desktop Icon” (p. 2-8) and Figure 2-7, “1830 EPT Desktop Icon (Large)” (p. 2-9)). Figure 2-6 1830 EPT Desktop Icon

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-7 1830 EPT Desktop Icon (Large)

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Installing the EPT on a Mac ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Download the files from website or copy the files from CD to Mac machine. To install, open the drive and double click on the .dmg file. Result: The EPT installer icon appears (see Figure 2-8, “Mac Desktop Icon” (p. 2-9)). Figure 2-8 Mac Desktop Icon

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Double-click the installer icon. Result: The EPT Setup Wizard launches (see Figure 2-9, “EPT Setup Wizard

Window” (p. 2-10)), Figure 2-9 EPT Setup Wizard Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Next to continue through the steps to install.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Installing the EPT Software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The EPT program is downloaded in the Applications folder (see Figure 2-10,

“Applications” (p. 2-11)). Figure 2-10 Applications

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Uninstalling the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Uninstalling the EPT Purpose

This procedure provides instructions for uninstalling the EPT from the PC. Procedure

Complete the steps below to uninstall the EPT from the PC. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the PC Start menu, select Programs > Nokia > 1830 PSS EPT > Uninstall EPT R9.0.1. Result: A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 2-11, “Confirmation Window

(Confirm Uninstall)” (p. 2-12)). Figure 2-11 Confirmation Window (Confirm Uninstall)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes in the confirmation window to uninstall the EPT.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Uninstalling the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Setup Status window is displayed (see Figure 2-12, “(Deinstallation in

Progress)” (p. 2-13)). Figure 2-12 (Deinstallation in Progress)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 2-13, “Confirmation Window (Successful Uninstall)” (p. 2-14)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Uninstalling the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-13 Confirmation Window (Successful Uninstall)

The EPT software is now removed from the PC. Click Finish. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0 EPT Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

EPT software upgrade to Release 9.0 is supported from any EPT release subsequent to and including R3.6.50. You cannot move a design from Release 9.0 to Release 6.0.6 or any other previous release. For additional software upgrade considerations, please refer to the 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Customer Release Notes for the respective EPT release. EPT Design Migration to Future Releases

The following are software considerations when upgrading to EPT Release 9.0 from previous EPT releases. Designs created with previous EPT releases opened in EPT Release 9.0 will initialize new Release 9.0 field parameters to their default values. Note additional upgrading considerations for your EPT software release in the sections below. EPT Release 9.0 Designs

A design cannot be upgraded when it contains deployed site(s) with “CDC-F Special” field value of Shelf placement in Rack or Pack placement in Shelf or if the design has the Integrated Bay field enabled. You must return to the old release to change these values. Note: This will/may change the rack layout of the deployed racks. Due to the removal of the CDC-F network design concept, the following additional changes are implemented: •

•

•

•

Upgrade of a CDC-F network design to Release 9.0 should default the Network Parameters and Site Equipment Options tabs, and per shelf NE Details called “PSS-32 ANSI Shelf Installation Kit” = Extra Depth (this corresponds to INSTNAREXT14 in the BOM). Non-CDC-F network design upgrades should retain the value in the EPT design file. The “PSS-32 Shelf Depth” field value to 13-Inch on the Network Parameters Equipment Options tab, Site Details Equipment Definition tab, and the NE Details window (per shelf). Non-CDC-F network designs will retain its value. Non-CDC-F network designs default the CDC-F specific fields “MCS Add/Drop Block auto creation sequence” and “Specialty FOC MPO Jumpers” to their default values. CDC-F network designs created in Release 8.0.0 and earlier will initialize the new “Specialty FOC MPO jumpers” field value to Yes (FOC type).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

•

CDC-F network designs created in Release 8.1 or later retain the “Specialty FOC MPO jumpers” field value. New designs starting in R8.1 already default the value to “No” (non-FOC).

•

Field values that were hidden in the old CDC-F design file, and are now supported in the network with WR20-TFM ROADMs, will have the default values for a standard network. Field values that exist in the CDC-F network design file will retain their values after the software release upgrade to Release 9.0.0. Configurable options previously exclusive to CDC-F network designs will now be displayed and set to their proper default settings, which are dependent on the WR preferences at the site, when the design file is opened in Release 9.0.

• •

In the Node Details window, the “Optimize for DGE” field name will change to “DGE Type” with new options. Any part numbers in the reports or price file that were previously displayed with “ALU” in the name will be renamed. Upgrade of GMPLS designs containing 12P120 packs: S-EFEC is not supported in GMPLS designs; therefore if the default OT is a 12P120 with S-EFEC, or if trails with 12P120 on A-End or Z-end and S-EFEC as requested FEC are present, the design cannot be upgraded. You will have to make modifications in the last EPT version used. C4CLR4d client interface name: When opening a design from Release 8.2.2 or earlier, if EPT discovers a D5X500 OT using client pluggable C4CLR4d (part number 3AL82023AA) the client interface name will be automatically changed from 100GBASE-LR4(CFP4) to 100GBASE-LR4-dualrate(CFP4). EPT Release 8.2 Designs

Updates when upgrading from EPT Release 8.1 to Release 8.2: During the design loading file: •

If deployed cards exist in the network design with a “Not Orderable” Nokia Part Number in the Price file, EPT will maintain those cards. A warning message window will be displayed to advise you of this scenario.

•

If undeployed cards exist in the network design with a “Not Orderable” part number in the Price file, you have the option to manually replace these cards with the orderable part number. This includes the 11DPE12A OT card with part number 8DG59340AC, which has been discontinued and substituted with the part number 8DG59340AD. By default EPT changes any un-deployed old card with the new one. A warning message window will be displayed to advise you of this scenario, which will allow you to change the discontinued equipment as desired in the Network Element Details window (see Figure 5-25, “Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-96)).

In addition, in all DWDM links, the Do not auto-design 50 GHz flex-grid channels below field will be set to Use Global Value. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When opening a GMPLS design that was created in EPT R3.6.50, R5.n. R6.n or R7.n, with an EPT R8.0 or later release, it is recommended before generating any report, to run the design. Be sure to select the Remove all auto-designed elements option (see Figure 8-1, “Run Design Options Window” (p. 8-5)). 1UD200 Packs: R8.1 designs that have the 1UD200-100G OT change to the 1UD200 100G linerate mode when the design file is first opened in Release 9.0. Equipment Controller (EC) Types: •

EPT will retain the EC type and part number for all current, future, and deployed designed PSS-32 and PSS-16 shelves.

•

New PSS-32 shelves added to the design in Release 8.2 will use the EC type EC if the main shelf (shelf 1) of the NE contains an EC. New PSS-32 shelves added to the design in Release 8.2 will use the EC type 32EC2if the main shelf (shelf 1) of the NE contains a 32EC2.

• •

If this is a redesign or addition of the main shelf (Shelf 1), EPT will use the EC type 32EC2 in a PSS-32 shelf.

EPT Release 8.1 Designs

Updates when upgrading from EPT Release 8.0 to Release 8.1: •

•

•

In CDC-F network designs, the EPT will select the default value of Yes in the Specialty FOC MPO Jumpers field on the Equipment Options tabs of the Network Parameters and Site Details windows. If the design file contains SXS64.2C pluggables, EPT will update the part numbers to remove the “AA” at the end of the string so that the part number is 10 characters in length. If the design file contains pluggables with the name “S10GB-SR(DCI),” EPT will convert them to “S10GB-SR.” This pluggable is only applicable to 112SDX11 and 11OPE8.

Exclusions when upgrading from EPT Release 8.0 to EPT R8.1: • •

EPT Release 8.1 will not upgrade or open an older design file containing a PSS-16II shelf. EPT Release 8.1 will not upgrade or open an older design file containing one or more OMSP links, as they are in an unsupported format. All OMSP links must be removed from the design and recreated in EPT Release 9.0.

For EPT designs created in releases prior to R8.1 and opened in R8.1, EPT will default the new Specialty FOC MPO jumpers field on the Network Parameters and Site Details windows (Equipment Options tab) to use FOC MPO jumpers, because that jumper type is what those networks were using.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To upgrade design files with DFOADM OMSP links: •

• • •

Delete all OMSP links (which also removes the two “inner” WDM links removing all amplifiers and all settings in the link, and remove routes of all demands (trails) that are routed over OMSP links) Migrate to R8.1 Create OMSP links Route trails

EPT Release 8.0 Designs

In addition, when upgrading from EPT Release 7.0.4 to EPT Release 8.0: • •

In CDC-F network designs, the Amplified OT Usage values configured as Allow Mixing will change to Prohibit Standard ASE OTs. The following SFP+ modules have been renamed to remove the hyphen in the acronym. – SXI-64.1 – SXS-64.2b – SXS-64.2C (1471 – 1611)

Some specific OT configurations are no longer supported, and if these configurations, conversion will fail upon upgrade.: • •

S-EFEC for XL-64TU for 11DPM12, 11QPA4, and 11QPEN4 Tunable XFP FEC selections

•

11STAR1A, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11QPEN4 no longer support S-EFEC

EPT Release 7.0 Designs

Designs created with EPT Release 7.0.2 will be migrated to EPT Release 7.0.4 as follows: •

New Release 7.0.4 configuration parameters will display their default values.

Designs created with EPT Release 7.0.0 will be migrated to EPT Release 7.0.2 as follows: • •

New Release 7.0.2 configuration parameters will display their default values. High ASE OTs: –

If the design file does not contain any high ASE OTs, the default OT is not a high ASE OT, and OSNRmin attribute of any OT has a non-default value and has format dd.27, then EPT will open the design file in prohibit medium ASE OTs mode. Reset the OSNRmin to its default value.

–

If the design file does not contain any high ASE OTs, the default OT is not a high ASE OT, and OSNRmin attribute has its default value then EPT will open the design file in Allow Mixing mode. If design file has a high ASE OT or high ASE default OT, then EPT will open the design file in Allow Mixing mode. If the OSNRmin attribute of any OT has a non-default value and has the format dd.27, then reset it to the default value.

–

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

•

•

• • •

•

NOFEC is not supported with the XL-64TCW tunable zero chirp pluggable; if the source or destination OT for any demand is 11QPA4 and the selected XFP is XL-64TCW (tunable zero chirp) and the FEC mode is NOFEC, the EPT design will not be loaded or imported. Either modify the FEC type, modify the pluggable to XL-64TU, or remove the demand using a previous release of EPT. If the older EPT design file contains any 260SCX2 (Muxponder) demands in a GMPLS enabled design, the design will not be loaded or imported because the OT is not supported in GMPLS designs. Modify the OT type or remove the demand with the 260SCX2 (Muxponder) using a previous release of EPT. All EPT designs created prior to Release 7.0.2 will have the Shelf Voltage Floor fields in the Network Parameters and Site Details windows set to 39 by default. Any design files with DCU Free and a mix of coherent and non-coherent OTs will not be loaded or imported. Release 7.0.2 design files will default to the PSS-32 high capacity fans, but designs upgraded from Release 7.0.0 will retain their current values as configured with the PSS-32 FAN Capacity field on the Network Parameters Equipment Options window. Design files from previous releases of EPT with existing WDM demands will be converted to trails or services as follows: –

–

–

Each non-cascaded demand will be converted to new a trail (from Line to Line) and a new service composed of all selected client ports for the demand. The service will be routed over the newly created trail. If an OT has the Allow Sharing field enabled and multiple demands use the same line port on the OT, only a single trail will be created. The services created will all use the same trail. Each cascaded demand will require two trails: one OCh Trail and one Cascaded Trail. The cascaded trail will be routed over the OCh trail. A new service will be created for all client ports for the cascaded OT. In both cases, if no client ports are selected, then a service will not be created. If a cascading OT is shared across multiple demands, only a single trail per line port in use is created. No new equipment will be added or removed in the upgrade process. No equipment will change location in a shelf. Trail and Service design states will inherit the design state of the former WDM demand.

EPT Release 6.2.0 Designs

Designs created with EPT Release 6.2.0 will be migrated to EPT Release 9.0 as follows: • •

•

New Release 6.2.0 configuration parameters will display their default values. The names for the High Performance Amplifier choices in the Network Parameters Amplifier Auto-Placement tab have changed in Release 9.0. Upgrading old design files into Release 9.0 map the old names to the new names. If the source or destination OT for any demand is set to 520SCX4-compatible, the EPT design will not be loaded or imported because the OT is not supported. Modify the OT type or remove the demand with the 520SCX4-compatible using a previous release of EPT.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

•

The PSS-32S shelf, uplink cards, client IO cards, and L1-Matrix entries are not supported in Release 9.0. If any of these equipment types exist in the design, the EPT design will not be loaded or imported. Modify the design using a previous release of EPT.

•

High ASE OTs: – If the design file contains any high ASE OTs, EPT will open the design file in Prohibit medium ASE OTs mode. – To use 130SCUPC-compatible, you must move the design to Prohibit high ASE OTs mode. –

To use high ASE OTs, you must move the design to Allow Mixing mode.

EPT Release 6.0.6 Designs

Designs created with EPT Release 6.0.6 will be migrated to EPT Release 9.0 as follows: •

New Release 6.0.6 configuration parameters will display their default values.

•

Demands for DDR client signals will be updated as follows: – The client interface 1x-DDR-SX is not supported in Release 9.0; you must modify demands with this client interface in a previous version of the EPT. –

– –

Demands with DDR client signals are not supported using ESNCP, Y-cable, or OPS protection in Release 9.0; you must modify demands with this client interface in a previous version of the EPT. Client interfaces set to 1x-DDR-LX-multirate in Release 9.0 will change to 1x-DDR-LX. The demand status becomes Complete, Invalid. Regenerated demands with DDR client signals is not supported in Release 6.0.6; you must modify demands with this client interface in a previous version of the EPT.

EPT Release 5.0.0 Designs

Designs created with EPT Release 5.0.0 will be migrated to EPT Release 9.0 as follows: •

•

If EPT Release 9.0 detects invalid characters for the System Identifier (SID) values in the network, an error message is displayed and you will be required to correct the SIDs before opening the design in EPT Release 9.0. Valid characters are described in Table 5-10, “Network Element Parameters” (p. 5-92). The 11QCUP compatible OT is no longer supported in EPT Release 9.0. You cannot open an EPT design file created in a lower release if the design file contains an 11QCUP compatible demand.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Software Upgrade to Release 9.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EPT Release 3.6.50 Designs

Designs created with EPT Release 3.6.50 will be migrated to EPT Release 9.0 as follows: • •

If the EPT R3.6.50 design file contains any PSS-36 shelves, the design will not open with EPT Release 9.0. Designs containing demands that include 11DPE12A OTs with S-EFEC are not supported; you must modify the demand by either changing the OT or changing the FEC type in the previous version of the EPT.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launching the EPT Application Purpose

This procedure provides instructions for launching the application on the PC. Before you begin

Ensure that the EPT application is installed on the PC or Mac, and that the icon is displayed on the desktop. Obtaining a License Key

The first time you run the EPT software, you must obtain and install a license key using the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Do one of the following: PC

Mac

•

Double-click the EPT icon on the PC desktop to launch the application, OR.

•

From the PC Start menu, select All Programs > Nokia > 1830 PSS EPT > 1830 PSS EPT R9.0.1.

Mac: Navigate to the Application folder and launch the EPT application, 1830EPT(R9.0.1).

Result: The License Error window is displayed (see Figure 2-18, “License Error

Window” (p. 2-26)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Copy to clipboard and paste the information into an email to your sales team representative. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

The sales team representative will generate a valid license key and email the license key to the user. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Paste the key into the “Paste key here” field, and click Validate. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure

Complete the steps below to open the EPT on the PC: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Do one of the following: PC

Mac

•

Double-click the EPT icon on the PC desktop to launch the application.

•

From the PC Start menu, select All Programs > Nokia > 1830 PSS EPT > 1830 PSS EPT R9.0.1.

In the Finder, select Applications > 1830 PSS EPT 9.0.1..

Result: The startup window is briefly displayed on the desktop (see Figure 2-14,

“EPT Startup” (p. 2-23)). Figure 2-14 EPT Startup

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If...

Then...

you have installed a valid license key,

The EPT main window is displayed with the Design Options window (see Figure 2-15, “Design Options Window” (p. 2-24)). Continue with “Initial Display Options and Launch Window” (p. 2-27).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If...

Then...

you have not installed a valid license key,

Either the License Invalid error or the License Expired error is displayed (see Figure 2-16, “License Invalid Error” (p. 2-24) andFigure 2-17, “License Expired Error” (p. 2-25)).

Result: Figure 2-15 Design Options Window

Figure 2-16 License Invalid Error

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-17 License Expired Error

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The License Error window is displayed (see Figure 2-18, “License Error

Window” (p. 2-26)). Figure 2-18 License Error Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Follow the instructions in “Obtaining a License Key” (p. 2-22) to obtain a valid EPT license key. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Initial Display Options and Launch Window ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

The first window displayed upon the EPT launch (see Figure 2-15, “Design Options Window” (p. 2-24)) allows you to select which type of network application to work on. There are three ways to invoke this feature: • •

Launch the EPT Select File > New

•

Import a file into EPT

This initial launch window provides an easier way for you to globally specify node types. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 2-2, “Design Options Window” (p. 2-27). Table 2-2

Design Options Window

Parameter

Definition

Create new design

Opens the EPT interface (see Figure 3-12, “Network Map” (p. 3-15).)

Open existing design

Launches a window that allows you to select a saved EPT network design file.

Allowed Values

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2-2

Design Options Window

Parameter Application

(continued) Definition

Allows you to select which network design to launch from all available standard and user-defined default profiles. The different design types are named to denote the network type, required performance, specific node type, and GMPLS support. Select Core HiPerf CDC-F to enable interworking between CDC-F and legacy ROADM. Note: When selecting a default file, note that the GMPLS and CDC-F options are permanent and you cannot change them to other design types.

Allowed Values Customer Default File Core HiPerf C-F (Core Network High Performance AD-D-C) Core HiPerf CDC-F GMPLS (Core Network High Performance CDC-F GMPLS) Core HiPerf CDC-F (Core Network High Performance CDC-F GMPLS) Core HiPerf non-GMPLS (Core Network High Performance non-GMPLS) Core HiPerf (Core Network High Performance non-GMPLS) Metro HiPerf IROADM GMPLS (Metro Network High Performance IROADM GMPLS) Metro HiPerf IROADM (Metro Network High Performance IROADM)

Display Network parameter option on next screen

Opens the Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (see Figure 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-3)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Launching the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The EPT interface is displayed (see Figure 3-12, “Network Map” (p. 3-15).)

Note: During the design loading file: •

•

If deployed cards exist in the network design with a “Not Orderable” part number in the Price file, EPT will maintain those cards. A warning message window will be displayed to advise you of this scenario. If undeployed cards exist in the network design with a “Not Orderable” part number in the Price file, you have the option to manually replace these cards with the orderable part number. A warning message window will be displayed to advise you of this scenario, which will allow you to change the discontinued equipment as desired in the Network Element Details window (see Figure 5-25, “Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-96)).

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Closing the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Closing the EPT Application Purpose

This procedure provides instructions for closing the application on the PC. Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, make sure that the EPT application is installed on the PC, and that the icon is displayed on the desktop. You should also save all configuration changes. Procedure

Complete the steps below to close the EPT on the PC: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Do one of the following: IF…

THEN…

You want to save all configuration changes to an existing file

Select File > Save. The file will be saved with an .xml extension.

You want to save all configuration changes to a new file

Select File > Save As.

You do not want to save any configuration changes

Go to Step 2.

A window is displayed where you can name the file and place in the desired directory. Select a name or leave the default as Network1. The file will be saved with an .xml extension.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select File > Exit or click the X in the upper right corner of the main window. A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 2-19, “Warning Window (Exiting EPT)” (p. 2-31))..

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Closing the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-19 Warning Window (Exiting EPT)

If you have opened a design that was created from an earlier version of the EPT, a confirmation window is displayed, explaining that if you save a design created in an older version of the EPT, you will not be able to re-open the design in any earlier version of the EPT. Important! If you click Yes without completing Step 1, you will lose any unsaved configuration changes. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Yes to exit the EPT application. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Installation and Setup

Closing the EPT Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 2-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

3

EPT User Interface 3

Overview Purpose

This chapter provides information about the EPT user interface. Contents Menus and Tool Bar

3-2

Information Bar

3-14

Map Legend

3-15

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Menus and Tool Bar Overview

Upon launching the 1830 PSS EPT, the main window displays a menu bar and a toolbar that includes the following categories: • • •

File Action Reports

• • •

Audit (GMPLS designs only) Help Action Buttons (on toolbar)

The Menus

Network design can be accomplished via the EPT menus and associated windows or via the mouse by using the mouse buttons to execute the required options. The following sections describe the EPT menu functions. File Menu Figure 3-1 File Menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-1

File Menu Descriptions Description

Option

New

Creates a new design.

Open

Opens an existing design.

Save

Saves the current design to default file name.

Save As

Saves the current design to another designated file name or location.

Network Parameters

Launches the Network Parameters window.

Merge

Launches the Merge window to merge two non-CDC-F network designs.

Import Design

Allows you to import a design from an Excel spreadsheet as a new design or as an incremental design (see Chapter 8, “Design Automation and Verification” for details).

Export Design

Allows the current network design file to be exported into an Excel spreadsheet.

Capture Map

Allows you to save the map display as a .jpg or .png file.

Print

Prints the current map display.

Exit

Closes the EPT and exits the application.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Action Menu Figure 3-2 Action Menu

Table 3-2

Action Menu Descriptions

Option

Description

Remove Auto Design

Returns the network to its pre-designed state by reversing the Run Design operation.Remove Auto Design only removes designed objects that are created automatically by the EPT except those designated as deployed.

Remove Whole Design

Returns the network to its pre-designed state by reversing the Run Design operation. Remove Whole Design removes all designed objects, whether created by a user or by the EPT, except those designated as deployed. When using multiple projects, you can choose to remove only design objects associated with the current project or design objects for all projects.

Remove All Restoration

Deletes all restoration routes calculated by EPT (in GMPLS-enabled designs).

Create Shared Risk Group

Allows you to include and exclude links and NEs into shared risk groups (SRGs) for failure analysis.

GMPLS Failure Scope

Allows you to include and exclude links, NEs and SRGs into a failure scope for failure analysis.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-2

Action Menu Descriptions

Option

(continued) Description

GMPLS Design Conversion

Allows you to convert your design to GMRE or non-GMRE depending on the current design.

Select Price File

Uses built in prices or a price file to calculate the network price.

Recalculate Restoration and Verify Design

Used by the OMS system to setup the network. This is similar to commissioning file which creates separate design-network.xml files.

Deploy Current Project

Adds all objects in a project to Deployed status.

Create Commissioning Files

Creates an .xml file that is used by the Commissioning and Power Balancing Tool (CPB) to automatically commission the network.

Import Network Data

Modify a EPT design file so that trail and service routes in the EPT design file match those in the actual 1830 network managed by the CPB.

Reports Menu Figure 3-3 Reports Menu (Non-GMPLS Network)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-4 Reports Menu (GMPLS and Commissioning)

Table 3-3

Reports Menu Descriptions

Option

Description

Bill of Materials

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the Bill of Materials Report.

Equipment View

Displays a graphical network equipment view by site.

Installation Report

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the Installation Report.

Network Information

Generates comprehensive network information that is presented in several reports (see Chapter 11, “Reports”).

Channel Utilization

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the Channel Utilization Report.

GMPLS

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the GMPLS Failure Scenario Report.

Physical Layer

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing detailed simulation data for each traffic route.

Custom Physical Layer

Launches the Create Specs window.

Statistics

Launches the Create/Manage Statistics Report window.

Card Inventory

Launches an Excel spreadsheet that lists all of the available cards for each NE in the network.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-3

Reports Menu Descriptions

Option

(continued) Description

Design Status Details

Displays status returned by the design for the loaded network.

Power Commissioning

Launches an Excel spreadsheet that contains all of the power commissioning data for each NE in the network. Enabled for GMPLS networks only.

GMPLS Commissioning

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the GMPLS Commissioning Report. Enabled for GMPLS networks only.

Target Offset Commissioning

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the Target Offset Commissioning Report. Enabled for GMPLS networks only.

BOL WDM Routing

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the BOL WDM Routing Report. Displayed for GMPLS networks only.

BOL Physical Layer

Launches an Excel spreadsheet containing the BOL Physical Layer Report. Displayed for GMPLS networks only.

Audit Menu

The Audit menu is displayed for GMPLS designs only, and is displayed with one of the following states: • •

Pending - At least one audit scenario has not been run in GMRE Path Computation (GPC) function Running - The audit scenario is currently being run in GPC.

• • •

Valid - Every audit scenario has been run in GPC and are all valid. Invalid - At least one audit scenario is invalid. Obsolete - At least one audit scenario is obsolete.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-5 Audit Menu

Table 3-4

Audit Menu Descriptions Description

Option

Run

Simulates the Baseline EPT GMPLS Design audit scenario (BEGD AS) or one or more RTS in GPC.

Add RTS

Creates a new Robustness Test Scenario (RTS).

Export RTS

Sends the results to further modification as another AS.

Apply RTS

Commits the results of an AS to the BEGD.

Clear results

Erases the results of a Valid or Invalid AS and reverts the AS to Pending.

Help Menu Figure 3-6 Help Menu

Table 3-5

Help Menu Descriptions

Option

Design History

Description Displays which EPT Releases (and related builds) have been saved (see Figure 3-7, “Design History Window” (p. 3-9)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-5

Help Menu Descriptions

Description

Option

About 1830 PSS EPT

(continued)

Provides information about the EPT, for example, the current release number. The About 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool window (see Figure 3-8, “About 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Window” (p. 3-10)) shows the license expiration and can be used to collect the information needed to request a license renewal (see Figure 3-9, “License Request Window” (p. 3-11)).

Figure 3-7 Design History Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-8 About 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-9 License Request Window

The Toolbar

The EPT Main window toolbar gives quick access to the main functional areas. The toolbar icons are described in Table 3-6, “Toolbar Icon Descriptions” (p. 3-11): Table 3-6 Name New Design

Toolbar Icon Descriptions Icon

Description Create a new design.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-6

Toolbar Icon Descriptions

Name

Icon

(continued) Description

Open Design

Open an existing design.

Save Design

Save the current design.

Run Design

Removes all automatically created design elements and the creates a new network design.

Verify Design

Run the analysis engine on the current network design.

Enter Audit | Exit Audit

Initiates or completes the GMPLS audit mode to or from normal EPT design mode. When you click the Enter Audit button, the audit scenarios tab on the Information Bar is enabled. When you click the Exit Audit button, the audit scenarios tab on the Information Bar is disabled.

Audit mode

Launches the Design Inconsistencies window. This option is only displayed after clicking the Enter Audit button.

Design Status

Displays the status of the design when Audit mode is not in progress.

Project

Enables or disables the display of projects on the map. Click this button to select a different project or create a new project.

Map On/Off

Turn the map background display on or off (toggle).

Zoom In

Increase the level of zoom on the map (one click per level).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Menus and Tool Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-6

Toolbar Icon Descriptions

Name

Icon

(continued) Description

Zoom Out

Decrease the level of zoom on the map (one click per level).

Maximize View

Brings the current network map into a centered and maximum zoom level appropriate to the objects on the map.

Go back to previous projection

Go back to the previous display of the map (position and zoom level).

Go forward to next projection

Go forward to next display of the map (position and zoom level).

Show Demands

Enables or disables the display of demands, trails and services on the map. Click this button to select any combination of trails or services to be displayed.

Show Links

Enables or disables the display of demands, trails and services on the map. Click this button to select any combination of DWDM, CWDM, SCHAN, or routed packet links to be displayed.

Show Regenerators

Enables or disables the display of any regenerators on the map.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Information Bar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Information Bar Overview

The Information Bar (see Figure 3-10, “Information Bar (Standard)” (p. 3-14) and Figure 3-11, “Information Bar (GMPLS Designs)” (p. 3-14)) is located along the bottom of the Main window. The Information Bar provides access to detailed information for any selected object on the network design. Selecting a particular site, traffic demand, or connection will display the selected object information. The Information Bar provides the only means to perform certain EPT functions, such as manual network design; manual card reassignment; and system creation. It also provides an alternative to editing objects by map selection. Figure 3-10 Information Bar (Standard)

Figure 3-11 Information Bar (GMPLS Designs)

Clicking an item in the bottom menu opens the Information Bar into a scrollable window to view related information (see Figure 5-29, “Network Elements ” (p. 5-107)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Map Legend Overview

This section describes the icons and representations used by the EPT. Figure 3-12, “Network Map” (p. 3-15) shows an EPT network design map. You can right-click on a blank area of the map and select Center to center the display on that location. Figure 3-12 Network Map

Site Icons

Different icons designate a site based on the type of equipment placed at the site. Demand-related elements are represented as described in (see Table 3-7, “Site Icon Descriptions” (p. 3-15)): Table 3-7

Site Icon Descriptions

Equipment Type

Icon

Description

Unequipped site

blue circle with a white dot in the middle

The site contains no nodes or glass through connections.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-7

Site Icon Descriptions

(continued)

Equipment Type

Icon

Description

Trail, service or packet link

white and blue striped line

One or more trail, service or packet connections are placed at the site.

Packet demand

white and purple striped line

One or more packet demands are placed at the site.

Glass-Through site

blue circle

One or more glass through connections are placed at the site. No nodes are placed at the site.

ILA

rotated blue square

One or more PSS-32 ILA nodes are placed at the site. No PSS-32 or PSS-16 ROADM, TOADM, FOADM, or CFOADM nodes are placed at the site.

PSS-4 NE

thin blue rectangle

One or more PSS-4 TOADM, FOADM, or CFOADM nodes are placed at the site.

PSS NE

blue square

One or more ROADM, TOADM, FOADM, or CFOADM nodes using PSS-32, PSS-16 or PSS-8 shelf types are placed at the site.

Segment Elements

Segments are represented by solid black lines.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 3-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

4

Design Process Workflow 4

Design Process Basic Recommended Design Process

1. Draw all equipment sites. 2. Rename sites with customer names. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Draw the fiber segments between sites. Add the trails and services. Route trails. Route cascaded trails, as applicable.

7. Route services, as applicable. 8. Run the design. Tips: • •

The first two fiber segments drawn at each site will be used as “express paths” for the design. Subsequent fiber segments will be assigned as mesh connections. When in the Add Site mode, press Ctrl and left-click to automatically create a segment connecting the two sites. The first two fiber segments drawn at each site will be used as express paths for the design. Subsequent fiber segments will be assigned mesh connections. This segment will be considered the express path for systems creation (SFD5 and WSS through connections). However, the segment name will be automatically named based on the default site names (for example, siteN-SiteN+1) rather than using a name that has customer meaning.

Design Process Overview and Reference

The EPT supports two methodologies to design 1830 networks: automatic and manual. The automatic design feature is the most efficient way to design most networks, but in certain configurations a manual design is required (see Figure 4-1, “Network Design Flowchart” (p. 4-2)). ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 4-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Process Workflow

Design Process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-1 Network Design Flowchart

Note: At the beginning of the network design process are several Network Parameters preferences to consider before running the design, although all have defaults. Refer to Chapter 5, “Site and Topology Definition and Configuration”. The following sections describe each step before their detailed procedures. Define Sites

A site contains one or more NEs. The EPT allows you to constrain what types of equipment may be placed at a site. These constraints include: • • • •

the filter architecture (FOADM, ROADM, TOADM) the number of fiber connections (1-8) power limitations (20A, 30A, 50A, 60A or 70A) power feed limit

• •

shelf power margin whether the site environment is subject to the extended temperature range (-40degC/+85degC ), clusters DGE Type preferences ROADM preferences

• • •

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 4-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Process Workflow

Design Process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• •

Shelf type preferences Equipment Definition (controller and power filter protection options, how to place cards into shelves, shelves into racks, and so on)

Define Topology

This step defines the fiber segment interconnection between sites, and the fiber type and characteristics (or use the defaults). The EPT allows the user to select fiber types (SSMF, LEAF, TW-RS, TWC, TW+, DSF and LS) and specify characteristics of each fiber segment (length, loss, margin, dispersion, and so on). If a segment carries 1588 timing distributed from the PTPCTL card, it is needed to create PTPCTL and PTPIO . Timing Distribution

If a segment carries IEEE 1588v2 timing distribution, the Timing Distribution cards PTPIO, PTPCTL and/or 11DPE12A cards should be added at the Sites at either end of the span manually. Note: At this phase (and until the Run Design command is used), no PTPCTL, no PTPIO physical packs will be created. A different procedure will need to be followed if synchronization is distributed with 11DPE12A acting as controller. Define Traffic Matrix

You can specify a set of trails and services between source and destination sites. Each trail and service defines the following: •

transponder type (such as 11STAR1, 11STAR1A, 11STMM10, 4DPA4, and 43STX4)

• • •

traffic client signal type (such as STM16, 10GbE, and 4G FiberChannel) client interface (such as 10GBASE-LR, S.64-2b, 1000Base-LX) protection options (such as diverse path, Y-Cable, OPS, and ENSCP 1+1)

Design Process

For EPT-enabled automatic design, click Run Design and the optimizer configures the network based on the site, topology and traffic matrix. Automatic design is available for most 1830 network configurations. Define NE Configuration

When performing a manual design, you must create an NE at a site and equip the NE with the appropriate amplifiers and optical filters. This is a two-stage process involving the Create Network Element and Create Node context menu options as follows.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 4-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Process Workflow

Design Process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Network Element allows you to specify:

•

NE type (1830 PSS or PSS-4)

• • •

first shelf type of the NE shelf width (ANSI 23 inch, EIA 19 Inch, and ETSI) system ID (used by the NE software and management systems)

•

If clustering is enabled (at least one site has Clustered selected) - two additional selections: (Optical Node, Clustered OT Connection)

Create Node supports selection of the following:

•

Optical Node type (ROADM, TOADM, DFOADM, CFOADM, or ECFOADM)

• •

maximum degrees supported on the node ROADM options [pressing the Schematic button displays parameters that support specification of the full set of optical amplifiers (OAs)]

• •

optical filters Dispersion Compensation Modules (DCMs) for up to eight fiber interfaces

Define Link Configuration

The next step in the manual design process is to link multiple optical nodes associated with different NEs or sites into a point to point link. The endpoints of a link are defined to be add/drop sites while intermediate optical nodes in the Link must be either ILA or glass-through sites. Note: An optical channel trail may traverse several links prior to needing regeneration. Four different link types may be defined (100GHz spaced channel link-channel, 50GHz spaced link-channel, CWDM 8-channel [CWDM-1F and CWDM-2F], and Single-channel). Amplifiers and dispersion compensation modules may be specified within the Link Configuration screens (an alternative to specifying them from the Create/Edit Node windows). Amplifier power levels can only be specified from the Manual Details window within the Edit Link window. 1621SLE Links (GMPLS) must be manually designed. Route Traffic

For each trail/service, you can select a path (set of links) for the optical channel trail. Your options include selecting the channel number (or have the EPT automatically assign a channel) and selecting regeneration points along the path.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 4-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Process Workflow

Design Process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Evaluate Design

As part of the automatic design process, the Run Design button synthesizes an 1830 network and verifies its design operation. When performing a manual design, click Verify Design to evaluate the design. Errors

After the design evaluation has completed, the EPT will determine if the design is valid or invalid. For invalid designs, check the Design Status report (see Chapter 11, “Reports”) and the Errors tab on the Information Bar (see “Errors” (p. 6-43)). Configure FOC

When measured fiber-optic characterization (FOC) (Loss, Dispersion, and Polarization Dependent Loss [PMD]) is available, the user updates each segment with the measured characteristics. Note: Be sure to verify the margin requirements for both fiber and connectors since many customers assign different margins for estimated versus measured fiber. Reevaluate Design

To determine if the same equipage and power levels remain valid, click Verify Design. If the design elements are not valid, click Run Design or a manual design process to make the necessary changes. Once there are no errors, then generate an updated Bill of Materials and report package. Also there may be system changes if links were deleted during the reevaluation/redesign process. Generate Commissioning File

A Commissioning File (download file) is necessary to automatically commission an 1830 network using one of the support Network Management systems (1340 INC or 1350 OMS). The losses/power levels associated with the EPT design file must be consistent with what the 1830 NE’s see in the field; otherwise the automated commissioning process will not succeed. The purpose of Commissioning is to: 1. Set the power, gain, loss, tilt, other values and ranges in the network with the designed values. 2. Provision the designed card types and locations. 3. Provision the topological connections between packs for the NE configuration designed. 4. Provision the network configuration, link topology between NEs. 5. If GMPLS is enabled, set the GMPLS data in the network used for quick restoration route calculations. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 4-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Process Workflow

Design Process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

After the design is error-free, divide the network into a set of rings or linear systems so the commissioning information may be downloaded to the NMS. This process involves selecting a set of links (from the Links tab on the Information Bar) and selecting Create System from the Context menu. See “Creating a Commissioning File” (p. 9-6) for more

details. For relaxed rules on partitioning the network into commissioning systems, select File > Network Parameters window, then set the Commissioning Mode field to Partial Commissioning. To set strict commissioning system rules resulting in the fewest commissioning systems, leave the setting of Commissioning Mode field at its default value. Import Network Data

The Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool (part of the 1350 OMS) supports generation of an Export File which can be imported into EPT by selecting Action > Import Network Data. Some configurations are not supported by the Import Network Data feature (see “Import Network Data” (p. 12-1)). For restrictions on the Import Network Data feature, refer to the 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Customer Release Notes for the respective EPT release. Generate BOM and other Reports

The EPT produces a Bill of Materials file in Excel after the network design has been verified. You may attach pricing to each line item in the BOM or manage the pricing within Excel. Additional reports that describe the network design including fiber data, fiber utilization, circuit pack slot assignment, fibering instructions, and traffic matrix are available as well. See Chapter 11, “Reports” for more details.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 4-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

5

S5ite and Topology Definition and Configuration

Overview Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to use the EPT to design a network. Network design can be accomplished using either the EPT menus and associated windows, or by using the mouse buttons to execute the required options. The procedures to create objects described in this chapter are performed using point and click operations in the network map. Contents Network Parameters

5-2

Sites

5-49

Segments

5-78

Network Elements

5-91

Nodes

5-110

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Parameters Overview

The EPT Design Network Parameters specify global preferences. For parameters that are also supported as a Site Preferences, the Network Parameter value is used as the default when a new site is created. User Preference Profiles and Saved Defaults

The settings in the Network Parameter window tabs can be defaulted to settings on a per-user basis. To open the Network Parameters window, select File > Network Parameters, select the desired values, and click Save As Defaults. Specific designs can override the default values so that when saved, the Global Network Parameters associated with that design is saved. The Save As Defaults operation creates an eptDefaults.xml file that is stored in the EPT installation directory. These customized settings/values are then applied to each new EPT design. To restore the Network Parameters to the factory default, remove this file from the directory. Note: Cost-optimized amplifiers in the Figure 5-7, “Network Parameters Window (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)” (p. 5-33) are not saved with this method. The following sections detail the various tabs on the Network Parameters window. View or Edit Network Parameters (Network Parameters and Defaults)

Network parameters provide default values for many settings used by the network design tool. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

When initially launching the EPT tool, the Design Options window is displayed (see Figure 2-15, “Design Options Window” (p. 2-24)). You can open the Network Parameters window by doing one of the following: •

(1) To create a new network design, select Create new design.

•

(2) To display a previously configured network, select Open existing design. Result: If you selected option (2) above, then your network design will load in the

EPT interface. The Erules fields on the Network Parameters window are set when you select a default file when creating a new design. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the checkbox next to the Display Network parameter option on next screen field and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Network Parameters window (see Figure 5-1, “Network Parameters

Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-3), Figure 5-2, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab, Scrolled)” (p. 5-4),Figure 5-3, “Network Parameters Window (GMPLS Designs)” (p. 5-4) and Figure 5-4, “Network Parameters Window (GMPLS Designs, Scrolled)” (p. 5-5)) is displayed. Note: You can open the Network Parameters window any time during network design and configuration by selecting File > Network Parameters Figure 5-1 Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-2 Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab, Scrolled)

Figure 5-3 Network Parameters Window (GMPLS Designs)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-4 Network Parameters Window (GMPLS Designs, Scrolled)

If you want to display the Network Parameters window anytime after completing this step, do one of the following: • •

Right-click anywhere on the EPT Main window and select Network Parameters from the context menu. Select File > Network Parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the values from the fields on this tab as described in Table 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-5). Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Network Parameters Name

User-defined name to identify this EPT design.

Up to 20 characters, restricted to characters permitted in file names.

Description

Optional field to list a description of the EPT design.

Up to 100 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter Distance Units OTDR Placement

Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM Type) Usage

Definition

Allowed Values

Which units should be used in the design.

km

This field must be enabled before you can make a selection for the OTDR with Line Amplifier field on the Segment Details window (see Figure 5-19, “Segment Details Window” (p. 5-80).

Yes

Indicates whether a WTCOM pack is used in this network design.

WTOCM

Changing this value affects segments only in the current project. Changing the value is not permitted unless all the segments in the current project are set to the same value. Changing this value will cause all the DWDM Link and Segment parameters by the same name to change. This value will also be the default for newly created segment values.

miles No

WTOCMA WTOCM-F No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter Amplified OT Usage

Definition Specifies the types of amplified OTs can be used in the network. Standard ASE OTs: 130SNX10, 130SCUPB, 130SCUPB-compatible, 260SCX2 Low ASE OTs: 1UD200, 130SCUPC, 130SCUPC-compatible, 130SCUPH, 130SNQ10, 130SNX10(LN), 260SCX2-Transponder(LN), 260SCX2-Muxponder(LN), 4UC400-compatible No ASE OT: 112SCX10, 112SCA1, 112SNX10, 112SNA1, 130SCA1, 130SCX10, 2UC400-compatible, D5X500 and legacy OTs supported since R3.6.51

Allowed Values Prohibit Standard ASE OTs •

For non-GMPLS designs, Standard ASE OTs are not allowed in colorless ports in the network, but they are allowed in the SFD colored ports.

•

For GMPLS designs, Standard ASE OTs not allowed in the network Low ASE OTs are allowed in the network.

Prohibit Low and Standard ASE OTs •

For non-GMPLS designs, Standard ASE OTs and Low ASE OTs are prohibited in colorless ports in the network, but they are allowed in the SFD colored ports.

•

For GMPLS designs, Standard ASE OTs and Low ASE OTs are prohibited in the network.

Allow Mixing - Standard and Low ASE OTs are available and allowed to mix with other OTs. Commissioning Mode

Specifies type of commissioning mode to be set for generating commissioning file. See “1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT” (p. 9-1)for details.

Default Commissioning Mode Partial Commissioning (Incremental Deployment)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter TOADM/OADM Placement

Definition

Allowed Values

The tool will allow ROADMs, DFOADMs, CFOADMs, ILAs and AnyDir A/D block TOADMs. TOADM placement cannot be set to this value if TOADM nodes exist in the network.

Allow: Strict 40G/100G adjacent channel restrictions Regular TOADMs can be used in the design and the channel spacing for 40 Gbps signals must be 100 GHz for colorless add. 50 GHz spacing is only allowed if the 40 Gbps, 100 Gbps, or 200 Gbps signals are added from 50GHz WSSs or ITLBs.

For regular TOADMs, EPT does not allow 40Gbps, 100Gbps and 200Gbps signals to be added at 50GHz spacing thru colorless ports. For config D’, EPT allows 40Gbps and most of the 100Gbps OTs (only 112SNX10/112SNA1 are not allowed) to be added colorlessly at 50GHz spacing.

Prohibit: Relaxed 40G/100G adjacent channel restrictions No regular TOADMs are allowed; only the TOADMs in config D’ and D” are allowed. TOADM automatic and manual designs will not be allowed (except as a Max degree = 0, Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks = 1 type of TOADM).

Channel Assignment Options Coherent Trail Channel Assignment Rules for Dispersion Managed Networks Unrestricted assignment. Mix coherent demands and other demands.

The EPT tool will permit routes of coherent OT demands and non-coherent OT Demands throughout the entire wavelength range are supported.

Disabled (Deselected) Enabled (Selected)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter Banded assignment. Separate coherent demands from other demands. Coherent channel range is 9170 to 9380

Definition When enabled, coherent OT trails are restricted to the channel range specified. Non-coherent ~10G/2.5G Line rate OT demands are restricted to the rest of the range. Use this setting to configure custom guardband per OMS.

Allowed Values Disabled (Deselected) Enabled (Selected)

A guardband between the 10G and coherent channels may vary per DWDM link, and is based on the link’s fiber type and the channel chosen for the coherent band start. Non-coherent 40G demands are permitted throughout the channel range. Auto-design restrictions (no auto-placed DCMs)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter Do not auto-design of 50 GHz flex-grid channels below:

Definition

Allowed Values

Specifies whether to separate channels by frequency level.

Other

Select 9170 to configure custom guardband per OMS unless you will use the SP-QPSK or PM-8QAM modes on trails.

9185

For SP-QPSK or PM-8QAM mode configuration, consider reserving a portion of the bandwidth for these. This would be needed to use the feature where these 62.5G side signals are placed preferring 250GHz spacing so that software upgrades in future releases is easier.

9280

9170 9210 9230 9255 9305 9325 9350 9375 9400 9420 9445 9470 9495 9515 9540 9565 9590

DWDM-FLEX Link 62.5 GHz signals prefer 250 GHz spacing for upgradability

Spectrum banding is used to separate DWDM-FLEX channels used for 50 GHz and 62.5 GHz signals. The 50 GHz wide/spaced channels are placed into the upper frequencies, and 62.5 GHz wide channels into lower frequencies.

(checkbox)

Not applicable when GMPLS flex links are enabled. Network Default Values

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter

Definition

Extended Temperature Range Sites

Specifies whether to allow the EPT to design the site with only the extended temperature range (ETR), -40degC/+85degC, cards, pluggables, shelves, and so on.

Yes

Segment Capacity

Specifies the default Capacity value used by the Edit Segment window. For

Unrestricted-2F

Unrestricted-2F

(Unrestricted, two-fiber) the segment is allowed to be designed for DWDM, CWDM, and so on, with 50GHz channel spacing or other, as needed by the traffic demand matrix, and Node type preferences specified. FLEX Channel Spacing (DWDM-FLEX) denotes a

Allowed Values No

50 GHz Channel Spacing (DWDM-50GHz) FLEX Channel Spacing (DWDM-FLEX) 44 Channels (100GHz spaced channel link) 8 Channels two-fiber (CWDM-2F) 8 Channels single-fiber (CWDM-1F) Single Channel (SCHAN)

“Flex-ready design.” Subsequent changes to the this field in the Network Parameters window do not have any effect on existing segments. (See the note below this table.) OT

Optimizes network performance for this OT and FEC type.

List of all valid OTs

Note: Demands using a lower performing OT/FEC may not design successfully in a network designed for a high performance OT/FEC.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter Erules

Definition Specifies whether GMPLS is enabled.

Allowed Values GMPLS Disabled GMPLS Enabled

To convert a non-GMPLS network design to GMPLS or a GMPLS network design to non-GMPLS, see “GMPLS Design Conversion” (p. 10-24). Nominal Route Disjointedness

For GMPLS-enabled networks: Used for disjoint path computations; only applies to nominal path routes.

Links only Links + Nodes

When defining the protection type for a service, its level of disjointedness is also defined: •

Links only – the protection or restoration path must be link-disjoint from its working path, in other words the protection or restoration path cannot traverse any links (segments) that form part of the working path.

•

Links + Nodes – the

protection or restoration path cannot traverse any links (segments) and intermediate nodes that form part of the working path.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-1

Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab) (continued)

Parameter Reuse Nominal Wavelength

Definition For GMPLS-enabled networks: When enabled, the restoration paths will re-use the nominal wavelength (if available on the restoration path). When disabled, the restoration route will not use the nominal path’s wavelength.

Retain routing when project status is changed to Future

Allowed Values Disabled (Deselected) Enabled (Selected)

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

_ max recursion in manual link creation

EPT does not check the site type; this parameter accounts for the path length independently from the site type.

6 (default) Range: 1 to 10

Pre-Staging ACI Pre-Staging ACI

Allows EPT to add in the BOM the total amount of ACI codes per site (1:1 the PSS shelves amount in the site). One ACI code (standard) per Stage1 and a couple of ACI codes (standard + extra test) per Stage2.

No Stage 1 Stage 2

If there are deployed projects, on sites base, and then possible NEs with “deployed and current shelves”, the actual ACI code assignment for “current shelf” is the Level 1 only (standard): EPT will automatically scale down from Stage2 to Stage1 for those current shelves.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Notes:

1.

Capacity field: The Capacity field value on the Network Parameters window will be the default value of the Capacity field on the Segment Parameters window when a segment is created. Thereafter, the segment's Capacity field value is unaffected by changes in the Network Parameters Capacity field value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

To save this configuration for future selection in the Application field of the Design Options window (see Figure 2-15, “Design Options Window” (p. 2-24), click Save as Customer defaults). Result: The Save window is displayed. The customer_profiles_

folder is displayed by default. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Navigate to the desired folder, enter a name for your default customer file. Note: The name cannot contain the following characters /\:*?"|' ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click Save. If the new application name is already in use, saving it will overwrite an existing application unless you opt out in the Warning window that displays (see Figure 5-5, “Warning Window: Overwrite Customer Default Confirmation” (p. 5-14). Result: Figure 5-5 Warning Window: Overwrite Customer Default Confirmation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Either click OK, or select another tab on this window to configure additional network parameters as desired. (These configuration options are described in the following sections). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit or View Auto-Design and Verification Settings (Network Parameters) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Network Parameters window (see Figure 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-3)), click the Auto-Design and Verification tab. Result: The Network Parameters window is displayed with the Auto-Design and

Verification tab (see Figure 5-6, “Network Parameters Window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)” (p. 5-15)) . Figure 5-6 Network Parameters Window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this tab as described in Table 5-2, “Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)” (p. 5-15). Table 5-2 Parameter

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab) Definition

Allowed Values

Network Definition

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

OA Selection Algorithm

Selects the algorithm used to design the amplifier types.

High Performance (not applicable for PSS-4 shelf types or DFOADM node types)

High Performance

Cost Optimized (Growth)

Cost Optimized

selects amplifiers and power more suited to LH networks, performance based. Cost Optimized will

design amplifier types with a preference for lowest relative cost. Target reach is calculated based on what could be the longest length of existing demands entered into the tool.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

OA Selection Algorithm (cont'd)

Cost Optimized (Growth) will design

(continued)

Allowed Values

amplifier types with a preference for lowest relative cost. Target reach is user specified in this option to allow for future “growth” (see Target Reach). WR20-TFx ROADMs are permitted in networks with the OA selection algorithm set to Cost Optimized/(Growth), but only manual selection of bidirectional amplifiers in the WR20-TFx ROADM is supported (on the DWDM Link Details window or the Schematic View window). Auto-design will fail to find amplifiers for the WR20-TFx ROADM if the OA selection algorithm is set to Cost Optimized/(Growth). Note: When modifying this value, OAs present in the network are retained, and new OAs are chosen using the selected OA selection Algorithm. The design state will not change. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Target Reach

The distance in km that the optimizer will use as its target when selecting OAs.

1 to 2000

(continued)

Only applicable when Cost Optimized (Growth) is selected

in the OA Selection Algorithm field. LD Output Attenuation

When this field is set to Yes, output attenuators are automatically selected during “Run Design“ process.

Yes No

Only applicable when High Performance is selected in the OA Selection Algorithm field.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Dispersion Compensation

Auto-place (flexible Add/Drop) places

Auto-place (flexible Add/Drop)

DCMs per the span length to compensate dispersion. This value is not allowed when there are WR20-TFMs in the network.

Prohibit (DCM free)

Prohibit (DCM free)

restricts manual placement of DCMs. Use this setting to configure custom guardband per OMS. DP-8QAM signal (on D5X500 OT) is supported only in networks when this field is not set to Auto-place (flexible Add/Drop).

Use Low Loss/Latency DCMs (SSMF/LEAF)

Specifies where to use the low loss (Fiber-Bragg Grating, FBG based) DCMs rather than the Fiber DCMs for SSMF (G.625) or LEAF fiber type lines.

On modular OAs only On all OAs

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Allow ILAs with WTOCMx Cards

Auto-design, if it places an ILA at the Site, will include a WTOCM, WTOCM-F, or WTOCMA card, depending on the WTOCM type preference set on the segments, in the ILA Network Element.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Calculate BOL OSNR/BER for 8 50 GHz channels (9370-9405)

Indicates whether calculations and reporting of OSNR and Bit Error Rate expected at beginning of life are enabled for this network design.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

This field must be enabled to view the BOL WDM Routing and BOL Physical Layer Reports.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys

Unkeyed optical channels allow you to provision connections on the NE without Wavelength Tracker keys.

On

(continued)

Off

When this value is set to On (keyed), all optical channels are assumed to be keyed. When this value is set to Off (unkeyed), the whole network is assumed to use only unkeyed optical channels (no use of the Wavelength Tracker keys). See additional restrictions for the Off setting in the note below this table. High Capacity Filter

The network will use either SFD40/SFD40Bs as the high capacity choice or SFD44/SFD44Bs— you cannot interchange the SFDs even for manual filter placement.

SFD44/SFD44B SFD40/SFD40B

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

1830 PSS Low Capacity Filter (100 GHz lines)

This is the type of filter auto-placed on a DFOADM line. The Equip all PSS-32 Lines with High Capacity Filters field is disabled (unchecked) on the Site Details window. This setting does not restrict the manual placement of any type of filter.

SFD5

(continued)

SFD8

The channel growth plan used will match the filter type. PSS-4 Low Capacity Filter (100 GHz lines)

This is the type of filter auto-placed on a DFOADM line. The Equip all PSS-32 Lines with High Capacity Filters field is disabled (unchecked) on the Site Details window. This setting does not restrict the manual placement of any type of filter.

E4_SFD4 E4_SFD8

The channel growth plan used will match the filter type.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Preferred ROADM Wavelength Router

Indicates the type of WR pack to place in an auto-designed ROADM. If you select a Maximum Degree value of 1 or 2, then you must use WR2-88.

IROADM

(continued)

WR2-88 WR20-TF (not valid in GMPLS designs) WR20-TFM WR8-88A WR8-88AF

IROADM: The EPT

will automatically design the network with IROADMV and IROADMF cards populated. WR20-TFM: Select

this option to enable interworking between CDC-F and legacy ROADM.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

DGE Type

Indicates the default value for newly created sites for the kind of pack used in an auto-designed Dynamic Gain Equalization (DGE) node.

ROADM WR2-88

ROADM WR20-TFM single-blade is the

TOADM

(continued)

ROADM WR20-TF ROADM WR20-TFM single-blade (only when Dispersion Compensation is set to Prohibit (DCM-free) ) ROADM WR8-88A ROADM WR8-88AF

default value when the ROADM is created autonomously at this site for DGE. Note: This ROADM will not support local add/drop blocks. This ROADM will not support anything except two degrees connected with a thru connection. The DGE function will use Connection block lines only. DWDM Parameters Equip unused Segments with DWDM Links

Equips DWDM links (with equipment at each end) over segments even if there is no trail or service requiring a link over that segment.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

DWDM OSNR Margin

Specifies the additional OSNR margin above the EPT calculation for demand verification.

0 to 3 dB

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

DWDM Loss Margin

Additional loss added to the fiber loss when calculating attenuation between sites: LossSEGMENT= LossFIBER + LossCONNECTOR + LossMARGIN

0 to 5 dB

(continued)

If more than one segment exists in a span, the largest margin from the segments within the span is used for the span–only one margin is used for the span. Fiber Attributes For routing on the Link

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Max DWDM-100 GHz Channels

Sets the maximum channel count to be used by the Edit Segment window and specifies the maximum number of channels or wavelengths that can be used for WDM demand routing over this link. This is considered along with any other restrictions, such as fiber type restrictions, in the calculation of the maximum usable channels for routing on this link.

8 to 44

(continued)

This parameter applies to DWDM-100GHz links.

Lower channel counts may enable longer reach since Power Per Channel (PPC) values are higher for lower channel count links. See the note below this table.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Max DWDM-50 GHz Channels

Sets the maximum channel count to be used by the Edit Segment window. This parameter applies to DWDM-50GHz links.

88 (default)

(continued)

8 to 88

Lower channel counts may enable longer reach since Power Per Channel (PPC) values are higher for lower channel count links. The value of this field cannot be increased without deleting links. Decreasing this value has no effect on power levels of already designed links. See note below this table. Max DWDM-Flex Channels

Sets the maximum channel count to be used by the Edit Segment window.

8 to 88

Connector Loss

Additional loss from connectors added to the Fiber loss when calculating attenuation between sites: LossSEGMENT = LossFIBER + LossCONNECTOR + LossMARGIN

0 to 5 dB

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Glass-Thru Loss

Additional loss associated with a Glass-through site (a fiber splice site). Link Loss is Calculated as follows: LossLINK = LossSEGMENT + LossGT + LossSEGMENT

0 to 3 dB

Loss Coefficient

Fiber only loss per Distance Unit LossFIBER = LossCOEFFICENT * Distance

.18 to 1.0 dB/km

PMD Coefficient

A global attribute for the PMD coefficient of the fiber.

0 to 1.5 ps/(square root km)

Fiber Type

Specifies the default fiber type for each segment created. Changing the value does not affect existing segments.

SSMF

Note: For Single Channel (SCHAN) segments, use only SSMF.

LS

Fiber Cost

Used for optimization of additional fiber degrees or additional channels for automatic network synthesis.

0 to 100,000 $/km

Length Uncertainty

The accuracy to which distances are specified. This field calculates the allowed range of dispersion when verifying demands.

0 to 100%

(continued)

ELEAF TW-RS TWC TW+ DSF 1621SLE

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

(continued)

Allowed Values

For per-channel power control Max DWDM-100GHz Channels

Specifies the channel count when allocating per-channel optical power. Note that raising this value lowers the perchannel power.

8 to 44

Note: Adjust this value with careful consideration of the impact on future growth of the network and interaction with the maximum channel count for routing. Max DWDM-50GHz Channels

(See above.)

Max DWDM-Flex Channels

8 to 96 8 to 120

Engineering Rules Adjustment Bypass Wavetracker Rules (Extended Reach)

Select this field if you want to create designs that can be deployed without a WaveTracker limit. See note below table.

Enabled (Selected checkbox), Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Maximum Channels on Links without WTOCMx

Indicates the number of channels supported on links without a WTOCM card.

10 to 44

Enable this field by selecting the Bypass WaveTracker Rules field.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Maximum Channels on Links with WTOCMx

Indicates the number of channels supported on links with a WTOCM card.

8 to 120

Allow High Power Divergence at FOADMs

Enabling this field increases allowable power divergence at FOADM nodes.

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Ingress SRS TILT Postfraction

Specifies the fraction of the TILT that the NE will post-compensate for, with respect to the linear tilt (SpanTilt + SRSTilt) in the span preceding the NE.

0.00 to 1.00

Egress SRS TILT Prefraction

Specifies the fraction of the TILT that the NE will pre-compensate for, with respect to the linear tilt (SpanTilt + SRSTilt) in the span preceding the NE.

0.00 to 1.00

Support OTs with line side XFPs on AnyColor AnyDirection Add/Drop

Indicates whether OTs with line side XFPs are allowed to be used in colorless ports in an AnyColor (Config D)AnyDirection Add/Drop block.

Yes

(continued)

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

No

Advanced Channel Options TWC Range Upperbound

Specifies the number of channels supported on TWC fiber.

193.87500 (default) The channel wavelength supported starts at 191.70 THz, and each wavelength in 50 GHz increments is supported up until the upperbound limit is reached, or 193.875 THz.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-2

Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

TW+ Range Upperbound

Specifies the number of channels supported on TW+ fiber.

195.07500 (default)

LS Range Lowerbound

Specifies the number of channels supported on LS fiber.

193.87500 (default)

Specifies the number of channels supported on DSF fiber.

193.87500 (default)

DSF Range Lowerbound

Note: Designs with DSF must be verified by Nokia using other simulation tools, as DSF engineering rules are not enforced in this version of EPT.

(continued)

The channel wavelength supported starts at 191.70 THz, and each wavelength in 50 GHz increments is supported up until the upperbound limit is reached, or 195.05 THz. The channel wavelength supported starts at 196.05 THz, and each wavelength in 50 GHz increments is supported down until the lowerbound limit is reached, or 193.90 THz. The channel wavelength supported starts at 196.05 THz, and each wavelength in 50 GHz increments is supported down until the lowerbound limit is reached, or 193.90 THz.

Notes:

1.

Maximum DWDM Channels: The range of allowed values are restricted based on the Maximum DWDM channels. Since the maximum PPC grows as the number of allowed channels decreases. Reach improvements can be realized by reducing the channel count. The link capacity is based on the value of these fields when you run the design.

2.

Dispersion Compensation Modules: If you change this value, routed WDM demands using 43SCA1-compatible, or 43SCX4-AFEC, 112SCA1 and 112SCX10 OTs change to the “Complete, unverified” design state, and a warning is displayed.

3.

Bypass Wavetracker Rules: The field models transmission using internal WaveTracker Detectors (WTD) until the number channels on any link reaches the selected channel count threshold. A warning message is issued if the channel count exceeds the threshold. It is recommended to deploy the WTOCM circuit pack to grow the channel count past this threshold. If deselected, transmission is modeled using the maximum channel count per link.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4.

DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys: When this field is set to Off, TOADMs, ROADMs, WTOCM, and OPS Demand protection is not supported. No 43SCUP-compatible, 130SCUP-compatible, 11QCUPC-compatible demand routes are supported. When this field is set to On, 4DPA2 OT demands are not permitted to route over DWDM Links, OCST Line Drivers are not supported, the PFDCA is not supported.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Either click OK, or select another tab on this window to configure other network parameters. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Edit or View Amplifier Auto-Placement

The Amplifier Auto-Placement tab allows you to override the standard permitted amplifiers, to control the choices that are considered during automatic amplifier placement during a run design. Specific amplifiers can be enabled/disabled to allow or prevent their use during run design. Restricting amplifier types used during automatic design enables you to more easily manage the cost of spare parts. These selections do not affect the ability to manually place amplifiers. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Network Parameters window (see Figure 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-3)), click the Amplifier Auto-Placement tab.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Network Parameters window is displayed with the Amplifier

Auto-Placement tab (see Figure 5-7, “Network Parameters Window (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)” (p. 5-33)) . Figure 5-7 Network Parameters Window (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this tab as described in Table 5-3, “Network Parameters (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)” (p. 5-33). Table 5-3

Network Parameters (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Cost Optimized Amplifier Choices

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-33 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-3

Network Parameters (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Cost Optimized Amplifier Choices

Allows you to change the default values for the displayed amplifiers. •

Standard: Leaves the

values as is. •

Override: Allows you to

enable or disable the default values on this tab to reduce the variety of amplifiers selected or, limit to a certified list of amplifiers, and to improve the speed of Cost Optimized network synthesis.

(continued)

Allowed Values Standard (default) Override Note: Overly constraining OA choices can result in designs for which a solution cannot be found if you force the EPT to use an amplifier in an application for which the amplifier was not designed.

High Performance Amplifier Choices High Performance Amplifier Choices

The EPT can automatically design the network with the AM2625A and AM2032A amplifiers. EPT selects these amplifiers if they are the best choice for auto-design. Auto-placement is not guaranteed, but selecting

Unidirectional and Bidirectional amplifiers Unidirectional amplifiers only Bidirectional amplifiers only

Unidirectional amplifiers only will cause the EPT to

consider these OAs during the run design process.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-34 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-3

Network Parameters (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

Parameter Hybrid Amplifier Placement with modular amplifiers

Definition Indicates when EPT should place amplifiers as follows: •

When Comparable: The

EPT will auto-design the A2P2125 amplifier instead of the combination of (RA2P + AM2125A(B)) or (RA2P + AM2318A), unless the two cards leads to more optimal performance. •

(continued)

Allowed Values When Comparable Forced Never (default)

Forced: The EPT will

always auto-design the A2P2125 amplifier instead of (RA2P + AM2125A(B)) or (RA2P + AM2318A). •

Never: The EPT will

never auto-place the A2P2125 in the design (although it is permitted to be manually placed). This parameter is only available when Modular and non-modular amplifiers or Modular amplifiers only is selected in the High Performance Amplifier Choices panel. Place AM2125A instead of AM2125B OAs in DCM-free designs

By default, in a DCM-free design where DCMs are prohibited, AM2125Bs are placed instead of AM2125As because the AM2125Bs do not have the DCM port. Selecting this field will allow the EPT place the AM2125A instead of the AM2125B during automatic OA placement.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-35 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-3

Network Parameters (Amplifier Auto-Placement Tab)

Parameter

Definition

(continued)

Allowed Values

Allow Raman Pre-amplification for Span Loss greater than

Specifies the span loss required for the network before Raman equipment is permitted to be designed on a span.

30 dB (default)

Show warning messages if OA gain exceeds the maximum flat gain

Allows EPT to optionally display warning messages when the amplifiers are operating in the extended gain range. (The warning messages are used for troubleshooting and design optimization only. There is no impact to system commissioning.)

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

15 to 40 dB

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Unidirectional amplifiers Specifies auto-design restrictions.

Switched gain amplifiers only where supported Non-switched gain amplifiers only Switched gain and non-switched gain amplifiers

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Either click OK, or select another tab on this window to configure other network parameters. Note: The complete list of amplifiers, pre-amplifiers, and boosters is accessible in the Link Attributes Selection window (see Figure 6-5, “Link Attributes Selection Window” (p. 6-12)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Edit or View Equipment Options

The Equipment Options tab simplifies the process of customizing NE equipment at each site. These values configured on this tab as used as the default values for the Site parameters when new sites are created. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-36 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Network Parameters window (see Figure 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-3)), click the Equipment Options tab. Result: The Network Parameters window is displayed with the Equipment Options

tab (see Figure 5-8, “Network Parameters Window (Equipment Options Tab)” (p. 5-37)) . Figure 5-8 Network Parameters Window (Equipment Options Tab)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this tab as described in Table 5-4, “Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)” (p. 5-37). Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Hardware Options Shelf Width

The size of the racks used in this network.

ANSI 23 Inch EIA 19 Inch ETSI

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-37 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter Fiber Storage Tray

Definition Selecting No means the site has an alternative or existing excess fiber storage solution which is used, and does not need this extra part included in this design.

(continued) Allowed Values

Yes No

Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II, and PSS-8. Attenuation Drawers

Selecting No means the site has an alternative or existing solution for storing attenuators which is used and does not need this extra part included in this design.

Yes No

Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II, and PSS-8. Flex Shelves in non-ETSI Racks

You can add FlexShelf (6 RU) in a non-ETSI rack by selecting Yes. You may also place a WR20-TFM into a 6RU FlexShelf.

Yes No

Note: The default profiles Core HiPerf CDC-F and Core HiPerf CDC-F GMPLS have this option set to No. For a list of advantages to using flex shelves, see the Note below this table. Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II, and PSS-8. Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf

If the ETSI racks in use have doors, individual shelf covers are not needed.

Yes No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-38 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Extended Shelf Cover Default (PSS-32/16/4)

Extended shelf covers allow electrical SFPs on OT client ports to fit under them, and they allow the space to fit attenuators on all pack faceplates underneath these covers.

(continued) Allowed Values

No Yes

Select Yes when the preferred WR or DGE is the WR20-TFM. Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, and PSS-4. Racks

Yes No

Allow PSS-8 User Panel

Yes No

PSS-32 Fan Capacity

11STAR1, 11STAR1A Regen

260SCX2 Operating Mode

High capacity Fan when a coherent transponder is required at a site.

Low (FAN)

Indicates the type of 11STAR1 pack used when creating an regen.

11STAR1A

Indicates how the 260SCX2 pack is used.

Single Mode

•

11STAR1

Dual Mode

Single Mode: – Transponder: 100G

–

•

High (FAN32H)

Mode (with only one client port available) Muxponder: 200G Mode (with both client ports available).

Dual Mode - 100 and 200G modes (can use the pack in either mode)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-39 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter 1UD200 Operating Mode

Definition Indicates how the 1UD200 pack is used. •

Allowed Values Single Mode Dual Mode

Single Mode: – Transponder: 100G

–

•

(continued)

QPSK Mode (with only one client port available). This includes a Right to Use (RTU) license for 100G mode only and uses part number 8DG62549AB. Muxponder: 200G 16QAM Mode (with both client ports available).

Dual Mode - 100 and 200G modes (can use the pack in either mode). This includes a RTU license for 100G and 200G modes, and uses 8DG62549AA.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-40 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter Pack Placement in Shelf

Definition Selects slot assignment rules using a card placement template. These options are for autonomous design card placement only. Manual card placement is not restricted. If the slots required are taken by manually placed or frozen equipment, a new shelf will be added by the auto-design in order to comply. Specifically, line packs for lines 1, 4, 5 and 6 are on left side while line cards for lines 2, 3, 7 and 8 are on right side. Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) value can

only be applied to PSS-32 TOADMs. The CWR, Rx OA and Tx OA are restricted to the left 4 slots and right four slots (each four supporting on line) of the PSS-32 shelf. It will leave a slot for an OA if it is not present with the other OAs. Auto-placed TOADM line cards are slotted at the edges in particular slots of a PSS-32 shelf.

(continued) Allowed Values

System Default Single Degree per Shelf Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) Common Optics Packs in PSS-16 (ROADM) Note: The Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) option

can only be applied to PSS-32 TOADMs. The CWR, Rx OA and Tx OA are restricted to the left 4 slots and right 4 slots (each 4 supporting on line) of the PSS-32 shelf. It will leave a slot for an OA if it is not present with the other OAs. See “Shelf Packing and Placement” (p. 13-60) for more details.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-41 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter (cont'd)

Definition

(continued) Allowed Values

Common Optics Packs in PSS-16 (ROADM) -

Auto-placed common optics cards for each optical line is placed into separate PSS-16 shelves (this is restricted to PSS-16 main shelf NEs). Non-common equipment is placed in extension shelves of a type specified in the shelves specified by the Site Details Extension General Use field. PDUs, if used, are always placed at the top of a rack (regardless of the setting of this field).

Fill from bottom

Determines the line side DWDM XFPs to be used for 11DPE12 or 11QPA4 packs

Tunable Zero Chirp

Preferred Line Side DWDM Attenuator

Determines the line side DWDM attenuator to be used.

Electronic, variable (sVOA)

Shelf Power Margin

Additional power added to card to determine electrical requirements to shelf.

0 to 25 (percent)

Shelf Voltage Floor DC Volts (Negative)

Indicates the voltage at which the maximum current load is calculated, in negative Volts.

39 (default)

Shelf placement in Rack

Preferred Line Side DWDM XFP

Fill from top

Tunable Fixed Frequency

Fixed

39 to 48

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-42 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter Line Isolation

Definition When selected for a site (Even/Odd or All), EPT splits equipment associated with different fiber interfaces into separate shelves (both commons and transponders). Even/Odd on Separate Shelves - Separates the cards

associated with even numbered optical lines into separate shelves that are used for odd-numbered optical lines. The default is to use the same shelf type as the main shelf for the separation. 1UD200 and 20P200 cards are exempt from shelf separation.

(continued) Allowed Values

None Even/Odd on Separate Shelves (Even / Odd uses 2 shelves to support 3 to 8 fiber interfaces.) All on Separate Shelves All in Separate Racks Line Transponders in Separate Shelves (only displayed when Common Optics Packs in PSS-16 (ROADM) is selected in

the Pack Placement in Shelf field)

All on Separate Shelves –

Optical line-associated equipment (including AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks) is separated into different shelves so that card failures can be protected similar to fiber failures. The default is to use the same shelf type as the main shelf for the separation. This more strictly enforces degree separation for WTOCM, OTDR, PTPIO and PTPCTL cards. 1UD200 and 20P200 cards are exempt from shelf separation.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-43 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter Line Isolation (continued)

Definition

(continued) Allowed Values

All in Separate Racks –

Optical line cards are separated into separate racks. The default is to use the same shelf type as the main shelf for the separation. 1UD200 and 20P200 cards are exempt from shelf separation. Line Transponders in Separate Shelves - The

1UD200/20P200 will not be subject to the shelf separation described for the Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) field (above). Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II and PSS-4. Apply Line Isolation on WTOCM

Yes

Line Transponders in separate shelves per MCS Add/Drop Block

Yes

No No

MCS Add/Drop Blocks in separate shelves

Specifies whether the MCS8-16 card is subject to shelf separation.

Yes

Line Transponders in separate shelves per optical line

Specifies whether the 1UD200/20P200 card is subject to the shelf separation described for the Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) field (above).

Yes

OTDR cards in separate shelves

Specifies whether the OTDR card is subject to shelf separation.

Yes

No

No

No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-44 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

(continued) Allowed Values

MCS Add/Drop Block auto-creation sequence

Allows you to customize the creation sequence for the MCS add/drop block in a CDC-F network. You can then run the design to create the first free add/drop block following the auto-creation sequence present on Site details. The auto-creation sequence can be changed but it does not impact the MCS add/drop block already present.

{1-12}CDC-F designs only

Specialty FOC MPO jumpers

Applicable to PSS-32.

No Yes

Protection Options(See the note below this table for PDU descriptions.) Duplex Controllers on nodes with PSS-32 main shelf

Selects whether all PSS-32 shelves have redundant controllers.

Yes

Duplex Controllers on nodes with PSS-16 main shelf

Selects whether all PSS-16 shelves have redundant controllers.

Yes

Duplex Controllers on nodes with PSS-16II main shelf

Selects whether all PSS-16II shelves have redundant controllers.

Yes

Duplex Controllers on nodes with PSS-8 main shelf

Selects whether all PSS-8 shelves have redundant controllers.

Yes

PSS-16 PF Protection

Provides the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-16.

Yes

Specifies the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-16II.

Yes

Provides the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-8.

Yes

PSS-16II PF Protection

PSS-8 PF Protection

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-45 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter PSS-4 PF Protection

Definition Provides the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-4.

(continued) Allowed Values

Yes No

Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Options PDU Type to Include with each Rack

For ANSI or EIA racks, select PDU2, PDU2B or PDU2C. For ETSI racks select PDU1, PDU1B, PDU2C, PDU2D.

None

This setting applies for new sites but will not change existing sites.

PDU2C/PDU2D

PDU1/PDU2 PDU1B/PDU2B PDU1C/PDU2C

Note:The EPT does not decide which PDU to use in a design, as this is manually designed. Note:The EPT does notverify that the PDU is suitable for the rack except for the following: •

If this is an ETSI rack, the tool will choose PDU1, PDU1B or PDU1C.

•

If this is an ANSI or EIA rack the tool will choose PDU2, PDU2B, PDU2C or PDU2D.

Note:The Bill of Materials lists a PDU breaker for each shelf in the rack. The EPT does not verify any inconsistencies in the PDU output count and shelf count.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-46 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4

Network Parameters (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Number of site PDU Bridge/Jumper Kits to include

This kit allows 12x12 PDU to be made into a variety of different combinations by jumpering inputs (or outputs) together.

(continued) Allowed Values

0 to 100

This setting applies for new sites but will not change existing sites. Include a slider kit with PDU (PDU1/PDU1B only)

The slider kit attaches to the PDU and allows it to be slid out of the cabinet to allow easier access to the cabling. ETSI PDU1C 12X12 kits come with this. Not applicable for PDU2/PDU2B/PDU2C NAR PDUs.

Yes No

This setting applies for new sites but will not change existing sites. Include a Breaker Toggler with each Breaker

This kit provides a “handle arm” for the breaker so that a tool is not required to switch the breaker.

Yes No

This setting applies for new sites but will not change existing sites. Notes:

1.

Flex Shelves in non-ETSI racks: Flex shelves offer the following advantages: (1) Makes an additional Rack Unit available in an ANSI rack. (2) Provides a single shelf cover over three items. (3) No visible gaps in the rack when the SFD4X(Y) DCM or FST are installed in the flex shelf. The flex shelf supports tighter spacing of these sub-shelves. (4) Easier in service installation of new SFD44/SFD44B, SFD40/SFD40B, DCM and Fiber Storage Trays, within the flex shelf. (5) Simplified Fiber Management.

Note: • •

PDU1 Power Distribution Unit - ETSI (2 input, 6 output) PDU1B Power Distribution Unit - ETSI (4 inputs, 12 outputs)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-47 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• • •

PDU1C Power Distribution Unit - ETSI (12 input, 12 outputs) PDU2 Power Distribution Unit - NAR (2 input, 6 outputs) PDU2B Power Distribution Unit - NAR (4 input, 12 outputs)

•

PDU2C Power Distribution Unit - NAR (12 input, 12 outputs)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Either click OK, or select another tab on this window to configure other network parameters. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-48 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sites Create Sites

The first step in designing a network is to place sites on the map. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Right-click the desired map location and select Create Site(s). Result: An icon representing the newly created site is positioned on the map with a

default name (see Figure 5-9, “Site Icon (Unequipped)” (p. 5-49)). Figure 5-9 Site Icon (Unequipped)

Place as many sites as needed in the network design. Additional sites may be added at any time. After configuring NEs, segments, and demand details, the site icon changes (see Figure 5-10, “Site Icon (Equipped)” (p. 5-49)). Figure 5-10 Site Icon (Equipped)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To simultaneously create a site and create a segment connecting the previous site to the new site, press Ctrl while clicking on the map to add sites. You may close a ring by placing the cursor over an existing site--in which case pressing Ctrl creates a segment without placing a new site. Right-clicking on the map restores the normal operation of the GUI. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To move sites around on the canvas, click on each site and drag it to any location. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-49 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure Site Details ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To configure site details, right-click the site and select Site Details or double-click the site icon. Result: The Site Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-11, “Site Details Window”

(p. 5-50)). Figure 5-11 Site Details Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-50 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-5, “Site Details” (p. 5-51). Table 5-5

Site Details

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Name

User-defined name to identify the site.

Up to 20 characters

Note: If the names of the sites are changed from the default names, it is not suggested that you automatically add segments between the sites (that is, press CTRL key) because the segment names will retain the default site names. Description

Optional field to list additional information about the site parameter.

Up to 50 characters

Clustered

Indicates whether the Cluster topology is enabled on this site.

(checkbox)

When disabled, you cannot create an NE on this site with a Clustered OT Connection, nor can the main shelf be PSS-8 or PSS-16. Latitude

-90 to 90 degrees

Longitude

-180 to +180 degrees

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK to close the window, or select another tab. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-51 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit or View Power Filter Settings (Site Details) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Site Parameters window (see Figure 5-11, “Site Details Window” (p. 5-50)), click the Power Filter Definition tab. Result: The Site Parameters window is displayed with the Power Filter Definition tab

(see Figure 5-12, “Site Parameters Window (Power Filter Definition Tab)” (p. 5-52)) . Figure 5-12 Site Parameters Window (Power Filter Definition Tab)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-52 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-6, “Universal Shelf Power Filter Default Options (Power Filter Definition Tab)” (p. 5-53). Table 5-6

Universal Shelf Power Filter Default Options (Power Filter Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

PSS-32 Power Filter Type

Specifies the type of power filter on the PSS-32 NE.

Internal Breaker (support Wavelength Tracker) PFDCA (PFDCA does not support Wavelength Tracker Keys)

PSS-32 Power Filters/Breakers

Allows user to override default 50A Power Filter upon creation of an NE. (See the note at the end of this table for details.)

20A 30A 50A 60A 70A

PSS-16 Power Filters

PSS-8 Power Filters

PSS-4 Power Filters

Allows user to override default value upon creation of an NE.

20A

Allows user to override default value upon creation of an NE.

DC

Allows user to override default value upon creation of an NE.

-48 V DC

35A

AC(110) AC(220)

+24V DC AC

Each power filter type has external breakers, and supports a fixed shelf power dissipation sum that is less than or equal to the selected value. See also note below table. Power Feed Limit

Allows provisioning a power limit (less than 20A) to all shelves at a site.

10 to 150A

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-53 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Notes:

1.

PSS-32 Power Filters/Breakers: For PSS-32 NEs, the EPT will select the 50A power filter if the power consumption of the packs in the shelf is more than 30A and less than or equal to 50A. Selecting 20A forces the 20A power filter to be used unless the current draw exceeds 18A, whereupon a 50A power filter is used. Selecting 30A forces the 30A power filter to be used unless the current draw exceeds 27A, whereupon a 50A PF is used. Selecting a 70A power filter forces the 50A power filter to be used unless current draw exceeds 45A whereupon the 70A power filter is used. If the current draw beyond 63A requires packs to be installed in a separate shelf draw exceeds 27A, then 50A is used until current draw exceeds 45A when the 70A power filter is used. Checking both 30A and 70A power filters results in the 30A power filter to be used until current draw exceeds 27A, then the 50A power filter is used until current draw exceeds 45A when the 70A power filter is used.

2.

For PSS-16, power is chosen based on power consumption of shelf exceeding 90% of the rated power filter. PFDC35K is chosen if power draw is more than 18 Amps.

3.

By default, the EPT picks the PFDC50 power filter type for each PSS-32 shelf (two for every PSS-32 shelf). Each time a pack is added, the resulting sum of power for all the packs in the shelf is verified to be under 50A. If the power is exceeded when adding a pack, then a new shelf is created for the pack.

4.

PSS-4 Power Filters: When the power dissipation exceeds the capacity of the power filter type requested for the PSS-4 shelf, the EPT will add another shelf to the design.

Note: If only the 20A power filter is selected, the EPT will add a second shelf when the current draw on the first shelf exceeds 17.5A. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK to close the window, or select another tab. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Edit or View Automatic Design Settings (Site Details) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Site Parameters window (see Figure 5-11, “Site Details Window” (p. 5-50)), click the Automatic Design Definition tab.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-54 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Site Parameters window is displayed with the Automatic Design

Definition tab (see Figure 5-13, “Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)” (p. 5-55)). Figure 5-13 Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-7, “Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)” (p. 5-55). Table 5-7 Parameter

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab) Definition

Allowed Values

Site DWDM Automatic Design Default Options OADM Type

Specifies the OADM type.

TOADM, ROADM, DFOADM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-55 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Max DWDM Degrees per Node

Specifies the degree to which an OADM node can be upgraded.

Applicable range based on value selected in the OADM Type field.

Options for PSC is enabled only for IROADM and WR20-TF.

TOADM: 1 to 8 (on PSS-32 only); 0 when the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks per Node field is greater than 0 ROADM: 1 to 8 DFOADM: 1 to 4 (on on PSS-4, PSS-16, and PSS-32 only) : CFOADM and ECFOADM: 1 to 2

Equip All non-WR-20-TF 1830 PSS Lines with High Capacity Filters

Automatically equips any OADM lines for 44 channel support using of SFD44/SFD40, or 88 channel support using SFD44B/SFD40B.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

When deselected and WR is IROADM, you can equip PSCs using automatic design. Applies to 1830 PSS-32, PSS-16, and PSS-4 only. Allow ILAs with WTOCMx Cards

Auto-design, if it places an ILA at the Site, will include a WTOCM, WTOCM-F, or WTOCMA card, depending on the WTOCM type preference set on the segments, in the ILA Network Element.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-56 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Regen Mode

Applicable for GMPLS networks, for auto-designed regeneration in nominal and restoration paths.

Unrestricted 3R (default): Specifies that a site is available to be selected (unrestricted) based on the standard algorithm for auto-regen placement when considering this site.

Note: Regarding the Favor 3R value, consider that the total number of regenerators in the network could increase or change (reduced), based on sharing optimization interaction with favored sites. Therefore we recommend this value only expert users to use this value; some experimentation with this may be needed to confirm that results are acceptable.

Favor 3R: Specifies this site as “favored” for auto-designed regen placement (for restoration and nominal paths). If the auto-design function needs to place a regenerator along a restoration or nominal path, it will choose a favored site to place it, if that does not cause the total number of regenerators to increase along the path. If there are several favored sites to choose from, the EPT will pick one that will to minimize “cost” in the design, where cost is a multipart criteria including the least number of regenerators for the design, best performance (feasibility) and other factors. There is a small cost subtracted if the site is favored (if chosen over an unrestricted site which would have been chosen). If there is an existing regen that the path can use, it may not add a regen to the favored site, but instead share the regen. Forbid 3R: Specifies the site as “forbidden” for auto-regen placement (for restoration and nominal paths). The auto-design function will never place a regen at this site, even the design fails. Manual regens for nominal paths can be placed at this site.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-57 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

DGE Type

Indicates the default value for newly created sites for the kind of pack used in an auto-designed Dynamic Gain Equalization (DGE) node.

ROADM WR2-88

ROADM WR20-TFM single-blade is the default

value when the ROADM is created autonomously at this site for DGE. Note: This ROADM will not support local add/drop blocks. This ROADM will not support anything except two degrees connected with a thru connection. The DGE function will use Connection block lines only. Use Low Loss/Latency DCMs (SSMF/LEAF)

Determines the OA selection algorithm to use the FBG-based DCMs rather than Fiber DCMs for G.652 or LEAF Fiber.

ROADM WR8-88A ROADM WR8-88AF ROADM WR20-TF ROADM WR20-TFM single-blade (only when Dispersion Compensation is set to Prohibit (DCM-free) ) TOADM

On modular OAs only On all OAs

ROADM Preferences

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-58 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Preferred ROADM Wavelength Router

Indicates the type of WR pack to place in an auto-designed ROADM. If you select a Maximum Degree value of 1 or 2, then you must use WR2-88.

IROADM

IROADM: The EPT will

automatically design the network with IROADMV and IROADMF cards populated.

WR2-88 WR8-88A WR8-88AF WR20-TF (not in GMPLS designs) WR20-TFM

WR20-TFM: Select this

option to enable interworking between CDC-F and legacy ROADM. Options for PSC is enabled only for IROADM and WR20-TF. Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks per Node

Number of Any direction blocks allowed per ROADM node allowed.

0 to 8 for ROADMs, 0 for all other node types

If you enabled the Equipped AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks per ROADM field, then this is the number of AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks that are designed on the ROADM. This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-59 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Max CWR in AnyColor (one NE) AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks

Maximum CWR8-88 allowed in a Config D block.

1 to 8

AnyDirection Add/Drop Block type

Specifies the any direction block type placed with ROADM node.

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs. AnyColor (one NE) ROADM/TOADM (one NE) ROADM/TOADM (two NEs)

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs. Max PSC1-6 splitter/combiner pairs per optical line

Specifies the maximum number of PSC sections that should be placed by the automatic design function on each WDM line that uses WR20-TF. Options for PSC is enabled only for IROADM and WR20-TF.

Min PSC1-6 splitter/combiner pairs per optical line

Specifies the minimum number of PSC sections that should be placed by the automatic design function on each WDM line that uses WR20-TF.

WR20-TF: 1 to 13 IROADM: dependent from the degree. If the IROADM is degree 1 then the maximum number of PSC1-6 is 4. IROADM degree is 4 the maximum PSC1-6 number is 1.

1 to 13

Options for PSC is enabled only for IROADM and WR20-TF.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-60 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Maximum MCS Add/Drop Blocks per Optical Node

Indicates the maximum number of MCS Add/Drop blocks that can be automatically created by EPT on a node to satisfy trail routing.

0 to 12

Minimum MCS Add/Drop Blocks per Optical Node

Indicates the number of MCS Add/Drop blocks that are created by automatic design on a node, or if no existing trail require the MCS Add/Drop resources.

0 to 12

Minimum AAR-8A cards per MCS Add/Drop Block

Allows you to force the pre-allocation of two AAR-8A cards for each MCS Add/Drop block to have an installed system able to support additional degrees in the future without the need to buy and equip additional AAR-8A cards.

1 to 2

Allow Local Add/Drops on ROADMs

Indicates whether local add drop is allowed in ROADM lines.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. In GMPLS designs, to avoid regenerator auto-placement on DGE sites, DGE sites must have this field disabled (deselected).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-61 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Equip all MESH4

Equips all MESH4 to support max degree and max anydir add/drop blocks.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs. Equipped CWR8-88 per WR8-88A Colorless Add/Drop Block

Specifies the number of CWR8-88 cards that can be pre-populated with each ROADM WR8-88A Colorless (one Node).

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

AnyDirection Add/Drop Block added to a ROADM at the site. This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs. Equipped AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks per ROADM

If a ROADM is designed at this site, if this is checked, then the value specified in the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks field are equipped on that ROADM.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-62 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Equip all AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks with High Capacity Filters

Specifies every AnyDirection Add/Drop Block on the TOADM to equip with high capacity filter or not during automatic design.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs. WTOCMx on AnyColor (one NE) Xmt Only

The ROADM can have the WTOCM connections on the Anycolor (Config D) AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks with or without using WTOCMs. If WTOCMs are used, there are two options: •

On Xmt amp within the Config D AnyDirection Add/Drop Block only

•

On Xmt and RCV amps within the Config D AnyDirection Add/Drop Block only

The OAs in the same Configuration D AnyDirection Add/Drop Block should be connected to a WTOCM or WTOCMA. You can enable or disable this option as described.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Only the drop OA has its MON_RX port (for bi-directional OAs like AHPHG) or MON port (for modular/unidirectional OAs) connected to a WTOCM or WTOCMA; the add OA is not connected to a WTOCM or WTOCMA. Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Both the add and drop OA, each have their MON_RX port (for bi-directional OAs like AHPHG) or MON port (for modular/unidirectional OAs) connected to the same WTOCM or WTOCMA.

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM. Not applicable for IROADM, WR2-88, WR20-TF or WR20-TFM ROADMs. Cost Optimized Pass Through Node Options .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-63 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

ILA

Specifies that this site is an ILA.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

If you select ILA, you can also select OADM and/or Glass Through. OADM

Specifies that this site is an OADM.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

If you select OADM, you can also select ILA and/or Glass Through. Do not select this value if you want to provision line protection for an OMSP link. DGE

Specifies that this site supports Dynamic Gain Equalization (DGE). This option cannot be enabled with the others on the DWDM

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Pass Through Node Options

panel. Glass Through

Specifies that this site is a glass through.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

High Performance Pass Through Node Options (See above)

ILA OADM DGE Glass Through

OADM Shelf Type Preferences

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-64 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

First

PSS-32: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-32 NEs and PSS-16 NEs where the PSS-32 is the first shelf and PSS-16 NEs are growth shelves.

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal

PSS-16: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-16 and PSS-32 NEs where the PSS-16 is the first shelf and PSS-32 NEs are growth shelves. (See note 1 below this table.) PSS-8: NE consisting of one or more PSS-8 shelves. Extension General Use

Specifies which type of shelf to add when the EPT automatically creates new shelves as needed to hold the cards created during Manual/Auto Routing.

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal

If you want to use coherent OTs and the main shelf is set to PSS-16, then set this value to PSS-32 Universal. Extension Client/Line

A Client Line extension shelf are added by automatic design only if required (that is, only if a 1UD200 or 20P200 trail/service/ring needs to be designed), and only if valid).

PSS-16 Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal

Note:EPT will not prevent other types of cards from being placed into the “Client-Line” shelf if it needs a slot and a free one exists in this shelf. ILA Main Shelf .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-65 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-7

Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

First

PSS-32: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-32 NEs and PSS-16 NEs where the PSS-32 is the first shelf and PSS-16 NEs are growth shelves.

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal

PSS-16: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-16 and PSS-32 NEs where the PSS-16 is the first shelf and PSS-32 NEs are growth shelves. (See note 1 below this table.) PSS-8: NE consisting of one or more PSS-8 shelves. PSS-4: NE consisting of one or more PSS-4 shelves. Extension General Use

Specifies which type of shelf to add when the EPT automatically creates new shelves as needed to hold the cards created during Manual/Auto Routing. (See note 2 below this table.)

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal

Notes:

1.

OADM Main Shelf: When both PSS-32 and PSS-16 are checked, the EPT will place the solution that can meet the maximum degree requested, with the fewest blank slots. The solution is based on the packs and configuration requested, and the rules of what elements are allowed to be placed in each shelf type. In addition, each time Run Design is selected, the current autonomous design is deleted, and the first shelf type of auto-configured NEs in the current project at this site may change, based on the current line, link and demand configurations. However, the first shelf type of user-configured NEs will not change.

2.

Extension General Use: The NE Details has this same field and defaults to the values set above, at the time the NE is created. When ILA extension shelves are automatically added, will default to be the same type as the main shelf. When they are added manually, they will follow the same rules as an OADM. ILAs can need more than one PSS-8, PSS-16/PSS-16II main shelf if they have Raman/WTOCM/OTDR and use separate cards per degree.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-66 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK to close the window, or select another tab. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Edit or View Equipment Settings (Site Parameters) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Site Parameters window (see Figure 5-11, “Site Details Window” (p. 5-50)), click the Equipment Definition tab. Result: The Site Parameters window is displayed with the Equipment Definition tab (see Figure 5-14, “Site Parameters Window (Equipment Definition Tab)” (p. 5-67)) . Figure 5-14 Site Parameters Window (Equipment Definition Tab)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-67 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-8, “Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)” (p. 5-68). Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Hardware Options Shelf Width

Fiber Storage Tray

Attenuation Drawers

Flex Shelves in non-ETSI Racks

Type of shelf for this NE. The size of the racks used in this network.

EIA 19 Inch

Selecting No means the site has an alternative or existing excess fiber storage solution which are used, and does not need this extra part included in this design.

Yes

Selecting No means the site has an alternative or existing solution for storing attenuators which are used and does not need this extra part included in this design.

Yes

You can add FlexShelf (6 RU) in a non-ETSI rack by selecting Yes. You may also place a WR20-TFM into a 6RU FlexShelf.

Yes

ANSI 23 Inch ETSI No

No

No

Note: The default profiles Core HiPerf CDC-F and Core HiPerf CDC-F GMPLS have this option set to No. For a list of advantages to using flex shelves, see the Note below this table. Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II, and PSS-8. Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf

If the ETSI racks in use have doors, individual shelf covers are not needed.

Yes No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-68 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Extended Shelf Cover Default (PSS-32/16/4)

Extended shelf covers allow electrical SFPs on OT client ports to fit under them, and they allow the space to fit attenuators on all pack faceplates underneath these covers.

Yes No

Select Yes when the preferred WR or DGE is the WR20-TFM. Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, and PSS-4. Racks

Yes No

Allow PSS-8 User Panel

Yes No High capacity Fan when a coherent transponder is required at a site.

Low (FAN)

11STAR1/11STAR1A Regen

Indicates the type of 11STAR1 pack used when creating an regen.

11STAR1A

260SCX2 Operating Mode

Indicates how the 260SCX2 pack is used.

Single Mode

PSS-32 Fan Capacity

•

11STAR1

Dual Mode

Single Mode: – Transponder: 100G

–

•

High (FAN32H)

Mode (with only one client port available) Muxponder: 200G Mode (with both client ports available).

Dual Mode - 100 and 200G

modes (can use the pack in either mode)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-69 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

1UD200 Operating Mode

Indicates how the 1UD200 pack is used.

Single Mode

•

–

•

Dual Mode

Single Mode: – Transponder: 100G

QPSK Mode (with only one client port available). This includes a Right to Use (RTU) license for 100G mode only and uses APN 8DG62549AB. Muxponder: 200G 16QAM Mode (with both client ports available).

Dual Mode - 100 and 200G

modes (can use the pack in either mode). This includes a RTU license for 100G and 200G modes, and uses 8DG62549AA. Allow a PSC1-6 shelf to be auto-designed shared by multiple optional lines in a ROADM?

Indicates whether to allow automatic design to share PSC section contained in the same PSC1-6 shelf to be shared on different WDM lines.

Yes No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-70 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Pack Placement in Shelf

Selects slot assignment rules using a card placement template.

Network Default

These options are for autonomous design card placement only. Manual card placement is not restricted. If the slots required are taken by manually placed or frozen equipment, a new shelf is added by the auto-design in order to comply.

Single Degree per Shelf (PSS-32 TOADM/ROADM)

Specifically, line packs for lines 1,2,5, and 6 are on the left side and line packs for lines 3,4,7, and 8 are on the right side, regardless of line isolation specification. However, if the line isolation specification is none or even/odd, there are two lines per shelf. If the line isolation specification is all, there is one line per shelf.

System Default

Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) Common Optics Packs in PSS-16 (ROADM) See“Shelf Packing and Placement” (p. 13-60) for more details. Note: You cannot change this field value when the Site is not empty.

Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) value can only

be applied to PSS-32 TOADMs. The CWR, Rx OA and Tx OA are restricted to the left 4 slots and right four slots (each four supporting on line) of the PSS-32 shelf. It will leave a slot for an OA if it is not present with the other OAs. Auto-placed TOADM line cards are slotted at the edges in particular slots of a PSS-32 shelf.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-71 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

(cont'd)

Common Optics Packs in PSS-16 (ROADM) - Auto-placed common

(continued)

Allowed Values

optics cards for each optical line are placed into separate PSS-16 shelves (this is restricted to PSS-16 main shelf NEs). Non-common equipment are placed in extension shelves of a type specified in the shelves specified by the Extension General Use field. See also the Line Transponders in Separate Shelves field (below). Shelf placement in Rack

Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II, PSS-8, and PSS-4.

Fill from bottom Fill from top

PDUs, if used, are always placed at the top of a rack (regardless of the setting of this field). Determines the line side DWDM XFPs to be used for 11DPE12 or 11QPA4 packs

Tunable Zero Chirp

Preferred Line Side DWDM Attenuator

Determines the line side DWDM attentuator to be used (for PSS-4 and PSS NEs).

Electronic, variable (sVOA)

Shelf Power Margin

Additional power added to card to determine electrical requirements to shelf.

0 to 25 (percent)

Shelf Voltage Floor DC Volts (Negative)

Indicates the voltage at which the maximum current load is calculated, in negative Volts.

39 (default)

Preferred Line Side DWDM XFP

Tunable Fixed Frequency

Fixed

39 to 48

Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II and PSS-8.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-72 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Line Isolation

When selected for a site (Even/Odd or All), EPT splits equipment associated with different fiber interfaces into separate shelves (both commons and transponders).

None

All on Separate Shelves –

Optical line-associated equipment (including AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks) is separated into different shelves so that card failures can be protected similar to fiber failures. The default is to use the same shelf type as the main shelf for the separation. This more strictly enforces degree separation for WTOCM, OTDR, PTPIO and PTPCTL cards. 1UD200 and 20P200 cards are exempt from shelf separation.

Even/Odd on Separate Shelves (Even / Odd uses 2 shelves to support 3 to 8 fiber interfaces.) All on Separate Shelves All in Separate Racks Line Transponders in Separate Shelves (only displayed when Common Optics Packs in PSS-16 (ROADM) is selected

in the Pack Placement in Shelf field) All uses 3 shelves to 3 fiber

interfaces and 4 shelves to support 4 fiber interfaces. Additional shelves are added to isolate transponders into separate shelves.

All in Separate Racks – Optical

line cards are separated into separate racks. The default is to use the same shelf type as the main shelf for the separation. 1UD200 and 20P200 cards are exempt from shelf separation. Line Transponders in Separate Shelves - The 1UD200/20P200

are not subject to the shelf separation described for the Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) field (above). Applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16, and PSS-4. Apply Line Isolation on WTOCM

Yes No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-73 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

Parameter

Definition

(continued)

Allowed Values Yes

Line Transponders in separate shelves per MCS Add/Drop Block

No

MCS Add/Drop Blocks in separate shelves

Specifies whether the MCS8-16 card are subject to shelf separation.

Yes

Line Transponders in separate shelves per optical line

Specifies whether the 1UD200/20P200 card are subject to the shelf separation described for the Line cards at shelf edges (PSS-32 TOADM) field (above).

Yes

OTDR cards in separate shelves

Specifies whether the OTDR card are subject to shelf separation.

Yes

MCS Add/Drop Block auto-creation sequence

Indicates the order in which the MCS add/drop blocks are created when a design is run.

{1 to 12}

Specialty FOC MPO jumpers

Applicable to PSS-32 .

No

No

No

No

Yes Protection Options

Duplex controllers on nodes with PSS-16 main shelf

Specifies the option for redundant controller on the PSS-16.

Yes

Duplex Controllers on nodes with PSS-16II main shelf

Selects whether all PSS-16II shelves have redundant controllers.

Yes

Duplex controllers on nodes with PSS-32 main shelf

Specifies the option for redundant controller on the PSS-32.

Yes

PSS-16 PF Protection

Specifies the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-16.

Yes

Specifies the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-16II.

Yes

PSS-16II PF Protection

No

No

No

No

No

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-74 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

PSS-8 PF Protection

Specifies the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-8.

Yes

Specifies the option for redundant power feeds and filters on the PSS-4.

Yes

PSS-4 PF Protection (displayed for PSS-4 NEs only)

No

No

Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Options PDU Type to Include with each Rack

For ETSI racks, select PDU2, PDU2B or PDU2C. For ANSI or EIA racks select PDU1, PDU1B, PDU2C, PDU2D. This can override the network parameters setting ( based on the network parameters at the time the site was created).

None PDU1/PDU2 PDU1B/PDU2B PDU1C/PDU2C PDU2C/PDU2D

Note:The EPT does not decide which PDU to use in a design, as this is manually designed. Note:The EPT does notverify that the PDU is suitable for the rack except for the following: •

If this is an ETSI rack, the tool will choose PDU1, PDU1B or PDU1C.

•

If this is an ANSI or EIA rack the tool will choose PDU2, PDU2B, PDU2C or PDU2D.

Note:The Bill of Materials lists a PDU breaker for each shelf in the rack. The EPT does not verify any inconsistencies in the PDU output count and shelf count.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-75 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-8

Equipment Options (Equipment Definition Tab)

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Number of site PDU Bridge/Jumper Kits to include

This kit allows 12x12 PDU to be made into a variety of different combinations by jumpering inputs (or outputs) together.

0 to 100

This can override the network parameters setting ( based on the network parameters at the time the site was created). Include a slider kit with PDU (PDU1/PDU1B only)

The slider kit attaches to the PDU and allows it to be slid out of the cabinet to allow easier access to the cabling. ETSI PDU1C 12X12 kits come with this. Not applicable for PDU2/PDU2B/PDU2C NAR PDUs.

Yes No

This can override the network parameters setting (it's based on the network parameters at the time the site was created). Include a Breaker Toggler with each Breaker

This kit provides a “handle arm” for the breaker so that a tool is not required to switch the breaker.

Yes No

This can override the network parameters setting (it's based on the network parameters at the time the site was created). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK to close the window, or select another tab. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View, Edit or Delete Sites ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view/modify site details, select Sites from the Network section of the Information Bar.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-76 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A table of all sites configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 5-15, “Site Details ” (p. 5-77)). You can select other sites and the information will change to reflect the selected site. Figure 5-15 Site Details

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To delete a site, right-click the site and select Site Delete. Result: The following warning window is displayed: Figure 5-16 Warning Window (Delete Site)

Click Yes to delete the site. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

You can edit or delete multiple sites simultaneously, as follows: • •

Select more than one row in the Site table by pressing Shift while selecting a contiguous group, and right-click, or Press Ctrl, select one row at a time, and right-click.

You can then edit or delete all of the selected sites simultaneously with a multi-edit panel. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-77 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Segments Create Segments

You must create segments between sites before creating DWDM, CWDM or Single Channel links. You must also create segments before the EPT will automatically provision spans. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To connect two or more sites to one another with segments, right-click the site and a context menu will display. Select Create Segment and click the site being connected with the segment. Each time you right-click on a site, a context menu is displayed. Selecting Create Segment puts the GUI into the segment creation mode. Then, each time you select a site, a segment is created from the previously selected site. Right-clicking on the map restores the normal operation of the GUI. You must define the end site. If you create a segment from the map (right-click on the source site and selected destination site), the end sites are selected in the ‘create segment panel’ as they were specified by selecting the sites in the map. Note: For bidirectional trails, the source and destination values are interchangeable and dependent on your manual configuration. Result: The map redisplays with the selected sites connected by a segment indication

(see Figure 5-17, “Segment Connection” (p. 5-78)). The physical fiber segments connecting sites are shown as solid lines. Figure 5-17 Segment Connection

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-78 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

More than one segment can be created between a pair of sites, representing actual fiber connecting those sites. However, all segments between the sites are represented with a single line connecting those sites on the map. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View or Modify Segments ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a segment, select Segments from the Network section of the Information Selection Tab. Result: A table of all segments configured in the network is displayed (see Figure

5-18, “Segments ” (p. 5-79)). Figure 5-18 Segments

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for one or more segments, select the row(s) for the desired segment(s), right-click the segment and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-79 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Segment Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-19, “Segment Details

Window” (p. 5-80)), allowing you to specify a number of settings related to the segment such as the fiber properties of the segment. All values on this window are defaulted and may be overridden as needed. The window also provides the choice of allowing the tool to set fiber characteristics with algorithmic calculations based on fiber type and length or by your specification. Figure 5-19 Segment Details Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-80 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-9, “Segment Parameters” (p. 5-81). Table 5-9

Segment Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Segment Definition Name

User-defined name to identify the segment parameter.

Up to 25 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the segment parameter.

Up to 50 characters

Type

Indicates the type of segment.

External

•

Internal

External type is between

two NEs with OSP fiber. •

Internal is for the

ROADM-TOADM connection within an AnyDirection Add/Drop Block using a regular optical jumper of 3.5m default length. Capacity

Defines the type of equipment that can be deployed on each subnetwork, and whether that subnetwork can carry 44 or 88 channels of traffic, or CWDM, or SCHAN service.

Unrestricted-2F 50GHz Channel Spacing (DWDM-50 GHz) FLEX Channel Spacing (DWDM-FLEX) 100GHz Channel Spacing (DWDM-100 GHz) 8 Channels two-fiber (CWDM-2F) 8 Channels single-fiber (CWDM-1F) Single Channel (SCHAN)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-81 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-9

Segment Parameters

Parameter Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM Type) Usage

(continued) Definition

Allowed Values

Indicates whether a WTCOM pack is used on this site. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE. This value is supported on segments within an OMSP link.

Default: the segment value will change if the network parameter of the same name is changed.

WTOCM usage is selected on a per segment basis. When the link changes WTOCM usage, the segments within the link automatically change.

No WTOCM WTOCMA WTOCM-F

Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) supported on this segment when carrying DWDM

OSC may be eliminated on a per segment basis (except when violating laser safety requirements). Not applicable if the [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Projects

•

Future—These elements

Future

are ignored by EPT for network design. The Run Design and Verify Design functions have no effect on Future design elements. The power, gain, and other values for these elements is unchanged during a Run Design operation.

Current

•

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Deployed

Current—There is only

one project with this status, and these elements are designed and validated. New cards added during Run Design are placed in this project.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-82 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-9

Segment Parameters

Parameter (cont'd)

(continued) Definition

•

Allowed Values

Deployed—Elements

with this status are resources available for EPT to route additional traffic trails, services, and demands, but are not modified by the Run Design function. The power, gain, and other values for these elements is unchanged during a Run Design operation. In addition, these elements may not be modified by manual design procedures. Network Parameters that affect elements in the network (for example, Fiber Margin) may not be modified when there are projects in the Deployed state, as changes to these parameters may invalidate a design or cause changes to the Bill of Materials for these elements which have already been installed or deployed. See also Table 8-2, “Changing Project States” (p. 8-18). Fiber Properties OSP Fiber

Describes the OSP fiber.

Up to 50 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-83 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-9

Segment Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Asymmetric Fiber Properties (B-End to A-End panel only)

Allows for fiber properties to be specified separately for each direction if desired. Different fiber types are allowed on each side of a glassthru site in non-GMPLS designs.

Allowed Values Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

When enabled, the segment may use a different fiber type in the B-A direction than it uses in the A-B direction. Spans with Raman amplifiers are not allowed to use multiple fibers. Not applicable if Capacity is set to CWDM-1F or [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE. Type

The category of transmission fiber.

Default SSMF ELEAF TW-RS TWC TW+ LS DSF 1621SLENote: The TWC, TW+, LS and DSF are only available when Dispersion Compensation field is set to DCM free.

Length (km)

The length of the fiber segment. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

.01 to 250 For AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks, this value is fixed at .0035 km.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-84 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-9

Segment Parameters

Parameter Loss (dB)

(continued) Definition

The loss of the fiber segment.

Allowed Values 0 to 50 If selecting a value in the User Specified column, it should be the loss of the segment at 1550 nm.

PMD (ps)

The PMD contribution of the fiber segment. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

0 to 30

Disp @1546nm (ps/nm)

The chromatic dispersion of the fiber segment. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

-1500 to 3000

Dispersion Slope (ps/nm2)

The slope of the chromatic dispersion of the fiber segment. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

-10 to +20

Loss Margin (dB)

The additional loss that should be added to the fiber segment to account for a potential increase in loss. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

0 to 5

A-end Connector Loss (dB)

The additional loss that should be added to the segment to account for A-end connectors. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

0 to 3

B-end Connector Loss (dB)

The additional loss that should be added to the segment to account for B-end connectors. Not applicable if [Fiber] Type is set to 1621SLE.

0 to 3

Feature Details

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-85 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-9

Segment Parameters

Parameter OTDR with Line Amplifier

(continued) Definition

You can select this when OTDR Placement field is enabled on the Network Parameters window (Parameters and Defaults tab; see Table 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-5)) .

Allowed Values Tx Rx

Notes:

1.

Capacity field: The Capacity field value on the Segment Parameters window is the same value specified in the Capacity field on the Network Parameters window. After this segment is created, the segment's Capacity field value is unaffected by changes in the Network Parameters Capacity field value.

2.

Capacity field (continued): 88 Channels (50GHz spaced channel link) and 44 Channels (100GHz spaced channel link) links are not allowed on CFOADM or ECFOADM lines. 8 Channels single-fiber (CWDM-1F) and 8 Channels two fiber (CWDM-2F) links are not allowed on DFOADM or TOADM lines.

3.

Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM) Usage: Changing the value on the Network Parameters window affects segments only in the current project (see Table 5-1, “Network Parameters Window (Network Parameters and Defaults Tab)” (p. 5-5)).

4.

Changing the Capacity or Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM) Usage removes the WDM link using that segment (which also removes the routing of any trail using the segment). Link editing or right-clicking on links in the Links table (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)) allows you to change the WTOCM setting without removing the WDM link.

To add segments to a project, see “Dividing a Network Design into Projects” (p. 13-68). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring Segments for OMSP Link Primary and Secondary Paths

In non-GMPLS networks, you can provision line protection for OMSP links by specifying primary and secondary paths for the link. You must first select ILA, Glass Through or DGE in the Cost Optimized Pass Through Node Options panel on the Automatic Design Definition tab of the Site Details window (see Figure 5-13, “Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)” (p. 5-55)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-86 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Segments from the Network section of the Information Selection Tab. Result: A table of all segments configured in the network is displayed (see Figure

5-18, “Segments ” (p. 5-79)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the row(s) for the desired segment(s), right-click the segment and select Create Line Protection > Primary Path or Create Line Protection > Secondary Path. Result: If the selected segments are unavailable, an error is displayed (see Figure

5-20, “Segments Used Error” (p. 5-87)). Figure 5-20 Segments Used Error

When line protection creation is successful, selecting the primary path on the map highlights it in red, and selecting the secondary path on the map highlights it in blue. Note: You can also create line protection by selecting contiguous segments on the network map. In addition, to create a valid path, the following criteria must be met: • • •

The Primary and Secondary paths must use a disjoint set of segments. The Primary and Secondary paths must start and end on the same site. One path (primary or secondary) may not have the same site between segments occurring more than once (that is, no loops). The same site is permitted to occur on both the primary and secondary paths.

• •

The segments cannot contain previously-configured links. The segments have the same value for WTOCM Type (either WTOCMx or WTD(no WTOCMx)).

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-87 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View or Modify Line Protection Paths ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view primary and secondary paths configured for OMSP line protection, select Line Protection from the Network section of the Information Selection Tab. Result: A table of all paths configured on the segments in this network is displayed

(see Figure 5-21, “Line Protection Paths” (p. 5-88)). Figure 5-21 Line Protection Paths

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify the name of the path, select the row for the desired path, right-click it and select Edit > . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To change the primary path to the secondary path (or vice versa), select the row for the desired path, right-click the segment and select Swap Paths. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Delete Line Protection Paths ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete one or more primary or secondary paths, select the row(s) for the desired path(s), right-click and select Delete > or Delete Selected Rows. A confirmation window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the path(s). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-88 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Segments ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete one or more segments, select the row(s) for the desired segment(s), right-click and select Delete or Delete Selected Rows. Note: When deleting a segment unassociated with a WDM trail, you will not have a chance to confirm deletion. The segment will be deleted immediately. A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 5-22, “Warning Window (Delete One Segment)” (p. 5-89) and Figure 5-23, “Warning Window (Delete Multiple Segments)” (p. 5-89)). Figure 5-22 Warning Window (Delete One Segment)

Figure 5-23 Warning Window (Delete Multiple Segments)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-89 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Segments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the segment(s). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-90 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Elements Note: Creating an NE is not necessary if you are using the Automatic Design feature of the EPT. Create Network Elements ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a new NE on the map, right-click the site and a menu will display. Select Create Network Element. If the NE is created using this method, the Site will be automatically populated in the panel. The Create Network Element window is displayed (see Figure 5-24, “Create Network Element Window ” (p. 5-92)), allowing you to specify settings related to the NE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-91 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-24 Create Network Element Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-10, “Network Element Parameters” (p. 5-92). Table 5-10

Network Element Parameters

Parameter Name

Definition User-defined name to identify the NE.

Allowed Values Up to 25 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-92 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-10

Network Element Parameters

Parameter

(continued)

Definition

Allowed Values

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the NE.

Up to 50 characters

Site

The site where the node is to be created.

N/A

NE Type

The type of NE to be created. See note at the end of this table.

1830 PSS

This option is not displayed unless Clustered is enabled on any site. Note:If the site is not clustered, this value will be unchecked and disabled.

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Optical Node

1830 PSS-4 (not displayed for CDC-F designs) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Note: When merging two EPT files, the setting for this field must match in each file, otherwise the merge will fail. Clustered OT Connection

This option is not displayed unless Clustered is enabled on this site. Note:If the site is not clustered, this value will be unchecked and disabled.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Note: When merging two EPT files, the setting for this field must match in each file, otherwise the merge will fail. SID

The System Identifier, a character string used by the EMS to address each NE.

1 to 20 characters from the set of non case-sensitive alphanumberic characters ([A-Z][a-z][0-9] and the extended character set (above 0x7E) as given in ISO/IEC 8859-1. Note: Enter an SID value if you want to use this NE create a commissioning file (see “Creating a Commissioning File” (p. 9-6)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-93 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-10

Network Element Parameters

Parameter

(continued)

Definition

Allowed Values

OADM Shelf Type Preferences First

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal

Extension General Use

PSS-32: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-32 NEs and PSS-16 NEs where the PSS-32 is the first shelf and PSS-16 NEs are growth shelves.

(The default value is the same as the Extension General Use field on the Site Details: Automatic Design Definition window at the time that the NE is created. Choices displayed will vary depending on which value is selected in the NE Type field: PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II or PSS-8 when 1830 PSS is selected, or PSS-4 when 1830 PSS-4 is selected.)

PSS-16: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-16 and PSS-32 NEs where the PSS-16 is the first shelf and PSS-32 NEs are growth shelves. (See note 3 below this table.)

PSS-32 Universal

Specifies which type of shelf to add when the EPT automatically creates new shelves as needed to hold the cards created during Manual/Auto Routing. (See note 2 below this table.)

PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal (The default value is the same as the Extension General Use field on the Site Details: Automatic Design Definition window at the time that the NE is created. Choices displayed will vary depending on which value is selected in the NE Type field: PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II or PSS-8 when 1830 PSS is selected, or PSS-4 when 1830 PSS-4 is selected.)

PSS-8/ PSS-4: NE consisting of one or more of the selected PSS-n shelves.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-94 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-10

Network Element Parameters

Parameter

(continued)

Definition

Allowed Values

Loopback IP

IP address for the network element.



OAMP IP

IP address of the OAMP port.



CIT IP

IP address of the CIT port.



VOIP IP

IP address of the VOIP port.



Notes:

1.

NE Type: Do not create NEs at sites where no Add/Drop is required (ILA or Glass-thru sites). Upon NE configuration, the NE Type cannot be modified; only viewed or deleted.

2.

Extension General Use: After setting this field and clicking Run Design and selecting the option, Do not remove any designed elements, new extension shelves added to the design will use the updated extension shelf preferences.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter the desired values on the window, and click OK. After adding a new NE, the EPT automatically tries to provision a node associated with the NE. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Enter values the desired values on this window. Result: The Node Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-32, “Add Node Details

Window (Standard)” (p. 5-110)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Modifying the Shelf Type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select NEs from the Information Bar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a row for the desired NE, and right-click. Result: A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-95 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Network Element Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-25,

“Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-96)). Figure 5-25 Network Element Details Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-11, “Network Element Details Parameters” (p. 5-96). Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

NE Details Name

User-defined name to identify the NE.

Up to 25 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the NE.

Up to 50 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-96 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter SID

(continued)

Definition The System Identifier, a character string used by the EMS to address each NE.

Allowed Values 1 to 20 characters from the set of non case-sensitive alphanumberic characters ([A-Z][a-z][0-9] and the extended character set (above 0x7E) as given in ISO/IEC 8859-1. Note: Enter an SID value if you want to use this NE create a commissioning file (see “Creating a Commissioning File” (p. 9-6)).

Type of shelf for this NE. The size of the racks used in this network.

EIA 19 Inch

Loopback IP

IP address for the network element.



OAMP IP

IP address of the OAMP port.



CIT IP

IP address of the CIT port.



VOIP IP

IP address of the VOIP port.



Shelf Width

ANSI 23 Inch ETSI

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-97 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter Reserved Shelf Numbers

(continued)

Definition List of shelves that will be reserved to reserve a non-managed PSS-24x shelf in an NE. The EPT handles multiple NEs at a site for the Cluster feature, therefore PSS-24x shelves are reserved per NE.

Allowed Values {Comma-separated list of shelf numbers} Note: The number 1 is not a valid value since a PSS-24x may not be the master shelf.

Shelf numbers may be persistent. Reservations are preserved unless the NE is deleted. NE attributes such as Name and Shelf Number will be ‘user-defined’ so that they will persist through Run Design option 2. Note: All shelf reservations are triggered from an EPT or NPT user operation. Thus, once a shelf is reserved, the NE is considered user-defined. Run Design option 3 will remove all reservations, but Run Design option 2 will not remove reservations because an NE with some reserved shelves is user-defined (see Step 1). Optical Node

This option is not displayed unless Clustered is enabled on the site.

(checkbox)

Note: When merging two EPT files, the setting for this field must match in each file, otherwise the merge will fail.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-98 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter Clustered OT Connection

(continued)

Definition This option is not displayed unless Clustered is enabled on the site.

Allowed Values (checkbox)

Note: When merging two EPT files, the setting for this field must match in each file, otherwise the merge will fail. OADM Shelf Type Preferences First

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal (The default value is the same as the Extension General Use field on the Site Details: Automatic Design Definition window at the time that the NE is created. Choices displayed will vary depending on which value is selected in the NE Type field: PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II or PSS-8 when 1830 PSS is selected, or PSS-4 when 1830 PSS-4 is selected.)

PSS-32: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-32 NEs and PSS-16 NEs where the PSS-32 is the first shelf and PSS-16 NEs are growth shelves. PSS-16: Mixed NE types consisting of a PSS-16 and PSS-32 NEs where the PSS-16 is the first shelf and PSS-32 NEs are growth shelves. (See note 3 below this table.) PSS-8/ PSS-4: NE consisting of one or more of the selected PSS-n shelves.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-99 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter Extension General Use

(continued)

Definition PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal (The default value is the same as the Extension General Use field on the Site Details: Automatic Design Definition window at the time that the NE is created. Choices displayed will vary depending on which value is selected in the NE Type field: PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II or PSS-8 when 1830 PSS is selected, or PSS-4 when 1830 PSS-4 is selected.)

Allowed Values Specifies which type of shelf to add when the EPT automatically creates new shelves as needed to hold the cards created during Manual/Auto Routing. (See note 2 below this table.)

Shelf Details Shelf Type

Note: The main shelf type cannot be changed from PSS-32 to PSS-16 if the NE has extension shelves of type PSS-16II or PSS-8.

PSS-32 Universal PSS-16 Universal PSS-16II Universal PSS-8 Universal PSS-4 Universal DCM SFD44 SFD44B SFD40 SFD40B RA3P PB1 MSH8-FSM

PSS-32 Shelf ANSI Installation Kit

Applicable to PSS-32 Universal shelves with ANSI 23 inch width only.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-100 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter Shelf Cover

(continued)

Definition Note: The PSS-32 shelf with bumped out covers and the standard installation kit for the rack type are recommended if the NE contains the PSS-8 or PSS-16II. Bumped out covers are the default. In non-CDC-F designs, only standard PSS-32 installation kits are supported.

Allowed Values PSS-32, PSS-16, or PSS-4: •

None: The Shelf Width field on the Network Parameters Equipment Definition window is set to ETSI, and the Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf field on the Site Details Equipment Definition window is set to No.

•

Conventional: The Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf field on the Site Details Equipment Definition window is set to Yes.

•

Extended: The Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf field on the Site Details Equipment Definition window is set to Yes.

PSS–16II and PSS-8: •

None: The Shelf Width field on the Network Parameters Equipment Definition window is set to ETSI, and the Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf field on the Site Details Equipment Definition window is set to No.

•

Extended: The Shelf Cover for each ETSI Shelf field on the Site Details Equipment Definition window is set to Yes.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-101 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter Shelf Number

(continued)

Definition

Allowed Values

In CDC-F networks, you cannot change the shelf number of a Deployed shelf, nor switch shelf numbers with or on a Deployed shelf. Note: In R8.1 and higher, a PSS-8 or PSS-16II shelf will not automatically be added to PSS-32 main shelf NE when a trail which requires placement of the 1UD200 OT is routed.

Description PDU Breaker

When you select a value other than None in the PDU Type to Include with each Rack field on the Network Parameters Equipment Options/Site Details Equipment Options windows, the PDU Breaker panel is displayed on the Shelf Details panel.

60 (default) 1 to 80 (Amperes)

Pack Details (Refer to Step 2.)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-102 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-11

Network Element Details Parameters

Parameter Change Pack Type

(continued)

Definition Switch to a different card type, as available.

Allowed Values [Varies depending on the selected card type.]

IROADMx cards: Changing the pack type will result in a design state change to “Complete,Unverified.” Mid-stage DCMs will not be preserved or moved to an InLine DCM, and InLine DCMs will not be preserved or moved to a Mid-stage DCM after you click OK. Equipment Controllers (ECs): On PSS-32 and PSS-16 NEs, you may switch between EC types EC and 32EC2. You cannot switch between these EC types if the NE contains any 4G ECs (APNs 8DG59241AB or 8DG59241AA). Change Pack APN

Displays the Nokia part number for the selected pack.

[Varies depending on the selected pack type.]

OSC SFP

Applicable only for specific packs, such as IROADMx.

[Varies depending on the selected pack type.]

APN

Applicable only for specific packs, such as IROADMx.

[Varies depending on the selected pack type.]

WTOCM Connection {1-4}

If using the WTOCM, WTOCMA or WTOCM-F pack, you can select up to four connections to modify or override.

Unused [Varies depending on available equipment installed in the shelf.]

Applicable only for WTOCMx packs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select a shelf in the Shelf Details panel of this window.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-103 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Shelf Details fields are populated (below the equipment image). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

If you change the shelf type, a warning window is displayed (see Figure 5-26, “Change Shelf Type Confirmation Window” (p. 5-104)). Figure 5-26 Change Shelf Type Confirmation Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click OK or Cancel. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

To create...

Then...

a new shelf,

click Create Shelf.

a new extension shelf,

click Preferences.

Result: The corresponding window is displayed (see Figure 5-27, “Create Shelf

Window” (p. 5-104) and Figure 5-28, “NE Preferences Window” (p. 5-105)). Figure 5-27 Create Shelf Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-104 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-28 NE Preferences Window

The values available are determined by the setting in the Extension General Use field on the Site Details window. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Reconfiguring Circuit Pack Slots

Note: You cannot manually reconfigure slots for Equipment Controllers and Power Filters (for example PFDC30, PFDC50, and so on), which cannot be moved. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Perform steps 1-3 in “Modifying the Shelf Type” (p. 5-95). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a slot in the Shelf Details panel of this window. Result: The Pack Details panel is populated. You can use this panel to move the packs to the desired slot, APN, and add new shelves, as applicable (see Table 5-11, “Network Element Details Parameters” (p. 5-96)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

On the Pack Details Override panel you can: • • •

Change the shelf by selecting a different shelf in the New Shelf Number field. Change a slot by selecting a different slot in the New Slot Number field (see Note below). in the Change Pack Type field, If using a WTOCMx pack, you can select a different WTOCMX pack type. If using the IROADMV or IROADMF pack, you can select a different IROADMX. Note: For information on placement restrictions in specific packs, refer to the Nokia 1830 Photonic Service Switch Product Information and Planning Guide.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-105 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If...

Then...

you want to configure XFP or SFP details for this pack,

continue with Step 5.

you do not want to configure XFP or SFP details for this pack,

proceed to Step 7.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

To edit the XFP/SFP information or desired pluggable module (if applicable), select the pack from the slot in the graphic of the PSS NE in the Shelf Details panel . Result: The Pack Details panel populates with the current pack information. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select the desired XFP/SFP or pluggable module (or Compute). Note: The following SFPs are supported on the EPT for the client signal type named OC-12/STM-4; however, the 1830 NE supports these SFPs on the STM-4 but not the OC-12: • • • •

GE-BX20U GE-BX20D GE-BX40U GE-BX40D

Therefore, do not select OC-12 for these pluggables. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click OK. If the new slot assignments are not valid, an error message is displayed. For more information on how to correct your PSS-32 Y-cable slot pairs for 3-slot wide card configuration, refer to the Nokia 1830 Photonic Service Switch Product Information and Planning Guide. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View or Modify Network Elements ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Note: You cannot delete NEs that are created automatically by the EPT. There is no option on the context menu to delete an NE created automatically.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-106 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To view details for an NE, select NEs from the NEs section of the Information Bar. A table of all NEs configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 5-29, “Network Elements ” (p. 5-107)). Figure 5-29 Network Elements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for an NE, select the row for the desired NE, right-click the NE and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-107 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Network Element Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-30,

“Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-108)). Figure 5-30 Network Element Details Window

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Delete Network Elements

When deleting an NE, any nodes associated with the NE will be deleted along with the NE. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete one or more NEs from the Information Bar, select the row(s) for the desired NE, right-click the NE and select Delete. A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 5-31, “Warning Window (Delete NE)” (p. 5-109)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-108 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Network Elements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-31 Warning Window (Delete NE)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the NE. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-109 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Nodes Overview

When configuring the Node, be sure to select the correct filter. You must also select at least one amplifier for each fiber interface. However it is easier to select the amplifier (and DCM) using the appropriate Link Details window (see “View or Modify Links” (p. 6-23)). Note: Creating a node manually is not necessary if you are using the Automatic Design feature. Procedure

To create and configure nodes using the EPT, perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If...

Then...

you want to create a node from the map,

perform Step 2 to Step 3.

you want to create a node from the Information Bar,

perform Step 4 to Step 6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Right-click on a site with one or more PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-8 or PSS-4 NEs. Result: A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Create Node. Result: The Add Node Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-32, “Add Node

Details Window (Standard)” (p. 5-110)). Figure 5-32 Add Node Details Window (Standard)

Proceed to Step 7. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-110 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select NEs from the Information Bar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select a row for the desired NE, and right-click. Result: A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select Add Node. Result: Either the Add Node Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-32, “Add

Node Details Window (Standard)” (p. 5-110)) or the Network Element Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-30, “Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-108)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 5-12, “Node Parameters” (p. 5-111). Table 5-12

Node Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Site

User-defined name to identify the site.

N/A

Node

User-defined name to identify the node.

Up to 20 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about this node.

Up to 50 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-111 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12

Node Parameters

Parameter DGE Type

(continued) Definition

Specifies whether to enable Dynamic Gain Equalization (DGE) optimization. Displayed when Type is set to ROADM.

Allowed Values None Single Blade Dual Blade

Enabling this field will restrict the node type--only the TOADM or ROADM can be used for gain equalization. Colored and colorless add drop (or regen) will not be supported on this node. SFDs are not supported on this node. Trails, services and demands can be added at this site, but cannot be manually routed until a node at the site that supports them is added (or this TOADM or ROADM is removed and the design is re-run in which case the TOADM or ROADM would be re-added to the site). Trails, services and demands may be auto-routed to this node when the design is run, and then the Optimize for DGE field will be automatically unchecked.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-112 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12

Node Parameters

Parameter (cont'd)

(continued) Definition

Allowed Values

Disabling this value will transition states of all “Complete, Valid” and “Complete, Invalid” routes through this node to “Complete, Unverified.” You cannot enable this value if there are SFD filters or MCS Add/Drop Blocks in this node. You cannot disable this value if trails, services or demands are add/drop routed onto this node.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-113 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12

Node Parameters

Parameter Type

(continued) Definition

Allowed Values

Specifies the type of node to be created.

TOADM: This node may contain only TOADM and AnyDirection Add/Drop lines and SCHAN lines. Applicable to PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 shelves. Only available if the TOADM OADM Placement field is selected as Allow (on Network Parameters and Defaults tab) and DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys field is set to On (on Auto-Design and Verification tab) in Network parameters. ROADM: This node may contain only ROADM and AnyDirection Add/Drop lines and SCHAN lines. Applies to PSS-32, PSS-16II and PSS-8 shelves. Only available if the DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys field is set to On in the Network Parameters window (Auto-Design and Verification tab). DFOADM: This node may contain only DWDM FOADM lines and SCHAN lines. Applies to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II, PSS-8 and PSS-4 shelves. CFOADM: This node may contain only CWDM FOADM lines and SCHAN lines. Applies to PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-16II and PSS-8 shelves. ECFOADM: This node may contain only CWDM lines and/or SCHAN lines. Applies to PSS-4 shelves.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-114 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12

Node Parameters

Parameter Max Degree

(continued) Definition

Specifies the maximum number of non-OMPS lines and OMSP protected line pairs, which are not part of an AnyDirection Add/Drop Block, that may exist in the node. It is also the maximum number of (non-OMSP DWDM links and OMSP links), or CWDM links that may be terminated on this node, with the exception of the DWDM links supported within an AnyDirection Add/Drop Block between the ROADM and TOADM portions of an AnyDirection Add/Drop Block.

Allowed Values CFOADM: 1 to 2 DFOADM: 1 to 4 ROADM: 2 to 8 ECFOADM: 1 to 2 TOADM: 1 to 8

Options for PSC is enabled only for IROADM and WR20-TF. Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks per Node

Specifies the maximum AnyDirection Add/Drop blocks supported on the node.

0 to 8

This field is only enabled with the OADM Type field is set to ROADM.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-115 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12

Node Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Max PCS1-6 splitter/combiner pairs per Optical Line

Specifies the maximum number of PCS1-6 splitter/combiner pairs for the PCS1-6 shelf that will be pre-populated in the design on a node, even in the absence of any trail or service using them for add/drop, when a design is run using Run Design.

Allowed Values {1 to 12}

Options for PSC is enabled only for IROADM and WR20-TF. Allow a PSC1-6 shelf to be shared by multiple optical lines in a ROADM

Displayed only when the Type field is set to ROADM.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Maximum MCS Add/Drop Blocks per Optical Node

Specifies the maximum number of MCS Add/Drop blocks for the MCS8-16 card that will be pre-populated in the design on a node, even in the absence of any trail or service using them for add/drop, when a design is run using Run Design.

{1 to 12}

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Enabled only on ROADM nodes with at least one line.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-116 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12

Node Parameters

Parameter Minimum MCS Add/Drop Blocks per Optical Node

(continued) Definition

Specifies the minimum number of MCS Add/Drop blocks for the MCS8-16 card that will be pre-populated in the design on a node, even in the absence of any trail or service using them for add/drop, when a design is run using Run Design.

Allowed Values {2 to 12}

Enabled only on ROADM nodes with at least one line. Minimum AAR-8A cards per MCS Add/Drop Block

Specifies the minimum number of AAR-8A cards designed on each MCS Add/Drop Block in this node after the node is created.

{1 to 2}

Enabled only on ROADM nodes with at least one line. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Do one of the following: IF…

THEN…

You want to use the Schematic Editor to choose your node configuration

Continue with Step 9.

You want to configure the node without using the Schematic Editor

Go to Step 17.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

To design the node on this NE manually, click Schematic.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-117 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: WR20-TFM ROADMs are permitted in networks with the OA selection algorithm set to Cost Optimized/(Growth), but only manual selection of bidirectional amplifiers in the WR20-TF ROADM is supported. Auto-design will fail to find amplifiers for the WR20-TF ROADM if the OA selection algorithm is set to Cost Optimized/(Growth). Note: Options for PSC1-6 follow same rules for WR20-TF (connect PSC section on the same PSC1-6 to different line, select section, check that line for PSC is created and Max PSC number defined on Site and Node). Line capacity is set to 50 GHz if ITLB is attached, or 100 GHz if SFD is directly attached. Line capacity (50/100 GHz) is defined when a DWDM link is created and PSC1-6 is attached. Result: The Schematic Editor is displayed (see Figure 5-33, “Schematic Editor View”

(p. 5-118)). Figure 5-33 Schematic Editor View

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-118 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Schematic Editor, you can select components along the left column of the window. Additional icons support the RAMAN amplifier, the Interleaver and SFD44B for 88-channel applications. From the View menu, you can change your preferences and font viewing options as follows: • •

Select View > Preferences to display the Schematic Preferences window (see Figure 5-34, “Schematic Preferences” (p. 5-119)). From the View menu (View > Font), you can launch the Font Options window to change the font size in the Schematic Editor (see Figure 5-35, “Font Options” (p. 5-119)). You may need to adjust the Size setting if demand names overlap in the display.

Figure 5-34 Schematic Preferences

Figure 5-35 Font Options

The Schematic Editor enforces a sequential design of a node. The following steps illustrate the process: 1. Add a line 2. Add an ingress amplifier 3. Add an egress amplifier (required on PSS-16 NEs) 4. Add DCMs (for ingress and egress) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-119 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5. Add filters (CWRs must be added before SFDs for TOADM nodes) 6. Add thru and mesh connections You can also see tips on the Help menu in the Schematic Editor (select Help > Features and Help > Info). Note: Use the DWDM, CWDM, or SCHAN Link Details window (see Figure 6-10, “DWDM Link Details Window (100 GHz)” (p. 6-25), Figure 6-11, “DWDM Link Details Window (50 GHz)” (p. 6-26), Figure 6-12, “CWDM Link Details Window” (p. 6-27), and Figure 6-13, “SCHAN Link Details Window” (p. 6-28)) to set power levels and change DCM values. Note: ITLB must be used for dropping all 88 channels in a FOADM end terminal or a ROADM node. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

To add an OSP fiber, click Add Line (see Figure 5-36, “Add Line Button” (p. 5-120)). Figure 5-36 Add Line Button

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Select an optical amplifier (OA) and build by selecting additional components as needed (see Figure 5-37, “Icon Selection on Schematic Window” (p. 5-120). Note: The SFD5 and SFD44 may only be connected to the drop port of the CWR8/CWR8B/CWR8-88 and not the colorless ports. Figure 5-37 Icon Selection on Schematic Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-120 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click on the to node icon as a shortcut to go to the schematic for another node. Note: The node icon shortcut is available in a Schematic panel only when there is a link associated with the displayed node to another node. You can create a subtending 44-channel system using the odd channels from the SFD44B by manually editing the node. On any ROADM node, in a valid design, if you right-click on the underlined WR card name displayed above the WR card figure, it will turn into a blue link (see Figure 5-38, “Schematic View (Displaying Highlighted Card Name)” (p. 5-121)). Select it to display its information in the Pack Details panel on the Network Element Details window. Figure 5-38 Schematic View (Displaying Highlighted Card Name)

The schematic view marks the Line that where you enter this window from by displaying “Last Visited” in red text. For the arrow links turn red as you traverse or scroll through the nodes. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-121 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This window also displays user-defined line facing directions as you scroll through the nodes. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

To use the configuration displayed on the schematic view, click Apply. Result: The configuration is saved.

Note: To save this configuration for TOADM nodes, all lines must be connect all lines by either a mesh connection or a thru connection. Note: If you do not click Apply, your changes are not saved. If you attempt to close the window, a warning window is displayed (see Figure 5-39, “Warning Window (Unsaved Schematic)” (p. 5-122)). Figure 5-39 Warning Window (Unsaved Schematic)

Either click Yes to exit without saving, and go to Step 9, or click No to continue your configuration. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

To print the configuration displayed on the schematic view, click Print. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Click Schematic.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-122 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Figure 5-40, “Finished Schematic View” (p. 5-123) is displayed. Figure 5-40 Finished Schematic View

Clicking Schematic is a toggle to show or hide the schematic view of the node. It does not prevent the configuration designed in the panel to be deleted if hidden. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Go to Step 9 to finish the configuration. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-123 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

You can click run design (see Figure 5-41, “Run Design Icon” (p. 5-124)) to have the EPT automatically draw the node schematic for you. Figure 5-41 Run Design Icon

Afterward, you can edit the components by selecting Nodes > Edit from the Information Bar. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View or Modify Nodes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view nodes, select Nodes from the Network section of the Information Bar. A table of all nodes configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 5-42, “Node List” (p. 5-124)). Figure 5-42 Node List

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details a node, select the row for the desired node, right-click it, and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-124 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The (Edit) Node Details window is displayed, similar to Figure 5-43, “Node

Details (Schematic View)” (p. 5-125). Figure 5-43 Node Details (Schematic View)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Edit the node as desired, then click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Manage Add/Drop Blocks ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Node List, select the row for the desired node, right-click it, and select Manage CDC A/D Blocks.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-125 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Edit CDC A/D Blocks window is displayed (see Figure 5-44, “Edit CDC

A/D Blocks Window” (p. 5-126)). Figure 5-44 Edit CDC A/D Blocks Window

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Delete Nodes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete one or more nodes, select the row(s) for the desired node(s), right-click the node in the Selection Bar and select Delete. A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 5-45, “Warning Window (Delete Node)” (p. 5-127)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-126 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-45 Warning Window (Delete Node)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the node (and corresponding NEs). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-127 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Site and Topology Definition and Configuration

Nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 5-128 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

6

6 dditional Equipment A Definition and Configuration

Overview Purpose

This section describes how to configure or view information on various additional elements used in network design. The procedures to create objects described in this chapter are performed using point and click operations in the network map. Contents Links

6-2

Spans

6-37

Glass-Throughs

6-39

L2 Switch

6-40

Errors

6-43

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Links Before you begin

Before you can create a link on a site, you must first configure an appropriate NE for the kind of link you want at each site (see Chapter 5, “Site and Topology Definition and Configuration”) and a segment between them (see “Create Segments” (p. 5-78)). Observe the following rules before you begin configuring links for your network design: •

DWDM links are supported on ROADM, TOADM and DFOADM nodes. The EPT can design either 44- (100 GHz) or 88-channel (50 GHz) links. You can configure the link capacity by editing the capacities of the individual segments on each link. To configure only the odd-numbered 44 channels associated with the SFD44B, you must use a manual design. 88-channel (50-GHz) links must use TOADM filters at pass-through sites. FOADM configurations are supported for point-to-point connections only, and must use SFD40/SFD40B or SFD44/SFD44B filters. DWDM links are also supported at the intersection of the set of the WTOCMx supported at either end of the link.

•

CWDM links are supported on CFOADM and ECFOADM nodes. CFOADM can terminate/originate CWDM links with ECFOADM. CFOADM-to-CFOADM CWDM links are supported.

•

Single Channel links are supported on TOADM, DFOADM, CFOADM, and ECFOADM nodes.

Some tips when configuring links are as follows: • •

Set power levels based on link loss – Amplifier gain is 2 to 3 dB higher than the fiber loss for ILAs Dispersion map requires using 30KM DCM on egress amp for [SSMF] G.652 fiber whenever the fiber length is greater than 30 km. When selecting an amplifier, consider: – Flat gain region and minimal power input of the amplifier – Small channel count and Booster Amp (only increases OSC reach)

Create DWDM Links

Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a DWDM link and configure OAs or DCMs.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Right-click on a source site and select Create DWDM-FLEX WTOCMx Link, Create DWDM-100GHz WTOCMx Link (DFOADM nodes) or Create DWDM-50GHz WTOCMx Link (ROADM nodes). Click the destination site. One of the following windows is displayed, which allows you to specify various attributes of the link: •

Figure 6-1, “Create DWDM-Flex Link Window ” (p. 6-4)

•

Figure 6-4, “Create DWDM-100GHz Link Window ” (p. 6-7) (only applicable to PSS-32, PSS-16 and PSS-4 NEs) Figure 6-2, “Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window (with Coherent/Custom Guardband)” (p. 6-5) and Figure 6-3, “Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window ” (p. 6-6) (only applicable to PSS-32 and PSS-16 NEs)

•

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-1 Create DWDM-Flex Link Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-2 Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window (with Coherent/Custom Guardband)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-3 Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-4 Create DWDM-100GHz Link Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 6-1, “DWDM Link Parameters” (p. 6-7) . Table 6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

Parameter

Description

Allowed Values

Name

User-defined name to identify the DWDM link.

Up to 55 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the DWDM link.

Up to 50 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

Parameter Link Type

(continued) Description

Indicates the type of DWDM link. Only displayed on the DWDM Link Details window.

Allowed Values DWDM-50GHz DWDM-100GHz (not in CDC-F designs) DWDM-FLEX (CDC-F designs only)

Maximum Channel Count For routing

For per-channel power

Specifies the maximum number of channels or wavelengths that can be used for routing over this link. This will be considered along with any other restrictions (such as fiber type restrictions) in the calculation of the maximum usable channels for routing on this link.

Use Global Value (currently = 44 or 88)

Specifies the channel count that will be considered when allocating per-channel optical power, note that raising this value lowers the per-channel power.

Use Global Value (currently = 44, 88, 96 or 120)

Note: Adjust this value with careful consideration of the impact on future growth of the network and interaction with the maximum channel count for routing.

•

100 Ghz: 8 to 44

•

50 Ghz or FLEX: 45 to 88

•

100 Ghz: 8 to 44

•

50 Ghz: 45 to 88

•

FLEX: 120(CDC-F designs only)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

Parameter Maximum Usable Channels

Long Haul Wavelength Tracker Decoder (WTOCM) Usage

(continued) Description

Specifies the maximum number of usable channels for routing trails on the link, considering the For routing field and other restrictions, such as Link fiber type restrictions. and the intersection (union) of the wavelengths supported by all the fibers in the link (see the # λ (Nom.) column in Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24) and the # λ Supported column in Figure 11-13, “Link Report” (p. 11-20)).

44

Indicates whether a WTCOM pack is used in this network design.

No

Only displayed on the DWDM Link Details window. PTPIO Usage

Only displayed on the DWDM Link Details window.

OMS Administrative Cost

Allowed Values 88 114

WTOCM WTOCMA WTOCM-F Yes No

This is an arbitrary cost value assigned to each DWDM link for GMPLS designs based on the number of spans in that link. Configure GMPLS auto-design to prefer or avoid a particular link by adjusting the administrative cost of that link down (prefer) or up (avoid) compared to other links.

Auto-design routing restrictions (no auto-placed DCMs)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

Parameter Do not auto-design 50 GHz flex-grid channels below:

(continued) Description

Allowed Values

Specifies whether to separate channels by frequency level.

Use Global Value (currently = 9170)

Select 9170 to configure custom guardband per OMS.

Other 9170 9185 9210 9230 9255 9280 9305 9325 9350 9375 9400 9420 9445 9470 9495 9515 9540 9565 9590

A-End / B-End Site

(Selected Site)

Node

(Selected node)

N/A

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

Parameter Line #

(continued) Description

Allowed Values

Select the line number for optical line renumbering. For OMSP links, this will be the line number of the primary path at this endpoint.

DFOADM: 1 to 4; 1 to 8 with OMSP (PSS-32/ PSS-16)

CDC-F designs only.

•

1 to 2 for a WR2-88 ROADM.

•

1 to 10 with OMSP (Lines 9 and 10 available only when AnyDirAddDropBlocks are present)

•

1 to 8 for all others

TOADM: 1 to 8 (PSS–32/PSS–16) ROADM:

WR8-88A Colorless: 1 Line Type

TOADM DFOADM ROADM Add/Drop

Max # Add Channels

TOADM and FOADM: 8 to 44 (100GHz spaced channel link) and 45 to 88 (50GHz spaced channel link) OA/DCM Selection

Manual

Enable NE Auto Regress Power Adjustment A ⇒ B

Enable NE Auto Regress Power Adjustment B ⇒ A

Specifies the OA and the DCM used by each end of this link.

Automatic

These settings each control a Commissioning parameter. They are not applicable for links without an IROADM endpoint. If the user changes an intermediate ILA to glassthrough or vice versa, the link becomes manually designed.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Manual

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Link Route Displays the sequence from the sites connected by the DWDM link. For OMSP links, this pertains to the primary path only. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

DWDM Link Parameters

Parameter

(continued) Description

Allowed Values

Site Route Provides an alternative view to the sequence of segments that comprise this DWDM link. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Manual to choose the OA and the DCM used by each end of this link. Note: WR20-TFM ROADMs are permitted in networks with the OA selection algorithm set to Cost Optimized/(Growth), but only manual selection of bidirectional amplifiers in the WR20-TF ROADM is supported. Auto-design will fail to find amplifiers for the WR20-TF ROADM if the OA selection algorithm is set to Cost Optimized/(Growth). Result: The Link Attributes Selection window is displayed with configuration options

for optical amplifiers, and the RAMAN (see Figure 6-5, “Link Attributes Selection Window” (p. 6-12)). Figure 6-5 Link Attributes Selection Window

The Link Attributes Selection window defines the amplifiers and DCMs between TOADM/ROADM/FOADM sites. At the OADM node at the top of this window, the Transmit line describes the equipment associated with the egress part of the node with

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

the signal path flowing from top to bottom. The Receive line describes the equipment associated with the ingress part of the node with the signal path flowing from bottom to top. At ILA sites, the Line 1 (OA, Target Power, DCM, etc.) describes the equipment associated with the signal path flowing from top to bottom. Line 2 describes the equipment associated with the signal path flowing from bottom to top. Between sites, segment information is shown that describes the fiber type, length and loss. This information is useful for selecting DCMs and amplifier target power. The NE shelf type can also be set for an ILA. An ILA site may be changed to a Glass-through and vice versa. You may have more than one OMSP link with line protection per link route. You cannot have more than five OMSP links with line protection from a single ROADM node. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 6-2, “Link Attributes Selection Parameters” (p. 6-13) . Table 6-2

Link Attributes Selection Parameters

Parameter

Description

Allowed Values

Site Receive: OA

Specifies the OA to be used on the receive side of the link for one end. IROADMV cards: This value is automatically set to IROADMVrcv and cannot be changed. IROADMF cards: This value is automatically set to either IROADMFrcv and cannot be changed.

none A2325A A2P2125 A4PSWG(Low Gain) A4PSWG(High Gain) AHPHG AHPLG ALPHG AM2032A AM2125A AM2125B AM2318A AM2625A ASWG(Low Gain) ASWG(High Gain) IROADMFrcv IROADMVrcv

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-2

Link Attributes Selection Parameters

Parameter

(continued)

Description

Allowed Values

Receive: VOA

Specifies the receive side software controller variable optical attenuator (VOA) within the AM2125A/B used to simultaneously optimize amplifier NF and Non-Linear Effects.

Receive: Target Power

Specifies the target power per channel that the amplifier should achieve (dBm).

Varies depending on the maximum DWDM channel count.

Receive: Mid-stage DCM

Specifies the mid-stage DCM to be placed in the receive OA.

none

IROADMx cards: Indicates the mid-stage DCM for IROADMV.

DMTWR020 to DMTWR120 (in increments of 20)

DMSMF010 to DMSMF140 (in increments of 10)

DMLEF020 to DMLEF120 (in increments of 20) DMBSM010 to 240 DMBLE0101 to 240

Receive: Inline DCM

Specifies the inline DCM to be placed in the receive OA. IROADMx cards: Indicates the inline DCM for IROADMF.

none DMSMF010 to DMSMF140 (in increments of 10) DMTWR020 to DMTWR120 (in increments of 20) DMLEF020 to DMLEF120 (in increments of 20) DMBSM010 to 240 DMBLE0101 to 240

Receive: PTPIO

Specifies insertion loss added due to PTPIO presence on the line.

Receive: Loss Rcv LBO

Specifies the attenuator at the input of an ingress amplifier typically used to prevent overload.

0.0 to 10.0; 12.0 14.0

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-2

Link Attributes Selection Parameters

Parameter

(continued)

Description

Allowed Values

Pre-amp Pre-amp

Sets the loss for the output of the preamplifier.

None RA2P RA3P

Loss

Indicates the amount of loss allowed (for the RA2P/RA3P setting only).

0 dB to 2 dB

Accounts for the connector losses between the ingress amplifier and the RAMAN amplifier. Gain

Indicates the gain for the RAMAN amplifier.

Booster Booster Booster Loss

Sets the loss for the input of the booster amplifier.

None

Indicates the amount of loss allowed (for the PB1 setting only).

.5 dB to 2 dB

PB1

Segment Length

Indicates the length of the segment.

Loss

[The value for this field is read-only.] [The value for this field is read-only.]

Span Length

Indicates the length of the span.

[The value for this field is read-only.]

Fiber Type

[The value for this field is read-only.]

Loss

[The value for this field is read-only.]

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-2

Link Attributes Selection Parameters

Parameter Transmit: OA

(continued)

Description Specifies the OA to be used on the transmit side of the link for one end. IROADMV cards: This value is automatically set to IROADMVxmt and cannot be changed. IROADMF cards: This value is automatically set to IROADMFxmt and cannot be changed.

Allowed Values none A2325A A2P2125 A4PSWG(Low Gain) A4PSWG(High Gain) AHPHG AHPLG ALPHG AM2032A AM2125A AM2125B AM2318A AM2625A ASWG(Low Gain) ASWG(High Gain) IROADMFxmt IROADMVxmt

Transmit: VOA

Specifies the transmit side software controller variable optical attenuator (VOA) within the AM2125A used to simultaneously optimize amplifier NE and Non-Linear Effects.

Transmit: Target Power

Specifies the target power per channel that the amplifier should achieve (dBm).

Varies depending on the maximum DWDM channel count.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-2

Link Attributes Selection Parameters

Parameter Transmit: DCM

(continued)

Description Specifies the DCM to be placed in the transmit OA. IROADMx cards: Indicates the midstage DCM for the IROADMV and the inline DCM for IROADMF.

Allowed Values none DMSMF010 to DMSMF140 (in increments of 10) DMTWR020 to DMTWR120 (in increments of 20) DMLEF020 to DMLEF120 (in increments of 20) DMBSM010 to 240 DMBLE0101 to 240

Transmit: PTPIO

Specifies insertion loss added due to PTPIO presence on the line.

Transmit: Loss Xmt LBO

Specifies an attenuator at the output of an egress amplifier that may be used to improve the amplifier NF and reduce Non-Linear Effects and also prevent against downstream amplifier overload.

0.0 to 10.0; 12.0 14.0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Make any necessary entries on the Link Attributes Selection window, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create CWDM Links

Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a CWDM link. To create a CWDM link, you must create two specific sites as follows: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create a PSS-4 ECFOADM NE at the first site by right-clicking on a site and selecting Create Network Element. Select PSS-4 as the NE type and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

In the Node Details – Add window, verify that ECFOADM (Edge CWDM Fixed OADM) is displayed in the Type field. Click Schematic.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Configure the CWDM node in the Schematic window by placing the Line and then the E_SFCn. Click Apply > OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select a row for the desired link, and select Change WTOCM Usage. If...

Then...

you want to configure a ECFOADM-toECFOADM CWDM link,

repeat Step 1 through Step 3, then proceed to Step 8.

you want to configure a ECFOADM-toCFOADM CWDM link,

continue with Step 5.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Create a PSS-32 CFOADM NE at a second site by right-clicking on a site and selecting Create Network Element. Select PSS-32 as the NE type and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

In the Node Details – Add window, verify that CFOADM is displayed in the Type field. Click Schematic . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Configure the CWDM node in the Schematic window by placing the Line and then the SFCn. Click Apply > OK. Note: It is recommended that you rename the node “CWDM” or similar to distinguish it from the DWDM node that the EPT will automatically create. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

On the map, select the source PSS-4 NE ECFOADM NE/PSS-32 CFOADM NE, and right-click it. A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Select Create CWDM-2F Link. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Right-click a destination PSS-4 NE ECFOADM NE/PSS-32 CFOADM NE (can be a second PSS-4 NE, or whichever NE not selected in Step 8).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create CWDM-2F Link window is displayed (see Figure 6-6, “Create

CWDM-2F Link Window (Two PSS-4 NEs)” (p. 6-19)), allowing you to specify settings related to the CWDM link. Figure 6-6 Create CWDM-2F Link Window (Two PSS-4 NEs)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 6-3, “CWDM Link Parameters” (p. 6-19) . Table 6-3

CWDM Link Parameters

Parameter Name

Description User-defined name to identify the CWDM link.

Allowed Values Up to 55 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-3

CWDM Link Parameters

Parameter

(continued) Description

Allowed Values

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the CWDM link.

Up to 50 characters

Support FEC Disabled/Off

Specifies whether forward error correction is supported on a CWDM link.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Specifies the number of different lines that can be selected for creating a CWDM link.

1

Line # (for A-End and B-End)

Site (for A-End and B-End)

(Selected site)

Node (for A-End and B-End)

(Selected node)

Line Type (for A-End and B-End)

Specifies the different nodes supported on A and B end.

CWDM Link Route

This panel shows the sequence from the sites connected by the CWDM link.

Site Route

Provides an alternate view of the sequence of segments that comprise this CWDM link.

Enabled (Selected checkbox) 2

ECFOADM CFOADM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Make any other entries on the CWDM Link window as desired, and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The following window is displayed (see Figure 6-7, “CWDM/SCHAN

Warning” (p. 6-21)): Figure 6-7 CWDM/SCHAN Warning

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Single Channel (SCHAN) Links

To create an SCHAN link, perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Do one of the following: • •

Create a PSS-4 at each site. Create a PSS-4 NE at one site and a TOADM/DFOADM/CFOADM NE (PSS-32/16/4) at the other site.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Connect the two sites with a segment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Right-click on either site and select Create SCHAN Link.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Single Channel Link window is displayed (see Figure 6-8, “Create

Single Channel Link Window” (p. 6-22)), allowing you to specify settings related to the single channel link. Figure 6-8 Create Single Channel Link Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 6-4, “Single Channel Link Parameters” (p. 6-22) . Table 6-4

Single Channel Link Parameters

Parameter Name

Description User-defined name to identify the single channel link.

Allowed Values Up to 55 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-4

Single Channel Link Parameters

Parameter Description

(continued)

Description Optional field to list additional information about the single channel link.

Support FEC Disabled/Off

Allowed Values Up to 50 characters

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Site

(Selected site)

Node

(Selected node)

Line #

1 to 32 (ECFOADM) 1 to 50 (CFOADM, DFOADM, TOADM, ROADM)

Line Type Single Channel Link Route

SCHAN This panel shows the sequence from the sites connected by the single channel link.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Make any other entries on the Single Channel Link window as desired, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View or Modify Links ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a link, select Links on the Information Bar. A table of all SCHAN, CWDM, and DWDM links configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-9 Links List

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for a link, • •

Select the row for the desired link, right-click it and select Edit. To edit the Long Haul Wavelength Tracker Decoder (WTOCM) Usage value, select Change WTOCM Usage and select the desired value.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The DWDM, CWDM, or SCHAN Link Details window is displayed (see

Figure 6-10, “DWDM Link Details Window (100 GHz)” (p. 6-25), Figure 6-11, “DWDM Link Details Window (50 GHz)” (p. 6-26), Figure 6-12, “CWDM Link Details Window” (p. 6-27), and Figure 6-13, “SCHAN Link Details Window” (p. 6-28)). Figure 6-10 DWDM Link Details Window (100 GHz)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-11 DWDM Link Details Window (50 GHz)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-12 CWDM Link Details Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-13 SCHAN Link Details Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To establish link connectivity, select a row for a link in the Link table. The terminations of the selected link are displayed with an NE icons that are labeled with the name of the NE’s terminating the link. You can highlight as many links as desired by selecting multiple rows in the table. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Make changes as desired, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create OMSP DWDM 50 or 100 GHz Link

EPT supports Diverse path and Dual Homed Protection over OMSP links (ROADM and DFOADM). OMSP unidirectional non-revertive protection adds support for ROADM nodes and WR8-88A, WR8-88AF and WR2-88 cards on PSS-16 and PSS-32 (see additional considerations in “OMSP Considerations” (p. 6-30)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Before you can create an OMSP DWDM 50 or 100 GHz link, you must first: 1. Configure Line Protection between the A-end Site and at least one other site in the network with segments that support DWDM 50 or 100 GHz links (see “Configuring Segments for OMSP Link Primary and Secondary Paths” (p. 5-86)). 2. Create an NE with the following node provisioning: • In the Max Degree field, select 5. •

In the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks, field, select 0.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Do one of the following: • •

Right-click on a source site and select Create OMSP_DWDM-50GHz Link, and select the OMSP link start endpoint NE and the node. Right-click on a source site and select Create OMSP_DWDM-100GHz Link, and select the OMSP link start endpoint NE, the node, and Line Protection identifier.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select a valid endpoint site for the B-end of the OMSP link: the NE, node (ROADM or DFOADM) at the site, and the Line Protection identifier. Result: The Create DWDM-50GHz Link or Create DWDM-100GHz Link window is

displayed (see Figure 6-4, “Create DWDM-100GHz Link Window ” (p. 6-7) and Figure 6-2, “Create DWDM-50GHz Link Window (with Coherent/Custom Guardband)” (p. 6-5)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Repeat step 3 on the other end of the OMSP link (the second site). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Create an NE, and in the Add Node window, select the Optimize DGE field checkbox. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Repeat step 2 for the second site. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OMSP Considerations

OMSP unidirectional non-revertive protection is supported on DFOADM and ROADM nodes when Wavelength Tracker is enabled. OMSP is not supported in CDC-F or GMPLS networks. OMSP is supported on PSS-16 and PSS-32 on the following OTs: 112SCX10, 130SCX10, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11QPEN4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, WR2-88, WR8-88A and WR8-88AF. This includes ROADMs at the endpoints of the OMSP link and ROADM DGEs within the OMSP link. Only the following LDs are supported on OMS protected by OMSP: •

Ingress: ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG

•

Egress: None, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, A2325A

A ROADM supports up to 5 OMS protected links (that is, 10 bidirectional OSPF interfaces). MESH4 cards are not supported in the endpoint ROADMs of an OMSP. IROADMx cards are not supported in OMSP. All DWDM filters are supported in case of OMSP protection: •

SFD5 (supported also in cascaded configuration)

• • •

SFD8 (supported also in cascaded configuration) SFD40/40B (+ITLB) SFD44/44B (+ITLB)

Each OMS protected path may contain 0 or more ILAs and/or DGEs. Linear, mesh and ring network configurations are supported. The two paths of an OMSP link must be link diverse (that is, they must have no shared links). The two paths are not required to be Site diverse or NE diverse (for example, if there are two DGE nodes in one NE at a site, then one DGE could be in one path and the other DGE in the alternate path of an OMSP link). ROADM mesh and thru connections are only supported in a ROADM with OMSP protected optical line configurations provided that both optical lines that are involved in the mesh or thru connection are configured for OMSP. Any channel that is routed between an OMSP ROADM optical line and a non-OMSP protected ROADM optical line will be regenerated between the optically disjoint ROADM nodes within the same NE. Trail routing in the map will display the routing via both physical links included in OMSP link. Routes inside manual routing panel includes both WDM links and OMSP links. View Link Routes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view link routes from the Information Bar, click Links.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A table of all SCHAN, CWDM, and DWDM links configured in the network

is displayed (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select one or more rows for the desired links, right-click and select Show Route(s). Result: The Routing window for each selected link is displayed with the OMSP link between two endpoints (see Figure 6-14, “Routing Window” (p. 6-31)), and the map highlights the DWDM link routes within the OMSP link. Figure 6-14 Routing Window

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View User Logs on OMSP Links

For OMSP links you can view the User Activity Log entries. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Information Bar, click Links. Result: A table of all SCHAN, CWDM, and DWDM links configured in the network

is displayed (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select one or more rows for the desired OMSP links, right-click and selectShow Logs. Result: The Link Logs window is displayed. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create a System of OMSP Links

You can create a system comprised of all DWDM links within the OMSP link. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Information Bar, click Links. Result: A table of all SCHAN, CWDM, and DWDM links configured in the network

is displayed (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select two or more rows for the desired links, right-click and select Create System. See “Creating a System” (p. 9-3) for considerations when choosing links for a system. Result: The system will be verified for validity. If the system is valid, the System

Details window is displayed (see Figure 9-5, “ System Details Window” (p. 9-5)). If the system is not valid, an error message is displayed, which may be similar to Figure 9-2, “ System Error Message (Invalid System)” (p. 9-4)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Calculating DCMs

EPT can automatically recalculate the DCMs (dispersion map) in an OMS/Link. This eliminates the need to estimate the dispersion map after manually editing amplifiers. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Information Bar, click Links. Result: A table of all DWDM links configured in the network is displayed (see Figure

6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a rows for the desired link(s), right-click and select Calculate DCMs. Result: The following confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 6-15, “Calculate

DCMs Window” (p. 6-32)). Figure 6-15 Calculate DCMs Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The DCM calculation is now displayed in the Node Detail Schematic View. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Calculate OSC SFPs

EPT can automatically calculate the OSC SFPs for all the DWDM links within the OMSP link. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Information Bar, click Links. Result: A table of all DWDM links configured in the network is displayed (see Figure

6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a row(s) for the desired link, right-click and select Calculate OSC SFP. Result: The following confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 6-16, “Calculate

OSC SFP Confirmation Window” (p. 6-33)). Figure 6-16 Calculate OSC SFP Confirmation Window

This will recalculate the optimal OSC SFP values for all the spans in the selected link(s). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Optimizing Amplifier Power ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Information Bar, click Links.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-33 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A table of all SCHAN, CWDM, and DWDM links configured in the network

is displayed (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To optimize all the DWDM links within the OMSP link, right-click the desired link in the table and select Optimize Amplifier Power. Note: This option is only available when the OA Selection Algorithm field is set to High Performance on the Auto-Design and Verification tab of the Network Parameters window. Result: If successful, the Optimize Amplifier Power window is displayed (see Figure

6-17, “Optimize Amplifier Power Window” (p. 6-34)). Otherwise, a error message is displayed. Figure 6-17 Optimize Amplifier Power Window

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Link Channel Utilization ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view or modify details for channel utilization for a link, see “Channel Utilization Interface Report” (p. 11-82). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Modifying WTOCM Usage

OMSP supports WTOCMx cards and Wavelenth Tracker Detection (WTD) monitoring. Since all optical line in a node must be with WTOCMx card or all without, the two OMSP links with the ROADM or FOADM endpoint nodes must be provisioned the same.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-34 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WTOCMx provisioning must be the same at either end of a link. Therefore the ROADM (DGE) within the OMSP link must have WTOCM provisioning which matches both endpoint nodes. WTOCM usage may be changed for the specified links(s) without having to delete and redesign the link. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Information Bar, click Links. Result: A table of all SCHAN, CWDM, and DWDM links configured in the network

is displayed (see Figure 6-9, “Links List” (p. 6-24)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a row for the desired link, right-click it, and select Change WTOCM Usage. If...

Then...

a WTOCM change is valid for this network design,

the WTOCM column on the Links Information Bar changes to your selection (Yes or No).

a WTOCM change is invalid for this network design,

an error messages is displayed.

All the links in a node must either all have WTOCM, WTOCMA, or WTOCM-F packs, or all lines must have WTOCM set to No. If you change the WTOCM setting on a link and it violates this rule, then an error is displayed (see Figure 6-18, “WTOCM Cannot Be Changed” (p. 6-35)). You will then have to adjust the collection of links that are selected to ensure that this rule is not violated. Figure 6-18 WTOCM Cannot Be Changed

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-35 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Links ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete a link from the Information Bar, select the row for the desired link, right-click it, and select Delete Site n to Site n. Note: When deleting a link unassociated with a trail or service, you will not have a chance to confirm deletion. The link will be deleted immediately. Result: A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 6-19, “Warning Window

(Delete Link)” (p. 6-36)). Figure 6-19 Warning Window (Delete Link)

Note: When deleting an OMSP link, the OMSP link, when an OMSP Link is selected, the OMSP link, all contained DWDM links, filters, amplifiers, WR cards and trail routes will be removed. You cannot remove OMSP protection while preserving the contained WDM links. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the link. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-36 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Spans View Spans

Spans are placed between NEs, and can contain multiple sites and glass-throughs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a span, select Spans from the Network section of the Information Bar. A table of all spans configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 6-20, “Spans” (p. 6-37)). Figure 6-20 Spans

If the fiber on the span is homogeneous, a single fiber type name will be displayed. If the fiber on the span is heterogeneous, Multiple is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To view span details for one or more segments, select the row(s) for the desired span(s), right-click the span and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-37 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Span Details window is displayed (see Figure 6-21, “Span Details”

(p. 6-38)). Figure 6-21 Span Details

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-38 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Glass-Throughs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Glass-Throughs Overview

A glass-through is a glass-to-glass fiber connection that splices segments in a span between NEs. Glass-Throughs are not configurable. If you create segments within a span as a different fiber types, you can insert a site where the segments meet, and that site will become a glass-through. View Glass-Throughs ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a glass-through select Glass-Thru from the Network section of the Information Bar. A table of all glass-throughs configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 6-22, “View Glass-Throughs” (p. 6-39)). Figure 6-22 View Glass-Throughs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To view glass-thru details for one or more glass-thrus, select the row(s) for the desired glass-through(s), right-click and select Edit. Result: The Glass-Thru Details window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

In the Loss field, select Global if you want to apply the same loss characteristics throughout, or select User Specified to enter the actual loss you want to allow. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-39 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

L2 Switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L2 Switch Overview

Creating an L2 Switch at a site allows you to configure Timing card (PTPIO and PTPCTL) instances for the site. After card instances are configured, use the Edit L2 Sync Network option from the Site context menu to create relationships between these cards and existing L2 Switch and 11DPE12A OT cards for timing distribution. Refer to “1588v2 Configuration” (p. 13-3). Please also refer to the 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide for information on the IEEE 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP). Create L2 Switch ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Right-click a site and select Create L2-Switch.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-40 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

L2 Switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Editing L-2 Pack window is displayed (see Figure 6-23, “Editing L-2

Pack Window” (p. 6-41)). Figure 6-23 Editing L-2 Pack Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To add packs to the L2 switch, do the following: 1. Select PTPCTL or PTPIO in the Category field. 2. You may enter an optional Name and Description. 3. If you selected PTPIO in the Category field, click OK. (You can add a PTPCTL pack by repeating Step 1 and Step 2.) 4. If you selected PTPCTL in the Category field, , select the desired values in the Client Signal, Client Interface and Port fields. 5. To save your settings, click Add NEW.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-41 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

L2 Switch

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Repeat Step 2 as needed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK to close the window. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View, Edit or Delete L2 Switch ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view/modify an L2 Switch, select L2-Switch from the Information Bar. A table of all sites configured with L2 switches in the network is displayed (see Figure 6-24, “L2 Switch List” (p. 6-42)). You can select other sites and the information will change to reflect the selected site. Figure 6-24 L2 Switch List

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To delete an L2 switch, right-click the site and select Delete L2-Switch. Result: The following warning window is displayed: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

You can delete multiple L2 switches simultaneously, as follows: • •

Select more than one row in the Site table by pressing Shift while selecting a contiguous group, and right-click, or Press Ctrl, select one row at a time, and right-click.

You can then delete all of the selected sites simultaneously with a multi-edit panel. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-42 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Errors Overview

This section describes errors displayed in the Errors tab of the Information Bar. View Errors ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view an error in the network, select Errors from the Information Bar. A table of all unresolved errors and warnings in the network are displayed (see Figure 6-25, “All Errors” (p. 6-43)). Figure 6-25 All Errors

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Both warning messages and errors appear in the error tab. To sort the errors and warnings, click on the Error Description column header. Result: All the lines in the error table are sorted, grouping all the warning messages

and error messages separately. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

For some errors, you can view specific information about its cause. Right-click the error in the Information Bar and select Details (see Figure 6-26, “Errors Information Tab (Context Menu)” (p. 6-44)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-43 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Error Details window is displayed (see Figure 6-27, “Error Detail”

(p. 6-44)). Figure 6-26 Errors Information Tab (Context Menu)

Figure 6-27 Error Detail

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

MCS Add/Drop Block Error

If a violation of Alien/OT segregation rule occurs during manual routing that disallows a route to be used, perform the steps in the following procedure as a workaround. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the configuration of the MCS add/drop block. If...

Then...

the error occurs during manual routing,

create a new MCS add/drop block and re-trying to do the routing. (The EPT does not automatically create new MCS add/drop blocks during manual routing.)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-44 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If...

Then...

the error occurs automatic design,

increase the value of the Maximum MCS Add/Drop Blocks per Optical Node field on the Site Parameters Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab). (The EPT may not able to create a new MCS add/drop block if the maximum MCS add/drop block for the node has been reached. )

This error could also occur due to a specific distribution of demand and 3R over the different MCS add/drop block, so that the EPT cannot route a new demand due to Alien/OT segregration and MCS add/drop diversity constraint. In this case, re-route the demands to clear this error. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

WSS Overhead Error

When designing FOADM networks, power deviation is the prime source of concern for keeping costs down. Once the power deviation exceeds 4 dB (or 6 dB when TOADM compatibility is removed), then additional CWR8 devices are required. The WSS Overhead error condition indicates that the power divergence (ripple) seen by the CWR8 exceeds the maximum that this device can correct (4 dB). To address the WSS overhead problem, find the source of excessive power divergence: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify that no amplifiers are operating outside the standard gain range. Additional ripple is introduced as the gain enters the extended gain region (see Figure 6-28, “WSS Overhead” (p. 6-46)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-45 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-28 WSS Overhead

The standard gain ranges for amplifiers is as follows: • • • •

AM2032A: {26-40} A2325A, A2P2125, AHPHG, AHPLG, AM2125A, AM2125B: {15-31} AM2318A: {7-24} AM2625A: {16-30}

•

ASWG: 7.00 (default) – Gain Range = Low: {7-22} –

Gain Range = High: {13-29}

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The EPT often selects an AHPLG pack to improve the Noise Figure (NF) and reduce the OSNR at the expense of power divergence. Modify the amplifier selection. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Reduce the target output power of the amplifier to reduce amplifier gain and result in less ripple. (This also trades off NF and power divergence.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Add a RA3P amplifier to reduce gain for long spans (at significant cost–and the RA3P amplifier adds additional power divergence). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Typically the EPT can support 5 ILA spans. If a design has more than 5 spans without a CWR to balance power, this may be the cause of ripple. Add a CWR.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-46 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Using the Physical Layer Report, find the amplifers that are operating outside the standard gain region under the oaname and gain columns. This will reduce the linear ripple contribution (as shown in the lin rip column) of each amplifier to approximately 0.75 dB per amplifier (see Figure 6-29, “Physical Layer Report” (p. 6-47)). Figure 6-29 Physical Layer Report

Result: After changing the amplifiers, the cumulative linear ripple (as shown in the

cum lin rip column) drops from 4.76 dB at Walker to 3.32 dB. This is sufficient for the overall design to verify without any errors. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

RAMAN Tilt Exceeds Maximum Allowed Value ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Long Haul applications often exhibit the RAMAN Tilt exceeds maximum allowed value error condition (see Figure 6-30, “RAMAN Tilt Exceeds Maximum Value” (p. 6-48)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-47 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-30 RAMAN Tilt Exceeds Maximum Value

You can clear this condition by configuring the network to use Wavelength Tracker Long Haul (WT-LH). The WT-LH technology is embedded in the WTOCM card. This card calibrates the Wavelength Tracker for high power, long span, and long path applications. In metro regional applications, the calibration offered by the WT-LH technology is typically not needed.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-48 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-31 RAMAN Tilt Risk Flowchart

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

You can address the RAMAN tilt problem by reducing the amplifier output power. In the following example uses an 11x19dB linear network (11 spans, 19 dB/span fiber loss, 0 dB margin, 0 dB connector loss) to illustrate how to correct a moderate excursion of the RAMAN tilt by reducing the amplifier output powers. 1. Click WDM on the Information tab. Check the Src OSNR Margin value (it should be at least 1 dB).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-49 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2. Examine each link to determine if the EPT has chosen the most appropriate set of amplifiers. In this case, adding an egress amplifier increases both the OSNR (desirable) and the RAMAN tilt (undesirable).

3. The large RAMAN tilt (9.63 dB) corresponds to a NPS = 0.505617 rad (as shown on the Physical Layer report). This corresponds to an integrated power of ~13 dB. The WT integrated power limit is approximately 8 dB. Therefore, you can start reducing the output power of the amplifiers by approximately 5 dB (3.57 – 5 = -1.43 dB). By trial and error, you an increase power to approximately -1.25 to -1.2, as shown in the working design below.

Note: To maximize the OSNR, use the ALPHG amp whenever the output power is less than or equal to 0.57 dBm and the amplifier gain is greater than 19 dB.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-50 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Using the same 11x19dB network in the example above, you can address the RAMAN tilt problem using the Bypassing the WaveTracker Rules method. 1. Set the Maximum Number of Channels Before WT-LH value on the Auto Design and Verification tab of the Network Parameters window. and then simulate the network. Using our previous example yields a working design at 26 channels (WSS overhead errors require correction as described in “WSS Overhead Error” (p. 6-45)). However, this approach yields a much higher OSNR, making it more suitable for 40G traffic. Additionally, much longer designs can be supported using this technique. The example below shows a 24x19dB design that is enabled by bypassing the WT rules after the 1st ten channels are equipped.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-51 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Additional Equipment Definition and Configuration

Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following lines require the minimum # chans

“The following lines requires the minimum # chans” warning is displayed for certain designs after the Run Design or Verify Design process is completed. This warning means that possible traffic patterns exist that may require more than one channel present on the link to maintain the minimum power on an ingress amplifier . The EPT determines if a minimum power warning is necessary by examining all possible traffic patterns and verifying that the nominal power minus any power ripple exceeds the amplifier minimal power requirement. If you receive this message but no errors are displayed in the Error Information Bar, there is no pending issue. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To determine exactly which traffic demand is causing this phenomenon, create an any-to-any traffic matrix, simulate the design and check the Error Information Bar or the Physical Layer Report for power levels less than -32.8 dBm [for AHPHG or ALPHG packs] or less than -24 dBm [for AHPLG packs]. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 6-52 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

7

7raffic Definition and T Configuration

Overview Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to create trails, services, packet demands and connections on a network, as well as commissioning files and uploading demands. The procedures to create objects described in this chapter are performed using point and click operations in the network map. For help on viewing errors in the EPT, see “Errors” (p. 6-43). Contents Elements of Traffic Definitions in the EPT

7-2

Trails and Services

7-4

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

7-39

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Elements of Traffic Definitions in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Elements of Traffic Definitions in the EPT Traffic Types

Traffic types supported by the EPT: • •

Trails and services: Adds a transponder or muxponder to the network configuration. Packet demands: Assigns bandwidth to GbE flows associated with 11STGE12 and 11DPE12 OTs.

Protection Schemes Figure 7-1 EPT Design Protection Schemes for Trails and Services

Trails and services support the following associated protection schemes: • • • •

Unprotected – point to point trails Diverse Path –two transponders at each end with both route and node diverse paths; dual fiber pair client handoff. ESNCP 1+1 – single transponder at each end using a head end bridge/tail end switch Client 1+1 Y Cable – two transponders at each end with both route and node diverse paths; single fiber pair client handoff

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Elements of Traffic Definitions in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• • • •

Dual Homed (source and destination dual homed) Dual Homed (source dual home/Destination diverse) OPS Dual Interface – two transponders at each end with both route and node diverse paths; single fiber pair client handoff OPS Single Interface - single transponder at each end using a head end bridge/tail end switch

Rules for Channel Spacing

The EPT will design for any channel spacing requirements. Some supported configuration and signal type combinations require 100 GHz channel spacing to be maintained until after the Trail signal has passed through an ITLB/ITLU or 50 GHz WSS on the CWR8-88 (Drop/Thru) or WR8-88A/WR8-88AF/WR2-88 (Add/Mesh/Thru). Table 7-1, “Channel Spacing Rules” (p. 7-3) lists these configuration/signal type combinations. Table 7-1

Channel Spacing Rules

Configuration

Signal

Add/Drop on a TOADM line with SFD/CWR8 without an ITLB

43SCA1, 43SCX4 43SCX4E, 43STA1P, 43STX4P, 43STX4, 43SCUP-compatible

Add/Drop on a TOADM CWR8 or CWR8-88 colorless (CLS) port (that is not part of an AnyDirection Add/Drop Block)

43SCA1, 43SCX4. 43SCX4E, 43STA1P, 43STX4P, 43STX4, 43SCUP-compatible

Add/Drop on a TOADM with SFD/CWR8 (without an ITLB)

112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 130SCA1, 130SCX10, 130SNX10, 260SCX2, 130SCUP-compatible, 130SCUPB-comaptible, 130SCUPC-compatible

Add/Drop on a Config D’ or D” AnyDirection Add/Drop Block CWR8-88 colorless (CLS) port on a TOADM Config D’ or D” AnyDirection Add/Drop line

43STA1P,43STX4P, 43STX4, 112SNA1, 112SNX10

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Trails and Services Process

This section describes the process to configure and route trails and services (formerly WDM demands) as follows: 1. Configure trails and services as desired (see “Create Trail” (p. 7-4) and “Create Service” (p. 7-14)). 2. Route trails, as applicable (see “Route a Trail” (p. 7-20)). 3. Route cascaded trails, as applicable (see “Route Cascaded Trail” (p. 7-28)). 4. Route OT-to-OT trail connections, as applicable (see “Create OT-to-OT Trail Connection” (p. 7-13)). 5. Route services, as applicable (see “Route Service on a Trail” (p. 7-30)). You cannot route a service over a non-routed trail. If you are including both trails and services in your network design, see “Simultaneous Trail and Service Configuration” (p. 7-4). Simultaneous Trail and Service Configuration

You can create a service without creating a trail first. To create all parts of a demand in a single step, create a service (see “Create Service” (p. 7-14)), select New in the Primary Trail field, and leave the default values for the new trail. Create Trail

Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a trail. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Right-click on a source site and select Create Trail. Select the destination NE and node.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Trail window (see Figure 7-2, “Create Trail Window ” (p. 7-5) and

Figure 7-3, “Create Trail Window (Clustering Enabled)” (p. 7-6)) is displayed, which allows you to specify various attributes of the trail. Figure 7-2 Create Trail Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-3 Create Trail Window (Clustering Enabled)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6). Table 7-2

Trail Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Name

User-defined name to identify the trail.

Up to 54 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the trail.

Up to 50 characters

Deployed Name

When design is deployed, this name is used as a reference to identify deployed trails.

Up to 50 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-2

Trail Parameters

Parameter Line Rate Filter

(continued) Definition Filters the list of OTs in the OT field by their line rate.

Allowed Values All 1G 4G 10G 40G 100G 200G

Calculate BOL OSNR/BER

Instances

This field must be enabled to view the BOL WDM Routing and BOL Physical Layer Reports.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox)

Duplicates this configuration for the number entered.

1 to 100

Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Trail Type Routed Over

Specifies whether the trail is cascaded onto another trail.

None: This trail will be an OCh Trail (Primary trail). Trail: This trail will be a

Cascaded Trail. This option is not allowed when the selected OT in the Source or Destination field is not an OT that is part of a valid cascade configuration. Source Protection (see Table Note)

Specifies the type of protection to be configured at the source/destination site. The destination side's protection type will be consistent with that of the source side. Note: ESNCP1+1, Dual Homed, OPS Dual Interfaceand OPS Single Interface values are not available in GMPLS-enabled networks.

Unprotected Diverse Path ESNCP1+1 Client 1+1 Y Cable Dual Homed OPS Dual Interface OPS Single Interface Note: When selecting this option, the Source/ Destination 2 panels are displayed.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-2

Trail Parameters

Parameter

Destination Protection

(continued) Definition

Displays available protection types based on the value in the Source Protection field.

Allowed Values

Unprotected Diverse Path ESNCP1+1 Client 1+1 Y Cable Dual Homed OPS Dual Interface OPS Single Interface

Disjoint Trail

Disjoint Trail Name

Displayed when the Source Protection field is not set to Uprotected.

New

Displayed when the Disjoint Trail field is set to New.

Trail n

Trail n Trail n-n Trail n-n

DWDM Channels Requested

Assigned

Allows you to manually set channel frequency.

Compute 9170 - 9600 (Not available for GMPLS-enabled networks.)

Indicates the channel assigned by the Run Design function.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-2

Trail Parameters

Parameter Restoration Type

(continued) Definition

Allowed Values

Specifies the type of restoration for this trail.

None

Note: This field is only displayed in GMPLS-enabled network designs.

Pre-calculated: Refers to the Guaranteed Restoration feature, which allows the network to reserve network resources for an LSP to be restored over should a failure occur on the active LSP.

Note: Changing this value changes the trail status to “Routed, Incomplete.”

Upon Failure

Note:Trails with Guaranteed Restoration must be routed first to avoid potential issues with lack of ports or available channels. Routing of trails will fail if there is at least one failure scenario for which the protection route is not fully disjoint from nominal route. Note: Trails using pre-calculated (“guaranteed”) restoration must have the Source Protection field set to Unprotected. Projects Project

Lists all the projects that contain this trail.

—

Source/Destination Site

Defines the site in the network design.

List of all sites in the network design.

NE Type

Specifies the type of network element.

1830 PSS

Specifies the OT type to be used for the trail.

List of all valid OTs

OT

1830 PSS-4 (Not applicable for GMPLS-enabled designs.)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-2

Trail Parameters

Parameter Mode

(continued) Definition Specifies the operational line mode of the OT cards specified.

Allowed Values None 1UD200: 100G, 100G/200G 260SCX2: 100G A/D, 100G/200G, 200G Mux 2CL 260SCX2(LN): 100G A/D, 100G/200G, 200G Mux 2CL 2UC400-compatible: QPSK, SPQPSK, PM-8QAM, PM-16QAM D5X500: DP-8QAM, PM-8QAM, PM-8QAM-SC, PM-16QAM, QPSK, SPQPSK

Line Port

Allow Sharing

Specifies a specific line when the OT has more than one line port.

If an OT has two line ports, you can use two independent trails, reducing cost. Enable this field if you want to allow multiple trails to use the same OT (if compatible).

Compute Additional values displayed are based on pack type: •

G1 through G8

•

L1 through L8

•

X1 through X6

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

If the Allow Sharing field is selected for the MVAC OT, up to eight alien signals are aggregated onto a single MVAC. Optical Node

Specifies from which node to originate (on source side) or terminate (on destination side) the trail/service.

Compute List of nodes at Source site

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-2

Trail Parameters

Parameter FEC

(continued) Definition Specifies the type of FEC to be configured on the OT.

Allowed Values A-EFEC* EFEC S-EFEC* SDFEC-G2 GFEC* NOFEC (only on specific OTs) (* = A-EFEC = EFEC, S-EFEC = EFEC2, GFEC = RSFEC.)

DWDM Line Pluggable

Specifies the line pluggable type for select OTs.

[Varies depending on the selected OT type.]

Add/Drop Config

This field is only applicable when the OADM Type field is set to ROADM.

Compute Local, Fixed Channel AnyDirection, Fixed Channel AnyDirection, Colorless AnyDirection, Colorless or Fixed Channel

Notes:

1.

The Create Trail window is displayed with a different set of available parameters depending on what you select in the Source Protection and Destination Protection fields.

2.

OPS Protection: The OPS Single and Dual interfaces are not supported if the DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys field is set to Off on the Auto-Design and Verification tab of the Network Parameters window (see Figure 5-6, “Network Parameters Window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)” (p. 5-15) ).

3.

Some FEC field values have related NE values as follows (EPT value = NE value).

4.

The 130SNX10 and 130SCX10 OTs support Soft-Decision Forward Error Correction (SD-FEC) as a configurable option. The 130SCX10 line bit rate is OTU4 (129.280281 Gbps +/- 20 ppm) when provisioned for SDFEC mode, and OTU4 (111.8099736 Gbps */- 20 ppm) when provisioned for AFEC mode. The 130SNX10 line bit rate is OTU4 (130 Gbps) when provisioned for SDFEC mode, and OTU4 (112 Gbps) when provisioned for AFEC mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK to create the trail. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Cascaded Trail

Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a primary/Och trail using the cascading OT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a trail, right-click on a source site and select Create Trail. Result: The Create Trail window (see Figure 7-2, “Create Trail Window ” (p. 7-5)) is

displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the cascading OT (for example 11QPEN4) in the OT field, and other fields as desired (see Table 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Create a secondary trail using the cascaded OT between the same source and destination as the cascading trail as follows: 1. Routed Over: Trail 2. Source Protection: Unprotected 3. Source Client Port: • Compute – Allows the EPT to automatically decide which client port to use on the cascading OT at the source NE. It is also specified as the default when 11QPEN4 is the cascading OT. • C1 – C4 (corresponds to client ports C1 – C4 on the cascading OT at the source NE when the selected cascading OT has only 4 client ports such as 43STX4P, 43SCX4 and 43SCX4E). • C1 – C10 (corresponds to client ports C1 – C10 on the cascading OT at the source NE when the selected cascading OT has 10 client ports such as 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 130SCX10 and 130SNX10). 4. Destination Client Port: •

•

•

Compute – Allows the EPT to automatically decide which client port to use on the cascading OT at the destination NE. It is also specified as the default when 11QPEN4 is the cascading OT. C1 – C4 (corresponds to client ports C1 – C4 on the cascading OT at the destination NE when the selected cascading OT has only 4 client ports such as 43STX4P, 43SCX4 and 43SCX4E). C1 – C10 (corresponds to client ports C1 – C10 on the cascading OT at the destination NE when the selected cascading OT has 10 client ports such as 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 130SCX10 and 130SNX10).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5. Line Port: Select the line port of the cascaded OT that will connect to the source and destination client ports. 6. Select other fields as desired (see Table 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6)), and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create OT-to-OT Trail Connection

Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an OT-to-OT trail connection. This example uses two trails. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

1. Right-click on a source site and select Create Trail, and the Create Trail window (see Figure 7-2, “Create Trail Window ” (p. 7-5)) is displayed.. 2. Leave the Routed Over field selection as the default, None. 3. Leave the Source Protection field selection as the default, Unprotected . 4. In the Source panel, select the first site, for example Site 1 in the Site field. 5. In the Destination panel, select a different site, for example Site 2 in the Site field. 6. Select the OTs in the Source and Destination panels (such as 130SCX10, 130SNX10(LN), 11DPM8, 11DPM12, or 11QPEN4) in the OT field. 7. Select other fields as desired (see Table 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6)), and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create another trail as follows: 1. Leave the Routed Over field selection as the default, None. 2. Leave the Source Protection field selection as the default, Unprotected . 3. Select the same OT in the Source and Destination panels (for example 130SNX10(LN)) in the OT fields. 4. Select Compute in the Source and Destination panels in the Add/Drop Config fields. 5. Select other fields as desired (see Table 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6)), and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Route the trails (see “Route a Trail” (p. 7-20)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Run Design.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The OT-to-OT trail connection is created, and is displayed in the OT-OT tab of

the Information Bar (see Figure 7-35, “OT-OT Trail Connections” (p. 7-54)). This tab also displays OT-to-OT packet links. The Type column displays whether this element is an OT-to-OT packet link or an OT-to-OT trail. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

To view or modify OT-to-OT trail connections, refer to “View and Modify OT-to-OT Packet Link or Trail Connection” (p. 7-53). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create Service

Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Right-click on a source site and select Create Service. Select the destination NE and node.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Service window (see Figure 7-4, “Create Service Window”

(p. 7-15)) is displayed, which allows you to specify various attributes of the trail. Figure 7-4 Create Service Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 7-3, “Service Parameters” (p. 7-15). Table 7-3

Service Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Name

User-defined name to identify the service.

Up to 54 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the service.

Up to 50 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-3

Service Parameters

Parameter

(continued) Definition

Allowed Values

Deployed Name

When design is deployed, this name is used as a reference to identify deployed services.

Up to 138 characters

Line Rate Filter

Filters the list of OTs in the OT field by their line rate.

All 1G 4G 10G 40G 100G 200G

Protection Source Protection

Specifies the type of protection to be configured at the source/destination site. The destination side's protection type will be consistent with that of the source side. Note: ESNCP1+1, Dual Homed, OPS Dual Interfaceand OPS Single Interface values are not available in GMPLS-enabled networks.

Destination Protection

Displays available protection types based on the value in the Source Protection field.

Unprotected Diverse Path ESNCP1+1 Client 1+1 Y Cable Dual Homed OPS Dual Interface OPS Single Interface

Unprotected Diverse Path ESNCP1+1 Client 1+1 Y Cable Dual Homed OPS Dual Interface OPS Single Interface

Trail Definition Show Filtered Selections

(checkbox)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-3

Service Parameters

Parameter Primary/CascadeTrail

(continued) Definition

Enabled by default unless no trails exist between the selected source and destination sites for the primary path. The end points are transitive. A trail created with source site Site1 and destination site Site2 will be a match for a service with a source site of Site2 and a destination site of Site1, if all other conditions are met.

Allowed Values Compute: EPT selects a trail automatically. New: Creates two new trails automatically. List of existing trails between the selected sites

This list may include OCh trails (Primary trails) and cascaded trails. If no trails exist, the field will be set to Compute and be disabled. Secondary Trail

Disabled by default. Enabled only if Source Protection is not set to Unprotected.

Compute: EPT selects a trail automatically.

The end points are transitive. A trail created with source site Site1 and destination site Site2 will be a match for a service with a source site of Site2 and a destination site of Site1, if all other conditions are met.

List of existing trails between the selected sites

New

This list may include OCh trails (Primary trails) and cascaded trails. If no trails exist, the field will be set to Compute and be disabled. Use Private Trail

When enabled, indicates that this service is the only service allowed on the trail. No other services can share the trail.

(checkbox)

Projects .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-3

Service Parameters

Parameter Project

(continued) Definition

Allowed Values

Lists all the projects that contain this service.

—

Primary/Secondary Source Primary/Secondary Destination Show all unused client ports

When enabled, all client ports for the selected OT in each endpoint are displayed in the client ports table. When disabled, only the selected client ports will be displayed in the client ports table.

(checkbox)

Site

Defines the site in the network design.

List of all sites in the network design.

NE Type

Specifies the type of network element.

1830 PSS

Specifies from which node to originate (on source side) or terminate (on destination side) the trail/service.

Compute

Specifies the OT type to be used for the service.

List of all valid OTs

Optical Node

OT

1830 PSS-4 (Not applicable to GMPLS-enabled designs.) (list of nodes at Source site)

The available values in the OT field change based on what you select in the NE Type field. Mode

Specifies the operational line mode of the OT cards specified.

None 1UD200: 100G, 100G/200G 260SCX2: 100G A/D, 100G/200G, 200G Mux 2CL 260SCX2(LN): 100G A/D, 100G/200G, 200G Mux 2CL D5X500: DP-8QAM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-3

Service Parameters

Parameter FEC

(continued) Definition

Specifies the type of FEC to be configured on the OT.

Allowed Values A-EFEC* EFEC S-EFEC* GFEC* NOFEC (only on specific OTs)

Selected

Specifies which ports to include in this service.

Port

Indicates the client port number.

C1 to C22 (as applicable for the selected OT)

Signal

Signal type of the port.

100G LAN PHY

Note: The available values vary based on the selected port.

10G LAN PHY 10G FC OTM-0.2 GbE FC-100 FC-200 FC-400 FC-800 FE HDSDI SDSDI 3GSDI DVBASI SDR

Interface

Specifies the client side interface of the port at the source/destination. The destination side's interface will be consistent with that of the source side.

[Varies depending on the selected OT type.]

Note: Field name and available values vary based on the selected signal.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-3

Service Parameters

Parameter

(continued) Definition

Container

Allowed Values OPTSG ODU0

Protected

Specifies the protection option for client ports on Mux OTs. To have protected ports and unprotected ports on the same trail, you must create separate services.

No Yes

Displayed for Mux OTs only. Read-only. Notes:

1.

See notes from Table 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To specify client ports (available only for specific OTs), select them in the Source and Destination panels. The checkbox in the “Selected” column must be selected. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK to create the service. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Route a Trail

Manually routing trails equips the transponders (reflected in the BOM). You can manually route trails/services one at a time. For all protected trail/services, the shortest/lowest cost path from autorouting is given to the first path. Provision this path as the “working” path if the protection group is provisioned for revertive. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a route, start from the Information Bar, and click Trails. IF…

THEN…

the trail/service is already routed

Continue with Step 2.

the trail/service is not already routed

Go to Step 5.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the trail and right-click. A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Delete Route. Result: A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 7-5, “Warning Window

(Delete Trail Route)” (p. 7-21)). Figure 7-5 Warning Window (Delete Trail Route)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Yes. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the trail and right-click. A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select Show Route. If not routed, click Create Route. Result: The Trail Routing window is displayed (see Figure 7-6, “Trail Routing

Window” (p. 7-21) and Figure 7-7, “Trail Routing Window (GMPLS Designs)” (p. 7-22)). You can right-click on the component to view its schematic. Figure 7-6 Trail Routing Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-7 Trail Routing Window (GMPLS Designs)

The trail routing for GMPLS networks shows in both directions for each link supporting the trail the percentage of the following optical parameters as percentages, from left to right: •

osnr%: Displays the fraction of the OSNR budget of the route consumed.

• • •

nlp%: Displays the fraction of the NLP budget consumed. pmd%: Displays the fraction of the PMD budget consumed. WssCount%: Displays the fraction of the WSSs consumed.

Two sets of values are depicted on each span within arrows that indicate the transmission direction for which they apply. The values represent the budgets consumed for transmission from the head end to the end of that span. Acceptable values are shown in green. Values greater than 100% are displayed in red to indicate that the budget for that parameter has been exhausted and regeneration is needed. Note: If the route is protected, a window is displayed that allows you to change this setting. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Modify.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Site Selection window is displayed (see Figure 7-8, “Site Selection

Window” (p. 7-23)). Figure 7-8 Site Selection Window

The Site Selection window allows you to filter the sites considered when looking for a valid path. The default option makes all sites in the design optional, but you can move sites to the Required or Excluded columns. Sites in the Required column denote that only paths that contain those (and possibly Optional) are listed. Any path that has a site listed in Excluded column will not be listed in the search results. Note that in large networks, thousands of possible paths may exist and may take a long time to search unless you specify sites in the Required or Excluded columns to reduce the search time. The Site Selection window displays the following options when the Show Options checkbox is selected: • Show Excluded sites names on map: This shows the site name in a different form. • Allow automatic Exclude population for Protection path: When selected the Exclude list is populated with the sites used in the primary path (except Source and Destination). • Use last settings: This populates the list based on the last setting. This is overridden by the previous option for the protected path. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Select the desired sites for this route and click Add to move them to the Required column. Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Trail Routing window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Click Start. Result: The Trail Routing window is displayed with possible routes.

Paths displayed show the path-of-sites as the top layer. The Windows folder icon denotes that the Site Path searched for complete paths, which may include valid or invalid paths. The circle icon denotes that this path has not been searched. Click on the site path to begin the search. If more than one valid path exists in the Site Path, then the default selected path is the first one. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Select the path you want to use for the trail/service, and click Next. Result: The Trail Routing Solutions window is displayed (see Figure 7-9, “Trail

Routing Solutions Window” (p. 7-24)). Figure 7-9 Trail Routing Solutions Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click Details.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The OT Selection window is displayed. Figure 7-10, “OT Selection Window (Details from Either Node)” (p. 7-25) is displayed when you click Details from either

node, but Figure 7-11, “OT Selection Window (Details from Intermediate Node)” (p. 7-25) is displayed when you click Details from the intermediate node. Figure 7-10 OT Selection Window (Details from Either Node)

Figure 7-11 OT Selection Window (Details from Intermediate Node)

Clicking Details at a TOADM node displays the CLS (colorless) port selection option on the OT Selection window. Auto allows you to select the best available port and the EPT will put the trail/service on a filter port (if available). A trail/service can be explicitly forced onto an available colorless port by selecting the port from the CWR CLS port field. In Core HiPerf CDC-F designs, you can also select MCS Add/Drop port (see Figure 7-12, “OT Selection (CDC-F Design Options)” (p. 7-26)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-12 OT Selection (CDC-F Design Options)

Note: When routing 11QCUPC-compatible trails/services, you must edit the details of source and destination endpoints to select the 11QCUPC-compatible port (that is, either select a specific line port or select Compute). Otherwise, the following error will be displayed after clicking Finish: The routes references L1 shelves: please edit details in the following endpoints. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Decide whether to do a forced regeneration. IF…

THEN…

you want to do a forced regeneration

Continue with Step 13.

you do not want to do a forced regeneration

Proceed to Step 15.

Note: If you force a regeneration on a node and then add an Add/Drop block regeneration at another node, the force regenerated node is reset, and you will have to select the force regeneration option again. This is because the force regenerated state is saved on the current selected path; when you add the Add/Drop block the path is changed, causing a new route to be created. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

From Figure 7-11, “OT Selection Window (Details from Intermediate Node)” (p. 7-25), select Yes in the Force Regen field.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Trail Routing Solutions window is updated, displaying with the logical

path for the trail/service. Note: You can also force a regeneration by selecting a different channel from the pulldown menu in one leg of the route in the Trail Routing window (see Figure 7-13, “Trail Routing Window (Channel Selection)” (p. 7-27)). Figure 7-13 Trail Routing Window (Channel Selection)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Proceed to Step 17. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Select No in the Force Regen field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Confirm the path. IF…

THEN…

This path is correct

Continue with Step 17.

This path is incorrect

Click Back, then go to Step 10.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Click Finish to complete the operation. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

You can right-click the trail/service from the Information Bar and select Show Route to display the routed trail/service. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Route Cascaded Trail ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Route the cascaded trail created above in either of two ways: •

Select Run Design from the GUI panel.

•

Right-click the cascaded trail and select Create Route. Result:

Figure 7-14 Cascaded Trail Routing Solutions Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Next to accept the route path.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Figure 7-15 Route Path Accepted

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Finish to apply routing. Result: The cascaded trail is now routed on the same channel as the cascading trail). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create Service on Cascading Trail

One or more additional services belonging to the cascading OT can be created to the cascading trail created in the above procedure, in addition to the cascaded trail. These services need to be assigned to a client port on the cascading OT which is not used by a cascaded trail. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a service, right-click on a source site and select Create Service. Select the destination NE and node. Result: The Create Service window (see Figure 7-4, “Create Service Window”

(p. 7-15)) is displayed, which allows you to specify various attributes of the trail. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the cascading OT in the OT field, and select the source and destination ports for the service, ensuring that the ports selected are not in use by another service or a cascaded trail. If the selected service port is already in use, routing for this service will fail. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the Primary Trail as the cascading trail.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Route Service on a Trail ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If...

Then...

you selected Compute in the Primary Trail field,

continue with Step 2.

you selected a trail in the Primary Trail field,

The Demand Routing Solutions Window is displayed. Continue with Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Route the trail created above in either of two ways: •

Select Run Design.

•

Right-click the trail and select Create Route. Result:

Figure 7-16 Demand Routing Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Next to accept the route path. Result: The Demand Routing Solutions Window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Back to edit settings (if desired), then click Finish to apply routing. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Setting Channel Utilization ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Trails from the Information Bar. Result: All trails configured in the network are displayed (see Figure 7-18, “Trails ”

(p. 7-33) and Figure 7-19, “Services” (p. 7-33)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for a trail, select and right-click it, then select Channel Utilization. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

At one of the endpoints of a manually routed trail with cascade, click Details.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Channel Utilization Details window is displayed (see Figure 7-17,

“Channel Utilization Details Window” (p. 7-32)). Figure 7-17 Channel Utilization Details Window

This window allows you to select the shelf, slot and port of the cascading OT. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View and Modify Trail or Service ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a trail or service, select Trails or Services from the Information Bar.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: All trails or services configured in the network are displayed (see Figure 7-18,

“Trails ” (p. 7-33) and Figure 7-19, “Services” (p. 7-33)). Figure 7-18 Trails

Figure 7-19 Services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for a trail or service, right-click it and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-33 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Edit Trail or Edit Service window is displayed (see Figure 7-20, “Edit

Trail Window” (p. 7-34) and Figure 7-21, “Edit Service Window” (p. 7-35)). Figure 7-20 Edit Trail Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-34 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-21 Edit Service Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Make changes as desired. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

To view or modify details for channel utilization for a trail, see “Channel Utilization Interface Report” (p. 11-82). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

To view the Card View window, right-click the desired trail or service, and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-35 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Card View window is displayed (see Figure 7-22, “Card View: Trail/Service n Window” (p. 7-36)). Figure 7-22 Card View: Trail/Service n Window

This window provides a schematic of optical transponders for routed Trails and Services. This is an extension of the Show Route option where this panel shows the connections starting at the line port of the optical transponder through all client port connections. It provides a view at each end of the trail or service being selected. It will provide a primary path and secondary path if the service is protected. You can see details for each port at the bottom of this window in an “Info” section as you mouse-over each port. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

For the 20P200, you can also launch an expanded view of the internal routing of services (see Figure 7-23, “(Expanded Card View)” (p. 7-37)). To launch this window: 1. Route the service (see “Route Service on a Trail” (p. 7-30)). 2. Create a ring. 3. From the Card View window (see Figure 7-22, “Card View: Trail/Service n Window” (p. 7-36)), click the square symbol with the arrow that is displayed for the card.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-36 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-23 (Expanded Card View)

This window displays the routing paths of service as the enter one line ports and continue to the other line port, or terminate of the client ports of the card. The Trail/Service Legend panel allows you to highlight the details of a particular service. Make changes as desired, and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

On the Edit Trail or Edit Service window, click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-37 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Trails and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Trail/Service ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete one or more trails/services from the Information Bar, select and right-click them, then select Delete or Delete Selected Rows. Note: No undo or warning exists for this selection. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-38 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links Overview

This section is not applicable to GMPLS-enabled networks. Packet Connections

Packet connections are the physical client connections between packet switching OTs and equipment outside the 1830 network. A packet connection establishes a virtual port that is mapped to a muxponder physical port. This allows certain L2 flows to be associated with specific optical endpoints (different routers attached to different client ports on a muxponder, or different router ports associated with different muxponder client ports). The EPT allows you to configure packet connections at each site. A packet demand terminates on a packet connection. Packet connections are defined at a site and do not need any prerequisite equipment or provisioning at the site. Packet connections are bidirectional. Packet connections are only designed and supported on the client ports of the PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 11STGE12, 11DPE12 and 11DPE12E. The 11STGE12 only supports the Fullrate mode, while the 11DPE12/11DPE12E and PSS-4 support the QinQ, Fullrate, and Subrate modes. Note: For the Fullrate mode, up to one packet demand can be associated with the packet connection. For the Subrate mode, 1 to 10 packet demands (reserved bandwidth destined to another site or sites in the network) can be associated with the packet connection, depending on the bandwidth assigned to each packet demand. For QinQ mode, each “line port” packet connection can have 1 to 100 packet demands.The number supported depends of the committed information rate (CIR), or bandwidth assigned to each packet demand. The EPT checks that the total committed bandwidth into any packet connection port does not exceed the port bandwidth, and verifies that the aggregate some of packet flows does not exceed the trail/service bandwidth. The EPT restricts the total number of flows to the provisioning system limits. In an incomplete design, the packet connection is not yet assigned to a specific OT. The Packet connection's OT is assigned a node, OT, shelf, slot, and port after running the design. Packet Demands

Packet demands support transport and grooming of Layer 2 Ethernet flows multiplexed onto a 10G channel. A packet demand runs over a set of trails/services (see Figure 7-24, “Packet Demand Illustration” (p. 7-40)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-39 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-24 Packet Demand Illustration

Packet demands allocate a committed bandwidth between packet connection ports. The packet flows use the underlying trails/services and connect the individual packet ports (see Figure 7-25, “Diagram of Packet Flows and Connection Ports” (p. 7-40)). Multiple packet demands can use the same packet connection. Figure 7-25 Diagram of Packet Flows and Connection Ports

Packet Links

The EPT supports the automatic and manual configuration of trails or services provisioned as packet links. Trails with packet OTs automatically become packet links and support packet demands. Trails and services provisioned as packet links carry the packet traffic between packet switching OTs. A packet demand between two packet connections is supported without the packet link having been created, in this case, one or more packet links will automatically be created when the design is run. Packet links are displayed in the Trails Information Tab, Services Information Tab, Trails Report, Trail Routing Report, Services Report, Links Information Tab, and Link Report (see Chapter 11, “Reports”). The EPT supports OT-to-OT connections for packet demands. This link type is currently supported between two 11DPE12 OTs on the PSS-4, and PSS-32 shelves only.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-40 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Packet Connection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a packet connection, right-click on a site and select Create Packet Connection. The Create Packet Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-26, “Create Packet Connection Window” (p. 7-41)). Figure 7-26 Create Packet Connection Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-41 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-4, “Packet Connection Parameters” (p. 7-42) defines the values that can be entered for packet connection parameters. Table 7-4

Packet Connection Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Packet Connection Definition Name

User-defined name to identify the packet demand. The name is automatically populated as a concatenation of the site name and the number of the packet connection at that site.

up to 50 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the packet demand.

up to 50 characters

Site

Defines the site for this packet connection.

(All sites in network)

Bandwidth Remaining Available

Minimum available bandwidth of the packet connection. OT Type

OT

Rate Supported

Specifies the OT type to be used for the packet connection.

For PSS-32/PSS-16: 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11STGE12

Rate of the packet connection.

1G

PSS-4: 11DPE12, 11DPE12E 10G 100M Note: 10G is restricted to the 11DPE12 in QinQ mode.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-42 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-4

Packet Connection Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Mode

CIR mode of the OT.

QinQ: The max client port (VTS) packet demands is 10. The line port can transport up to 100 packet demands (customer services) using double tagging (inner and outer VLAN tags). Fullrate: Only one packet demand can be associated with the packet connection. Subrate: Up to 10 packet demands can be associated with the packet connection.

Shelf/Slot Port Type Port

Interface

The physical port assigned to the packet connection. Specify a specific client (or line port) or have EPT choose one.

Compute

SFP or XFP type.

1000BASE-LX-singlerate

C1 - C12

1000BASE-LX-singlerate 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-T S-C8S1-1Dx 1471 S-C8S1-1Dx 1491 S-C8S1-1Dx 1511 S-C8S1-1Dx 1531 S-C8S1-1Dx 1551 S-C8S1-1Dx 1571 S-C8S1-1Dx 1591 S-C8S1-1Dx 1611 Demand Usage Available End Points Assigned End Points

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-43 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the desired parameters and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View Packet Connections ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a packet connection, select Pkt Conn from the Information Tab. A table of all packet connections configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 7-27, “Packet Connections” (p. 7-44)). Figure 7-27 Packet Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for a packet demand, select the row for the desired packet connection, right-click it and select Edit. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create Packet Demand ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a packet demand, right-click on a site and select Create Demand > Packet Demand. Select the destination NE and node. The Create Packet Demand window is displayed (see Figure 7-28, “Create Packet Demand Window” (p. 7-45)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-44 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-28 Create Packet Demand Window

Table 7-5, “Packet Demand Parameters” (p. 7-45) defines the values that can be entered for packet demand parameters. Table 7-5

Packet Demand Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Packet Demand Definition Name

User-defined name to identify the packet demand.

up to 50 characters

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the packet demand.

up to 50 characters

Deployed Name

User-defined name to identify the packet demand, sent to the NE to keep in the MIB, associated with OT line ports.

up to 138 characters

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-45 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-5

Packet Demand Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Source/Destination Protection (see Table Note)

Specifies the type of protection to be configured at the source/destination site. The destination side's protection type will be consistent with that of the source side.

Unprotected Diverse Path ESNCP1+1 Client 1+1 Y Cable Dual Homed Unprotected: Two OTs equipped. one channel assigned across one path. Diverse Path: Four OTs equipped. One channel assigned across two paths. ESNCP1+1: Service and protection paths terminate on a dual port OT, service selection is electrical. Note: An 11DPE12 10G packet connection with a packet demand provisioned with ESNCP is permitted in QinQ mode only. Client 1+1 Y-Cable: One channel assigned across two paths. Dual Homed: A variation on diverse path where the service and protection paths terminate on different nodes.

Services

Indicates how many packet demands to create.

1 to 100

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-46 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-5

Packet Demand Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Packet CIR/Bandwidth (Mb/s)

Allows you to define L2 flows between PSS-4 sites/ports.

Minimum available bandwidth of the source and destination packet demands. You cannot configure this field value unless the Mode is Subrate and packet connections are the endpoints. A value of 0 means no committed bandwidth.

Flow Continuity Monitoring

Projects

Available only on a subset of L2 flows in QinQ mode. When the 11DPE12/E line port interface is provisioned as OTU2, the pack supports this feature only on the first 32 VTS (flows). If the line port interface is provisioned for 10GbE, then it is not supported.

Disabled (Deselected checkbox) Enabled (Selected checkbox)

Lists all the projects created in the network design.

—

Primary/Secondary Source Site

Defines the source/destination site for this demand.

(All sites in network)

NE Type

Specifies the type of network element.

1830 PSS

Specifies from which node to originate (on source side) or terminate (on destination side) the packet demand.

Compute

Specifies the OT type to be used for the packet demand.

For PSS-32/PSS-16: 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11STGE12

Node

OT

1830 PSS-4 (list of nodes at Source site)

For PSS-4: 11DPE12, 11DPE12E rate: 100M Rate

Rate of the packet connection

1G 10G

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-47 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-5

Packet Demand Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Mode

CIR mode of the OT.

QinQ: The max client port (VTS) packet demands is 10. The line port can transport up to 100 packet demands (customer services) using double tagging (inner and outer VLAN tags). Fullrate: Only one packet demand can be associated with the packet connection. Subrate: Up to 10 packet demands can be associated with the packet connection.

Packet Connection Details Packet Connection Name (shared endpoint grouping)

All the created packet connections for that site are listed.

Compute

Primary

The first choice path for this demand.

N/A

Secondary

For protected demands, this is the backup path for this demand.

N/A

Notes:

1.

The allowable values in the Destination panel's Protection Type field change based on values selected in the Source panel's Protection Type field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the desired parameters and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Route Packet Demand ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a route, start from the Information Tab, and click Packet.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-48 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the packet demand and right-click. A menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Create Route. Result: The Packet Demand Routing window is displayed (see Figure 7-29, “Packet

Demand Routing Window” (p. 7-49)). Figure 7-29 Packet Demand Routing Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Start.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-49 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The window is displayed with a list of possible routes (see Figure 7-30,

“Packet Demand Routing Window” (p. 7-50)). Figure 7-30 Packet Demand Routing Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the path you want to use for the packet demand, and click Next. Result: The Packet Demand Routing window is updated, displaying with the logical path for the demand. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Confirm the path. Click Finish to complete the operation. You can right-click and select Show Route to display the routed demand (see Figure 7-31, “Routed Packet Demand” (p. 7-50)). Figure 7-31 Routed Packet Demand

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-50 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View Packet Demands ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a packet demand, select Packet from the Information Tab. A table of all packet demands configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 7-32, “Packet Demands” (p. 7-51)). Figure 7-32 Packet Demands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for a packet demand, select the row for the desired packet demand, right-click it and select Edit. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Delete Packet Demand ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete one or more packet demands from the Information Tab, select the row(s) for the desired demand(s), right-click it, and select Delete or Delete Selected Rows. Note: No undo or warning exists for this selection. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create OT-to-OT Packet Link ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a packet link, right-click on a 1830 PSS NE site and select Create OT-OT Packet Link. Select the destination NE and node. The OT-OT Packet Link window is displayed (see Figure 7-33, “OT-OT Packet Link Window” (p. 7-52)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-51 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 7-33 OT-OT Packet Link Window

Table 7-6, “OT-OT Packet Link Parameters” (p. 7-52) defines the values that can be entered for the OT-OT packet link parameters. Table 7-6 Parameter

OT-OT Packet Link Parameters Definition

Allowed Values

OT-OT Packet Link Definition Name

User-defined name to identify the packet link.

(Up to 50 characters)

Description

Optional field to list additional information about the packet link.

(Up to 50 characters)

Site

Defines the source/destination site for this packet link.

(All sites in network)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-52 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-6

OT-OT Packet Link Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

NE

Specifies the type of network element.

Node

Specifies from which node to originate (on source side) or terminate (on destination side) the packet demand.

Allowed Values

(List of nodes at Source site)

A end/B end OT

Specifies the OT type to be used for the packet demand. You must use the same OT for both ends.

OT Link Port

11DPE12 11DPE12A (supported only in QinQ mode) 11DPE12E Backplane L1 L2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the desired parameters and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View and Modify OT-to-OT Packet Link or Trail Connection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view an OT-to-OT packet link, select OT-OT from the Information Bar.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-53 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: All OT-to-OT packet links and OT-to-OT trail connections configured in the

network are displayed (see Figure 7-34, “OT-OT Packet Links” (p. 7-54) and Figure 7-35, “OT-OT Trail Connections” (p. 7-54)). The Type column displays whether the entity is an OT-to-OT packet link or an OT-to-OT trail. Figure 7-34 OT-OT Packet Links

Figure 7-35 OT-OT Trail Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for an OT-to-OT packet link or OT-to-OT trail connection, right-click it and select Edit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-54 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The OT-to-OT Packet Link window or Edit OT-to-OT Trail Connection

window is displayed (see Figure 7-33, “OT-OT Packet Link Window” (p. 7-52) and Figure 7-36, “Edit OT-OT Trail Connection Window” (p. 7-55)). Figure 7-36 Edit OT-OT Trail Connection Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Make changes as desired, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-55 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Traffic Definition and Configuration

Packet Connections, Demands, and Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 7-56 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

8

8 esign Automation and D Verification

Overview Purpose

This chapter describes how to: • • • •

Run a network design Remove a network design Verify a network design Select a price file

• •

Initiate an incremental design Import/export a design

You can manually route all demands (see “Route a Trail” (p. 7-20)) and then verify the network design. Contents Design Options

8-2

Running a Design

8-4

Removing a Design

8-8

Verifying a Network Design

8-10

Price Files

8-14

Running an Incremental Design

8-16

Importing and Exporting a Design

8-23

Merging Network Designs

8-25

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Design Options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design Options Overview

The EPT supports incremental design in projects, a feature that allows the user to freeze a completed design and then add new components to the design without changing the frozen part of the design. Sites, segments, connections, trails and services may all be added to a frozen design without modifying any part of the frozen design. The design must be in the Complete Valid state to initiate a new design increment. Design States

The status of a design element is defined as one of the following states: •

•

Not Designed: The network has never been processed by the EPT, has been returned to the Not Designed state by having all of the design results removed, or no links, trails or services exist in the network. For existing trails/services: route them, then run the network as a new design to it to become “Complete.” Incomplete: The following will cause the design to become incomplete: – – – – – – – –

•

One or more trails, services, WDM links, or Packet Demands are “Not Designed” “Equip unused segments with DWDM Links” is selected in Network Parameters, but any segment does not have a link on it. One or more Trail is “Routed, Incomplete” There is a PTPIO card entered via the GUI at a site which has not been connected to any Optical Line at that site. There is a PTPIO card entered via the GUI which has not been manually connected (via the GUI) to any PTPCTL or 11DPE12A card. There is a PTPCTL card entered via the GUI which has not been manually connected (via the GUI) to any PTPIO. If the network is in GMPLS mode: if one or more WDM demands, or WDM links is Complete, Unverified. If the state of the Network is one of “Complete, valid”, “Complete, Invalid”, or “Complete, Unverified”, and subsequently: If deleted a SRG in the failure scope, changed a SRG in the failure scope, or changed the failure scope for the network.

Complete, Unverified: All links, trails and services are complete, but not all have been validated. A demand is complete if it has been routed. A link is complete if the link has been routed, spans created, all OAs selected, all DCMs selected, and all link parameters specified.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Design Options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

•

•

Complete, Invalid: All links, trails and services are complete, but not all are valid, or one of the system level tests has failed validation. – To clear this error for links, trails or services, check the Error Information Tab (see “Errors” (p. 6-43)) and the Design Status Report (see “Design Status Details ” (p. 11-75)). – To clear this error for a network, check the Error Information Tab (see “Errors” (p. 6-43)) and the Network Information Report (see “Network Information ” (p. 11-16)). Complete, Valid: All links, trails and services are complete and valid. All system, link, trail and service validation tests are successful.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running a Design Overview

After creating the needed sites, segments, and traffic demands, trails and services, the design analysis engine can be run to determine if the design is valid, and if so, to specify the NE equipage needed to satisfy the network design criteria. Before running a design, you must specify each site as either OADM, ILA, DGE, or Glass Through (see Figure 5-11, “Site Details Window” (p. 5-50)). Manual Configuration of Design Elements

Using the Run Design feature is the recommended procedure for configuring DWDM networks. Even if manual editing is required, having the EPT define the NE, nodes, and links is faster than manually configuring these elements from the GUI. The scenarios where a network cannot be completely designed using the Run Design feature are: •

• •

Hybrid Networks consisting of multiple NE types. Use the Run Design feature for the 1830 PSS NEs. Auto-design of PSS-4 is supported only when Cost Optimized is selected in the OA Selection Algorithm field on the Network Parameters window. 88 channel systems using even channels on a portion of the network Split Shelf NEs (separating east/west fiber interfaces onto different shelves)

Design elements automatically designed by the EPT are shown as Auto in the respective Information Tab such as (NE, Node, and Link). If you manually create or edit any of these elements, the state changes to Manual. Further iterations of using Run Design have no effect on elements in the manual state. To reestablish automatic re-configuration of elements in the manual state, delete these elements by selecting them in the Information Tab, or by selecting Action > Remove Whole Design. Note: The EPT may override some manual configurations when running the design. For example, when nodes/settings are not supported in previous configurations, or to choose default configuration settings as a more cost-effective option. Simulation Time

Running a large design may take over one hour to complete. By limiting the amplifier choices on the Amplifier Auto Placement tab of the Network Parameters window, design time may be reduced since the EPT would process fewer amplifier permutations. For iterative designs (to clear errors or add additional traffic to a complete design), using the Verify Design feature “Verifying a Network Design” (p. 8-10) results in faster simulations. The Verify Design feature will not alter NE hardware, but it may result in power setting changes for elements in the Auto state.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS Design Considerations

In GMPLS designs when nominal routes are deleted, you must run the design to ensure that all associated restoration regens are removed before the design file is saved. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To run the design, click Run Design on the toolbar. Result: The Run Design Options window is displayed (see Figure 8-1, “Run Design

Options Window” (p. 8-5)). You can choose whether to retain all network design elements, remove only the EPT-design elements, or remove EPT- and user-design elements. Figure 8-1 Run Design Options Window

Do not remove any designed elements (also referred to as Run Design option 1)

allows elements that have been slotted to stay where they have been placed, and speeds processing when using the PLDM optimizers. The other options, Remove all auto-designed elements (also referred to as Run Design option 2) and Remove all user-designed and auto-designed elements (also referred to as Run Design option 3), do not remove deployed projects or objects. Segments, demands, trails, services, packet connections and OT-to-OT links that are not in the Current or Deployed Project are treated as if they do not exist. Deployed objects will not be changed by any of the design options. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select one of the options and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The following window is displayed: Figure 8-2 Design Status Window

If the design is successful, the following Design Status window is displayed (see Figure 8-3, “Design Completed Window (Success)” (p. 8-6)). Figure 8-3 Design Completed Window (Success)

If the design fails to be created, a Design Status window is displayed (see Figure 8-4, “Design Completed Window (Incomplete)” (p. 8-6) and Figure 8-5, “Design Completed Window (Failure)” (p. 8-7) ). Figure 8-4 Design Completed Window (Incomplete)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-5 Design Completed Window (Failure)

Note: The contents of the design failure message will vary depending on the reason for the failure. After the analysis engine is run, a design state will be displayed in the toolbar area. The message indicates whether the design was complete or if it was incomplete due to the inability to route particular demands, trails and services over the network as specified. To see the details of any design issues, select Design Status Details from the Reports menu. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Removing a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing a Design Removing an Auto Design or Whole Design ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete the network configuration displayed on the map, select one of the following (see Table 3-2, “Action Menu Descriptions” (p. 3-4) for descriptions of these menu options): •

Action > Remove Auto Design

•

Action > Remove Whole Design Result: For auto design, Figure 8-6, “Remove Auto Design Window” (p. 8-8) is

displayed. For whole design, Figure 8-7, “Remove Whole Design Window (Incremental)” (p. 8-8) is displayed. Figure 8-6 Remove Auto Design Window

Figure 8-7 Remove Whole Design Window (Incremental)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Removing a Design

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Verifying a Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verifying a Network Design Overview

The Network Verification feature allows you to modify attributes (such as fiber characteristics), verify if the changes are valid, and decide whether to accept the changes (if valid) or revert back to the original values. If a network was designed using preliminary or estimated fiber characteristics, you can test whether the design is still valid when actual fiber characterization data is available. You can also test how much margin a design has by changing fiber characteristics and verifying that the design is still valid. For example the user can increment the loss margin and test whether the design is still valid. Note: Starting from EPT Release 8.1, Design Verification (using the Verify Design or Run Design buttons) no longer changes the OSC SFP types. This also applies when opening a Complete and Valid design configured in earlier releases, and then opening it in EPT Release 8.1. If you encounter an error, see “Demand and Design Errors” (p. 14-9). Procedure

Note: You cannot perform this procedure if the network design is in the Not Designed or Incomplete state. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Click the Verify Design button in the menu. The Verify Network window is displayed (see Figure 8-8, “Verify Network Window” (p. 8-11)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Verifying a Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-8 Verify Network Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To change values for the selected site, modify the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 8-1, “Verify Network Parameters” (p. 8-11). The defaults for various parameters are the current values in the design. Table 8-1

Verify Network Parameters

Parameter

Default Value

DWDM Loss Margin

1 dB

DWDM OSNR Margin

0 dB

Fiber Type

SSMF

Fiber Cost

2000 $/km

Connector Loss

0.5 dB

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Verifying a Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 8-1

Verify Network Parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Default Value

Glass-Thru Loss

0 dB

Loss Coefficient

0.25 dB/km

PMD Coefficient

0.05 ps/(square root) km

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To undo changes made in Step 2, click Revert. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Verify. If successful, the following window is displayed (see Figure 8-9, “Network Verification Confirmation Window” (p. 8-12)). Result: The following confirmation window is displayed (see ): Figure 8-9 Network Verification Confirmation Window

Click OK. On the Verify Network window, click Close. Note: If you close the EPT after this procedure, the following window is displayed (see Figure 8-10, “Network Update Confirmation Window” (p. 8-12)): Figure 8-10 Network Update Confirmation Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Verifying a Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To update your network design with the new values and close EPT, click Yes. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Price Files

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Price Files Overview

Price files are available from your representative. You can only import price files with a software release version compatible with the current EPT release. Selecting or Importing a Price File ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To select or import a price file select Action > Select Price File. The Pricing Options window is displayed (see Figure 8-11, “Pricing Options Window (Default)” (p. 8-14)). Figure 8-11 Pricing Options Window (Default)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select one of the following values in this window: • •

To use the prices from the EPT tool, leave the default value selected, Use built-in prices. To use the prices from a file saved on your computer, first select Use new equipment price list and specify the location of the file. Then the Use existing equipment prices option will become enabled and the selected file will be listed under it. Note: When using the built-in price values, the Bill of Materials report does not show any cost information.

Once you have imported a price file, the next time you open the Pricing Options window, the last file you imported will be shown for the Use existing equipment prices option. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Price Files

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running an Incremental Design Overview

The EPT supports incremental, phased design and/or concurrent design of a network divided into several Projects (in GMPLS designs, Future projects are not supported). This feature: •

•

Allows you to freeze a completed, deployed design and then add new components to the design without changing the deployed portion of the design. Sites, segments, connections, trails, services and demands may all be added to a frozen design without modifying any part of the frozen design. The Project must be in the “Complete, Valid” state to be moved to the status to Deployed. Allows a design to be divided into projects. Some projects may be deployed, some in active rework or design, and some may be marked as Future and set aside (or are be worked on by other engineers and not of immediate concern).

Working with Projects in Incremental Design

EPT supports subdividing the network into “Projects.” Projects consist of the segments, trails, services and demands design elements, and may be in one of three Status values: • •

Future Current

•

Deployed

All other network design elements have derived status from the status of segments, trails, services and demands. For example, a link is considered deployed if all the segments it traverses on are deployed. The behavior of the project types is as follows: •

Projects with status set to Future—Elements contained in a project with status set to Future are ignored by EPT for network design. The Run Design and Verify Design functions have no effect on Future design elements. The power, gain, and other values for these elements is unchanged during a Run Design operation. If the Project is provisioned for Retain Routing set to no, trails and services are unrouted when moved to a Project with this status, so they do not take away channel bandwidth from the Current project. If the Project is provisioned for Retain Routing set to yes, trails and services retain their routes when moved to a Project with this status, then trails and services in the Current project will not be able to use the channel bandwidth that these trails and services retain.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The cards contained in the future Project(s) are treated as real for some aspects of the design, the shelf slots they occupy cannot be used by cards designed in the Current project, the shelf power they consume is considered when designing power filter sizes during run design, the optical line power on future links is considered when designing the current links, and so on. •

•

Projects with status set to Current—There is only one project with the status set to Current. Elements contained in the Current project are designed and validated. New cards added during Run Design are placed in the Current project. Projects with status set to Deployed—Elements contained in a project with status set to Deployed are resources available for EPT to route additional traffic trails, services, and demands, but are not modified by the Run Design function. The power, gain, and other values for these elements is unchanged during a Run Design operation (see Step 4 for the method to change power and gain on Deployed elements). In addition, elements in the Deployed state may not be modified by manual design procedures. Network Parameters that affect elements in the network (for example, Fiber Margin) may not be modified when there are projects in the Deployed state, as changes to these parameters may invalidate a design or cause changes to the Bill of Materials for these elements which have already been installed or deployed.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying Projects

Table 8-2, “Changing Project States” (p. 8-18) describes restrictions when moving elements from one project status to another. Table 8-2

Changing Project States

Design Object Segment

Status Change

Result

Add to a Future Project

The segment is now a member of this additional project, it retains its membership in any other projects where it is already a member.

Delete from the Current Project

Any current trails and services routed over the segment will be unrouted after confirmation; Current project trails and services cannot be routed over segments in Future projects. If the segment is a member of the Current project only, this action will move the segment to the project named “None” (the segment is never left as a member of no project).

Trails, Services, and Packet Demands

Deployed to Current

The state and route remain unchanged. (If a packet link is moved from a Deployed to a Current project, the packet demand routed over it also moves to the Current project.)

Current to “Future”

The route will be retained only if the project is provisioned for Retain Routing set to yes; otherwise the route will be removed. (If a packet link is moved from the current project to a Future project, the packet demand routed over it will also be unrouted.)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating and Viewing Projects ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To create a new Project, click Project in the menu bar or skip to Step 6 and select New. Result: The Current Project window is displayed (see Figure 8-12, “Current Project

Window” (p. 8-19)). Figure 8-12 Current Project Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Initiate a new project by clicking New.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Project window is displayed (see Figure 8-13, “Project Window”

(p. 8-20)). Figure 8-13 Project Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter a name and description, and click OK . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

To make this the Current project, select the Project Name from the Name field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

After clicking OK, all projects are displayed as shown in Figure 8-14, “View Projects” (p. 8-20). Figure 8-14 View Projects

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

To view a project and its contents from the Information Selection bar: • •

Select Projects from the Information Selection bar. Figure 8-14, “View Projects” (p. 8-20) is displayed. Right-click on a project row and select Edit. The Project window is displayed (see “Creating and Viewing Projects” (p. 8-21)).

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Adding or Deleting Design Elements To or From a Project

To add or delete a segment, trail, service, or packet demand to or from a Project, perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Information Selection tab, select Segment, Trail, Service, or Packet .

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Running an Incremental Design

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

When the desired section is highlighted, right-click to display the context menu. Remove from Project will delete the element from the project. If the element would not longer be in any project it will be added to the project named None automatically. Elements are never deleted when using project movement options. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Importing and Exporting a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing and Exporting a Design Overview

Two file menu options allow you to import a design from an Excel spreadsheet as a new design or as an incremental design: •

New Design: Allows you to import a design from an Excel spreadsheet

•

Increment Design (see “Running an Incremental Design” (p. 8-16))

The network characteristics specified in an Excel spreadsheet include: •

Site Name and properties

• •

Fiber Segment names and properties WDM (from-to) trail/service names and properties

The Export Design menu option allows the current network design file to be exported into an Excel spreadsheet containing network characteristics (without any implementation data) consistent with the Import file. Importing a Design ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To import a design, select File > Import Design from the EPT menu. (If you previously established this design, proceed to Step 2.) Result: The Import window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the xls (spreadsheet) file you want to use, and click Import. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Exporting a Design ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To export a design, select File > Export Design from the EPT menu. Result: The Export window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type in a name for the xls (spreadsheet) file to name the network design, and click Export.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Importing and Exporting a Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Network Parameters window is displayed. You must set the same values that were present before the export, as the export does not export Network Parameter values. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Merging Network Designs EPT Merge Interface

EPT supports the merging of two network designs, where a secondary EPT design file is imported into an open EPT file (primary design file). EPT Merge Toolbar

The EPT Merge window toolbar has a panel of buttons at the top with the following functions (from left to right) as described in Table 8-3, “Merge Toolbar Button Descriptions” (p. 8-25): Table 8-3

Merge Toolbar Button Descriptions

Name

Icon

Description

New Merge

Opens the Select Secondary File window.

Reload Merge

Repeats merge checks with the same two selected files.

Merge Report

Produces a text-based report of all merge actions that can be saved or printed

Collapse Tree

Collapses all nodes in the Destination Design tree.

Expand Tree All Nodes

Expands the tree to display all nodes.

Expand Tree with Error Nodes

Expands the Destination Design tree to display only the paths with errors present.

Expand Tree with Warning Nodes

Expands the Destination Design tree to display only the paths with warnings present.

Expand Tree with Incomplete Nodes

Expands the Destination Design tree to display only the paths with incomplete warnings present.

EPT Merge Destination Design Tree

On the left of the Merge window is the Destination Design Tree, which identifies the objects in the destination file. Most objects contain all elements of its type in the Primary design and Secondary design as child nodes. The elements from the Primary design are denoted with a “(P)” after the name, and the elements from the Secondary file are denoted with a “(S).”

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The branches of the tree root are: •

Design History

•

Site - Sites have child nodes in the tree for Network Elements, Nodes, L2 Packs, Glass-Throughs, and Packet Connections. Each child of a site is listed in the tree. A merge will be performed if site names are identical. NEs with common names, and nodes within NEs with common names will be merged. However, all sites, NEs, and nodes that do not have an exact name match in both files will be added to the destination file with no additional merging functions performed on those entities. Segment - The Primary and Secondary files should not have common segments. Segments with the same A-end and Z-end in both designs will be added during the merge as a new segment between those two sites.

•

• •

Trail Project - All project names must be unique, else they must be renamed (see Step 6). Objects in the “Current” project in the Secondary file are merged to the “Current” project in the Primary file. If the name in the Secondary file is unique, then the “Future” project will be merged to the destination file. “Deployed” projects in the Primary file are allowed, but if any project in the Secondary file is “Deployed,” the merge cannot be performed. (All objects in the secondary file are merged to 'current' or 'future' and therefore doesn't interfere with any deployed object in the primary file.)

• •

• •

Span Link - Links are not merged. Instead, links from the secondary file are added as new objects in the destination file. All OA, DCM, PTPIO, LBO, and other entity details in the Link Attributes Selection window are preserved for primary links and secondary links during the merge process. Transparent Link SRG (GMPLS designs only) - All SRG names must be unique, else they must be renamed (see Step 6). Any failure scopes in GMPLS designs are not merged; the failure scopes from the Primary file will be used. Destination's restoration routes, feasibility calculations, and 3R resources are removed during the merge.

•

System - Any defined system that is invalid must be deleted.

•

Network Configuration is a child node that displays a summary in the main panel of the parameter conflicts.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Primary design is the source of the global Network Parameters. The Secondary design will adopt the global Network Parameters from the first design. If the parameters in the Secondary design preclude merging, an error will be displayed explaining why the merge is not possible. If the parameters in the Secondary design are different than in the first and the merge is possible, a warning will be issued and a difference list presented. You will have then be able to correct the issues as indicated, or abort the merge. Lines: If the number of lines exceeds the limit for a node or an NE, an error will be displayed in the merge UI and the merge will fail. AnyDir Add/Drop blocks cannot be merged; they can only be added to the destination file. When merging lines, the line number for any line cannot be higher that the maximum DWDM lines per node for that site. If so, the lines must be renumbered. The Line Isolation field value should be considered when renumbering lines. ILAs and Glass-through nodes cannot be merged, but they can be added to the destination file if no name conflict exists (to rename duplicate names, see Step 6). Nodes are color-coded depending on their merge status: •

Green: The merge can be completed successfully.

•

Yellow: A problem exists that is preventing the merge from completing. This is usually a naming or shelf numbering conflict. Yellow warnings can be corrected within the Merge window. Red: A conflict exists that prevents the merge from completing, and cannot be fixed within the Merge window. Grey: This node could not be merged because the parent node failed to merge. It is incomplete.

• •

EPT Merge Main Message Panel

The main panel of the Merge window (on the right) displays details on the selected object in the tree, including a successful merge, or warnings. If the object cannot be merged, details of why the merge failed are listed. Naming Conventions

Except for common sites, NEs and nodes, all names must be unique. If a naming conflict is preventing the merge from completing, you can rename an object (see Step 6). Before you begin

The files to be merged must be created using the same build number as the installation of EPT. If not, you must open and save the older file to update the build number for that design before you can proceed. And in general, all sets of parameters of the NE will be required to match to move to Shelf and Shelf Set merging phase.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To combine two network designs, perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If not already open, open the first design (primary file) that you want to include in the merge and select File > Save. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select File > Merge. Result: The Merge and Secondary File Select windows are displayed (see Figure

8-15, “Merge Window (Initial)” (p. 8-28)). Figure 8-15 Merge Window (Initial)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Select to choose the design file you want to merge with the design selected in the Primary File field. Note: The file you select must have the same EPT release and build as the primary file.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Save window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Navigate the directory to the desired destination file and location on your system, and click Save. Result: The Destination File field automatically populates with the current working directory of the primary file and a concatenation of the primary filename and secondary filename.

If the destination filename already exists, you will be prompted choose whether to overwrite the file or rename it before you can save it. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click OK. Result: The merge process begins, and then momentarily the merge results are displayed with any applicable warnings (see Figure 8-16, “Merge Window (Completed)” (p. 8-29)). Figure 8-16 Merge Window (Completed)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

In the case of duplicate names in the two files, you must select each item in the tree on the left and rename the duplicate items to make them unique and then click Apply Prefix or Apply Postfix to append to the name (see Figure 8-17, “Merge Window (Renaming)” (p. 8-30)). Figure 8-17 Merge Window (Renaming)

Click OK for each item to view the result (see Figure 8-18, “Merge Window (Renaming Successful)” (p. 8-31)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-18 Merge Window (Renaming Successful)

Repeat this step for all duplicate-named items. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Save or Cancel. Result: Save creates the destination file based on the merge results displayed in the

Destination Design Tree. The primary file that is currently open in EPT closes, and the newly created destination file opens. Cancel closes the Merge window without making any changes to the primary, secondary, or destination files.

Note: The Save button is only enabled if all nodes in the tree are green (see “EPT Merge Destination Design Tree” (p. 8-25)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

After saving the newly merged file, you can also choose whether to save the merge results to be saved. You can access the report later using the Reload Merge button in the toolbar (see Table 8-3, “Merge Toolbar Button Descriptions” (p. 8-25)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Design Automation and Verification

Merging Network Designs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: When a merged file is merged with another design file, the previous merge history is not saved in the destination file. Only the new merge details are saved. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 8-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

9

1830 PSS Commissioning 9

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT Overview

This section describes how to use the EPT design with the Portable Provisioning Tool (PPT) (described in this chapter) to provision each 1830 PSS NE in the network according to the EPT design. The EPT supports generation of Commissioning Files (one file per commissioning system) which are used to provision the following to the 1830 NEs: • • • • • • • •

Network Element type, System Identifier, shelf types, node types (ROADM, TOADM, DWDM FOADM, CWDM FOADM), shelf numbers, and so on All card types, slot locations, SFP, XFP, CFP pluggable types/location All topological connections between card ports Amplifier target power, nominal gain, power and gain ranges, tilt, ripple, and other parameters used by the transmission software on the NE Network Topology; that is, the NE to NE fiber links and orientation with respect to each other Port to Port and fiber span loss information Optical Channel Power Offsets Feasibility information for the network GMPLS software for decisions regarding restoration path routing (in GMPLS designs only)

System Commissioning Files created by the EPT are used as inputs to the PPT, which converts the file contents to commands sent to each NE in the system. (See also “Commissioning Alternatives” (p. 9-10), for commissioning without the PPT.) For information on how to use the commissioning files created with the EPT to provision/commission an 1830 network, refer to the Nokia 1830 PSS Portable Planning Tool (PPT) User Guide.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commissioning Systems for Commissioning File Creation

Divide the EPT network into a set of commissioning systems. Each system is a subset of Links that comprise a linear or ring topology path extending along the THRU path (also known as express) of each node: •

A mesh topology must always be divided into linear or ring systems for commissioning and maintenance.

•

The THRU path uses the jumper between two CWR/WR THRU ports to get through the node. This is also sometimes referred to as the express path. On FOADMs this is the jumper between SFD EXP ports or ITLB E or O ports through the node. For a valid system, a node cannot exist in the linear path or ring more than once (except to close the ring). The EPT will produce separate commissioning files for each of the systems that comprise the network.

• •

The EPT will confirm that the selected system is valid. EPT commissioning files are used by the PPT tool to commission and power balance each system individually. See also the Nokia 1830 PSS Portable Planning Tool (PPT) User Guide. Full Commissioning Systems

To use Full Commissioning Systems, the system must contain the linear or ring path extending on the THRU path through each node until it connects to a node degree without a THRU path, or a one degree node or circle back on itself in a ring. In a system that has no rings, if you follow the THRU paths through every node, and the THRU path traverses one node several times, you must use Partial System Commissioning. Partial System Commissioning

Note: Partial System Commissioning should be avoided when possible, as it requires additional manual procedures to perform NE power commissioning. When using the Partial System Commissioning feature, you can specify a set of links to create a commissioning file, and the set can end in the middle of an NE's THRU path. When selecting links for a commissioning file, the two cards can reside in different commissioning files if the cards form a THRU path in an NE. Partial System Commissioning may be used to commission an incremental component of an existing network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select File > Network Parameters. Result: The Network Parameters and Defaults tab is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

In the Commissioning Mode field, select Partial Commissioning (Incremental Deployment) and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-1 Partial Commissioning Warning

Tips: • •

• •

•

•

Some networks have no valid Full Systems, for example a “figure eight” network. Use Partial Commissioning for such networks. Each Config D’ (ROADM/TOADM with two NEs) and Config D” (ROADM and TOADM with one NE) AnyDirection Add/Drop Block that consists of an AnyDirection Add/Drop line on a ROADM, and a AnyDirection Add/Drop Line on a TOADM and a DWDM link in between, must be in a system alone without any other links. When provisioning/commissioning a network, the network provisioning must match the provisioning in the EPT, or the PPT provisioning may not work. After provisioning and/or commissioning of a system using the PPT, any change made to the provisioning of the system must be reflected back in the EPT design and new system commissioning file(s) generated before running the PPT again. (For example, changing an OT line port ITU channel in the NE.) You cannot create a commissioning file unless the design state of your network is “Complete, Valid” (see “Design Options” (p. 8-2)). You should save the design before creating a commissioning file. You should enter the EPT System Identifier (SID) for the NEs that are used in the system (see Table 5-10, “Network Element Parameters” (p. 5-92)).

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Creating a System

For ROADM nodes, the AnyDirection Add/Drop Block which consists of a AnyDirection Add/Drop line on a ROADM, and a AnyDirection Add/Drop Line on a TOADM and a DWDM link in between must be in a System alone. System creation is not allowed to be combined with any other external links.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Information Tab, click Links to display all the optical links in the traffic design. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Press Ctrl and select each link you want to include in the system. Tips: •

For ROADM nodes, the ROADM/TOADM (two NEs) and ROADM/TOADM (one NE), also known as Config D’ and Config D”, AnyDirection Add/Drop Block which consists of a AnyDirection Add/Drop line on a ROADM, and a AnyDirection Add/Drop Line on a TOADM and a DWDM link in between must be in a System alone. System creation is not allowed to be combined with any other external links.

•

The design state must be “Complete, Valid” for each row you selected. If not, click the Run Design icon or Verify Design icon (see Table 3-6, “Toolbar Icon Descriptions” (p. 3-11)). If you are using the Project feature, all links selected for a system must be on Current Project or Deployed segments. Systems cannot be created for CWDM and SCHAN links (see Figure 9-2, “ System Error Message (Invalid System)” (p. 9-4)), you cannot select a link that is already included in another system (see Figure 9-3, “ System Error Message (Used Link)” (p. 9-4)), and Figure 9-4, “ System Error Message (Wrong Node)” (p. 9-5).

•

Figure 9-2 System Error Message (Invalid System)

Figure 9-3 System Error Message (Used Link)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-4 System Error Message (Wrong Node)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Right-click the rows and select Create System. Result: The system will be verified for validity. If the system is valid, the System

Details window is displayed (see Figure 9-5, “ System Details Window” (p. 9-5)). If the system is not valid, an error message is displayed, which may be similar to Figure 9-2, “ System Error Message (Invalid System)” (p. 9-4)). Figure 9-5 System Details Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If desired, rename the system and click OK. Result: A system is created.

Note: On the System Details window is the Allow Power/Gain recalculation on Deployed Links parameter. When this parameter is selected (checked), the links in the system are permitted to have their power and gain recalculated even if they are in a Deployed Project. When deselected (unchecked), which should be the normal state, the Deployed links in this system remain unchanged. Proceed to “Creating a Commissioning File” (p. 9-6). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Creating a Commissioning File ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Action > Create Commissioning Files. Result: If the design file is unsaved, the following window is displayed (see Figure 9-6, “Create Commissioning Files Window (Unsaved)” (p. 9-6)). Click OK. Figure 9-6 Create Commissioning Files Window (Unsaved)

When the design file is saved, the following Create Commissioning Files window is displayed (see Figure 9-7, “Create Commissioning Files Window (File Not Yet Created)” (p. 9-7)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-7 Create Commissioning Files Window (File Not Yet Created)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Create.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Commissioning Files window is displayed (see Figure 9-8,

“Create Commissioning Files Window” (p. 9-8)) and the commissioning file is created. The Create Commissioning Files window is populated with the File Created name and File Location of the text file. Figure 9-8 Create Commissioning Files Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Double-click on the location and the commissioning file contents will be displayed. You can also browse to this location, on your PC, which is the same directory as where your network design file is saved (see “Closing the EPT Application” (p. 2-30)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View or Modify Systems ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view a system, select Systems on the Information Tab. A table of all systems configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 9-9, “Systems” (p. 9-9)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-9 Systems

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify details for a system, select the row for the desired system, right-click it and select Edit. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Edit. Result: The System Details window is displayed (see Figure 9-5, “ System Details

Window” (p. 9-5)), allowing you to specify settings related to the system. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Modify the settings as desired, then click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Delete Systems ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To delete a system from the Information Tab, select the row for the desired system, right-click it, and select Delete. A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 9-10, “Warning Window (Delete System)” (p. 9-9)). Figure 9-10 Warning Window (Delete System)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: When you delete a system, any associated commissioning file will also be deleted. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the system. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Commissioning Alternatives

Alternative methods for network commissioning that do not use the PPT include the following: 1. The 1830 WebUI supports import of an EPT-created Commissioning File, which it uses to pre-populate commissioning values to the current Power Commissioning screen or GMRE Commissioning windows (only applicable if the EPT design is GMPLS-enabled). Note: The WebUI has three GMRE Commissioning windows. For example, on the WebUI, you can select Administration > Power Commissioning, click on the arrow icon at the top/right of the Power Commissioning window, browse to the EPT Commissioning file on your PC, and the values from the EPT file will be pre-populated into the WebUI screen. (Some of the GMRE Commissioning screens on the WebUI have an explicit Import button instead.) 2. The EPT Power Commissioning and GMPLS Commissioning Reports (see Figure 11-51, “Power Management Report” (p. 11-76) and Figure 11-55, “GMPLS Commissioning Report” (p. 11-79) respectively) can be used to manually view the EPT design values so that it can be manually typed into the 1830 WebUI Power Commissioning screen or GMRE Commissioning windows. Re-Commissioning

Re-commissioning may be applied in the following cases (this is not an exhaustive list): • • •

Change amplifier type (possible new EPT file) Add/remove node in ring/linear chain Fiber segment replacement

•

Change the number of channels (migrate from 44 to 88 channels)

Once the EPT design modifications are made, run the design to bring the design into a Complete, Valid state again. If the network has had trail or service deployments that are not reflected in the current EPT design file, you can use the Upload feature (see “Import Network Data” (p. 12-1)) to check the EPT design against the physical network, and add the additional trails or services from the physical network to the EPT design file. Create the new Commissioning Files. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Portable Provisioning Tool

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1830 PSS Portable Provisioning Tool PPT Overview

The 1830 PSS Portable Provisioning Tool (PPT) that provides on-site provisioning of a single Network Element (NE) using a portable tool on a laptop. The PPT is comprised of a Python script that uses XML that is generated from the Engineering Planning Tool (EPT) and sends Command Line Interface (CLI) commands to the 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS portfolio of WDM products (one node at a time). The PPT is a portable, customizable solution that works for advanced users and beginners. The PPT is supported for Release 9.0 PSS-4, PSS-8, PSS-16, PSS-16II and PSS-32. For further information on Nokia EPT, refer to the latest Nokia 1830 PSS Engineering Planning Tool (EPT) User Guide. For further information on Nokia PPT, refer to the latest Nokia 1830 PSS Portable Planning Tool (PPT) User Guide.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS Commissioning

1830 PSS Portable Provisioning Tool

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 9-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

10

10 PSS GMPLS Planning 1830 Using the EPT

GMPLS Concepts in the EPT Overview

The EPT, when set to GMPLS-enabled, is used to design the network to ensure the capacity to support the route restoration required for the specified GMPLS failure scenarios. For more information on GMPLS, and its use in the 1830 network, refer to the Nokia 1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide. Basic GMPLS concepts supported by EPT are: • • • •

•

•

GMPLS Failure Scope are definable in EPT. For example: all segments, all segments and all sites, or a custom defined set of segments and sites. Shared Risk Group (SRG): A grouping of segments and/or sites that are treated as one, failure risk, when choosing diverse paths and restoration paths. Failure Count: The maximum number of simultaneous failures that need to be protected/restored (accessed from Action > GMPLS Failure Scope. A failure scenario is one or more (up to a maximum of Failure Count) segment and/or sites, from the failure scope, that fail simultaneously. A route can be restored, for a given failure scenario, if it can be rerouted to avoid all failed segments and sites in the failure scenario. You can specify for each trail, whether the route(s) should be restorable. EPT will pick the nominal path for each trail definition, and report on whether this path can be restored in all failure scenarios. Services are not explicitly restorable, but will use restoration routes based on the settings of the trail(s) the services use. EPT will design the equipment so that each trail specified as requiring Restoration can be restored. Equipment such as AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks, 3R OT regeneration equipment necessary for route restoration paths, and so on will be added to the design.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Concepts in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

•

The EPT Commissioning File includes, per OT category, the threshold values for OSNR, PMD, and so on for the GMPLS algorithms to use in feasibility decisions when choosing valid restoration paths at any time.

•

The EPT Commissioning File also includes line feasibility information, per OTS in the network for the GMPLS algorithms to use when choosing valid restoration paths at any time.

Regen Placement Guidelines

The following are guidelines to be used to place regenerators in manual routing for GMPLS designs. OSNR depends on both NLP and PMD, but while the dependency from NLP is of f(NLP), the dependency from PMD is of (PMD^3). This means that OSNR budget can assume very high values if PMD is high. WSS budget is an independent value and increases with the number of traversed nodes dependently from the kind of WSS equipped on each node. When the budget is RED, the route is traversing too many nodes. As a generic rule the order in which to address the physical issues is PMD,NLP,OSNR and WSS count. For example, if in one direction both OSNR and PMD percentages are red and other values are green, then evaluate PMD first. The first site in which a regen can be placed is the last site with PMD lower or equal to 100%. If the OSNR budget is the only red value, the first site in which it is possible to place a regenerator is the last one in which the OSNR is less than 100%. Regenerators must be placed in positions that have a WSS count lower than 100%. So if for example, WSS count and OSNR percentage are red and the other values are green, the first site in which it is possible to place a regenerator is the one in which both the OSNR and WSS budget are lower or equal to 100%. It is possible that the placement of regenerator is not enough to obtain budgets below 100% in both directions. The general guidelines provided in this section must be applied per direction. Restoration Options

For more information on this topic, see the Restoration field description inTable 7-2, “Trail Parameters” (p. 7-6). Restoration = Pre-Calculated: Trails specified with the Restoration field set to Pre-Calculated require that the trail is restorable for all failure scenarios affecting that trail. The Run Design command will fail and an error message is displayed in the Errors section of the Information tab (see “Errors” (p. 6-43)): Demand Demand1 Cannot guarantee restoration for demand with pre-calculated restoration.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Concepts in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: In the 1830 physical network, network resources are reserved for restoration paths in this mode. Restoration = Upon Failure: Trails specified with the Restoration field set to Upon Failure allows a design status to be Complete, Valid even if the trail is not restorable for all failure scenarios. A warning message is displayed in the Errors section of the Information tab (see “Errors” (p. 6-43)) : RWA Warning--Network restoration optimization warning. Refer to Design Status Details.

Restoration parameters can be combined with the Source Protection field as shown in Table 10-1, “Trail Restoration with Protection” (p. 10-3). Table 10-1

Trail Restoration with Protection

Protection Unprotected

Diverse Path and Client 1+1 Cable

Restoration

Description

None

Unprotected

Upon Failure

SBR (Source Based Restoration)

Pre-Calculated

GR (Guaranteed Restoration)

None

Protected 1+1

Upon Failure

PRC (Protection and Restoration Combined)

GMPLS Network Evolution

Support of network evolution – only Current and Deployed projects are supported in GMPLS designs (not Future). Projects allow incremental or phased design and growth of an installed network’s design. Highlights: • •

Restoration routing is project-less (it is always calculated on whole design) Restoration regenerators can be deleted –

•

Only restoration regenerators in the current project can be removed if not used in a nominal path – Deleting deployed regenerators is not allowed Restoration regenerators can be un-deployed – All restoration regenerators can be removed from a deployed project. They are automatically placed back in the current project. – Nominal regenerators can be removed only by removing trail (or its routing)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Concepts in the EPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Greenfield: •

• •

Nominal regenerators are placed by EPT GMPLS Engine as part of the automatic routing of a trail as well as by manual routing, restoration regenerators are created by a dedicated panel on a given NE. Restoration regenerators can be created automatically by EPT GMPLS Engine, in addition to creation by the panel. User-defined regenerators are reused by EPT GMPLS Engine as much as possible on both nominal and/or restoration routes Only restoration regenerators can be manually removed from the design

Brownfield: Run design options 1 and 2 preserve regenerators placed by user and try to reuse deployed regenerators. Option 3 will remove user-defined regenerators if not deployed or used. EPT GMPLS Engine can use a user-defined restoration 3R that is optically compatible with a trail, even if the 3R is not the pack that EPT GMPLS Engine would place by default.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS Configuration Overview

Using GMPLS in a network design adds additional protection options on the trails and services created in the network (see Figure 7-3, “Create Trail Window (Clustering Enabled)” (p. 7-6)). Configuring a network for GMPLS consists of several steps: • • • • • • •

enabling GMPLS on a network design (see “Enable the Network for GMPLS” (p. 10-5)) creating (can also view and edit) GMPLS shared risk groups (SRGs) (see “Create SRGs” (p. 10-6) and “View and Modify SRGs” (p. 10-7)) creating GMPLS failure scopes (see “Create Failure Scope” (p. 10-7)) performing GMPLS restoration and path verification (see “Restoration Routes” (p. 10-10)) creating 1621SLE links (optional) auditing of GMPLS (see “GMPLS Auditing” (p. 10-13)) setting up commissioning of GMPLS routes (see “1830 PSS Commissioning Support in the EPT” (p. 9-1)) Note: GMPLS designs do not support alien demands (trails or services that interface to the 1830 PSS network through an MVAC, MVAC8B or SVAC), nor trails or services using certain OTs such as 43STX4, 43SCUP-compatible (or older compatible) demands. Note: In GMPLS designs, to avoid regenerator auto-placement on DGE sites, DGE sites must have the Allow Local Add/Drop on ROADMS disabled (deselected) on the Site Details Automatic Design Definition window (see Table 5-7, “Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)” (p. 5-55)). Note: Certain OT-to-OT compatibility rules are stricter for GMPLS-enabled designs.

Enable the Network for GMPLS

You must begin by creating a new network design (see “View or Edit Network Parameters (Network Parameters and Defaults)” (p. 5-2)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Perform Step 1 on the Network Parameters and Defaults Tab. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a value other than GMPLS Disabled in the Erules field. Note: To convert a non-GMPLS network design to GMPLS or a GMPLS network design to non-GMPLS, see “GMPLS Design Conversion” (p. 10-24).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create SRGs ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Action > Create Shared Risk Group. Result: The Create Shared Risk Group window is displayed (see Figure 10-1, “Create

Shared Risk Group Window” (p. 10-6)). Figure 10-1 Create Shared Risk Group Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the sites and segments you want to include in the SRG. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View and Modify SRGs ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view an SRG, select SRGs from the Network section of the Information Bar. A table of all SRGs configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 10-2, “View SRGs” (p. 10-7)). Figure 10-2 View SRGs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select and right-click the desired row. Select Edit from the displayed menu. Result: The Create Shared Risk Group window is displayed (see Figure 10-1, “Create

Shared Risk Group Window” (p. 10-6)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

View or change the desired parameters, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Create Failure Scope

The failure scope defines which segment(s), site(s) or SRG(s) are to be included in a failure scenario. Excluded resources will not be subject to a failure during the GMPLS failure analysis. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Action > GMPLS Failure Scope.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The GMPLS Failure Scope window is displayed (see Figure 10-3, “GMPLS

Failure Scope Window” (p. 10-8)). Figure 10-3 GMPLS Failure Scope Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 10-2, “GMPLS Failure Scope Parameters” (p. 10-9) . Table 10-2

GMPLS Failure Scope Parameters

Parameter

Description

All Segments

Indicates that trails and services marked for restoration should be restorable when any segment fails, and if Failure Count is set to n, then they should be restorable when any n segments fail.

All Segments and All Sites

Indicates that trails and services marked for restoration should be restorable when any segment or site fails, and if Failure Count is set to n, then they should be restorable when any n segments fail.

Custom

You can select specific segments or sites to be considered for failure scenarios.

Allowed Values

Custom Failure Scope Definition Excluded Resources

Select the sites and segments you want to exclude in the failure scope, using the and Add and Remove buttons. Only applicable when Custom is selected.

Included Resources

Select the sites and segments you want to include in the failure scope, using the and Add and Remove buttons. Only applicable when Custom is selected.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 10-2

GMPLS Failure Scope Parameters

Parameter Failure Count

(continued)

Description The maximum number of simultaneous failures that need to be protected/restored.

Allowed Values 0 to 5

For example if the Failure Count is set to 2, each failure scope permutation will include either the simultaneous failure of two segments, one segment and a site, or two sites. The resources that form part of the failure scope (included) shall define which resources are subject to failure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK. You can view details on the failure scope in the GMPLS Failures Report (see “GMPLS Reports” (p. 11-38)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Restoration Routes

To view a restoration route, perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Information Bar, select Trails. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select and right-click a row for one of the trails. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Show Restoration Route(s). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1621SLE Long Spans in GMPLS-Enabled Networks

Beginning with R5.1.0, 1621SLE links are supported in GMPLS-enabled network designs. In GMPLS-enabled networks, design of the nominal and restoration paths is supported automatically. However, for a nominal route to traverse the 1621SLE Link, the trail must be manually routed; they will not by default autonomously route across this link due. During “Run Design,” restoration paths will be autonomously designed as needed for all failure scenarios and so on defined across the 1621SLE Link or otherwise as required. All nominal and restoration paths in the GMPLS-enabled EPT design will have regenerators on either end of the 1621SLE link. The 130SNX10 OT supports regeneration onto a 1621SLE link. The following procedure is a high-level flow of steps for using the EPT with GMPLS-enabled and a 1621SLE span: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create the design as described in “1621SLE Long Spans ” (p. 13-13). From the Create/Edit DWDM Link window, specify how many channels to be turned up over the 1621SLE link. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create a trail and manually route it across the 1621SLE link. Result: This action provides the nominal route. If you want EPT to find the route

automatically, you may skip this step, but note that EPT will not choose a nominal path across the 1621SLE link by default. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Run Design and select the option “Do not remove any designed elements.” Result: EPT computes the OT types and wavelengths of 3R resources required to

restore traffic for all specified failure scenarios, including on either end of this 1621SLE link, and routes remaining trails. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Using the 1621SLE SNDP tool, design the number and OT type of the wavelengths across the 1621SLE, and the specific wavelengths per the 1621 loading plan. (More wavelengths than needed can be designed in 1621SLE SNDP tool.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Edit the EPT design using the wavelengths picked by SNDP for each type: • •

To edit a nominal trail, right-click on the trail or service and select Editing Nominal Channel(s) on 1621SLE. To edit a 3R resource wavelength, right-click on the 1621SLE link and select Edit Restoration Channel on 1621SLE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A window is displayed (see “1621SLE Long Spans in GMPLS-Enabled

Networks” (p. 10-12)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Create an Installation Report (see Chapter 11, “Reports”). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

On-site, install equipment and turn-up the wavelengths using the Installation Report. The number of channels in the real network must match (or be greater than) the number of nominal and 3R wavelengths specified by EPT GMPLS planning, or some GMPLS failure scenarios will not be protectable. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS Auditing Purpose

EPT allows you to create and manage Audit Scenarios in GMPLS designs. EPT uses GMRE Path Computation (GPC) to perform a GMPLS audit, which consist of the following audit scenarios: •

Trust Workflow: GMPLS audit mode is used to run restoration analysis without changing the Baseline EPT GMPLS Design (BEGD) to assess if the restoration plan determined by EPT/RWA is confirmed by GPC.

•

Robustness Workflow: GMPLS audit mode is used to run restoration analysis after some changes to the BEGD to assess if the restoration plan determined by EPT/RWA is robust to changes in the planning assumptions.

Before you begin

Before you can perform a GMPLS audit, you must run a GMPLS-enabled network design that results in a Complete, Valid or Complete, Invalid state. Running a GMPLS Audit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Click the Enter Audit button in the menu toolbar. Result: The Audit tab of the Information Bar is enabled and displayed (see Figure

10-4, “Audit Tab (Pending)” (p. 10-13)), showing a list of audit scenarios for which results are available. See Table 10-3, “Audit Parameters” (p. 10-14) for descriptions of the values for the fields in this tab. Figure 10-4 Audit Tab (Pending)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 10-3

Audit Parameters

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

Scenario

Displays the auto-generated or user-defined scenario name assigned when the audit scenario is defined.

BEGD Audit

Type

Displays the auto-generated scenario type assigned when the scenario is defined.

Baseline (only for the BEGD audit scenario) MRR MFS MSC PFS A combination of types displayed as a comma-separated list for composite RTSs

Status

Defines the state of the audit scenario.

Pending Running Valid Invalid Obsolete

Summary

Displays the text entered in the Description field of the Create Audit Scenario or Edit Audit Scenario window.

FS - Current design failure scope FC - Current design failure count #3R - Current count of restoration regenerators planned by EPT/RWA

Audit Run Selections

Displays the three selections that were made in the Audit Run Options panel when the audit scenario was run.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Right-click an audit scenario to display results.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A menu is displayed (see Figure 10-5, “Audit Tab Menu” (p. 10-15)). Figure 10-5 Audit Tab Menu

Note: You can select multiple rows in this table except for the first BEGD row; this allows multiple scenarios to be combined or run in sequence. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Audit > Run. Result: The Run Status window is displayed (see Figure 10-6, “Run Status Window”

(p. 10-15)). Figure 10-6 Run Status Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 10-7 GPC Routes Not Allowed Warning Window

Once the status is complete, the Audit menu will change from Audit Pending to Audit Valid, Audit Invalid, or Audit Obsolete. The Status field in the Audit Scenarios tab will also change accordingly (see Figure 10-8, “Audit Scenarios Tab (Status Change Valid)” (p. 10-16)). Figure 10-8 Audit Scenarios Tab (Status Change - Valid)

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Add Robustness Test Scenario

To add a Robustness Test Scenario (RTS), perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Audit > Add RTS.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Audit Scenario window is displayed (see Figure 10-9, “Create

Audit Scenario Window” (p. 10-17)). Figure 10-9 Create Audit Scenario Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

You may enter a unique name and/or a description in this window as desired. Then click OK. Result: The RTS is added to the Audit Scenarios tab (see Figure 10-10, “Audit

Scenarios Tab (RTS Added)” (p. 10-17) Figure 10-10 Audit Scenarios Tab (RTS Added)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

You can repeat this procedure to add another RTS, run an audit with this new RTS included, or exit audit mode (see “Returning to EPT Design Mode” (p. 10-23)). Note: At this point, the RTS is in a Pending state. You must run the audit before you can perform other actions with this RTS such as applying, exporting, or combining with other RTSs. To run the audit, select the RTS that has a Status of Pending. If

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

[current] is not displayed in the Scenario field, right-click the row and select Set as current scenario. Then run the audit (see Step 3). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Placing 3R Regenerator in Audit Mode

Once you have added an RTS, you can place regenerators. You can manually create restoration 3Rs in a specific NE, shelf or Add/drop block. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the NEs tab of the Information Bar, right-click the desired line a menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Create Regenerator. Result: The Create regenerator in Network Element x is displayed (see “Placing 3R

Regenerator in Audit Mode” (p. 10-18)). The A-side panel can be used to select a regen or cross regen. The B-side is used for cross regen only.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Parameter

Definition

Regenerator type

Allowed Values Regen Cross

A/D & Port Selection A/D block

Allows you to select the Add/Drop block or the local Add/Drop.

ROADM n - Local Add/Drop: Selects SFD filters directly attached to line 1 or line 2. A/D*n – AnyColor(one NE): Selects one of the created add/drop blocks

CWR CLS Port

Allows you to select between automatic calculation and shelf/slot/ports alternatives.

Auto 1-16-CLSn (where n is {1–8}

Note: This field is not applicable if you selected ROADM n - Local Add/Drop

in the A/D block field. SFD Port

Allows you to select automatic calculation or one of the frequencies in the frequency allocation plan.

Auto {9175–9600}

Note: This field is only applicable if you have SFD available in the add/drop node, or you have selected a local add/drop. OT & Port Selection OT Type

Allows you to select the OT.

List of all valid OTs

FEC

Allows you to select the FEC for the selected OT Type above.

AFEC A-EFEC S-EFEC GFEC NOFEC (only on specific OTs)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Parameter Shelf-Slot-Port

Definition Allows you to select the line port on the OT.

Allowed Values Compute: Creates a new pack. compute - compute Ln: Creates a new pack, indicating the line port only.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Show Regenerators

To view and select nominal and/or restoration regens on the network map, perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT Toolbar, click Show Regenerators. Result: The Show Regen window is displayed (see Figure 10-11, “Show Regen

Window” (p. 10-20)). Figure 10-11 Show Regen Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Nominal, Restoration or click Select All to view the types of regenerators you want to highlight on the network map.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The sites on the map where regenerators are present are highlight with either

an N or an R based on regen type. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

View, Modify or Delete Regen (3R) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To view, undeploy or delete a regen, select 3R from the Network section of the Information Bar. Result: A table of all regens configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 10-12,

“3R Tab” (p. 10-21)), indicating the type of regen present (user defined or automatic, nominal or restoration). You can delete a restoration regen. In addition there’s a Show Regen option indicating position for regens in the map (nominal and/or restoration). Figure 10-12 3R Tab

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To undeploy a regen, right-click it and select Remove from Project Name. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To delete a regen, right-click it and select Delete 3R Name.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The following confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 10-13,

“Confirmation Window (Delete 3R)” (p. 10-22)): Figure 10-13 Confirmation Window (Delete 3R)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK to delete the regen or Cancel to abort. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Apply Robustness Test Scenario ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Once the Baseline and RTS audit scenarios are run and in a Valid state, you can apply them by selecting Audit > Apply RTS. Result: A confirmation window is displayed. The Audit menu status may change (see

Step 3). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Export Robustness Test Scenario

Once the Baseline and RTS audit scenarios are run and in a Valid state, you can export them by selecting Audit > Export RTS. A confirmation window is displayed (see “Export Robustness Test Scenario” (p. 10-23)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Auditing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Your files are saved in the same location as your other EPT design files. Edit Audit Scenario

To change attributes for an audit scenario, right-click an audit scenario in the table and select Edit. The Edit Audit Scenario window is displayed (similar to Figure 10-9, “Create Audit Scenario Window” (p. 10-17)). Make changes as desired and click OK. Delete Robustness Test Scenario

To delete an RTS, either: •

Select Audit > Delete RTS, or

•

Right-click an audit scenario in the table and select Delete.

View Audit Summary Report

To view a summary report of the audit scenarios, select GMPLS > Reports. The Summary Report is displayed (see Figure 11-29, “Audit Summary Report” (p. 11-39)). Returning to EPT Design Mode

To leave GMPLS audit mode and return to the default EPT design mode, click the Exit Audit button in the menu toolbar. The button changes back to Enter Audit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Design Conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS Design Conversion Overview

GMPLS Design Conversion is a feature that allows you to change a network design upgrade from non-GMRE to GMRE and downgrade from GMRE to non-GMRE. The EPT will check that configurations are valid before doing the conversion. GMPLS Design Conversion Impact on Default Profiles

When a network design is converted to or from GMPLS characteristics, the default profiles (see Figure 2-15, “Design Options Window” (p. 2-24)) are impacted as follows: This Default Profile...

Changes to or From

Core HiPerf

Core HiPerf GMPLS

Core HiPerf CDC-F

Core HiPerf CDC-F GMPLS

Metro HiPerf iROADM

Metro HiPerf iROADM GMPLS

Note: Core HiPerf C-F cannot be converted to GMPLS. Prerequisites When Upgrading From non-GMPLS to GMPLS

This upgrade is only allowed on Complete, Valid designs. Several elements are not supported in GMPLS designs. Before you initiate a design conversion from non-GMPLS to GMPLS, be sure that none of the following conditions are present in your network design. Otherwise, you will not be able to convert the design. •

• • •

The following OTs: – All OTs under 10G, including 4DPA2, 4DPA4, 4QPA8, 1DPP24M – 112SDX11, 43STX4, MVAC, MVAC8B, SFD40/SFD40B and SVACs User-defined aliens Fixed frequency line pluggables OT-OT trail connections Note: EPT supports OT-OT trail connections and OT-OT link connections. OT-OT trail connections are used in client line ring applications and are supported by GMPLS designs, OT-OT link connnections are used for packet demands and are not supported.

• •

Packet demands TOADM and DFOADMs except one degree DFOADM nodes are allowed at either end of a 1621SLE link; the DFOADM must be in the same NE as the ROADM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Design Conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Even if GMPLS does not support a multi-hop 1621SLE link, since EPT allows designing multi-hop 1621SLE links, it is acceptable to allow the conversion of a one degree DFOADM node that has degree 1 and is connected to 1621SLE link even if there is no ROADM in the same site. • • • •

CWR8 and CWR8-88 CWDM and SCHAN network configurations DWDM 100 GHz links (Only DWDM-50GHz, DWDM-FLEX, and 1621SLE-50GHz link types are allowed in GMPLS-enabled networks.) Asymmetric fiber types on each side of glassthrus

• • •

DSF and LS fiber types Future projects ENSCP, OPS Dual Interface, and OMSP protection

• •

WT Keying disabled Dispersion Compensation set to Manual (Verify Externally)

• • •

Client/line rings have restrictions on trails used to create rings Protected cascaded configurations Symmetrical Add/Drop configuration on A-end and Z-end This applies only when OPS Single Interface protection is enabled and if there's a asymmetrical A/D configuration on A-end and Z-end.

•

Amplified OT usage in Network Parameters set to Prohibit Standard ASE OTs or Prohibit Low and Standard ASE OTs

• •

• • • •

•

OT modes not supported in GMPLS A site containing an IROADM node with at least one line supporting PSC1-6, or if the site is configured in such a way to force automatic PSC creation as consequence of automatic design. Network Parameters default setting for Segment Capacity is not DWDM50GHz or DWDM-FLEX. Trails with 12P120 on A-End and/or Z-end and FEC is S-EFEC, or if the default OT is a 12P120 with S-EFEC. A non-GMPLS design using FLEX links should be converted to a GMPLS design with FLEX links. NOFEC is not supported on the OT line side in GMPLS. This applies for the tunable XFP and tunable zero chirp. Note that OPS Single Interface protection uses cascaded trails over an OPSA-NOFEC. Designs using the following differential phase encoding OTs cause the conversion to fail: – D5X500-QPSK-nodcm-diff-SDFEC-G2 – 2UC400-compatible-QPSK-diff-nodcm-SDFEC-G2

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Design Conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Only absolute phase encoding for the D5X500 QPSK and 2UC400-compatible QPSK modes is supported in GMPLS. •

Design conversion from non-GMPLS to GMPLS is denied if there is a cluster site

Prerequisites When Downgrading From GMPLS to non-GMPLS

This downgrade is only allowed on Complete, Valid designs. Before you initiate a design conversion from GMPLS to non-GMPLS, be sure that none of the following conditions are present in your network design. Otherwise, you will not be able to convert the design. •

Deployed/user restoration regens

•

Trails with an automatic nominal regen. Non-GMPLS designs do not support automatic placement of regens, so after downgrade the design will be invalid because the trail will be non-feasible. You must manually route the trail with a user-created nominal regen.

Post-Conversion Actions

After converting from a GMPLS network design to non-GMPLS, EPT will perform the following actions: • • • •

Remove restoration routes Set Restoration to None for all Trails Set Route Disjointness to None for all Trails Set Failure Scope to default (allSegments + failureCount=1)

•

Design turns to Incomplete state, Run Design option 2 is required (see Step 1).

Restoration Routes in GMPLS designs will be deleted when converted to a non-GMPLS design. They will not be restored if the user converts back to a GMPLS design. SRGs in GMPLS designs will be deleted when converted to a non-GMPLS design. They will not be restored if the user converts back to a GMPLS design. Converting a Network Design to GMPLS/Non-GMPLS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Action > GMPLS Design Conversion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Design Conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The window is displayed (see Figure 10-14, “Convert GMPLS Design

Confirmation” (p. 10-27)). Figure 10-14 Convert GMPLS Design Confirmation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click OK to proceed with the conversion process. Result: If there are no incompatible components present (as described in the

prerequisites sections above), then the conversion occurs (see Figure 10-15, “GMPLS Conversion Completed” (p. 10-27)), and the design state changes to “Incomplete.” Figure 10-15 GMPLS Conversion Completed

If the design fails verification, the conversion cannot be completed, and an error message is displayed. The same information is stored in a text file for troubleshooting purposes, named design_file_name_GMPLSMigrationError.info and is located in the same directory as the design file. Note: For conversion to GMPLS only, if no blocking errors are found but WTOCM is not used, the design is converted to GMPLS, and you will be prompted to configure a WTOCM. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

1830 PSS GMPLS Planning Using the EPT

GMPLS Design Conversion

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click the Run Design button and select (option 2 recommended) to realign the design to the new Erules value in Network Parameters. See Step 1. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 10-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

11

Reports 11

Overview Purpose

This chapter shows the reports available in the EPT. Contents EPT Reports

11-3

Bill of Materials Report

11-4

Equipment View

11-7

Installation Report

11-10

Network Information

11-16

Network Parameters Report

11-17

Site Report

11-18

Rack Report

11-19

Link Report

11-20

Fiber Report

11-21

OT-OT Link Report

11-23

OA and DCM Report

11-24

Shelf Report

11-25

Trails Report

11-26

Services Report

11-28

BOL WDM Routing Report

11-29

BOL Physical Layer Report

11-30

Trail Routing Report

11-31

Packet Demands/Routing Report

11-33

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Packet Connections Report

11-34

Systems Report

11-35

L1 Configuration Report

11-36

Errors Report

11-37

GMPLS Reports

11-38

Physical Layer Report

11-49

Custom Physical Layer Report

11-51

Statistics Report

11-65

Card Inventory Report

11-73

Design Status Details

11-75

Power Management Report

11-76

Channel Utilization Report

11-78

GMPLS Commissioning Report

11-79

Target Power Offset Commissioning Report

11-80

Channel Utilization Interface Report

11-82

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

EPT Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EPT Reports Overview

Reports are available to display network information in a clear and readable format. These reports are generated as HTML pages or Microsoft Excel spreadsheets that can be viewed, saved, and printed. Several other reports combine related information from different areas to present a unified view of the network. Reports are launched from the Reports menu. An Equipment View report is provided which shows graphics of the shelves populated with their circuit packs as designed by the tool. The entire network equipage can be viewed and you can also view individual sites and NEs. Zoom options are provided to control the display for optimal viewing. There is also a report of the details of the design status which is intended to help debug why a design analysis may have failed or not been able to be completed. Important! Most of the reports will not contain meaningful data until after you run the design. Note: When opening a GMPLS design that was created in EPT R3.6.50, R5.n. R6.n or R7.n, with an EPT R8.0 or later release, it is recommended before generating any report, to run the design. Be sure to select the Remove all auto-designed elements option (see Figure 8-1, “Run Design Options Window” (p. 8-5)). The available reports are described in the following sections.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Bill of Materials Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bill of Materials Report Purpose

The Bill of Materials (BoM) Report lists a bill of materials including shelves, packs, pluggables, cables, and jumpers for internal system connections. This report will include the pricing if a price file has been imported. The Bill of Materials Report supports different options for viewing objects: •

Current and Deployed

• •

Deployed only Current (Incremental Difference over Deployed)

Viewing the BOM ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT menu, select Reports > Bill of Materials. Result: The Bill of Materials Report is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet (see Figure

11-1, “Bill of Materials Report” (p. 11-4)). Figure 11-1 Bill of Materials Report

Note: Jumpers and cables connecting to equipment external to an individual NE, for example office LAN connections, connection to craft PC, connections from the 1830 NE OTs to external equipment, and connections to the WDM links which connect NE to NE in the network are not included in the Bill of Materials Report. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Bill of Materials Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the design is invalid, a warning window is displayed (see Figure 11-2, “Invalid Design Warning (Before BOM Generation)” (p. 11-5)). Figure 11-2 Invalid Design Warning (Before BOM Generation)

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Smart SFPs in the BoM

Smart SFPs have a corresponding regular SFP for the 11QPE24/11QCE12X client port (see “Smart SFPs in the BoM” (p. 11-5)). Both the Smart SFP and the regular SFPs are displayed in the Bill of Materials Report. Selected Smart SFP

Automatically Inserted Regular SFP

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-LX10 - EFM OAM

1000BASE-LX-singlerate

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-ZX - EFM OAM

1000BASE-ZX

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX20-U - EFM OAM

1000BASE-BX20-D

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX40-U - EFM OAM

1000BASE-BX40-D

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX20-D - EFM OAM

1000BASE-BX20-U

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX40-D - EFM OAM

1000BASE-BX40-U

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-LX10 - CFM OAM

1000BASE-LX-singlerate

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-ZX - CFM OAM

1000BASE-ZX

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX20-U - CFM OAM

1000BASE-BX20-D

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Bill of Materials Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Selected Smart SFP

Automatically Inserted Regular SFP

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX40-U - CFM OAM

1000BASE-BX40-D

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX20-D - CFM OAM

1000BASE-BX20-U

1GbE Smart SFP 1000BASE-BX40-D - CFM OAM

1000BASE-BX40-U

BOM Warnings for CDC-F Equipment

CDC-F Networks: Bill of Materials is for ANSI compliant-equipment. For translations to ETSI and EIA, see the Nokia 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool Customer Release Notes.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Equipment View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment View Accessing the Equipment View

To access the Equipment View (see Figure 11-3, “Equipment View” (p. 11-7)), select Reports > Equipment View. You can modify the view by right-clicking on the menu and selecting Zoom. The display can include the entire network or a specific site. Figure 11-3 Equipment View

To view a close-up view of a specific equipment, click the site link, and a close-up view is displayed (see Figure 11-4, “Equipment View Close-Up ” (p. 11-8)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Equipment View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-4 Equipment View Close-Up

Importing the Equipment View to a Graphics Editor

Each individual site is formatted as a Scalable Vector Graphic (SVG) file. To allow graphical moving of shelves within the bays, you can import this file type into a graphics editor such as Microsoft Visio, and then edit the image. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Equipment View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform the steps in the following procedure to import the equipment view into Visio. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT menu, select Reports > Equipment View. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Within the Equipment View: 1. Right-click on a figure and select Save SVG As .... 2. Enter a filename, and click Save. This saves the picture as a .svg file. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Open the .svg file with Visio. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Edit the picture. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

The cable/jumper lengths in the Bill of Materials Report may need to be adjusted manually, as the tool assumes the arrangement in the report.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Installation Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Installation Report Purpose

The Installation Report supports different options for viewing objects: • • •

Current and Deployed Deployed only Current (Incremental Difference over Deployed)

The Current (Incremental Difference over Deployed) options contains all of the Installation Report connection types: •

•

Jumpers/cables for each connection listed in the corresponding BOM (note that in the BOM if a connection between two cards has an attenuator in an attenuator drawer, the jumper count may be more than the Installation Report’s connection rows) SFP/XFP/CFP is listed in the corresponding BOM

•

OSP connections for any links from the corresponding BOM

Viewing the Installation Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT menu, select Reports > Installation Report. Result: The Installation Report is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet (see Figure 11-5,

“Installation Report” (p. 11-10)). Figure 11-5 Installation Report

Each site is detailed in a separate spreadsheet. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Installation Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The spreadsheets are color-coded: • White Background—SFP, XFP, Attenuator, VOA, and electrical Cables • Yellow Background—Internal Optical jumpers • Blue Background—OSP fiber connections E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Additional Considerations Connection Type

The Connection Type column lists the name of the electrical cable or optical jumper required; XFP or SFP if the row represents which type of pluggable to plug into the port of an OT card; or FOADMINV if the row represents a cable connection to the FOADMINV part. The table provides the information about the A-end and B-end of a "connection", providing the type of card or part, the line, shelf, slot, and port that the cable or part plugs into on both the A and B ends. For the case of XFP/SFPs plugging into an OT, the line, shelf, slot and port are the same on the A and B ends, the A-end will list the OT type and the B-end will list the XFP/SFP type. Attenuators

The Attenuator column (see Figure 11-5, “Installation Report” (p. 11-10)) lists any attenuator information needed in between the A-end and B-end, including the location of the attenuator. If the attenuator value is displayed as “2 TBD”, the attenuator values are to be determined (TBD) at installation time and two attenuators are needed--one in each direction. Note: Attenuators that are NOT on the faceplate of either the A or B end card will require two fibers, one to the attenuator and one from the attenuator. The attenuator location in this case will be listed as the attenuator drawer. Note: The Installation Report does not list the two jumpers needed on either side of the attenuators on separate rows; it is listed on one row with the attenuator note in that column. The Bill of Materials Report lists a count. So the count in the BOM may be different that the number of rows in the Installation Report. The column in the Installation Report is not the jumper count, it is the connection type. Smart SFPs

Each Smart SFP will have a corresponding regular SFP for the 11QPE24 client port. Only the SFP connection between the 11QPE24 client port and the corresponding regular SFP is displayed in the Installation Report.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Installation Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unidirectional Amplifiers ILA Cabling

This section describes the cabling of unidirectional amplifiers in ILAs, as depicted in Figure 11-6, “Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA” (p. 11-12). Figure 11-6 Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA

In Figure 11-7, “Node Details” (p. 11-13), the right side line has number 2 and the left side line has number 1.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Installation Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-7 Node Details

In Figure 11-8, “LINE_IN and LINE_OUT” (p. 11-13), the above amplifier is in slot 3 and the below amplifier is in slot 4. Figure 11-8 LINE_IN and LINE_OUT

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Installation Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EPT Representation in the Installation Report

The current EPT convention for handling the cabling of unidirectional amplifiers in ILA is always to associate to the amplifier the number of the line from which it receives the signal. Considering this example, for the amplifier in slot 3, the line number 1 is reported and for the amplifier in slot 4 the line number 2 is provided instead this for both and the OSC (see Table 11-1, “OSP Fiber Connections (A-End Only)” (p. 11-14)). Table 11-1 NE

OSP Fiber Connections (A-End Only)

Node

Connection Type

A-End Line APN

Type

Shelf Slot Port

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

Customer Supplied OSP Fiber

1

8DG60912AA

AM2125B 1

3

LINE_ IN

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

Customer Supplied OSP Fiber

2

8DG60912AA

AM2125B 4

3

LINE_ OUT

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

Customer Supplied OSP Fiber

2

8DG60912AA

AM2125B 1

4

LINE_ IN

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

Customer Supplied OSP Fiber

1

8DG60912AA

AM2125B 1

3

LINE_ OUT

• • • •

The line number connected to the LINE-IN of the AM2125B in slot 3 is 1. The line number connected to the LINE_OUT of the AM2125B in slot 4 is 1 (but it receives the signal from line 2). The line number connected to the LINE_IN of the AM2125B in slot 4 is 2. The line number connected to the LINE_OUT of the AM2125B in slot 3 is 2 (but it receives the signal from line 1).

In EPT, diversely from other jumpers (which foresee both A-END and Z-End), for an OSP fiber connection, the A-End information is compiled (providing the information of the pack connected to the fiber itself). That is, the line number is the one to which the pack belongs. In the specific case of ILAs with unidirectional amplifiers, the A-END of the LINE-OUT port, accordingly to this EPT convention, provide the line number which

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Installation Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

the pack belongs to (that is, the line which the LINE_IN port is connected to). See Table 11-2, “OSP Fiber Connections (A-End)” (p. 11-15) and Table 11-3, “OSP Fiber Connections (B-End)” (p. 11-15). Table 11-2 NE

OSP Fiber Connections (A-End)

Node

Connection Type

A-End Line

APN

Type

Shelf

Slot

Port

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

SIMJSME3

1

8DG60912AA AM2125B

1

3

OSCSFP_ OUT

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

SIMJSME3

1

8DG60912AA AM2125B

1

3

OSC_ OUT

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

SIMJSME3

2

8DG60912AA AM2125B

1

4

OSCSFP_ OUT

PENR_ PSS16_ 0001

PENR-1ON-1

SIMJSME3

2

8DG60912AA AM2125B

1

4

OSC_ OUT

Table 11-3 NE

OSP Fiber Connections (B-End)

Node

Connection Type

B-End Line

APN

Type

Shelf

Slot

Port

PENR_PSS16_PENR-10001 ON-1

SIMJSME3

2

8DG60912AA

AM2125B

1

4

OSC_IN

PENR_PSS16_PENR-10001 ON-1

SIMJSME3

1

8DG60912AA

AM2125B

1

3

OSCSFP_ IN

PENR_PSS16_PENR-10001 ON-1

SIMJSME3

1

8DG60912AA

AM2125B

1

3

OSC_IN

PENR_PSS16_PENR-10001 ON-1

SIMJSME3

2

8DG60912AA

AM2125B

1

4

OSCSFP_ IN

• • • •

OSCSFP_OUT of slot 3 AM2125B (injected by Line 1) is connected to OSC_IN of slot 4 AM2125B (injected by Line 2) OSC_OUT of slot 3 AM2125B (injected by Line 1) is connected to OSCSFP_IN of slot 3 AM2125B (injected by Line 1) OSCSFP_OUT of slot 4 AM2125B (injected by Line 2) is connected to OSC_IN of slot 3 AM2125B (injected by Line 1) OSC_OUT of slot 4 AM2125B (injected by Line 2) is connected to OSCSFP_IN of slot 4 AM2125B (injected by Line 2)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Network Information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Information Overview

To access the Network Information window (see Figure 11-9, “Network Information Window” (p. 11-16)), select Reports > Network Information. From this window any of the available reports can be accessed by clicking on the respective tab. The following figures show examples of the available reports. Figure 11-9 Network Information Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Network Parameters Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Parameters Report Overview

The Network Parameters Report lists the global network parameter values in effect. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Parameters tab to view the Network Parameters report (see Figure 11-10, “Network Parameters Report” (p. 11-17)). Figure 11-10 Network Parameters Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Site Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Site Report Overview

Lists the NEs and Glass-Through connections at the site and related information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Site tab to view the Site Report (see Figure 11-11, “Site Report” (p. 11-18)). Figure 11-11 Site Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Rack Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rack Report Overview

The Rack Report lists rack types and shelf placement for each site in the network. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Rack tab to view the Rack Report (see Figure 11-12, “Rack Report” (p. 11-19)). Figure 11-12 Rack Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Link Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Link Report Lists the NEs by site and provides single channel, DWDM, and CWDM link information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Link tab to view the Link report (see Figure 11-13, “Link Report” (p. 11-20)). Figure 11-13 Link Report

In GMPLS networks, the Max λ (Nom + Restor.) column counts, for each link, the number of nominal regenerators plus the max of lambdas used for restoration on all fault cases. (Every color is counted only once, so a restoration lambda that reuses a nominal lambda is counted only once).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Fiber Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fiber Report Overview

The Fiber Report lists the spans in the network and related information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Fiber tab to view the Fiber report (see Figure 11-14, “Fiber Report” (p. 11-21) and Figure 11-15, “Fiber Report (Scrolled)” (p. 11-22)). Figure 11-14 Fiber Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Fiber Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-15 Fiber Report (Scrolled)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

OT-OT Link Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OT-OT Link Report Overview

The OT-OT Link Report lists all the OT-to-OT links present in the network along with the shelf-slot information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click theOT-OT Link tab to view the OT-OT Link Report (see Figure 11-16, “OT-OT Link Report” (p. 11-23)). Figure 11-16 OT-OT Link Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

OA and DCM Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OA and DCM Report Overview

The OA and DCM Report lists the OA and DCM receive/transmit details. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the OA&DCM tab to view the OA and DCM Report (see Figure 11-17, “OA and DCM Report” (p. 11-24) and Figure 11-18, “OA and DCM Report (Scrolled)” (p. 11-24)). Figure 11-17 OA and DCM Report

Figure 11-18 OA and DCM Report (Scrolled)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Shelf Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Shelf Report Overview

The Shelf Report lists the sites in the network that contain NEs and provides related shelf information. From the Reports > Shelf Report menu, click the Shelf tab to view the Shelf Report (see Figure 11-19, “Shelf Report” (p. 11-25)). Figure 11-19 Shelf Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Trails Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Trails Report Overview

The Trails Report lists trails in the network and related information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Trails tab to view the Trails Report (see Figure 11-20, “Trails Report” (p. 11-26) and “Overview” (p. 11-27)). Figure 11-20 Trails Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Trails Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Services Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Services Report Overview

The Services Report lists Services in the network and related information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Services tab to view the Services Report (see Figure 11-21, “Services Report” (p. 11-28)). Figure 11-21 Services Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

BOL WDM Routing Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BOL WDM Routing Report Overview

To view the BOL WDM Routing Report, select Reports > BOL WDM Routing Report. The BOL WDM Routing Report displays the following information: • • • •

BOL OSNR nominal BOL OSNR worst case BOL Q nominal BOL Q worst case

• •

BOL per-FEC BER nominal BOL pre-FEC BER worst case

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

BOL Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BOL Physical Layer Report Overview

To view the BOL Physical Layer Report, select Reports > BOL Physical Layer Report. The BOL Physical Layer Report displays the following information: • • • •

BOL oa in, BOL oa in wc BOL cum tilt BOL cum linear ripple BOL cum random ripple

• • •

BOL oa gain BOL oa osnr nom BOL oa osnr wc

• • • •

BOL cum osnr nom BOL cum osnr wc BOL Trans osnr penalty_50GHz BOL PDL penalty

• • •

BOL PMD penalty BOL cum Raman tilt osnr penalty BOL Q nom and BOL Q wc

• • •

BOL pre-FEC BER nom BOL pre-FEC BER wc BOL NF: average NF from test data

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Trail Routing Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Trail Routing Report Overview

The Trails Routing Report lists all of the Trails in the network and related routing information. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Trail Routing tab to view the Trail Routing Report (see Figure 11-22, “Trail Routing Report” (p. 11-31) and Figure 11-23, “Trail Routing Report (Page 2)” (p. 11-32)). Note: If the Required OSNR and Delivered OSNR columns are blank, you must first route Trails, then run or verify the network design. Figure 11-22 Trail Routing Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Trail Routing Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-23 Trail Routing Report (Page 2)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Packet Demands/Routing Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Packet Demands/Routing Report Overview

The Packet Demands/Routing Report provides a flow-based view of the network packet layer. It shows the WDM demands used by the packet layer (packet links). It also lists all packet demands in the network and related information including protection status, and source and destination information for packet routing in the network. From the Reports > Packet Demands Report menu, click the Packet Demands/Routing tab to view the Packet Demands-Routing Report (see Figure 11-24, “Packet Demands/Routing Report” (p. 11-33)). Figure 11-24 Packet Demands/Routing Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-33 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Packet Connections Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Packet Connections Report Overview

The Packet Connections Report provides a physical port view of the network packet layer. It displays the packets demands associated with each port, and lists related capacity values for all packet links in the network. From the Reports > Packet Demands Report menu, click the Packet Connections tab to view the Packet Connections Report (see Figure 11-25, “Packet Connections Report” (p. 11-34)). Figure 11-25 Packet Connections Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-34 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Systems Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Systems Report Overview

The Systems Report shows a list of all commissioned systems in a design. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Systems tab to view the Systems Report (see Figure 11-26, “Systems Report” (p. 11-35)). Note: Before you can generate a Systems Report, you must first create a Commissioning File. Figure 11-26 Systems Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-35 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

L1 Configuration Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L1 Configuration Report Overview

The L1 Configuration Report lists _____________. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the L1 Configuration tab to view the L1 Configuration Report (see Figure 11-27, “L1 Configuration Report” (p. 11-36)). Figure 11-27 L1 Configuration Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-36 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Errors Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Errors Report Overview

The Errors Report shows a list of all errors found in a design. From the Reports > Network Information menu, click the Errors/Warnings tab to view the Errors/Warnings (see Figure 11-28, “Errors Report” (p. 11-37)). Figure 11-28 Errors Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-37 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS Reports Overview

This section describes the various GMPLS Reports generated by the EPT in GMPLS-enabled network designs. Audit Summary Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. Result: The GMPLS Report window is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet with five tabs: Audit Summary (in Audit mode only), Setup, Site, SRG, Failure Scope, and Restoration Regen. The Audit Summary Report tab is displayed by default (see

Figure 11-29, “Audit Summary Report” (p. 11-39)). The Audit Summary tab is present and displayed as the first tab in Audit Mode only. You must first create a BEGD audit scenario to view this tab.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-38 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-29 Audit Summary Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-39 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Guaranteed Restoration (GR) Trails column indicates which nominal routes do not have a pre-calculated backcup route. This value is always 0 for the design column but may be different from 0 for Audit. If the value for Audit is different from 0 this is a clear indication that the network is undersized. There is also a counter for the number of nominal GR trails with no inactive backup. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Setup Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Once the spreadsheet has launched, click the Setup tab.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-40 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Setup Report window is displayed (it is displayed as the first tab by

default when not in Audit mode; see Figure 11-30, “Setup Report” (p. 11-41)). Figure 11-30 Setup Report

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Site Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Once the spreadsheet has launched, click the Site tab.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-41 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Site Report is displayed (see “Site Report” (p. 11-42)).

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Shared Risk Groups (SRG) Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Once the spreadsheet has launched, click the SRG tab to view details for configured shared risk groups, (see Figure 11-31, “SRG Report” (p. 11-43)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-42 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-31 SRG Report

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Failure Scope Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Once the spreadsheet has launched, click the Failure Scope tab to view details for GMPLS Failure Scope (see Figure 11-32, “Failure Scope Report ” (p. 11-44)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-43 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-32 Failure Scope Report

The GMPLS Failure Scope report is an Excel spreadsheet that lists all nominal paths for the network. For each nominal path, where applicable, failure scenario routes that affect the nominal trail are also listed. The report displays the failures (by Nominal or a Failure Scenario route), failed resources, sites and segments. You can run this report only after running the design. It is not saved, and thus will not be available for a design that was opened and not yet run. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

GMPLS Routing Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To view details for GMPLS routing, click the GMPLS Routing tab (see Figure 11-33, “GMPLS Routing Report ” (p. 11-45)). To view this report, you must configure a trail/service in the GMPLS network design with restoration.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-44 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-33 GMPLS Routing Report

Figure 11-34 GMPLS Routing Report (Scrolled Once)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-45 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-35 GMPLS Routing Report (Scrolled Twice)

For each failure scenario of GR trails it is declared if the related back up route is available. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

GMPLS Failure Analysis Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To view details for GMPLS failure analysis, click the GMPLS Failure Analysis tab (see Figure 11-36, “GMPLS Failure Analysis Report ” (p. 11-47)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-46 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-36 GMPLS Failure Analysis Report

Note: To view this report, you must configure a trail in the GMPLS network design with restoration. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Restoration Regen Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > GMPLS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To view details for GMPLS Restoration Regen, click the Restoration Regen tab (see Figure 11-37, “Restoration Regen Report ” (p. 11-48)). Note: The highlighted text in red is for illustrative purposes to show where you can identify the resources.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-47 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-37 Restoration Regen Report

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-48 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Physical Layer Report Overview

The Physical Layer Report is an Excel spreadsheet that presents all of the simulation data used to verify a network design, including detailed optical characteristics for each WDM demand. The report lists each demand in both A to B and B to A directions. You can run this report only after running the design. It is not saved, and thus will not be available for a design that was opened and not yet run. Note: The Physical Layer Report is only available for Current and Deployed projects (see “Running an Incremental Design” (p. 8-16)). Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT GUI, select Reports > Physical Layer. Result: The Physical Layer Report is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet (see Figure

6-29, “Physical Layer Report” (p. 6-47)). Figure 11-38 Physical Layer Report

Total integrated power for a channel maybe determined using the following fields from the Physical Layer Report: • •

NPS44: non-linear phase shift for 44 channel links NPS88: non-linear phase shift for 88 channel links

To convert the non-linear phase shift to non-linear power threshold: Power = 10*log(qNL) +k k = 16.01 for SSMF k = 15.43 for LEAF k = 14.28 for TrueWave-RS

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-49 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example: For an NPS of .32 rad for SSMF [G.652] fiber, the NL threshold is 11 dBm. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-50 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Custom Physical Layer Report Overview

This section describes the process of creating, deleting, and editing Custom Physical Layer Report settings, which are available for non-GMPLS designs only. The Custom Physical Layer Report is a comma-separated value file that contains entries for all the demands within the current EPT design file. This report provides information pertaining to the calculation of the performance of the demand as it traverses from its source to its destination followed by the same information for the reverse path. As the EPT has evolved, many additional parameters have been added to this report in keeping with the numerical models that are used to predict the transmission performance of the different OT types. Given the increasing complexity of the report, we now offer a GUI interface that allows you to create custom reports from the EPT. Types of Custom Physical Layer Reports

There are three types of custom physical layer reports (CPLR) currently supported: • •

Comma-separated value (.csv) Excel spreadsheet (.xls)

•

Viewer

Comma-separated Value Format

The comma-separated value CPLR contains an ordered subset of the Physical Layer Report columns. As with the Physical Layer Report, each row is typically associated with an amplifier. The rows specific to a link or direction will be listed in the order of the link path in that direction from the source to the destination. When launched from the Main Menu (Reports > Custom Physical Layer > Create/Manage), a single CSV report will be shown in the default .csv viewer, containing information for each link and direction in the network. When launched from the link or demand tables, only information for the selected links or demands is displayed.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-51 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Excel Format

The Excel spreadsheet CPLR consists of a set of report sheets. Each sheet can be one of the following types: • •

•

Table: A table sheet consists of a subset of CPLR columns for a given link and direction, similar to the CSV report. Chart: A chart sheet consists of an X axis, shown in the A column, which is either cumulative distance or amp identifier, and a subset of CPLR columns for a given link and direction. Diagram: A diagram sheet consists of a drawing of the amplifiers, enclosing nodes, and intermediate spans with additional CPLR column information listed either under the amplifier or under the span, depending on which object the column describes.

When launched from the main menu, one Excel spreadsheet is displayed in the default .xls viewer for each link, direction pair in the network. Note: For a network with many demands, the .xls report will result in the generation of a large number of Excel worksheets. When launched from the link or demand tables, only the link, direction pairs associated with the selected links or demands is displayed. Viewer

The Viewer spreadsheet CPLR consists of a set of one to three report sheets. There is at most one of each type of viewer sheet. Each sheet can be one of the following types: • •

•

Table: A table sheet consists of a subset of CPLR columns for each link and direction, similar to the CSV report, which is displayed in the table area of the viewer. Chart: A chart sheet consists of an X axis, which is currently either cumulative distance or amplifier identifier, and a subset of CPLR columns for each link and direction. In addition, a subset of CPLR columns can be specified to each have an additional associated Y axis. In the case of an additional Y axis, the associated column plot will be scaled to its data values independent of the values of the other plots on the chart. The associated plots are displayed in the chart area of the viewer. Diagram: A diagram sheet consists of a drawing of the amplifiers, enclosing nodes, and intermediate spans with additional CPLR column information listed either under the amplifier or under the span, depending upon which object the column describes. This is displayed in the diagram area of the viewer.

When launched from the main menu, the viewer window will be shown with link drop-down list area populated with all the demands and links of the network. The first link, direction pair of the network will be initially displayed. When launched from the link or demand tables, only the link, direction pairs associated with the selected links or demands will be available in the link drop-down list area.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-52 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a Custom Physical Layer Report

You can customize the report settings and save it in a name of your choosing. After customizing settings, the report can be generated for those particular settings. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Custom Physical Layer > Create/Manage Result: The Create/Manage Custom Physical Layer window is displayed (see

“Creating a Custom Physical Layer Report” (p. 11-53)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Create New.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-53 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Specs window is displayed (see “Creating a Custom Physical

Layer Report” (p. 11-54)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-54 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 11-4, “” (p. 11-55). Table 11-4 Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

File Name

User-defined name to identify the settings file.



Report Name

User-defined name for this report.

Any names, except duplicate report name.

Report Format

Output format of the generated report.

XLS CSV Viewer

Power Sweep BOL Sheet Name

Name of the part of the report. You must enter a value before you can save this report.

Any names. Only applicable when XLS is selected in the Report Format field. Other format sheet types are set to the values of the Data Representation field.

Data Representation

The representation of the output report values.

Table Chart Diagram

X axis header

User-defined value for the X axis data type for the chart representation. You must enter a value before you can save this report.

[List of values]

Available Attributes

List of attributes that can be selected to report display. Press Ctrl to select multiple values to move to and from the Selected Attributes panel simultaneously.

[List of values]

Selected Attributes

List of attributes selected to report display.

[Listed in the Available attributes panel.]

Additional Y axis Attributes

List of attributes for additional Y axis with different range.

[Listed in the Available attributes panel.]

Note: If Chart is selected in the Data Representation field, you can select a maximum of 14 attributes.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-55 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

To copy this data to a new sheet, click Copy Sheet. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

To add another sheet to this report with default values, click Add Sheet, which will create a new blank sheet, then repeat step 3. Note: You can add a maximum of 3 sheets for the XLS and Viewer report formats, and a maximum of 1 sheet for the CSV report format (see Figure 11-39, “Maximum Sheets Error Window” (p. 11-56)). Figure 11-39 Maximum Sheets Error Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

To delete a sheet, select it and click Delete Sheet. Result: A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 11-40, “Delete Sheet

Confirmation Window” (p. 11-56)). Figure 11-40 Delete Sheet Confirmation Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-56 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The CPLR is created, unless you violated a rule when creating the report (see

Figure 11-41, “Sheet Name Required for Report Creation Error Window” (p. 11-57),Figure 11-42, “X axis Header Required for Report Creation Error Window” (p. 11-57) and ). Figure 11-41 Sheet Name Required for Report Creation Error Window

Figure 11-42 X axis Header Required for Report Creation Error Window

Figure 11-43 A Chart Formatted Report Cannot Exceed 14 Attributes Error Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

When finished, click Close. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-57 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a Copy of a Custom Physical Layer Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Custom Physical Layer > Create/Manage Result: The Create/Manage Custom Physical Layer window is displayed (see

“Creating a Custom Physical Layer Report” (p. 11-53)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a report in the list, and click Create Copy. Result: The Create Specs window is displayed with the pre-populated values taken from the currently selected report. The File name and Report name field will have the text “_Copy” appended to the original report name. Saving the copy will create a new settings file. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Repeat steps 3 through 8 in “Creating a Custom Physical Layer Report” (p. 11-53). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Modify or View a Custom Physical Layer Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Custom Physical Layer > Create/Manage Result: The Create/Manage Custom Physical Layer window is displayed (see

“Creating a Custom Physical Layer Report” (p. 11-53)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Manage.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-58 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Manage Specs window is displayed (see Figure 11-44, “Manage Specs

Window” (p. 11-59)) with the pre-populated values taken from the currently selected report. Figure 11-44 Manage Specs Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-59 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Do one of the following: •

Change settings on this window as desired, and continue with step 4.

•

Click Cancel to close the window without making any changes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If you want to...

Then...

update the current report with these settings,

click OK.

create a new report with these settings,

ensure that the File Name is different from the original value, and click OK.

Result: If you changed any values on this window, either the report is updated, or a

new report is created (based on step 4). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

When finished, click Close. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Deleting a Custom Physical Layer Report

Selecting the Delete option will delete the selected report and the corresponding settings files. All the data’s stored in the settings file will be lost completely. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Click Delete. Result: A confirmation dialog is displayed (see Figure 11-45, “Delete CPLR

Confirmation Window” (p. 11-60)). Figure 11-45 Delete CPLR Confirmation Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-60 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the report. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Physical Layer Report (PLR) Viewer Overview

The PLR Viewer window (see Figure 11-46, “PLR Viewer Window” (p. 11-61)) has four panels: the Control panel on the left, the diagram at the top, the chart in the middle, and the table at the bottom. The Control panel is used to modify the data shown in the three panels. Figure 11-46 PLR Viewer Window

The diagram area (in the top panel) shows a graphical representation of the ordered amplifiers and spans for the shown link and direction. The enclosing nodes are represented by a bold rectangle for OADM nodes and by a regular rectangle for ILA nodes. Spans are shown between the nodes. A span can be compressed by clicking it with the right mouse button and expanded by clicking it with the left mouse button. PLR column values selected for diagram display will be shown under the associated amplifier or span. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-61 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The amplifiers in the diagram are displayed according to their type: Amplifier

PLR OAUSE

Shape

Color

Transmit (TX)

XMIT

Large Triangle

Bright Green

Receive (RX)

RCV

Large Triangle

Dark Green

Repeater (RPTR)

RPTR

Large Triangle

Dark Green

Booster (BSTR)

BOOSTER

Medium Triangle

Cyan

Preamp (PRE)

PREAMP

Medium Triangle

Dark Cyan

Mesh (M)

MESH

Medium Rectangle

Orange

Add (ADD)

ADD

Medium Triangle

Dark Green

OSNR Penalty (PEN)

OSNRPENALTY

Small Rectangle

Dark Gray

Unknown (UNK)

UNKNOWN

Medium Square

Pink

The chart area (in the middle panel of the window) displays plots of the specified column values for the selected link and direction. The values of numerical column values are displayed as the y values in an x,y coordinate plot. The x axis is either cumulative distance in kilometers or amplifier identifier. The amplifier identifier is a combination of node name, line number, oause (amplifier usage and direction), and oaname (amplifier name). One or more alternate y-axes can be added, each associated with a column. If such a Y axis is added to the chart, the associated column values will be scaled independently and that alternate Y axis will be scaled according to the range of data of the associated column. A given plot can be highlighted, which will cause it to be drawn with thicker lines, by clicking on one of its points or on its legend entry. The table area (in the bottom panel of the window) displays the data of the specified PLR columns in a table. The columns of the table can be re-sized and moved by dragging the column borders and column headers respectively. On the Control panel, selecting the Hide Undisplayed Columns field can be used to hide the PLR column list entries that are not currently displayed in the diagram, chart, or table panels. Deselecting this field causes the PLR column list to display all the PLR columns supported by the shown file (the file selected in the link and direction selection area). When a column is selected in the PLR column list, the PLR column name is displayed below the list next to PLR column, its data type and units are displayed. In addition, if it is currently shown in the diagram, chart, or table, the appropriate associated fields are selected. If the column is displayed in the chart area with its own Y axis, the associated Add New Y Axis field is also selected. You can multi-select items from the PLR column list to apply drawing area display status changes to more than one column simultaneously. However, in this case, the data and viewing information from the set of columns would not necessarily be displayed. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-62 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: You can change the status of an independent Y axis for a column without removing it from the chart area. In this case, the associated plot will be redrawn with or without the independent Y axis. Using the PLR Viewer

You can launch the PLR Viewer for a report saved in Viewer format. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Custom Physical Layer > . Result: The PLR Viewer window launches (see Figure 11-46, “PLR Viewer Window”

(p. 11-61)). All demands in the current network will be available for viewing from the top panel drop-down lists used to specify which link and direction display. Note: When this window is launched from the demand or link tables, only the selected demands or links are available. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To specify the information displayed in the panels (link and direction), select the drop-down lists at the top of the window. There are four drop-down lists that determine the link and direction shown: the file drop-down list, the demand drop-down list, the link drop-down list, and the direction chooser. The file drop-down list initially only contains the physical layer report generated when opening the viewer of the current network design. More file options can be added to the file drop-down list by loading another physical layer report. The demand drop-down list lists the demands of the currently selected file. The link drop-down list lists the internal names of the links of the currently selected demand. Finally, the direction drop-down list has two options: AZ and ZA. The Show with field allows the user to select another link and direction to view in the chart and table areas to facilitate side by side comparison. When the Show with field is selected, the drop-down lists to pick the alternate link and direction become enabled. Once an alternate link is selected, the currently shown columns in the chart area will be shown for the alternate link/direction as well as the original link/direction (as specified by the top link selection dropdown lists). In the table area, the currently shown columns will also be shown for the alternate link/direction. Each alternate link/direction column will be next to that of the original link/direction. Note: In comparison mode the diagram will continue to display only the primary link/direction. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To add the links of a physical layer report to the available links to view in this PLR Viewer, click Add PLR File.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-63 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Custom Physical Layer Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A window opens with the file directory to your desktop. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select a physical layer report file of any type, such as PLR, CPLR, or BOL (in CSV format). The columns shown in the control panel will be the columns of the (primary) displayed file. Result: The added file will be added to the options of the Showing field. Now you can

select the newly-added file to view its links. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

On the Control panel, to show the selected column in one or more of the areas (i.e., diagram, chart, and/or table), select the associated field and click Apply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Right-click the chart to display a menu that allows you to change various properties including axis labels, title, font, and color. Functions such as print, save, and zoom are also accessed from this menu. You can also zoom in by sweeping a box (upper left mouse down drag to lower right mouse up) and zoom out by drawing a reverse box (lower right mouse down drag to upper left mouse up). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

To specify the controls to use, click Show/Hide Controls ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

To save this data in an Excel (XLS) spreadsheet, click Export to Excel. Result: A spreadsheet ia created to represent each drawing area: table, chart, and

diagram. For the diagram sheet, the displayed diagram is saved as an image and shown in the associated diagram sheet. For the table, the table data is saved to the associated table sheet. For the chart, the X axis (distance or amplifier) is saved to the first column of the chart sheet and each plot is saved as a column in this chart sheet, from which an associated chart is displayed on that same sheet. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

To view the associated PLR data in the default CSV viewer, click View PLR Data. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-64 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Statistics Report Overview

This section describes the process of creating, deleting, and editing Statistics Report settings, which are available for non-GMPLS designs only. The Statistics Viewer window has four panels: the Control panel on the left, the diagram at the top, the chart in the middle, and the table at the bottom. The Control panel is used to modify the data shown in the three panels. The diagram area (in the top panel) shows a graphical representation of the ordered amplifiers and spans for the shown link and direction. The enclosing nodes are represented by a bold rectangle for OADM nodes and by a regular rectangle for ILA nodes. Spans are shown between the nodes. A span can be compressed by clicking it with the right mouse button and expanded by clicking it with the left mouse button. PLR column values selected for diagram display will be shown under the associated amplifier or span. Control Panel (on left) • •

X Axis for Scatter Plot Chart: Any column/attribute can be selected. Table rows display items in table row order with the row number as X. Y Axis includes: – Option to hide undisplayed columns – Column/Attribute Selection (single and multi-selectable) – – – –

Statistics Column, Date Type, Units of selected column Show in Results /Chart/Table GroupBy checkbox to indicate column value will group data Filter: Adds filter from text field on selected column to filter

Top Controls: •

Report selection to load alternate report

• • •

Save As to save current settings to new report Object Selection – all but PLR will retrieve data Scope with supporting Demand/TLink/Direction Selection (if applicable to scope)

•

Chart Type

Bottom Controls: Show/hide filter controls, show/hide control panel, clear, refresh data, Show Hidden Table Columns (if unchecked, all columns shown) Filter Controls: Apply Filter, editable Filter combo box, Refresh Filter (reapply filter to data), and Save Filter

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-65 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a Statistics Report

You can customize the report settings and save it in a name of your choosing. After customizing settings, the report can be generated for those particular settings. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Statistics > Create/Manage Result: The Create/Manage Statistics window is displayed (see “Creating a Statistics

Report” (p. 11-66)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Create New.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-66 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Specs window is displayed (see “Creating a Statistics Report”

(p. 11-67)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the values from the fields on this window as described in Table 11-5, “Create Specs Parameters (Statistics)” (p. 11-67). Table 11-5

Create Specs Parameters (Statistics)

Parameter

Definition

Allowed Values

File Name

User-defined name to identify the settings file.



Report Name

User-defined name for this report.

Any names, except duplicate report name.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-67 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 11-5

Create Specs Parameters (Statistics)

Parameter

Definition

Object Type

(continued) Allowed Values Demand TLink WDM Link Span Segment Node Line Pack Amplifier

Report Scope

This value cannot be changed if you copy the report.

Chart Type

Network Demand Transparent Link Box and Whisker Histogram Scatter Bar Pie

Filter

(String of __ characters)

Filter syntax and functionality includes standard logical and numeric operators (&&, ||, , ==, !=). Comments are supported surrounded by /* */ Filters can be saved for future use.

Sort by Attributes Group by Attributes Available Attributes

Statistics Attributes

List of attributes that can be selected to report display. Press Ctrl to select multiple values to move to and from the Selected Attributes panel simultaneously.

[List of values]

List of attributes selected to report display.

[Listed in the Available attributes panel.]

Note: If Chart is selected in the Data Representation field, you can select a maximum of 14 attributes.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-68 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 11-5

Create Specs Parameters (Statistics)

Parameter

Definition

(continued) Allowed Values

Chart Attributes

[Listed in the Available attributes panel.]

Table Attributes

[Listed in the Available attributes panel.]

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK. Result: The Statistics Report is created. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Creating a Copy of a Statistics Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Statistics > Create/Manage Result: The Create/Manage Statistics window is displayed (see “Creating a Statistics

Report” (p. 11-66)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select a report in the list, and click Create Copy. Result: The Create Specs window is displayed with the pre-populated values taken

from the currently selected report. The File name and Report name field will have the text “_Copy” appended to the original report name. Saving the copy will create a new settings file. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Repeat steps 3 and 4 in “Creating a Statistics Report” (p. 11-66). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Modify or View a Statistics Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Reports > Statistics > Create/Manage

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-69 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create/Manage Statistics window is displayed (see “Creating a Statistics

Report” (p. 11-66)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Manage. Result: The Manage Specs window is displayed (see Figure 11-47, “Manage Specs

Window” (p. 11-70)) with the pre-populated values taken from the currently selected report. Figure 11-47 Manage Specs Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Do one of the following: • •

Change settings on this window as desired, and continue with step 4. Click Cancel to close the window without making any changes.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-70 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If you want to...

Then...

update the current report with these settings,

click OK.

create a new report with these settings,

ensure that the File Name is different from the original value, and click OK.

Result: If you changed any values on this window, either the report is updated, or a

new report is created (based on step 4). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Histogram ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Scatter Plot ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Box and Whisker Plot ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Pie Chart ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-71 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Statistics Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bar Chart ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Deleting a Statistics Report

Selecting the Delete option will delete the selected report and the corresponding settings files. All the data’s stored in the settings file will be lost completely. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Click Delete. Result: A confirmation dialog is displayed (see Figure 11-45, “Delete CPLR

Confirmation Window” (p. 11-60)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Yes to delete the report. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-72 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Card Inventory Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Card Inventory Report Overview

The Card Inventory Report is only available for Current and Deployed projects (see “Running an Incremental Design” (p. 8-16)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT menu, select Reports > Card Inventory. Result: The Card Inventory Report window is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet (seeFigure 11-48, “Card Inventory Report” (p. 11-73) and Figure 11-49, “Card Inventory Report (CDC-F)” (p. 11-74)). Figure 11-48 Card Inventory Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-73 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Card Inventory Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-49 Card Inventory Report (CDC-F)

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-74 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Design Status Details

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design Status Details Overview

The Design Status Details window is displayed when you select Reports > Design Status Details. This menu option is available after running the design. Figure 11-50 Design Status Details Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-75 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Power Management Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power Management Report Before you begin

Before you can generate a Power Management report, you must first: • •

Define the SID for each NE in the network. Create a Commissioning File (see “Creating a Commissioning File” (p. 9-6)).

Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the EPT menu, select Reports > Power Commissioning. Result: The Power Management Report is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet (see

Figure 11-51, “Power Management Report” (p. 11-76)). Figure 11-51 Power Management Report

The Power Management report shows the information you can see in the WebUI if you were to provision the network design with the correct settings. You can use this report as a guide for provisioning. Egress values refer to the transmit side, while ingress values refer to the receive side. If no information exists in the network design to create a power commissioning report, the following window is displayed (see Figure 11-52, “No Data for Power Commissioning” (p. 11-77)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-76 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Power Management Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-52 No Data for Power Commissioning

Note: If the NE target power is attained: • • •

Actual Gain > Minimum Gain and < Maximum Gain, commissioning succeeds Actual Gain Maximum Gain + Allowed Gain Delta, commissioning fails

Figure 11-53, “Schematic View of Sample Configuration” (p. 11-77) is a schematic view of this configuration. Figure 11-53 Schematic View of Sample Configuration

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-77 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Channel Utilization Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Utilization Report Overview

The Channel Utilization Report is lists all the channels used along with links across the network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To access the Channel Utilization report, do one of the following •

From the EPT menu, select Reports > Channel Utilization.

•

From the Link table, right-click the desired link and select Channel Utilization. Result: The Channel Utilization Report window is displayed as an Excel spreadsheet (seeFigure 11-48, “Card Inventory Report” (p. 11-73)).

Figure 11-54 Channel Utilization Report

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-78 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

GMPLS Commissioning Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS Commissioning Report Overview

The GMPLS Commissioning Report shows a list of all commissioned systems in a GMPLS-enabled design. Select Reports > GMPLS Commissioning menu to view the GMPLS Commissioning report (see Figure 11-55, “GMPLS Commissioning Report” (p. 11-79)). Figure 11-55 GMPLS Commissioning Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-79 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Target Power Offset Commissioning Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Target Power Offset Commissioning Report Overview

The Target Power Offset Commissioning Report shows a list of all commissioned systems in a GMPLS-enabled design. Select Reports > Target Power Offset Commissioning menu to view the Target Power Offset Report on the Site tabs (after the WTOCMx Calibration Report tab; see Figure 11-56, “WTOCMx Calibration Report” (p. 11-80) and Figure 11-57, “Target Power Offset Commissioning Report” (p. 11-81)). Figure 11-56 WTOCMx Calibration Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-80 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Target Power Offset Commissioning Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-57 Target Power Offset Commissioning Report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-81 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Channel Utilization Interface Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Utilization Interface Report Overview

The Channel Utilization Interface Report displays the information from the Channel Utilization window from which it is launched (see Step 1). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To access the Channel Utilization Interface report, do one of the following • •

From the Links section of the Information Bar, right-click the desired link and select Channel Utilization. From the Trails section of the Information Bar, right-click the desired trail and select Channel Utilization. Result: The Selected Links Channel Utilization window or Trail Channel Utilization window is displayed (see Figure 11-58, “Selected Links Channel Utilization Window” (p. 11-82) and Figure 11-59, “Trail Channel Utilization Window” (p. 11-83)).

Figure 11-58 Selected Links Channel Utilization Window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-82 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Channel Utilization Interface Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-59 Trail Channel Utilization Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Export.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-83 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Reports

Channel Utilization Interface Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Channel Utilization Interface Report window is displayed as an Excel

spreadsheet (seeFigure 11-60, “Channel Utilization Interface Report” (p. 11-84)). Figure 11-60 Channel Utilization Interface Report

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 11-84 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

12

Importing Network Data 12

Import Network Data Overview

The Import Data Network feature allows you to import network information from the 1830 network using the Network Management System (NMS) and the 1350 OMS to update a previously created EPT design file. Starting from EPT R8.2.2, for GMPLS-based networks, only the Discrepancy Report is supported, without trails, services and Regenerators for restoration purposes. Note: EPT and OMS cannot support the upload of an NE unless the OMS is synchronized with the NE. The Import Network Data Operation is as follows: 1. Start with an existing EPT design (see Notes below). 2. Save a copy of the EPT design in case of error. 3. In the EPT tool, with this existing EPT design file open, select File > Import Design. 4. Compare Import Network Data File and the current EPT Design and report discrepancies if any of the following mismatch: • System Identifier (SID), shelf type, NE type, Optical Node type • • •

Non-trail/service specific card shelf-slot position EC, FAN, power filter APNs (orderable part numbers) WDM link topology

• Non-trail/service specific card-to-port “topological connections” • Segment/Span Loss comparisons 5. For the scope of the import, check that: • •

Values commissioned with ranges are within range (Raman Gain, RX EDFA gain, mid-pack eVOA). Other (non-range) commissioned parameter values from the Import file match the current EPT design values that would be commissioned.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6. Verify that the design is valid, given the values Import Network Data file (for example, Segment Loss, Optical power, EDFA gain, Raman gain, Raman hybrid mid-pack eVOA attenuation). Determine whether the design has used up the Beginning of Life Loss margin, or any of the End of Life loss margin. 7. Discrepancy Reports support conflict resolution between the physical network as determined by the Import Network Data file and the EPT design (see “Viewing the Discrepancy Report” (p. 12-3)). Note: Upload of trail and services is not supported in Release 9.0. Note: After the Import Network Data process is complete, the EPT demands added from the import file are placed into a Deployed Project. Purpose

The Import Network Data feature has the following purposes: •

•

The 1830 PSS NEs are “auto-commissioned” using a Commissioning File created from the 1830 PSS EPT. Any extension of the network or modification may require an up-to-date EPT design with which to make the modifications for the expansion, and can then be used to create new Commissioning File(s). To verify that the network (not traffic matrix) deployed is valid.

Creating the Export File using OMS 1350 for the EPT Import Network Data

To ensure that an upload file works on the EPT design: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Ensure all NEs are re-synchronized in OMS before generating the upload file. (Re-synchronizing the NE is not service-affecting.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Re-synchronizing will resolve all missing APN, pluggable and power values on OT/LD. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If the links have just been installed and provisioned/commissioned, ensure that the A-to-Z and Z-to-A power balancing on demand services in OMS. Note: This step is optional if a green bar is present across the service path in the AZ-ZA direction in OMS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Re-discover all services in OMS before generating the upload file. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing Network Data ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Ensure all NEs in the EPT design systems which will be imported/compared are being managed by the OMS 1350. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

In the 1350 OMS GUI, select Actions > Commission and Power Balance > Generate File for Export to EPT. This step takes all the NE, shelf, slot, card, port, pluggable and service information from the managed network and creates a file to give to EPT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

In the EPT, save a copy of the EPT design. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

In the EPT, select Action > Import Network Data. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Viewing the Discrepancy Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Action > Import Network Data.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Import Network Data window is launched within the Upload window

displayed (see Figure 12-1, “Upload Window (Import Network Data)” (p. 12-4)). Figure 12-1 Upload Window (Import Network Data)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Import or Save and Import. Result: A window is displayed to browse your PC to the desired import file location. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Open.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Upload: filename window is displayed (see Figure 12-2, “Upload: FilenameWindow” (p. 12-5)). Figure 12-2 Upload: FilenameWindow

The Upload window reports NE, Shelf, Pack (excluding OTs), Topology, APN, power mismatches and discrepancies. It includes a Display Tree of the actions involved with import. The Console panel displays information of running progress, mismatches, and so on. Traffic Import is an additional option. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Optional: Select and copy the displayed data, as desired. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click Discrepancy Report.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Discrepancy Report is launched in Excel (see Figure 12-3, “Discrepancy

Report (NE Tab)” (p. 12-6), Figure 12-4, “Discrepancy Report (Span Tab)” (p. 12-7), and Figure 12-5, “Discrepancy Report (Verify Tab)” (p. 12-8)). Figure 12-3 Discrepancy Report (NE Tab)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 12-4 Discrepancy Report (Span Tab)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Importing Network Data

Import Network Data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 12-5 Discrepancy Report (Verify Tab)

If you need to modify your design/configuration, you can do so on the OMS, or EPT, and then re-commission the file. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

When finished, click Close. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 12-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

13

EPT Tutorials 13

Overview Purpose

This chapter contains tutorials to illustrate various PSS configurations. Feature Category

Tutorials

Synchronization

“1588v2 Configuration” (p. 13-3)

Protection

“Designing Submarine Links” (p. 13-19) “1621SLE Long Spans ” (p. 13-13) “Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration” (p. 13-22) “Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration” (p. 13-26) “OPS Protection” (p. 13-29)

Aggregation

“Cascading OTs ” (p. 13-31) “1DPPM24 Aggregation” (p. 13-34) “MC LAG Configuration” (p. 13-36)

ROADM Designs

“ROADM Configurations” (p. 13-37)

Pack-Specific Configurations for OTs, LDs and SFPs

“IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration” (p. 13-39) “WTOCM OSNR Measurements” (p. 13-43) “Smart SFPs” (p. 13-46) “11QCUPC 10G EPT trail Segments” (p. 13-47) “4DPA4 Configuration ” (p. 13-49) “Alien Signal Configuration” (p. 13-56)

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Feature Category Shelf Packing and Placement

Tutorials “Shelf Packing and Placement” (p. 13-60) “Network Element Physical Configuration Editing” (p. 13-67)

Projects

“Project Configuration” (p. 13-68)

Contents 1588v2 Configuration

13-3

1621SLE Long Spans

13-13

Designing Submarine Links

13-19

Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration

13-22

Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration

13-26

OPS Protection

13-29

Cascading OTs

13-31

1DPPM24 Aggregation

13-34

MC LAG Configuration

13-36

ROADM Configurations

13-37

IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration

13-39

WTOCM OSNR Measurements

13-43

Smart SFPs

13-46

11QCUPC 10G EPT trail Segments

13-47

4DPA4 Configuration

13-49

Alien Signal Configuration

13-56

Shelf Packing and Placement

13-60

Network Element Physical Configuration Editing

13-67

Project Configuration

13-68

GMPLS-Enabled Network Upload

13-73

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1588v2 Configuration Overview

The EPT supports entry of the basic timing distribution card configuration. Time of day and phase synchronization distribution is supported on the 1830 Network Elements using the IEEE 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP); frequency synchronization is supported using SYNCE. The PTPIO card places an Ethernet signal onto a 1625nm timing channel to distribute timing over a WDM link. EPT will provide some simple sanity checks of the timing distribution, support the Bill of Materials and Installation Reports for timing distribution cards, port pluggables, and topological connections. EPT does not model external connections such as external timing clock inputs. The 1588v2 configuration has three main components: •

Configuring PTPCTLs/PTPIOs

• •

Configuring 11DPE12As Configuring PTPCTLs/PTPIOs with 11DPE12As

Before you begin, consider the overall 1588v2 synchronization network. Configuring PTPCTLs/PTPIOs

Begin with a network design (any design state is allowed). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create PTP cards: right-click and select Create L2-Switch on each site (see Step 1). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create PTPIOs and PTPCTLs with their client ports (see Step 2). Note: One PTPIO card includes two independent PTPIO blocks; that is, each PTPIO block has its own client port TPxW. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

In each site, you must associate PTPCTLs/PTPIOs together for building the overall PTP synchronization network. For example, in Site1 (see Figure 13-1, “PTPCTL/PTPIO Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network” (p. 13-4)), you must connect one PTPIO card with two PTPIO blocks connected to the two segments, and one PTPCTL with two client ports.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-1 PTPCTL/PTPIO Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Right-click and select Edit L2 Synch Network.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Edit PTP synchronization network window is displayed (see Figure 13-2,

“Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window” (p. 13-5)). Figure 13-2 Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the PTPCTL as root PTP-node of the synchronization network in the site (see Figure 13-3, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPCL Selected)” (p. 13-5)). Figure 13-3 Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPCL Selected)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select the PTPIO block (block 1 or block 2) as connected to the PTPCTL in the site (see Figure 13-4, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPIO Selected)” (p. 13-6)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-4 Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPIO Selected)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Select the segment to be associated to the PTPIO block in the site (see Figure 13-5, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (Segment Selected)” (p. 13-6)). Figure 13-5 Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (Segment Selected)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

If other client ports are available, you can change the client ports of the PTPCTLs in the Parent Port Number column (see Figure 13-6, “PTPCL Client Ports” (p. 13-6)). Figure 13-6 PTPCL Client Ports

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Click OK. • •

An error is displayed if a connected PTPIO block has no association with the segment. A warning is displayed if a PTP card is not used in this site synchronization tree.

You can check that all the PTP cards are used in the L2-Switch section of the Information Bar (see Figure 6-24, “L2 Switch List” (p. 6-42)). The Used/Available Client Ports, Line Ports and Connected columns to have details about the usage of the involved PTP cards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

To create the Circuit Packs associated to the defined L2 Switch (PTP cards) cards. Use the Run Design command (see Figure 8-1, “Run Design Options Window” (p. 8-5)). This command may display errors if one or more PTPIOs are not used in the synchronization network, or one or more PTPIOs are not associated to the segment (see Figure 13-7, “PTP Errors” (p. 13-7)). Note: Each segment transporting 1588v2 timing should have one PTPIO at each end. Figure 13-7 PTP Errors

When the design is successful, a Warning is displayed to check the consistency of the overall 1588v2 synchronization network (see Figure 13-8, “PTP Warnings” (p. 13-7)), including: •

Connectivity between segments involved in the 1588v2 timing

•

Connection to the Master Clock, (dedicated Client Port(s)) for external timing

Figure 13-8 PTP Warnings

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring 11DPE12As

Begin with a valid network design (with Complete, Valid status), including Packet Link (based on 11DPE12A OTs) and packet demands. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In each site, you must connect 11DPE12A cards together for building the overall PTP synchronization network. For example, in Site1 (see Figure 13-9, “11DPE12A Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network” (p. 13-8)), you must add one 11DPE12A. Figure 13-9 11DPE12A Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network

You should also: • •

Check that the packet demands transporting the 1588v2 timing are consistently selected according the synchronization network. Manually route 11DPE12A demands carrying 1588 timing

• •

Avoid the usage of 3R when routing the packet links. Avoid restorations of used packet links.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the 11DPE12A as root of the synchronization network in the site. You can distinguish the different instances of the 11DPE12A according the WDM demands (packet links) associated to it (the 11DPE12A-Site1-{Demand2, Demand3} card instance is displayed in Figure 13-10, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (11DPE12A Selected)” (p. 13-9)). Figure 13-10 Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (11DPE12A Selected)

The 11DPE12A cards used for propagating the 1588v2 timing (by data channel) are listed in the L2-Switch section of the Information Bar. The 11DPE12A has 12 available client ports; one client port is used for data transmission. In the Used/Available Client Ports column (as shown in Figure 13-11, “View L2 Switch (11DPE12A Demands)” (p. 13-9)), 0 client ports are currently used (in fact, parameter “Connected”=“NO”), while 11 client ports are potentially available. Figure 13-11 View L2 Switch (11DPE12A Demands)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To create the client ports and Jumpers defined in the synchronization network, use the Run Design command (see Figure 8-1, “Run Design Options Window” (p. 8-5)). Note: The Run Design option 1 Do not remove any designed elements is allowed only when 11DPE12A is used as 1588v2 timing. When 11DPE12A is selected in the PTP tree in one (or more sites, the Run Design options 2 and 3 (Remove all auto-designed elementsand Remove all user-designed and auto-designed elements) deletes the routes of packet links and the 11DPE12A packs. A warning is displayed when either of these latter two options are selected (see Figure 13-12, “11DPE12A L2 Pack Removal Warning” (p. 13-10)):

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-12 11DPE12A L2 Pack Removal Warning

When the design is successful, a warning is displayed to check the consistency of the overall 1588v2 synchronization network (see Figure 13-8, “PTP Warnings” (p. 13-7)), including: • •

Connectivity between segments involved in the 1588v2 timing Connection to the Master Clock, (dedicated Client Port(s)) for external timing

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring PTPCTLs/PTPIOs with 11DPE12As

Begin with a valid network design (with Complete, Valid status), including Packet Link (based on 11DPE12A OTs) and packet demands. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create PTP cards: right-click and select Create L2-Switch on each site (see Step 1). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create PTPIOs and PTPCTLs with their client ports (see Step 2). Note: One PTPIO card includes two independent PTPIO blocks; that is, each PTPIO block has its own client port TPxW. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

In each site, you should connect 11DPE12As/PTPCTLs/PTPIOs together for building the overall PTP synchronization network. For example, in Site1 (see Figure 13-13, “PTPCTL/PTPIO/11DPE12A Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network” (p. 13-11)), one PTPIO card with one PTPIO block should be connected to one segment, and one 11DPE12A with one Client Port available. Be sure to check the consistency of the overall synchronization network.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-13 PTPCTL/PTPIO/11DPE12A Blocks in PTP Synchronization Network

You should also: • • •

Manually route 11DPE12A demands carrying 1588 timing Avoid the usage of 3R when routing the packet links Avoid restorations of used packet links

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the 11DPE12A as root of the synchronization network in the site. You can distinguish the different instances of the 11DPE12A according the WDM demands (packet links) associated to it (in Figure 13-10, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (11DPE12A Selected)” (p. 13-9), the 11DPE12A-Site1-{Demand2, Demand3} card instance is displayed). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the PTPIO block (block 1 or block 2) as connected to the 11DPE12A-Site1{Demand2, Demand3} in the Site1, for example (see Figure 13-4, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (PTPIO Selected)” (p. 13-6)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select the segment to be associated to the PTPIO block in the site (see Figure 13-5, “Edit PTP Synchronization Network Window (Segment Selected)” (p. 13-6)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1588v2 Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

If other client ports are available, you can change the client ports of the PTPCTLs in the Parent Port Number column (see Figure 13-6, “PTPCL Client Ports” (p. 13-6)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

To create the Circuit Packs associated to the defined L2 Switch (PTP cards) cards. Use the Run Design command (see Figure 8-1, “Run Design Options Window” (p. 8-5)). When the design is successful, a Warning is displayed to check the consistency of the overall 1588v2 synchronization network (see Figure 13-8, “PTP Warnings” (p. 13-7)), including: • •

Connectivity between segments involved in the 1588v2 timing Connection to the Master Clock, (dedicated Client Port(s)) for external timing

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1621SLE Long Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1621SLE Long Spans Overview

EPT network designs allow the inclusion of a span designated using the 1621 Submarine Link Extender (SLE) to extend the reach of that span. The EPT will not design the 1621 SLE equipment; there is a separate tool for 1621 SLE equipment design (SNDP). The 130SNX10 OT supports regeneration onto a 1621SLE link. Procedure

To include a 1621 SLE long span in the EPT network design (with or without GMPLS enabled), perform the steps in the following procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create two sites, “Site2” and “Site3,” placed at either end of the submarine link. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create a segment between Site2 and Site3, which will be reach-extended with the 1621 SLE. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Right-click the segment and select Edit Segment. Result: The Segment Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-19, “Segment Details

Window” (p. 5-80)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

In Segment Details window in the Fiber Properties panel, select 1621SLE in the Type field. In a GMPLS-enabled design, you can enable WTOCM usage if desired. Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1621SLE Long Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The segment is now displayed as a dotted line (see Figure 13-14, “Map

(Segment Display--Initial)” (p. 13-14)). Figure 13-14 Map (Segment Display--Initial)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Manually add a one degree DFOADM node to each site A and B. For each site: 1. Right-click the site and select Create Node. 2. Select DFOADM in the Type field. 3. Select 1 in the Max Degree field. 4. Click OK. Note: The DFOADMs at Site2 and Site3 must be placed in the same NE as the node that will be associated with the links out to the nodes at Site1 and Site4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Create either a 1621SLE-100GHz link or a 1621SLE-50GHz DWDM link between the two DFOADM nodes at Site2 and Site3 by right-clicking in the map and selecting 1621SLE-100GHz or 1621SLE-50GHz. Note: If GMPLS is enabled, you must create a 1621SLE-50GHz link.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1621SLE Long Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create DWDM-100GHz or Create DWDM-50GHz window is displayed

(see Figure 13-15, “Create DWDM-50 GHz WTOCMx Window (1621SLE-50GHz)” (p. 13-15)). Figure 13-15 Create DWDM-50 GHz WTOCMx Window (1621SLE-50GHz)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Configure the channels to be available across this 1621SLE (from the 1621SLE design, ONDP) by clicking Configure on the 1621SLE Supported Channel Configuration panel.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1621SLE Long Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The 1621SLE Supported Channel Configuration window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Select channels 9170-9270 (see Figure 13-16, “1621SLE Supported Channel Configuration” (p. 13-16)) and click OK on the 1621SLE Supported Channel Configuration and Create DWDM-100GHz WTOCMx or Create DWDM-50GHz WTOCMx windows. Figure 13-16 1621SLE Supported Channel Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1621SLE Long Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The segment is displayed as a black dotted line (see Figure 13-17, “Map

(Segment Display--Final)” (p. 13-17)). Figure 13-17 Map (Segment Display--Final)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Manually create the DFOADM Node’s equipment at Site2 and Site3, using the Node Details window (see Figure 5-32, “Add Node Details Window (Standard)” (p. 5-110)). Note: The SNDP tool should be used to design the equipment within the 1621SLE link for verification and ordering of that product. For assistance, contact Nokia Technical Support. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

You must manually route or design demands required to route across this 1621SLE link (see Figure 13-18, “1621SLE Link - Manual Route” (p. 13-18)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1621SLE Long Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-18 1621SLE Link - Manual Route

During routing, regeneration will be placed by the tool at the 1621SLE link endpoint sites; which optically isolates the link. The Bill of Materials and Installation Reports (see Chapter 11, “Reports”) will include the 1830 PSS equipment but not the 1621 SLE equipment associated with this link. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Designing Submarine Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Designing Submarine Links Support of AHPHG, AHPLG, A2325A Amplifiers on WR20-TF ROADMs for Submarine Link Configurations

The subsea TX and RX line loading modules is not modeled in EPT, nor is the submarine system within the span containing amplifiers. • •

Set the WR20-TF ROADM target power transmitting/receiving to/from the Link so that the line loading modules receive the expected power. Span or segment loss is manually adjusted to support validation of the link with these target power values.

Regarding the specified power level ranges: • •

TX Line loading modules support an incoming per channel power (transmitted from the WR20-TF ROADM amplifier) between 0 and -6 dBm. RX Line loading modules examples given from the NE HLR show the outgoing per channel power (received on the WR20-TFM ROADM amplifier) to be: – -15.8 to -21.8 dBm for a link with a maximum of 20 channels (3 dB divergence) – -12.6 to -6.6 dBm for a link with a maximum of 88 channels (3 dB divergence) Note: The EPT DWDM Link and TLINK (Trail) validation results across submarine links are meaningless and can be ignored.

WR20-TFM ROADMs are permitted in networks with the OA selection algorithm set to Cost Optimized/(Growth), but only manual selection of bidirectional amplifiers in the WR20-TF ROADM is supported (on the DWDM Link Details window or the Schematic View window). Auto-design will fail to find amplifiers for the WR20-TF ROADM if the OA selection algorithm is set to Cost Optimized/(Growth). The High Performance OA Selection algorithm will continue not to support OA selection for DWDM link over a “no OSC” segment; it will support the design of OAs on other links in the network even when a segment with “no OSC” exists in the same network. The link over the “no OSC” segment(s) will not be designed. This is needed for mixed networks with a submarine link and other node types that may require OPSYS for unidirectional OA selection. Before you begin

The following procedure is recommended only for two-degree node networks with a link between them.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Designing Submarine Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab), set the OA Selection Algorithm field to either Cost Optimized or Cost Optimized (Growth) to allow OSC less segments. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create two sites at the submarine endpoints. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

For both sites, go to the Site Details (Automatic Design Definition Tab), select the Equip All non-WR-20-TF 1830 PSS Lines with High Capacity Filters field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Create a segment between two sites. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

On the Segment Details window, disable the Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) supported on this segment when carrying DWDM field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

In the Length field, enter a short length so the tilt will be ~“flat.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Manually add the WR20-TFM ROADM nodes at either end of the segment. Select amplifiers that can meet the target power needs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Manually add the DWDM-FLEX or DWDM-50GHz link (you will need a DWDM-FLEX if you plan to route PM-8QAM or SPQPSK signals). Max degree should not be set to 1 because it may grow. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Manually set the Target power for the two site’s amplifiers to meet the needs of the line loading modules. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Manually set the loss of the segment so that the Link validates with the target power values. Note: Do not adjust the length, as it will affect tilt. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click Verify Design.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Designing Submarine Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

You may auto-design the rest of the network, adding additional sites and segments, change the OA Selection Algorithm to High Performance, select any WR type for new NEs or nodes, and add lines to the original two WR20-TF ROADMs. EPT also supports adding a link between WR20-TF ROADMs using bidirectional amps manually to an existing network, and supports manually editing the amplifier types on an existing WR20-TF ROADM to bidirectional amplifiers. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration Overview

The EPT supports Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 (ESNCP 1+1) on the WDM Demand window (using the Source Protection and Destination Protection fields). The following sample configuration involves a WDM demand between A(Site 1) and Z(Site 3); a client signal or ODU on a client port of one OT card at the A-end will be sent on two diverse paths from two of the Line ports on the same OT card. At the Z-end the signal arrives on two of the OT Line ports and one is selected for the Z-end client port. Two OT cards are involved in this configuration--one at the A-end and one at the Z-end. ESNCP Protection by OT Card Type

The following OT Types support the ESNCP 1+1 protection on the Create/Edit Trail window: • •

4DPA4 (FlexMux) 4DPA2

• • • • •

4QPA8 11QPA4 11QPEN4 11DPM12 12P120

The following OT Types support the ESNCP 1+1 protection on the Packet Demand window: •

11DPE12

• •

11DPE12A 11DPE12E

Configuring ESNCP 1+1 Protection on Trails ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create the network by selecting File > Network Parameters and selecting the desired values. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check that at least two paths (with link diversity) exist between Sites A and Z in the network.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Add a trail between Sites A and Z. On the Create Trail window: 1. Select one of the applicable OT types listed as supported for trails (see “ESNCP Protection by OT Card Type” (p. 13-22)) in the OT fields (on both the Source and Destination panels). 2. Select ESNCP 1+1 in the Source Protection field. 3. Select ESNCP 1+1 in the Destination Protection field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Run the design by clicking the Run Design button. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring ESNCP 1+1 Protection on Packet Demands ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create the network by selecting File > Network Parameters and selecting the desired values. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check that at least two paths (with link diversity) exist between Sites A and Z in the network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Add the first packet link path, a WDM demand between Sites A and Z. On the Create Trail window: 1. Select one of the applicable OT types listed as supported for packet demands (see “ESNCP Protection by OT Card Type” (p. 13-22)) in the OT fields (on both the Source and Destination panels). 2. Select Packet Link. 3. Select Unprotected in the Source Protection field. 4. Select Unprotected in the Destination Protection field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Run the design by clicking the Run Design button. This action routes the first packet link trail (manual routing is optional). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Add a second packet link path as a trail between Sites A and Z. Select the same options described in Step 3.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Manually route the second link path on a diverse path. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Force the A-end OT to be the same OT as for the packet link previously created, but select a different Line port on that card for this packet link (see Figure 13-19, “Routing Packet Link” (p. 13-24)). Figure 13-19 Routing - Packet Link

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Force the A-end OT to be the same OT as for the packet link above, but select a different Line port on that card for this packet link.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Sub-Network Connection Protection 1+1 Protection Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Two link diverse routes with one OT at the A-end and one OT at the Z-end

(see Figure 13-20, “Link Diverse Routes” (p. 13-25)). Figure 13-20 Link Diverse Routes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Add a packet demand between Sites A and Z. On the Packet Demand window: 1. Select one of the applicable OT types listed as supported for packet demands (see “ESNCP Protection by OT Card Type” (p. 13-22)) in the OT fields (on both the Primary Source and Primary Destination panels). 2. Select ESNCP 1+1 in the Source Protection field. 3. Select ESNCP 1+1 in the Destination Protection field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Manually route the packet demand over the two WDM demand packet links previously created in Step 3 and Step 5. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration Overview

Dual Homed protection primary and secondary paths, chosen during auto-routing, will be Node Diverse as a preference, but if the network configuration does not support node diversity, the two paths will remain link diverse. The dual homed endpoint must be on two different sites. Diverse Path protection configuration requires the endpoint to be on the same site, two different cards. The EPT permits the source and destination to mix Dual Homed and Diverse Path configurations. An example of Dual Homed protection is shown in Figure 13-21, “Routing Demands with Dual Homed Protection” (p. 13-26). In this configuration, two transponders are at Site 1, one path goes to Site 2 and the other path is diversely routed to Site 4. This protection scheme is often used when the application is protected at the IP layer (using link aggregation groups (LAG) across two different routers). Figure 13-21 Routing Demands with Dual Homed Protection

Dual Homed Protection Configuration

Dual Homed protection is shown in Figure 13-22, “Routing Demands with Dual Homed Protection at the Source and Destination” (p. 13-27). In this configuration, two source transponders are at Site 1 and Site 2, and two destination transponders at Site 3 and Site 4. The desired result is to achieve two bi-directional diversely routed paths between the two sites. To configure dual homed protection at the source and destination, from the Create Trail window and select: •

Dual Homed in the Source Protection field

•

Dual Homed in the Destination Protection field

•

New or existing trail in the Disjoint Trail field

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-22 Routing Demands with Dual Homed Protection at the Source and Destination

Note: This illustrates one trail with Source and Destination protection requested as Dual Homed. With this protection definition, you do not specify which source connects to which destination–only to create two diverse paths. Diverse Path Protection Configuration

Diverse path protection is shown in Figure 13-23, “Routing Demands with Diverse Path Protection” (p. 13-27). In this configuration, two source transponders are at Site 1 and Site 2, and two destination transponders at Site 3 and Site 4. The desired result is to achieve two bi-directional diversely routed paths between the two sites. To configure diverse path protection at the source and destination, from the Create Trail window and select: •

Diverse Path in the Source Protection field

•

Diverse Path in the Destination Protection field

•

New or existing trail in the Disjoint Trail field

Figure 13-23 Routing Demands with Diverse Path Protection

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Dual Homed and Diverse Path Protection Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The result for this requested configuration is two separate OTs designed as Site 1 and two separate OTs designed at Site 3.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

OPS Protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OPS Protection Overview

In the EPT, Optical Protection Switch (OPS) protection is supported on TOADM, ROADM, and DFOADM nodes, PSS-32 and PSS-16 Universal Shelves, and 1830 PSS NEs. OPS is the only protection type supported for cascaded trails. Note the following considerations: •

• •

When selecting OPS protection, if the protected trail’s A-end is an OPS protection, the protected trail’s other end must also be set to OPS protection. If the protected trail’s A-end has OPS protection with an alien OT (that is, an OT Type of SVAC, MVAC or MVAC8B), the protected demand’s other end must also be set to OPS protection with an alien OT. The Source or Destination primary and secondary path associated with the OPS ports A and B, must be on the same NE (site), but may be in different nodes within that NE. The trail cannot route toward or over a DWDM link if the network is provisioned with the DWDM Wavelength Tracker Keys field set to Off (unkeyed). (See Table 5-2, “Network Parameters (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)” (p. 5-15).)

OPS Single Interface Protection

This protection type has four components to be provisioned: two Och trails, one trail with OTs, and one service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create a trail, selecting OPS Single Interface Protection in the Source Protection field, and click OK. OPSA is selected in the OT field by default and this field cannot be edited. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create cascaded trail with the following settings: •

In the Source Protection field, select OPS Single Interface Protection.

• •

In the OT field, select the desired OT. In the Primary Trail field, select the trail created in Step 1.

Click OK. Result: The new trails are displayed in the Trails tab. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create a service with the following settings: •

In the Source Protection field, select OPS Single Interface Protection.

•

In the Cascade Trail field, select the trail created in Step 2.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

OPS Protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Run the design. Result: The Trails and Services tabs are updated as are the Trails and Services Reports

(see Figure 11-20, “Trails Report” (p. 11-26) and Figure 11-21, “Services Report” (p. 11-28)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

OPS Dual Interface Protection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create an OCh trail with the following settings: •

In the Source Protection field, select OPS Single Interface Protection.

•

In the OT field, select MVAC, MVAC8B or SVAC.

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create trail with the following settings: •

In the Source Protection field, select OPS Dual Interface Protection.

•

In the Routed Over field, select Trail.

•

In the Primary Trail field, select the trail created in Step 1.

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create a service with the following settings: •

In the Source Protection field, select OPS Dual Interface Protection.

•

In the Cascade Trail field, select the trail created in Step 2.

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Run the design. Result: The Trails and Services tabs are updated as are the Trails and Services Reports

(see Figure 11-20, “Trails Report” (p. 11-26) and Figure 11-21, “Services Report” (p. 11-28)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Cascading OTs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cascading OTs Two-Stage Cascading Options

EPT supports different methods of two-stage cascading for encryption and/or aggregation of lower rate signals into a higher rate line wavelength. The Line signal of OT “A” is connected to one of the client ports of OT “B”: • •

Aggregation of 4DPA4(FlexMux) trails into 11STMM10 or 11DPM12 Cascade of a low speed OT to a high speed OT using one of the supported combinations listed in Table 13-1, “Cascading Configurations” (p. 13-31).

Protected cascaded OT configurations are not supported in GMPLS designs. The following nine OTs are not supported in CDC-F networks in a standalone configuration, but can be used as a cascade with the 130SNX10(LN) as line-facing OTs: The EPT supports the following cascading configurations as shown in Table 13-1, “Cascading Configurations” (p. 13-31). Compatible OTs such as 43SCX4 and 43SCX4E may be placed at opposite ends of the trail. Any configuration with the 11QPEN4 OT can be encrypted. Table 13-1

Cascading Configurations

OT “A”

OT “B”: (Line Interfacing OT)

How Many of OT “A” Can Be Connected to One OT “B”?

11DPE12A

11QPEN4

10

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

10

130SNX10(LN)

4

11QPEN4

4

11DPE12E

112SCX10

11DPM8

112SNX10

10

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

10

11DPE12E 11QPEN4

4

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

10

130SNX10(LN)

10

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Cascading OTs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 13-1

Cascading Configurations

(continued)

OT “A”

OT “B”: (Line Interfacing OT)

How Many of OT “A” Can Be Connected to One OT “B”?

11DPM12

112SCX10

10

112SDX11 112SNX10

10

11QPEN4

10

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

4

130SNX10(LN)

1DPP24M

43SCX4

4

43SCX4E

4

43STX4P

4

11DPM8

11OPE8

11QCE12X

11QPA4

112SNX10

10

11QPEN4

10

130SCX10

10

130SNX10(LN)

10

43SCX4

4

43SCX4E

4

112SCX10

10

112SNX10

10

11QPEN4

10

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

10

130SNX10(LN)

10

43SCX4

4

43SCX4E

4

112SDX11 260SCX2

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Cascading OTs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 13-1

Cascading Configurations

(continued)

OT “A”

OT “B”: (Line Interfacing OT)

How Many of OT “A” Can Be Connected to One OT “B”?

11QPE24

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

10

130SNX10(LN)

10

112SNX10

10

11QPEN4

10

43SCX4

4

11QPEN4

112SDX11 112SNX10

10

130SCX10

10

130SNX10

10

Aggregation Cascade ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create a trail using the 130SCX10 OT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create a cascaded trail using the 11DPM12 OT with the following settings: •

In the Routed Over field, select Trail.

•

In the Source Protection field, select Unprotected and click OK. Result: Two new trails are displayed in the Trails tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create a service. In the Primary Trail field, select Compute or Trail2 and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Run the design. Result: The new trails are displayed in the Trails tab and the Trails Report (see Figure

11-20, “Trails Report” (p. 11-26)) is updated. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-33 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1DPPM24 Aggregation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1DPPM24 Aggregation Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Auto-Design and Verification tab of the Network Parameters window (see Figure 5-6, “Network Parameters Window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab)” (p. 5-15)), select either Cost Optimized or Cost Optimized (Growth)in the OA Selection Algorithm field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create a network as required with at least two PSS-4 NEs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create a trail using the 4DPA4(FlexMux) OT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Create a second trail with the following settings: •

Select the NE Type as 1830 PSS-4.

•

In the Routed Over field, select Trail.

•

In the Primary Trail field, select the trail created in Step 3 or the 1DPP24M OT will not appear in the OT list. Select the OT as 1DPPM24.

•

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select Run Design.

Note: In the Bill of Materials Report and the Equipment View (see Chapter 11, “Reports”), the Network Elements at each end of the WDM Trail Trail1, the EPT placed a 4DPA4(FlexMux) and one 1DPP24M.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-34 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

1DPPM24 Aggregation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-35 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

MC LAG Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MC LAG Configuration Overview

Figure 13-24, “Dual Hub Node with a Single Card and a Single Router (PSS-4)” (p. 13-36) depicts the case of a Dual Hub Node. It has 2 x 10G Ring Closure Card Protection across different shelves using the Multi-Chassis Link Aggregation Group (MC-LAG) feature. Figure 13-24 Dual Hub Node with a Single Card and a Single Router (PSS-4)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-36 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

ROADM Configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ROADM Configurations Overview of Split Shelf ROADM Design Configuration

The 1830 supports the separation of EAST and WEST sides of the NE’s into different shelves. The limit is based on a combination of Optical Fiber jumpers and the 100Base-T limit for the control line between shelves. this tutorial starts with a working design (see Figure 13-25, “Example of Design” (p. 13-37)) and then splits the Le-Sueur site into EAST and WEST shelves. Figure 13-25 Example of Design

Split Shelf ROADM Design ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Perform steps Step 1 through Step 2 in the procedure, “Reconfiguring Circuit Pack Slots” (p. 5-105). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Move the CWR8/CWR8B/CWR8-88, AHPLG, and AHPHG packs (one at a time) from shelf 1 to shelf 2: 1. For each pack, first selecting its current shelf placement in the New Shelf Number field on the Manual Pack Reassignment panel. 2. Then select a slot in the New Slot Number field on the Manual Pack Reassignment panel. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-37 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

ROADM Configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The equipment view for the Le-Sueur site displays the updated shelf

configuration. The EPT will automatically update the BOM to include the new shelf. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

ROADM Network Design with AnyDirection Add/Drop Blocks ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Edit the Site preferences on the sites where you want to place ROADMs with AnyDirection as follows: 1. On the Automatic Design Definition tab of the Site DWDM Automatic Design Default Options window (see Table 5-7, “Site Details Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab)” (p. 5-55)), select ROADM in the OADM Type field. 2. Select a value in the Max Degree field (consider future growth and the interdependency with the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks, and Allow Local Add/Drop fields). 3. Select a value in the ROADM Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks field to the maximum number for this node (consider future growth). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create the demand. Set the Add/Drop Configuration preference field to one of the following values: •

AnyDirection, Fixed Channel

•

AnyDirection, Colorless

•

AnyDirection, Colorless or Fixed Channel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Run the design. ROADMs with AnyDirection Add/Drop blocks will be placed at the demand endpoint sites. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-38 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration Overview

This section describes configuration scenarios incorporating the IROADMV and IROADMF cards introduced in EPT Release 8.1. These cards will be referred to as IROADMX. The IROADMX cards are supported on the PSS-8, PSS-16, PSS-16II and PSS-32. Supported configurations include: • •

Manual design 50 GHz configuration: IROADMX) +ITLB+SFD44/SFD44B

•

100 GHz configuration: IROADMX) +SFD44/SFD44B

Creating WDM Links with IROADMx ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Network Parameters window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab), in the Preferred ROADM Wavelength Router field, select IROADM and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

On the Site Parameters Window (Automatic Design Definition Tab), in the Preferred ROADM Wavelength Router field, select IROADM and click OK. When creating a WDM link on an “empty” ROADM node (based on Site that has IROADM as preferred WR card), the EPT will place the default IROADM card, IROADMV. Note: The ROADM is created only if the “empty” ROADM node has a Max Degree field value is less than 5 and the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks value is 0. Otherwise, the EPT will select the appropriate WR card that can be different as it pertains to Site Detail preference. IROADMx cards can be manually created in the Schematic Editor of the Node Details window (see “Creating Nodes with IROADMx” (p. 13-40)). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring InLine and MidStage DCM with IROADMx

The IROADMF card supports InLineDCM, and the IROADMV card supports InLine And MidStage DCM on the port of rcv LDs (see “Configuring InLine and MidStage DCM with IROADMx” (p. 13-40). DCM configuration is applicable only for the IROADMV rcv LD because it can be configured with InLine or MidStage DCM based on the

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-39 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

connection created on Schematic Editor. IROADMF rcv can be configured only as InLineDCM, so DCMConfig is InLine. Transmit LDs of IROADMF and IROADMV are set to “None” due to they are internally connected into card.

Creating Nodes with IROADMx

The Schematic Editor (see “Creating Nodes with IROADMx” (p. 13-40)) has a new WRx button on the left toolbar that you can use to create a generic WRx card. Since IROADM is directly connected to WDM Line, if WRx is attached on Line, IROADM card will be created (with its internal LDs).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-40 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WR card types option are available after adding WRn on schematic: symbol is enabled or disabled following restriction on the WR card type. For the IROADM case, if Max Degree field greater than 4 and the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks field is greater than 0, WRn is not enabled. All the standard WR cards are available only if OA is added on Line symbol. A node must use and IROADM at each degree/line or no IROADMs at all. If an existing degree in a node is a WR8-88 or WR2-88, you cannot add a new degree with an IROADM. The reverse is also true. Creating IROADMx and Filters (ITLB+SFD or SFD)

IROADM can be configured for support on 100GHz grid (SFD attached to the port) or 50 GHz grid (ITLB+SFD attached on the ADT port). Only one type of filter can be connected to card; at least one ITLB or SFD can be directly attached to the IROADMx. All the other ports can be used to create mesh connection to other IROADM. Creating a Connection Between Two IROADMs

On the Schematic Editor, you can connect two IROADMx cards using the MESH connection symbol on the left toolbar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the desired site, right-click and select Create Node > NE:Site n-n. Result: The Node Details - Add window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

In the Type field, select ROADM. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

In the Max Degree field, select a value from 1 to 4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

In the Max AnyDir Add/Drop Blocks field, leave the default value of 0. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

In the Schematic Node Editor, click the OSP Line icon to add a Line. Then drag it, and select IROADMV/F. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Repeat step 5 to add a second line. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Select the connect two IROADMx cards using the MESH connection symbol on the left toolbar.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-41 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

IROADMF and IROADMV Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Node Details window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Select the source port (ADT_IN or ADT_OUT). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Select the line number and port on the destination IROADM card. The EPT will draw automatically second connection on the ports. The IROADMx card can be connected only to another IROADMx card. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Automatic Design of IROADMF and IROADMV ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Network Parameters window (Auto-Design and Verification Tab), in the Preferred ROADM Wavelength Router field, select IROADM. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Configure other network design parameters as desired, and click OK ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create your sites, segments, network elements, nodes, links, trails and services as desired. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Run Design. Result: The network should populate with IROADMX cards automatically in its

solution. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-42 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

WTOCM OSNR Measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WTOCM OSNR Measurements Overview

The WTOCMA card can be used where the WTOCM is used; it is supported on the PSS-32 and PSS-16. The WTOCMA has the capability to add OSNR channel measurements to existing WTOCM features. Configuring WTOCM - Network Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Network Parameters window, select WTOCM, WTOCMA, or WTOCM-F in the Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM Type) Usage field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select other fields as desired, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring WTOCM - Segments ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the Segment Details window, select WTOCM, WTOCMA, or WTOCM-F in the Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM Type) Usage field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select other fields as desired, and click OK. Result: The configured WTOCMx cards are displayed in the WTOCM Type column

on the Segments tab of the Information Bar. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring WTOCM - Links ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the DWDM Link Details window, select WTOCM, WTOCMA, or WTOCM-F in the Long Haul WaveTracker Decoder (WTOCM Type) Usage field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select other fields as desired, and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-43 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

WTOCM OSNR Measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The configured WTOCMx cards are displayed in the WTOCMx column on

the Links tab of the Information Bar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To modify the WTOCMx usage for a configured link, right-click the desired link. Result: The context menu is displayed.

Select Change WTOCM Type Usage and select Default (No), WTOCM or WTOCMA, WTOCM-F or No. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Configuring WTOCM - Network Elements ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

On the NEs tab of the Information Bar, right-click a configured NE. Result: The context menu is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Edit. Result: The Network Element Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-25,

“Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-96)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

On the Shelf Details panel, select the desired WTOCMx card.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-44 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

WTOCM OSNR Measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Pack Details panel is populated (see “Configuring WTOCM - Network

Elements” (p. 13-45)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

In the Change Pack Type field, select WTOCM, WTOCMA or WTOCM-F. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

In the WTOCM Connection {1-4} field, select up to four connections to modify or override as desired. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click OK to save the configuration. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-45 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Smart SFPs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Smart SFPs Overview

Remote Managed Devices include 1GbE SFPs, which are installed in Customer Equipment, and a standalone NID called cEDD. These devices are managed by an 11QPE24 or 11QCE12X pack to provide monitoring of the link between the CE (UNI-C) and PE (UNI-N). Several client interface options are available for the GbE signal for the 11QPE24 and 11QCE12X OTs. The Smart SFPs are reported in the Bill of Materials report (see “Bill of Materials Report” (p. 11-4)). Corresponding regular SFPs (for the 11QPE24 client port) are also listed. Only the SFP connection between the 11QPE24/ 11QCE12X client port and the corresponding regular SFP is listed in the Installation Report (see “Installation Report” (p. 11-10)). Configuring Smart SFPs ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Create or Edit Service window, on the Client Details panel, select the desired SFPs in the Interface field. (See “Smart SFPs in the BoM” (p. 11-5) for a list of Smart SFPs.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select other fields as desired, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-46 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

11QCUPC 10G EPT trail Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QCUPC 10G EPT trail Segments Overview

This feature is to add EPT support for 11QCUPC-compatible trails that originate or terminate in a an OCS node (11QCUPC-compatible trail) and pass through or terminate in a WDM node. 11QCUPC-compatible trails support the 11QPA4 or 11DPM12 as a destination OT for unprotected trails only. The trails support regeneration with the 11QPA4 in all configurations with 11QCUPC-compatible. They are also supported in GMPLS-enabled designs as unprotected trails with no restoration. In addition: •

The signal must enter a WDM node in a PSS-4, PSS-16, or PSS-32 shelf.

•

These trails are treated as an external signal coming from an SFD port.

The following protection modes are supported in EPT: • •

Unprotected Diverse Path

•

Dual Homed

Configuring 11QCUPC-Compatible trails ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Create or Edit Trail window, on the Source panel, select 11QCUPC-compatible in the OT field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

On the Destination panel, select 11QCUPC-compatible, 11QPA4 or 11DPM12 in the OT field. The following end points are supported for 11QCUPC 10G unprotected trails (see Figure 13-26, “OCS – DWDM – DWDM with 10AN10G and 11QPA4” (p. 13-48) and Figure 13-27, “OCS – DWDM – DWDM with 24ANM and 11DPM12” (p. 13-48)): •

11QCUPC-compatible to11DPM12 (originating from a 24ANM in an OCS node)

•

11QCUPC-compatible to 11QPA4 (originating from a 10AN10G in an OCS node); regeneration is supported with the 11QPA4.

FEC types supported in these configurations include A-EFEC and GFEC.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-47 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

11QCUPC 10G EPT trail Segments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-26 OCS – DWDM – DWDM with 10AN10G and 11QPA4

Figure 13-27 OCS – DWDM – DWDM with 24ANM and 11DPM12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To save this configuration, click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-48 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4DPA4 Configuration Overview

4DPA4 Dual Transponder/Muxponder- The bandwidth is divided into 16 time slots per DWDM line interface. The 4DPA4 (FlexMux) pack may be configured as ESNCP protected or unprotected. When unprotected, the 4DPA4 may be optionally configured as a dual transponder, or dual muxponder. Each client interface is mapped into the time slots as follows: • • • •

OC3/STM1 – 1 timeslot OC12/STM4 – 4 timeslots OC48/STM16 – full ODU1/OTU1 (no timeslot assignments) 1GbE – 8 timeslots (mapped to ODU0#1 or ODU0#2), 8B/10B

• •

FE (100M Fast Ethernet) – 1 timeslot, 4B/5B FC100 (1.0625G) – 7 timeslots, 8B/10B (includes FICON)

•

FC200 (2.125G) – 14 timeslots, 8B/10B (includes FICON_Express and ISC-3 Peer Mode) HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI HDTV) – 10 timeslots SD-SDI – 2 timeslots (SMPTE259M, Optical interfaces)

• •

The protection types supported by the 4DPA4 (FlexMux) pack are Unprotected, Diverse Path, ESNCP, Y-cable and Dual Homed (see Figure 13-28, “Protection/Service Network Design” (p. 13-49)). For the 4DPA4 (DualTran) pack, only Dual Homed and Diverse Path protection types are supported. Figure 13-28 Protection/Service Network Design

•

To configure the 4DPA4 pack as a dual transponder, perform the steps in the procedure, “4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration” (p. 13-50).

•

To configure the 4DPA4 pack as a dual muxponder, perform the steps in the procedure, “4DPA4 Dual Muxponder Procedure” (p. 13-54). To configure the 4DPA4 pack as ENSCP, see “4DPA4 ESNCP Configuration Considerations” (p. 13-55).

•

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-49 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration

In this example (see Figure 13-29, “Example Network Design” (p. 13-50)), create two trails using a single card. Both trails are from Site 1 to Site 2. But the first trail is routed directly from Site 1 to Site 2, and the second trail is routed from Site 3. Figure 13-29 Example Network Design

Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create the first trail called OC48(1) using the 4DPA4 (DualTran) pack with the following settings: •

Select Unprotected in the Source Protection field.

•

Enable the Allow Sharing field. Note: GFEC is the only type of FEC available with the 4DPA4 pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

On the Primary Destination panel, enter the same configuration values used for the Primary Source panel. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create the second trail called HDSDI using the 4DPA4 pack with the following settings: •

Select Unprotected in the Source Protection field.

•

Enable the Allow Sharing field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Because port 1 was chosen for the first trail, choose port 2 in this step; otherwise the EPT will configure the network using two different cards. Note: If the EPT configures two 4DPA4 packs, check that you used different line ports. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click Run Design .

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-50 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The EPT creates a design that uses a single 4DPA4 pack for both trails (see

Figure 13-30, “4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration (Equipment View)” (p. 13-51)). Figure 13-30 4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration (Equipment View)

The EPT will also route both trails across the same path (see Figure 13-31, “Routing Across Same Path (4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration)” (p. 13-51)). Figure 13-31 Routing Across Same Path (4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

To change the routes so that they are diversely routed, delete the route associated with OC48(1) (see Figure 13-32, “Diverse Routing (4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration)” (p. 13-52)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-51 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-32 Diverse Routing (4DPA4 Dual Transponder Configuration)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Create a new route for OC48(1). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Select the direct route from Site 1 to Site 2 (see Figure 13-33, “Routing Window (Selecting Site 1 to Site 2)” (p. 13-52)). Figure 13-33 Routing Window (Selecting Site 1 to Site 2)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Click Details below Site 1 (see Figure 13-34, “Routing Window (Routing Solutions)” (p. 13-53)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-52 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-34 Routing Window (Routing Solutions)

Result: The OT Selection window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Select 1(1)-17-L1(4DPA4) (see Figure 13-35, “OT Selection Window (Selecting 1(1)-17-L1(4DPA4))” (p. 13-53)). Figure 13-35 OT Selection Window (Selecting 1(1)-17-L1(4DPA4))

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Repeat Step 9 through for Step 11 for Site 2.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-53 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Click Finish. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

4DPA4 Dual Muxponder Procedure

This procedure is similar to that of the 4DPA4 Dual Transponder procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create the first WDM trail called 2xGbE using the 4DPA4 pack with the following settings: •

Select Unprotected in the Source Protection field.

•

Enable the Allow Sharing field. Note: GFEC is the only type of FEC available with the 4DPA4 pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

On the Primary Destination panel, enter the same configuration values used for the Primary Source panel. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Repeat Step 2 for port 2. Note: If the EPT configures two 4DPA4 packs, check that you used different line ports and client ports, and that the total number of client ports is four or less. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Create the second trail called FC100-OC12 using the 4DPA4 pack with the following settings: •

Select Unprotected in the Source Protection field.

•

Enable the Allow Sharing field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Because ports 1 and 2 were chosen for the first trail, choose ports 3 and 4 in this step; otherwise the EPT will configure the network using two different cards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click Run Design. Result: The EPT creates a design that uses a single 4DPA4 pack for both trails. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-54 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

4DPA4 Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4DPA4 ESNCP Configuration Considerations

• • •

When creating an ESNCP trail (head-end bridge and tail-end switch using an SFP), the Allow Sharing field is not available. You can select up to four ports, but the maximum bandwidth is 16 time slots. When you click Run Design, the EPT creates a design that uses two line-side SFPs with two eVOA’s (to imprint the WaveTracker keys on the channel), and diversely routes the path.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-55 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Alien Signal Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alien Signal Configuration Configuring Alien Signals ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

From the Create Service window, select MVAC, MVAC8B or SVAC in the OT field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the desired value in the Interface field. Each value provides a list of alien signal types: • • • •

Alien1 models a 10G transponder with performance similar to the

11STAR1/11STAR1A. Chirped XFP provides performance similar to a fixed 10G XFP with a dispersion map similar to the 11QPA4 (but this option is not allowed over a 50GHz link). Tunable Chirped XFP provides performance similar to a 50GHz capable tunable 10G XFP similar to the 11QPA4. 10AN10G Compatible support 10AN10G compatible VAC 10G trails (that is, unprotected trails that originate or terminate in an OCS node and pass through or terminate in a WDM node; see “VAC 10G Unprotected trails” (p. 13-57)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

When the Allow Sharing field is selected, up to eight alien signals are aggregated onto a single MVAC/SVAC. However, you cannot assign the alien signal to a specific MVAC or SVAC port. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select other fields as desired, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-56 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Alien Signal Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VAC 10G Unprotected trails

The following end points are supported for VAC 10G unprotected trails (see Figure 13-36, “OCS to DWDM to DWDM (1 of 2)” (p. 13-57), Figure 13-37, “OCS to DWDM to DWDM (2 of 2)” (p. 13-58), Figure 13-38, “Regeneration of 10AN10G and MVAC” (p. 13-58) and Figure 13-39, “DWDM to OCS to DWDM” (p. 13-59)): • • •

MVAC, MVACB, or SVAC to 11DPM12 (originating from a 24ANM in an OCS node); regeneration is supported with the 11QPA4. MVAC, MVACB, or SVAC to 11QPA4 (originating from a 10AN10G in an OCS node); regeneration is supported with the 11QPA4. MVAC, MVACB, or SVAC to MVAC, MVACB, or SVAC to (originating and terminating from a 10AN10G in an OCS node); regeneration is supported with the 11QPA4.

FEC types supported in these configurations are A-EFEC, GFEC and NOFEC. Figure 13-36 OCS to DWDM to DWDM (1 of 2)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-57 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Alien Signal Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-37 OCS to DWDM to DWDM (2 of 2)

Figure 13-38 Regeneration of 10AN10G and MVAC

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-58 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Alien Signal Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-39 DWDM to OCS to DWDM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-59 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Shelf Packing and Placement Shelf Packing Examples

Examples of field-customized shelf packing are displayed in Figure 13-40, “Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 1)” (p. 13-60) through Figure 13-43, “Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 4)” (p. 13-63) Figure 13-40 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 1)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-60 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-41 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 2)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-61 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-42 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 3)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-62 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-43 Field-Customized Shelf Packing (Degree 4)

If you were to automatically design an 8-degree node, with the line isolation of None or Even/Odd, the line cards are placed at the edges of the shelf. For line isolation of all, the slot numbers will be the same but there will be only one line per shelf, as shown in Figure 13-44, “Degree 8 Node (All)” (p. 13-64).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-63 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-44 Degree 8 Node (All)

For a node with OTs, the OTs will be placed in available slots starting from right to left as is the current system default behavior, as shown in Figure 13-45, “Degree 7 Node ” (p. 13-65).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-64 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-45 Degree 7 Node

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-65 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Shelf Packing and Placement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Other non-OT packs will be placed in available slots from left to right, again as is done with the current system default behavior. Modifying the OSC SFP

Perform the following steps to modify the OSC SFP. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select NEs from the NEs section of the Information Bar. A table of all NEs configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 5-29, “Network Elements ” (p. 5-107)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select the row for the desired NE, then right-click and select Edit. Result: The Network Element Details window is displayed (see Figure 5-25,

“Network Element Details Window” (p. 5-96)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

In the Shelf Details panel, select an amplifier card. Result: The Shelf Details and the Pack Details panels are populated. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click XFP/SFP. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the appropriate OSC SFP in the Amplifier Information window and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-66 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Network Element Physical Configuration Editing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Element Physical Configuration Editing Before you begin

For an auto-designed NE, you can re-number the optical lines (see Step 1 below) and/or the ROADM shelves in a rack (proceed to Step 1). EPT allows line numbers to be selected if they are less than or equal to the Max Degrees field value for the node. EPT allows MCS Add/Drop Block numbers to be selected if they are less than or equal to the Max MCS Add/Drop Blocks per Optical Node field value for the node. Optical Line Renumbering ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To re-number the optical lines while maintaining the optical line equipment relationship to upstream and downstream NEs and links, use the Optical Line Renumbering feature, accessed from the Link Details window. Select the desired line number in the Line # field on the A-End or B-End panel (see Table 6-1, “DWDM Link Parameters” (p. 6-7)). Note: Cards will NOT move due to optical line renumbering. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If the line is already used in a node, a warning window will be displayed, giving you the option to swap line numbers. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Shelf Renumbering ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To renumber the PSS-32 shelf, use the Shelf Renumbering feature, accessed from the Shelf Details window (see “Modifying the Shelf Type” (p. 5-95)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select NEs from the NEs section of the Information Bar (see Figure 5-29, “Network Elements ” (p. 5-107)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter the desired Shelf Number on the Shelf Details panel, and click OK. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-67 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Project Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Project Configuration Overview

This section covers two tutorials: • •

Creating a network design and dividing it into two projects (see “Dividing a Network Design into Projects” (p. 13-68)) Adding demands that traverse segments in two projects (see “Adding Demands that Traverse Segments in Multiple Projects” (p. 13-71))

Dividing a Network Design into Projects ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

There are two methods to create a network and divide it into two projects: If...

Then...

create separate projects first, then configure the network design,

continue with Step 2.

create the network first and then divide it,

proceed to Step 8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create Project A and Project B as follows: 1. Click Project in the menu bar. The Current Project window is displayed (see Figure 8-12, “Current Project Window” (p. 8-19)). 2. Click New. 3. Rename the project as “Project A.” Add a description if desired, select “Retain routing when project status is changed to Future,” and click OK. 4. Repeat substeps 1-3, but name this second project as “Project B.” 5. In the Current Project screen, choose Project A as the current project and click OK (see Figure 13-46, “Projects A and B” (p. 13-69)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-68 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Project Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-46 Projects A and B

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create the network design: 1. Create the sites, segments, NEs, links and demands for Project A. 2. Run the design. 3. Verify the design. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Change Project B to become the Current Project: 1. Click Project in the menu bar. The Current Project window is displayed (see Figure 8-12, “Current Project Window” (p. 8-19)). 2. Select Project B as current, and click OK. Note: Since Project A has the option to retain routing, the routing will remain in Project A. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Choose Network Design Parameters that may be different from those used to design the equipment in Project A. For example: “Network Parameters???Amplifier Auto-Placement”???Allow Raman Pre-amplification for span loss greater than”= XXdB. Note: There is only one set of Network Parameters in the EPT. Note: In some designs, it may be necessary to add segments from a Future project into the Current Project temporarily to allow the power and gain setting to be adjusted so that a valid value can be found for the Current Project’s link. To add segments, select Segments from the Information Selection Tab. A table of all segments configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 5-18, “Segments ” (p. 5-79)). Then select the

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-69 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Project Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

row(s) for the desired segment(s), right-click the segment and select Add to Project (see Figure 13-47, “Adding a Segment to a Project” (p. 13-70)). The Delete from Project menu option may be selected later. Figure 13-47 Adding a Segment to a Project

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Create the sites, segments, NEs, links and demands for Project B. Figure 13-48 Site Map for Projects A and B

In Figure 13-48, “Site Map for Projects A and B” (p. 13-70), the segments from Site 1 through Site 5 (black and striped lines) and two demands (striped lines) are designed in Project A, while the segments from Site 5 thorough Site11 and back to Site1 (gray lines) are in Project B.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-70 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Project Configuration

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Run the design, then verify the design. Within this stage, to remove and redesign Project B you may select Action > Remove Whole Design > Remove Whole Design, current design phase only. Stop! You have completed this procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Create the sites, segments, NEs, links and demands for the network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Create Project A and Project B as follows: 1. Click Project in the menu bar. The Current Project window is displayed (see Figure 8-12, “Current Project Window” (p. 8-19)). 2. Click New. 3. Rename the project as “Project A.” Add a description if desired, select “Retain routing when project status is changed to Future,” and click OK. 4. Repeat substeps 1-3, but name this second project as “Project B.” 5. In the Current Project screen, choose Project A as the current project and click OK (see Figure 13-46, “Projects A and B” (p. 13-69)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Add the demands and segments to Project A. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Add the demands to Project A. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Remove the segments and demands from Project None. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Repeat Step 10 through Step 12 for Project B. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Adding Demands that Traverse Segments in Multiple Projects ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create Project C as follows: 1. Click Project in the menu bar. The Current Project window is displayed (see Figure 8-12, “Current Project Window” (p. 8-19)). 2. Click New.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-71 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

Project Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3. Rename the project as “Project C.” Add a description if desired, select “Retain routing when project status is changed to Future,” and click OK. 4. In the Current Project screen, choose Project C as the current project and click OK (see Figure 13-46, “Projects A and B” (p. 13-69)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Create a demand named “Demand AB,” with an endpoint in Project A and another in Project B. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Add all the segments that you want to be considered for the routing of Demand AB (this could be all the segments in the network) to Project C, while also having them remain in Project A and B (nested projects). To add a segment to a project: 1. Select Segments from the Information Selection Tab. A table of all segments configured in the network is displayed (see Figure 5-18, “Segments ” (p. 5-79)). 2. Select the row(s) for the desired segment(s), right-click the segment and select Add to Project > Project C (see Figure 13-47, “Adding a Segment to a Project” (p. 13-70)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Run the design to route and verify the design. Demand AB can be routed over any segments that are in Project C with it, or any segments in Deployed Projects. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-72 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

GMPLS-Enabled Network Upload

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS-Enabled Network Upload Purpose

Use the following procedure to check that the network commissioned using the EPT-generated Commissioning File matches the EPT design, to confirm that the network was commissioned properly, that physical equipment, power settings, topology, and span losses are close to the design, or to update network equipment or other characteristics in the EPT design file. No upload of the traffic matrix (trails, services and 3Rs for restoration purposes), SRG or GMPLS parameters are supported. Steps ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Design the valid GMPLS-enabled network in EPT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

All nominal paths in EPT are manually routed in order to retain the route through subsequent design interactions. The Network is installed and commissioned with the EPT Commissioning File, and power balanced. Note: In external media (notebook), the location and type of 3Rs could move in the design file autonomously, but subsequent Commissioning shall not fail if there's a mismatch of equipment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create an upload of the whole network, or a subset of commissioning systems, using CPB/OMS. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Generate a Discrepancy Report using the upload file and the EPT design. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Are you using EPT projects? If...

Then...

yes,

proceed to Step 7.

no,

continue with Step 6, which will complete the procedure.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-73 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Tutorials

GMPLS-Enabled Network Upload

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

1. Make changes to the design file. 2. Recommission the whole network. Note: If you do not recommission the network using a Commissioning File generated with the new or updated EPT design file, subsequent Upload/Discrepancy Reports may not succeed because EPT will check the previously commissioned and provisioned values. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

1. Ensure the EPT design in the state “Complete, Valid.” 2. Select Action > Deploy. The Current EPT Network Design will be in a Deployed Project(s), which will create an empty new Current Project X and the new Deployed Project Y. 3. Edit the segment that needs to change , so that it becomes a member of the Current Project X. 4. Make the changes to that segment or its line equipment, etc and run design in the Current Project X. (note that some changes will cause a ripple affect and neighboring spans may also need to be pulled into the current project). 5. Create a Commissioning System with the links that have changed. 6. Recommission the network links that have changed. 7. To return all of the items in the deployed Project Y to the Current Project X, you can Delete the Deployed Project Y. 8. To deploy the whole network, deploy Project X now, and a new empty Current Project Z will be created. Note: There must be at least one test channel with optical power, on each span in the export file, in order for the exported power values to be usable in EPT for that span, for Discrepncy checking. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 13-74 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

14

Troubleshooting the EPT 14

Overview Purpose

This chapter describes how to identify and correct various error messages that can occur when using the EPT to design networks. Contents Error and Warning Types

14-2

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

14-4

Demand and Design Errors

14-9

Creating Systems Error

14-17

Import and Export Errors

14-18

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Error and Warning Types

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Error and Warning Types Overview

This section lists the various errors and warnings displayed in the EPT, by category. Subsequent sections describe the details of each error and warning with corrective actions and workarounds. Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

• • •

Span Loss Error Minimum Number of Channels Warning Power Divergence Error

• •

Low Channel Power Errors on Mesh TOADM or ROADMs BoL Pre-FEC BER Warning The channel configurations are incorrect for BOL calculation because of one or more of the following issues: – the WDM Link that is not 50 GHz – it does not have 8 coherent channels between 9370-9405 –

the demand does not specify a coherent OT type (112SCX10, 112SCA1, 112SNX10, 112SNA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43SCA1, or 43SCUP-compatible)

For details on troubleshooting these errors, see “Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings” (p. 14-4). Demand and Design Errors

• • • • •

No Demands Could Be Routed Error OSNR Error NLP Error Insufficient WDM Lines for Protected Demand Error CWDM Demand Routing Error General Routing Error

• • •

Required Cross OT Error OT Not Compatible Error Line Not Connected to a Link Error

•

Restricted Characters in SID Error: System Identification (SID) value can be up to 20 characters. The characters can be chosen from the set of noncase-sensitive alphanumberic characters ([A-Z][a-z][0-9] and the extended character set (above 0x7E) as given in ISO/IEC 8859-1.

•

Regen not supported for DWDM-DWDM with OTU4 and SDFEC. Inconsistent Local A/D configuration for GMPLS design at Node: Node Name: n (Failure scenario n)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Error and Warning Types

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For details on troubleshooting these errors, see “Demand and Design Errors” (p. 14-9). Creating Systems Error

•

Intermediate DFOADM Cannot Contain SFD44 Error

For details on troubleshooting this error, see “Creating Systems Error” (p. 14-17). Import and Export Errors

• • •

Invalid Design File Error Invalid Values Error Corrupt Data Error

•

TOADM Prohibited Error: If the imported design (File > Import Design) contains a TOADM NE but the current Network Parameter “TOADM OADM Placement” is set to the value Prohibit: Relaxed 10G/100G adjacent channel restrictions, then after the import is completed, the subsequent attempt to run the design displays an error explaining that TOADMs are not allowed.

For details on troubleshooting these errors, see “Import and Export Errors” (p. 14-18).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings Span Loss Error

The Span Loss error occurs when the span loss exceeds the maximum of 32.75 dB required by the OSC channel.

Error Message

Cause

Design Failed. Automatic OA selection algorithm could not find a valid solution

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Not Designed.

Design Failed. Please contact technical support for further assistance.

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Not Designed.

Corrective Action

Verify that the worst case span loss is less than 32.75 db, including fiber loss, connector loss, glass-through loss, and fiber margin. Use RAMAN amplification to increase span distances. Minimum Number of Channels Warnings

While the maximum span loss is 32.75 dB due to the OSC, additional transmission loss limitations exist. The minimum power into an amplifier is -32 dBm. If the amplifier power does not meet this requirement, a Loss of Signal (LOS) is declared and the amplifier shuts down due to laser safety issues (IEC 60825). A minimum number of channels may also be required to meet this minimum amplifier input power.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Warning Message

Cause

The following lines require the minimum number of channels given below:

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Complete, Verified.

LINE: NUMBER OF CHANNELS

Corrective Action

Verify the specified lines have the minimum number of channels. Power Divergence Error

The Power Divergence error occurs when power divergence among incoming channels is too great for OADM. Some channels are amplified more than others during the amplification process, resulting in power divergence. The ALPHG can provide up to 29 dB of gain but divergence can be minimized if the gain is limited to 23 db (known as the “flat-gain region”). In contrast, the AHPHG can provide up to 33 dB of gain and its flat-gain region extends to 26 dB.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Error Message (1 of 2)

Cause

The design automation ran to completion. However, the resulting design failed verification. See the Design Status Details report for more information.

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Complete, Invalid.

Note: No error message in EPT R1.0.0. Corrective Action

Examine the Design Status Details report (see “Design Status Details ” (p. 11-75)). Look for the statement: “actual value of power divergence (VALUE) exceeds max allowed value MaxFOADMDeviation (4.00) on SPAN at NODE”. In this case, the power divergence among the incoming channels has exceeded the max value for a FOADM. Add a CWR8 circuit pack at NODE from the line SPAN. Recall the CWR8 circuit pack provides automatic gain equalization. If VALUE is just slightly above the max value of 4.00, it may be possible to replace any ALPHG amplifiers with AHPHG amplifiers but keep the target power at 0.57 dBm. It is recommended to start at last ingress amplifier on the link and work upstream. Although the AHPHG amplifiers may help because they have a larger flat gain region, they introduce more noise and could degrade OSNR performance. Error Message (2 of 2)

Cause

The design automation ran to completion. However, the resulting design failed verification. See the Design Status Details report for more information.

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Complete, Invalid.

Corrective Action

Examine the Design Status Details report (see “Design Status Details ” (p. 11-75)). Look for the statement: “actual value of WSSOH (VALUE) exceeds max allowed value OHmax (4.00) on SPAN at NODE”. In this case, the power divergence among the incoming channels has exceeded the max value for a TOADM or ROADM. WSSOH is amount of power that the CWR8 needs to attenuate highest power channel to equalize it with the lowest power channel. The simple solution is to add another CWR8 circuit pack upstream from NODE from the line SPAN. Recall the CWR8 circuit pack provides automatic gain equalization. If VALUE is just slightly above the max value of 4.00, it may be possible to replace any ALPHG amplifiers with AHPHG amplifiers but keep the target power at 0.57 dBm. It is recommended to

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

start at last ingress amplifier on the link and work backwards. Although the AHPHG amplifiers may help because they have a larger flat gain region, they introduce more noise and could degrade OSNR performance. Note: EPT R1.0.0 does not provide the name of the SPAN and NODE in the Design Status Details report. Low Channel Power Errors on Mesh TOADM or ROADMs

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Span or Link Power Errors and Warnings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Error Message

Cause

The design automation ran to completion. However, the resulting design failed verification. See the Design Status Details report for more information.

In EPT R1.1.0, the Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Complete, Invalid.

(The Design Status Details report displays:The calculated power per channel at the input of the CWR Add Amplifier at NODE-LINE on SPAN X is too low. The calculated value is VALUE. This can be resolved by reconfiguring one of the mesh connected lines by: (A) changing to an AHPHG receive amplifier, (B) reducing the maximum channel count and increasing the target output power, or (C) reducing the power divergence from upstream nodes.) Corrective Action

Follow suggestions A, B, or C listed in the error message. For suggestion A, use a per channel power of 3.57 dB for the AHPHG. Note: The error message does not specify which incoming degree has the low per channel power. In the above example, it could be either Degree 3 or Degree 4. Follow suggestions A, B, or C for one degree at a time and determine if the error message returns and if VALUE has changed.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Demand and Design Errors No Trails/Services Could be Routed Error Error Message

Cause

Not designed. No trails could be routed.

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Not Designed.

Not designed. No services could be routed. Corrective Action

The automatic design process can be used without specifying demands in a 1830 PSS network. In this case however, at least two nodes must be specified as OADMs. This error occurs when no trail or service is specified and when the Thru-Nodes Constraints parameter is set to one of the following values for ALL of the sites in the network: • • •

Glass-Through, ILA, or TOADM ILA or TOADM Glass-Through

OSNR Error

An OSNR error occurs when the delivered OSNR of a trail or service did not meet the minimum requirement. Error Message

Cause

The design automation ran to completion. However, the resulting design failed verification. See the Design Status Details report for more information. (The Design Status Details report displays the error “transparent link LINK failed (OSNR)”.)

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Complete, Invalid.

Corrective Action

Determine the failed trail/service and link by selecting Network Information under the Reports menu, and then examine the report under the WDM Routing tab. Look for the trail/service under the “Valid” tab which has the value of “No: OSNR”. The simple solution is regenerate the trail/service at an intermediate node. Other solutions may be to use EFEC instead of GFEC where possible. Additionally, if the design is FOADM-based, converting one or more of the sites from DFOADM to a TOADM may improve OSNR.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NLP Error

An NLP error occurs when an unacceptable level of Non-linear Phase (NLP) shift is impacting the signal. NLP is a non-linear phenomenon which occurs when there are many channels at high per channel power. It alters the shape of the signal but does not transfer power between channels. Error Message

Cause

The design automation ran to completion. However, the resulting design failed verification. See the Design Status Details report for more information. (The Design Status Details report displays the error “transparent link LINK failed NLP”.)

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Complete, Invalid.

Note: No error message in EPT R1.0.0. Corrective Action

Determine the failed trail/service and link by selecting Network Information under the Reports menu, and then examine the report under the WDM Routing tab. Look for the trail/service under the “Valid” tab which has the value of “No: NLP”. If possible, edit the link to slightly reduce the per-channel target power. Insufficient WDM Lines for Protected Trail/Service Error

This error occurs when the maximum number of lines defined in the Site Details window is less than the number of lines required to implement to protected trail/service.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Error Message

Cause

Design Validation Error. The following protected trail(s) have source/destination site(s) with WDM Lines per Node set as MAX NUMBER OF LINES: TRAIL.

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Not Designed.

Design Validation Error. The following protected service(s) have source/destination site(s) with WDM Lines per Node set as MAX NUMBER OF LINES: SERVICE. Corrective Action

Examine the source and destination sites to determine which site does not have sufficient number of DWDM lines. Increase the maximum number of DWDM lines at that site. CWDM Trail/Service Routing Error

This error occurs when clicking Run Design without completing the routing for the CWDM trails/services. Error Message

Cause

Design is incomplete. One or more WDM Links/Trails is Not Designed. (The Design Status Details report displays “wdm demand DEMAND has no wdmroutes”.)

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Not Designed.

Corrective Action

Routing for CWDM trails/services must always be manually created. To create a route, right-click the trail/route and select Create Route.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

General Routing Error

This error occurs for DWDM and CWDM trails/services when there is no valid route for the trail/service.

Error Message (1 of 2)

Cause

Design is incomplete. One or more WDM Links/Demands in Not Designed. (The Design Status Details report displays “wdm demand DEMAND has no wdmroutes”.)

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Not Designed.

Corrective Action

Create a segment that provides a valid route. Error Message (2 of 2)

Cause

Solution ROUTE shares segment bundle with selected primary path.

Create Route

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This error is related to the general routing error described above, but is for the specific case of protected trails/services routed over different but non-diverse segments.

Corrective Action

When two segments are placed between the same two nodes, the EPT assumes they are in the same fiber bundle and will not allow protected trails/services to be routed over these segments. Required Cross OT Error

O-E-O regeneration is required when passing a trail/service between nodes within a NE. The Required Cross OT error occurs when a trail/service crosses between nodes within a NE but there are no OTs provided for the necessary O-E-O conversion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In this example, two nodes were created within the “Hub” NE. Nodes can only support from one to four lines. Two nodes were therefore required within the “Hub” NE to support the eight lines to the eight subtending sites. The trail/service from Site 4–Hub–Site 5 will cross between nodes at the hub. Error Message

Cause

Design in incomplete. One or more WDM Links/Demands in Not Designed. (The Design Status Details report displays “wdm demand DEMANDNAME wdmroute requires cross ot at MOD”)

The Run Design button is selected when the design state is Incomplete.

No solutions exist for this trail/service. Link LINK1 and Link LINK2 end-points are not in the same NE.

Creating a route when the design state is Incomplete.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action

Modify the design so that a trail/service does not need to cross from one node to another: 1. Increase the maximum number of lines per node. (This may not always be possible since the current maximum is four.) 2. Manually reconfigure line and node connections so that trails and services do not cross nodes: Delete existing links and reconnect them to the desired nodes. CAUTION: When manually creating links, you must specify the appropriate amplifiers and DCMs. 3. Break the demand into two smaller trails/services terminating on different nodes within the same NE. A fiber jumper must be manually added to the BOM. OT Not Compatible Error

Error Message

Cause

Design in incomplete. One or more WDM Links/Demands in Not Designed. (The Design Status Details report displays “DEMAND with given OT type”)

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected when the design state is Incomplete.

The Node NODE and OT OT TYPE are not compatible.

When editing the existing OT type in the Trail or Service window.

Corrective Action

Verify the design follows these configuration rules: • •

11STGE12 can only be used on a PSS-32 node. 11STMM10 can only be used on a PSS-32 node.

OSC SFP Type Error

When running or verifying a design prior to EPT Release 8.1, the EPT modified OSC SFP types (as applicable). This action in EPT Release 8.1 and later may cause the design to fail because the wrong OSC SFP is detected, and the error “The user selected OSC SFP

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Demand and Design Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

is not valid” is displayed. Clicking the Run Design button and selecting the Do not remove any designed elements option does not automatically fix this design error

by changing the OSC SFP type. Corrective Action

1. Select the Links tab on the Information Bar, select the proper link. 2. Right-click and select Calculate OSC SFP in the menu that is displayed. Regen not supported for DWDM-DWDM with OTU4 and SDFEC. Inconsistent Local A/D configuration for GMPLS design at Node: Node Name: n (Failure scenario n)

For GMPLS designs, at the node in question, there is a mixed presence of SFD filters. To resolve this error, you must add a local filter. Nominal Feasibility Errors

For GMPLS designs, errors for nominal routes display the reason why a trail is not feasible, for example, OSNR.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Creating Systems Error

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating Systems Error Intermediate DFOADM Cannot Contain SFD44 Error

The Intermediate DFOADM Cannot Contain SFD44 error is related to one of the configuration rules when creating systems: If two links terminate on a FOADM node and the links are not the endpoints of a linear system, they must be connected by a through connection.

Error Message

Cause

The intermediate nodes must have a through connection.

Selecting Create System from the context menu.

The selected links do not constitute a valid system. The intermediate DFOADM node cannot contain SFD44. Corrective Action

Separate the network into two systems.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Import and Export Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Import and Export Errors Invalid Design File Error

The chosen Excel file is not in the correct format to import a network into the EPT, or the file is formatted correctly but a certain parameter in the design file is invalid: • • •

Invalid site name in Site Details window Undefined site specified in Segment window Invalid Length value (non-numeric) in Segments window

• • •

Invalid Client value specified in Service window Invalid Protection value specified in Trail or Service window Undefined site specified in Trail or Service window

Error Message

Cause

Invalid Design File. Please load a valid design file.

Importing a design file.

Corrective Action

Verify the values on the Site Details, Segment Details, Trail or Service windows as listed above. Invalid Values Error Error Message

Cause

The selected file cannot be loaded. The following Sites contain invalid values for specified parameters: SITE (PARAMETER)

Importing a design file.

The selected file cannot be loaded. The following Segments contain invalid values for specified parameters: SEGMENT (PARAMETER)

The selected file cannot be loaded. The following Services contain invalid values for specified parameters: SERVICE (PARAMETER)

The selected file cannot be loaded. The following Trails contain invalid values for specified parameters: TRAIL (PARAMETER)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Import and Export Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action

Adjust the specified parameter at the site, segment, trail or service specified in the error message. Corrupt Data Error Error Message

Cause

Design Failed. Automatic OA selection algorithm could not find a valid solution. (The Design Status Details report displays “unknown failure” or “problem with site SITE”.)

The Run Design or Verify Design button is selected after importing a network when the design state is Not Designed

Corrective Action

Determine if a site is corrupted by right-clicking on each site and selecting Site Details. A corrupted site will return the error message “An error was encountered while processing the information.” Review the imported Excel file for invalid values, possibly in the ILA and OADM parameters.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Troubleshooting the EPT

Import and Export Errors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 14-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

15

EPT Specificity 15

Special Notices ID_26521: Additional check placed on fiber segments using Raman pre-amplifiers

Starting from Release 5.5, a check was placed on the loss coefficient of fiber segments that utilized Raman pre-amplifiers. The maximum loss coefficient supported in EPT on Raman amplified segments is 0.3dB/km. For releases prior to Release 5.5, designs used loss coefficients larger than 0.3dB/km on Raman amplified segments when loaded into R5.5 and later releases, the EPT will generate errors for segments where the loss coefficient limit is exceeded. To clear these errors while maintaining the existing span loss, it is recommended that the segment loss be set such that loss coefficient is at the maximum allowed (0.3dB/km). The change in segment loss required to accomplish this should then be added to the connector losses. Note: These changes may result in some Trails/Services failing validation. Such instances can be addressed on an individual case basis. ID_14950: APN 1AB375650046 not displayed in the Bill of Materials

A new version of the XL-64TU pluggable is available specifically for low latency applications without FEC (NOFEC). The existing pluggable identified as APN 1AB375650046 will be displayed in the Bill of Materials Report. User must take 1dB OSNR extra penalty in this design when using XFP-T no chirp for low latency networks at 11.1/11.3Gb/s.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 15-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Specificity

Special Notices

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ID_102: Dis-allowed configurations for 260SCX2 muxponder and 1UD200 (200G Mode)

260SCX2 and 1UD200 OTs in 200G mode is not supported in the following configurations: • •

•

GMPLS-enabled networks when dispersion compensation is set to auto-placed for all OADM configurations GMPLS-enabled networks when dispersion compensation is set to DCU-free for all Any-directional Config D, Config D (D Prime), and Config D (D Double Prime), colorless and colored Add/Drop ports Non-GMPLS networks when dispersion compensation is set to Auto-placed and channel assignment option is set to Unrestricted for all OADM configurations

It is strongly recommended not to use the Dispersion Compensation field set to Manual (Verify Externally) because the user is expected to perform transmission optical feasibility for the Trails/Services external to EPT. ID_240: GMPLS: Regenerators in DGE sites

In GMPLS designs, to avoid placing regenerators in DGE sites, the Allow Local Add/Drops on ROADMs field on the Site Details window must be disabled. ID_777: Precaution on DCM naming conventions in EPT, CPB, WebUI and OMS

“DCM shelf/container” is right a box without any shelf# assignment, for this reason on the WebUI/OMS tools the ITLU packs should be identified via a variable shelf# attribute and slot# one always fixed to 1. This does not identify the position of a pack inside the “DCM shelf/container” based on 8 slots. EPT tool provides more installation details like the shelf# and slot# (from 1 to 8) about the ITLU packs inside the “DCM shelf/container” via Installation Report and Node details, instead, the NE details and EPT Card Inventory Report provide the same WebUI/OMS information. ID_262: Precautions on EPT Upload EPT

Import Network Data (EPT upload) performs a consistency check between the EPT design and the actual network status. Note: It does not support re-alignment of EPT designs with respect to the actual network configurations. Indeed this was never the scope of the EPT upload itself, because this EPT capability relies on the fact that possible changes applied in the network have to be consistently done in the associated design. Before making an EPT upload, ensure that : •

CPB has been re-synchronized with the relevant network elements.

•

the network elements being uploaded are the ones defined in the EPT design file.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 15-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Specificity

Special Notices

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Starting from Release 7.0.2, EPT provides a dedicated discrepancy report to highlight differences between the design and the network regarding the line provisioning/span loss/power aspects thereby leaving to the user the decision to modify, where needed, either the design or the network configuration. Traffic matrix Upload in Release 9.0 is not supported. It is strongly recommended to keep the EPT design aligned with the actual network configuration. The effort will avoid a manual cumbersome process to reconcile divergent design and network configurations.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 15-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

EPT Specificity

Special Notices

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS 15-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics 100 BASE-TX

A 100 megabit-per-second local area network known by the generic name of Fast Ethernet operating over twisted-pair copper cable. This technology is becoming very popular and cost-effective. It is designed to integrate with existing networks with minimal disruption. 10/100 BASE-T

A twisted-pair cable version of an IEEE 802.3 network. 10-gigabit Small Form-factor Pluggable module (XFP)

An XFP is a hot-pluggable compact transceiver used for data communications and telecommunications. It interfaces a so-called “parent board” to a fiber optic. The XFP layout has been standardized by a consortium of leading suppliers of telecommunications equipment. XFP is protocol independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel, and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported. 1+1 Line Protection

A protection architecture in which the transmitting equipment transmits a valid signal on both the working and protection lines. The receiving equipment monitors both lines. Based on performance criteria and OS control, the receiving equipment chooses one line as the active line and designates the other as the standby line. 3R (Reshaping, Reamplification, Retiming) Functionality

When a signal is converted from optical to electrical, optical translators reshape, reamplify, and retime the electrical signal. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A

ABN

LED indicator used to indicate abnormal conditions Access Identifier (AID)

A technical specification for explicitly naming entities (both physical and logical) of an NE using a grammar comprised of ASCII text, keywords, and grammar rules. Used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that are defined for the system architecture. Accessible Emission Limits (AEL)

Related to laser standards and classifications, laser classes are based on AEL thresholds. Each laser class is based on these AEL thresholds. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ACO

See “Alarm Cut-Off ” (p. GL-3) for definition. ACT (Active)

Used to indicate that a circuit pack or module is in-service and currently providing service functions. ADC

See “Analog Digital Converter” (p. GL-4) for definition. Add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example, DS3 or DS1). ADM

See “Add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-2) for definition. Administrative Unit (AU)

A managed entity within the SDH structure AEL

See “Accessible Emission Limits” (p. GL-1) for definition. Agence Nationale de la Sécurité des Systèmes d'Information (ANSSI)

A certification authority on network and information security. Agent

Performs operations on managed objects and issues events on behalf of these managed objects. All SDH managed objects will support at least an agent. Control of distant agents is possible via local “Managers”. AHPHG

High Power High Gain, with mid-stage access amplifier AID

See “Access Identifier” (p. GL-1) for definition. AINS

See “Automatic In-Service” (p. GL-6) for definition. AIS

See “Alarm Indication Signal” (p. GL-3) for definition. Alarm

An alarm is a observable alerting indication, for example visually, to a condition that may have immediate or potential negative impact on the state of the monitoring Network Element. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm correlation

The search for a directly-reported alarm that can account for a given symptomatic condition. Alarm Cut-Off (ACO)

Alarm Cut-Off button on the user panel used to clear the Network Element alarm indicators (LEDs on the active FLC, rack top lamp interface, the remote alarms interface). In 1830 PSS-24x the ACO button of the active or the standby CCC clears the CR (URG) and the MJ (NURG) at the remote alarm (RA) interface, only. Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that indicates that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed. Alarm list

A status report that lists active alarms on the NE. Alarm log

A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE. Alarm severity

An attribute defining the priority of the alarm message. The way alarms are processed depends on the severity. Alarm suppression

Selective removal of alarm messages from being forwarded to the GUI or to network management layer OSs. ALPHG

Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

A line code that employs a ternary signal to convert binary digits, in which successive binary ones are represented by signal elements that are normally of alternative positive and negative polarity but equal in amplitude and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements that have zero amplitude. AMCC

See “Applied Micro Circuits Corporation” (p. GL-4) for definition. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages, communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International Organization for Standards (ISO). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

A non-profit industry-wide organization that publishes standards, methods of test, recommended practices, definitions, and related material.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-3 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AMI

See “Alternate Mark Inversion” (p. GL-3) for definition. AMP

See “Alternate Mark Inversion” (p. GL-3) for definition. Amplified Spontaneous Emission (ASE)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input power. Analog Digital Converter (ADC)

A device that converts analog signals into digital signals. Angle Polished Connector (APC)

A 5°-15° angle on the connector tip for the minimum possible back reflection. Angular misalignment

Loss at a connector caused by misaligned fiber end-face angles. Anomaly Anomaly

The smallest observable discrepancy between the actual and the desired characteristic of a system component. The occurrence of a single anomaly does not interrupt the ability to perform a required function. Anomalies do not result in any consequent actions, but are contributors to defects and performance monitoring counts. ANSI

See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-3) for definition. ANSSI

See “Agence Nationale de la Sécurité des Systèmes d'Information” (p. GL-2) for definition. Antireflection coating (AR)

A thin dielectric or metallic film applied to an optical surface to reduce its reflection and thereby increase its transmission. APC

See “Angle Polished Connector” (p. GL-4) for definition. APD

See “Avalanche Photo Diode” (p. GL-6) for definition. APIPA

See “Automatic Private IP Addressing ” (p. GL-6) for definition. Apparatus code

ASCII name assigned by the manufacturer to identify a particular circuit pack by pack type and number. Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (AMCC) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-4 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Certain 1830 PSS devices contain Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (AMCC) asynchronous mapping devices with Enhanced Forward Error Correction (EFEC). APR

See “Automatic Power Reduction” (p. GL-6) for definition. APS

See “Automatic Protection Switch” (p. GL-6) for definition. APSD

See “Automatic Power Shutdown” (p. GL-6) for definition. AR

See “Antireflection coating” (p. GL-4) for definition. ASE

See “Amplified Spontaneous Emission” (p. GL-4) for definition. ASON

See “Automatically Switched Optical Network” (p. GL-6) for definition. Assembly

Gathering together of payload data with overhead and pointer information (an indication of the direction of the signal). Association

A logical connection between manager and agent through which management information can be exchanged. ASTM

See “American Society for Testing and Materials” (p. GL-3) for definition. Asynchronous

Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal Asynchronous Mapping Procedure (AMP)

An Optical Transport Network (OTN) mapping method using asynchronous mapping with dedicated stuff byte positions in the ODU server layer AMP is also used to denote an amplifier ATAG

See “Autonomously Generated Correlation Tag” (p. GL-6) for definition. Attenuation

The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering. Attenuation is usually expressed in dB/km. Attenuator

A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-5 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attribute

Alarm indication level: critical, major, minor, or no alarm. Auto-provisioning

Configuration of system parts without pre-provisioning. When a part is plugged into the system, it is accepted with its default configuration. Autolock

Action taken by the system in the event of circuit pack failure/trouble. System switches to protection and prevents a return to the working circuit pack even if the trouble clears. Multiple protection switches on a circuit pack during a short period of time cause the system to autolock the pack. Automatic In-Service (AINS)

One possible state of a port or slot. When a port is in the AINS state and a good signal is detected, the port automatically enters the IS (in-service) state. When a port or slot is in the AINS state and a circuit pack is detected, the slot/port automatically enters the IS state. The important things about AINS state is that alarms are suppressed. Absence of the circuit pack is not alarmed. Absence of a signal is not alarmed on the port. Automatic Power Reduction (APR)

The lowering of the laser power to a limit that fits into the class 1 category for handling fiber cables. APR replaces the full power-off feature known as ALS (automatic laser shutdown) or APSD (automatic power shutdown). Automatic Power Shutdown (APSD)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA)

A Windows feature that enables automatic configuration of an IP address and subnet mask when a DHCP server isn't available. Automatic Protection Switch (APS)

A protection switch that occurs automatically in response to an automatically detected fault condition. Automatically Switched Optical Network (ASON)

An optical network that is able to automatically manage signalling and routing. Autonomous message

Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and changes in the system database. Autonomously Generated Correlation Tag (ATAG)

An autonomous TL1 message (event) counter used to detect lost events. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-6 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Avalanche Photo Diode (APD)

A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B

Back reflection

See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-29) for definition. Background Block Errors (BBE)

Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring. Backscattering

The return of a portion of scattered light to the input end of a fiber; the scattering of light in the direction opposite to its original propagation. Backward Defect Indication (BDI)

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure Backward Defect Indication Overhead (BDI-O)

Indicates the OMS or OTS overhead signal fail status detection in the OMS or OTS termination sink function. Backward Defect Indication Payload (BDI-P)

Indicates the OMS or OTS payload signal fail status detection in the OMS or OTS termination sink function. Backward Error Indication (BEI)

Signal that indicates the count of interleaved-bit blocks that have been detected in error in the upstream direction. Backward Incoming Alignment Error (BIAE)

Signal that indicates the count of interleaved-bit blocks that have been detected in error in the upstream direction. Bandwidth

The difference in Hz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a transmission channel. The data rate that can be carried by a given communications circuit. Baud rate

Transmission rate of data (bits per second) on a network link. Bay

An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also known as a rack. BBE

See “Background Block Errors” (p. GL-7) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-7 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BCM

See “Board Controller Module” (p. GL-9) for definition. BDFB

Battery Distribution Fuse Board BDI

See “Backward Defect Indication” (p. GL-7) for definition. BDI-O

See “Backward Defect Indication Overhead” (p. GL-7) for definition. BDI-P

See “Backward Defect Indication Payload” (p. GL-7) for definition. BEI

See “Backward Error Indication” (p. GL-7) for definition. Bend radius

The smallest radius an optical fiber or fiber cable can bend before increased attenuation or breakage occurs BER

See “Bit Error Rate” (p. GL-8) for definition. BIAE

See “Backward Incoming Alignment Error” (p. GL-7) for definition. Bidirectional line

A transmission path consisting of two fibers that handle traffic in both the transmit and receive directions. Bidirectional Line Switched Ring (BLSR)

A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection. Bidirectional switch

Protection switching performed in both the transmit and receive directions. BIP-N

See “Bit Interleaved Parity-N” (p. GL-9) for definition. Bit Error Rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-8 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent. Bit Error Rate threshold

The point at which an alarm is issued for bit errors. Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N)

A method of error monitoring over a specified number of bits (BIP-3 or BIP-8). Bit-synchronous Mapping Procedure (BMP)

A method of mapping a client signal for transport across the Optical Transport Network (OTN). BITS

See “Building Integrated Timing Supply” (p. GL-9) for definition. BLSR

See “Bidirectional Line Switched Ring” (p. GL-8) for definition. BMP

See “Bit-synchronous Mapping Procedure” (p. GL-9) for definition. Board Controller Module (BCM)

A small module (printed wiring board plus components) that plugs into almost every circuit pack (other than the NCTL, SCTL, and SUPVY) to supply the processor, memory, and intra-NE communications capabilities needed to operate the pack in the system. Bridge a cross-connection

The setting up of a cross-connection leg with the same input tributary as that of an existing cross-connection leg. Thus, forming a 1:2 bridge from an input tributary to two output tributaries. Broadband communications

Voice, data, and/or video communications at greater than 2 Mbit/s rates. Broadband service transport

STM-1 concatenation transport over the 1830 Photonic Service Switch for ATM applications. Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS)

A method for distributing a precision clock among telecommunications equipment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C

C form-factor pluggable (CFP)

A CFP is a pluggable optical module with either 40 or 100 Gb/s transmission rate. The CFP layout has been standardized by a consortium of leading suppliers of telecommunications equipment. Cable assembly

A cable that is connector-terminated and ready for installation.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-9 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable plant

Consists of all the optical elements including fiber connectors and splices between a transmitter and a receiver. Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)

A control technique for getting onto and off a LAN. All devices attached to the network listen for transmissions in progress (that is, carrier sense) before starting to transmit (multiple access). If two or more begin transmitting at the same time and their transmissions crash into each other, each backs off (collision detection ) for a different amount of time (determined by an algorithm) before again attempting to transmit. CBR

See “Constant Bit Rate” (p. GL-13) for definition. CC

See “Clear Channel” (p. GL-12) for definition. See “Cross-connection” (p. GL-14) for definition. CCITT (Consultative Committee for the International Telephone and Telegraph)

See See “International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunications Sector ” (p. GL-33) for definition. CDR

See “Clock Data Recovery” (p. GL-12) for definition. Center wavelength

In a laser, the nominal value central operating wavelength. It is the wavelength defined by a peak mode measurement where the effective optical power resides. In a LED, the average of the two wavelengths measured at the half-amplitude points of the power spectrum. Central Office (CO)

A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long distance subscribers. CESR

Carrier Ethernet Switch Router, for example, Nokia's 7450 ESS CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute)

A measure of how much air moves through the fan of air-coded equipment. CFP

See “C form-factor pluggable” (p. GL-9) for definition. CFR

See “Code of Federal Regulations” (p. GL-13) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-10 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel

A sub-unit of transmission capacity within a defined higher level of transmission capacity. Channel Optical Filter (COF)

COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints. Chirp

In laser diodes, the shift of the laser's central wavelength during single pulse duration caused by laser instability. Chromatic dispersion

The speed that an optical pulse travels depends on the fiber wavelength. This is caused by several factors including material dispersion, waveguide dispersion, and profile dispersion. The net effect of chromatic dispersion is that if an optical pulse contains multiple wave-lengths (colors), then the different colors travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, spreading the received optical signal. CIDR

See “Classless Inter-Domain Routing” (p. GL-11) for definition. Circuit

A set of transmission channels through one or more network elements that provides transmission of signals between two points, to support a single communications path. Circuit pack

Term used to describe a device or unit that is designed to be inserted (plugged) into another device or equipment. CISPR

Comité International Spécial des Perturbations Radioélectriques CIT

See “Craft Interface Terminal” (p. GL-14) for definition. CL

See “Coupling Ratio/Loss” (p. GL-14) for definition. Cladding

Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the core. Class of Service (CoS)

Class of service is a parameter used in data and voice protocols to differentiate the types of payloads contained in the packet being transmitted. The objective of such differentiation is generally associated with assigning priorities to the data payload or access levels.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-11 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Classless Inter-Domain Routing

Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions. Clear Channel (CC)

A digital circuit where no framing or control bits are required, thus making the full bandwidth available for communications. CLEI ™ code

COMMON LANGUAGE ® equipment code. Used by network service providers for inventory, engineering, spare piece-part ordering, provisioning and maintenance operations. CLEI codes identify the specific form, fit and function of equipment items used network topologies. Client

A client is a computer, device or program that requests services from a network. Client also may refer to the terminating device at one end of a network node. Client Signal Fail

Alarm indication of a client signal failure Clock Data Recovery (CDR)

A technique used in Local Area Networks (LANs) whereby a data octet is subdivided, scrambled, and encoded into an expanded form. The expanded expression of the data value includes bits that are used for clock recovery. Closed ring network

A network formed of a ring-shaped configuration of network elements. Each network element connects to two others, one on each side. CMI

Coded Mark Inversion CMISSSER

Serialized CMISS information CN

See “Control Network” (p. GL-13) for definition. CO

See “Central Office” (p. GL-10) for definition. Co-resident

A hardware configuration where two applications can be active at the same time independently on the same hardware and software platform without interfering with each others functioning. Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-12 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing (WDM). Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Set of federal regulations for broad areas of control. Different parts relate to different industries. The telecommunication industry is related to title 47 of the CFR. Collocated

System elements that are located in the same location. Command group

An administrator-defined group that defines commands to which a user has access. Commercial temperature

Identifies equipment that is capable of sustaining normal operation in commercial temperature ranges, for example, 0°C to +70°C, -5°C to +70°C, or -5°C to +75°C. Commissioning and Power Balancing tool (CPB)

Software tool for automated provisioning, commissioning and power balancing functions of photonic networks based on the 1830 PSS portfolio of WDM products. Concatenation

A procedure whereby multiple virtual containers are associated one with each other resulting in a combined capacity that can be used as a single container across which bit sequence integrity is maintained. Configuration Management (CM)

Subsystem that configures the network and processes messages from the network. Connector

A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a fiber and a source or detector. Constant Bit Rate (CBR)

Constant Bit RateType of service that provides a constant bit data transfer rate. Used for delay-intensive service such as voice or video. Continuous Wave (CW)

The constant optical output from an optical source when it is turned on, but not modulated with a signal. Control Network (CN)

The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example, communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol. Control Plane (CP)

Portion of the network or system which enables control of communication sessions and services. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-13 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane Routing (CPR)

IP routing performed by an NE for RSVP notify messages, and for management traffic. OSPF is used as routing protocol. A CPR domain contains NEs and Network Operation Centers (NOCs). CPR domains can be de-coupled from IP routing in the operator's DCN, by setting up IP-in-IP tunnels between NEs attached to the Out-of-band DCN, and NOCs. Core

The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index of refraction than the cladding. Correlation

A process where related hard failure alarms are identified. Correlation Tag (CTAG)

A user supplied label attached to an input command that is repeated in the associated response to facilitate the correlation of input to response. CoS

See “Class of Service” (p. GL-11) for definition. Coupler

An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers. Coupling Ratio/Loss (CL)

The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a percentage. CP

See “Control Plane” (p. GL-13) for definition. See “Circuit pack” (p. GL-11) for definition. CPE

See “Customer Premises Equipment” (p. GL-15) for definition. CPR

See “Control Plane Routing” (p. GL-13) for definition. CR (Critical (alarm))

Alarm that indicates a severe, service-affecting condition. Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)

A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or, by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system. CRC

See “Cyclic Redundancy Check” (p. GL-15) for definition. Cross-connection (CC)

Path-level connections between input and output tributaries or specific ports within a single NE. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-14 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cross-connections are made in a consistent way even though there are various types of ports and various types of port protection. Cross-connections are re-configurable interconnections between tributaries of transmission interfaces. Crosstalk

An unwanted signal introduced into one transmission line from another. CRU

Clock Recovery Unit CSF

See “Client Signal Fail” (p. GL-12) for definition. CSMA/CD

See “Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection” (p. GL-10) for definition. CT

See “Commercial temperature” (p. GL-13) for definition. CTAG

See “Correlation Tag” (p. GL-14) for definition. Current software (SW) generic

The whole software and (static) data presently associated with a particular NE release. Current value

The value currently assigned to a provisionable parameter. Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)

Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point. CW

See “Continuous Wave” (p. GL-13) for definition. CWDM

See “Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing” (p. GL-12) for definition. CWR8

An 8 port colorless wavelength router; 44 channel capacity. CWR8-88

An 8 port colorless wavelength router; 88 channel capacity. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

A method to detect erroneous bits in a byte stream.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-15 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D

DAC

See “Digital to Analog Converter” (p. GL-18) for definition. DAPI

Destination access point identifier Dark current

The flow of electricity through the diode in a photodiode when no light is present. Data

A collection of system parameters and their associated values. Data Communication Channel (DCC)

A portion of the SDH/SONET signal that contains alarm, surveillance, and performance information. Data Communications Network (DCN)

A configuration of telecommunications equipment for the purpose of transmitting data rather than analog signals. Data Terminating Equipment (DTE)

The equipment that originates data for transmission and accepts transmitted data. Database administrator

A user who administers the database of the application. Databearer

A databearer represents a physical link connection between two nodes in the transport plane. DCC

See “Data Communication Channel” (p. GL-16) for definition. DCF

See “Dispersion Compensating Fiber” (p. GL-18) for definition. DCM

See “Dispersion Compensation Module” (p. GL-18) for definition. DCN

See “DCN” (p. GL-16) for definition. Default

An operation or value that the system or application assumes, unless a user makes an explicit choice. Default provisioning

The parameter values that are pre-programmed as shipped from the factory. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-16 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Defect

A limited interruption of the ability of an item to perform a required function. It may or may not lead to maintenance action depending on the results of additional analysis. Delay Measurement (DM)

Identification of signal delay between measurement points. Demultiplexer (DEMUX)

A device that splits a combined signal into individual signals at the receiver end of transmission. Demultiplexing

A process applied to a multiplexed signal for recovering signals combined within it and for restoring the distinct individual channels of these signals. DEMUX

See “Demultiplexer ” (p. GL-17) for definition. Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example, minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber. Deprovisioning

The inverse order of provisioning. To manually remove/delete a parameter that has (or parameters that have) previously been provisioned. Detector

An opto-electric transducer used in fiber optics to convert optical power to electrical current. Usually referred to as a photodiode. DGD

See “Differential Group Delay” (p. GL-17) for definition. DGE

See “Dynamic Gain Equalizer” (p. GL-20) for definition. DGEF

See “Dynamic Gain Equalization Filter” (p. GL-20) for definition. DHCP

See “Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol” (p. GL-20) for definition. Differential Group Delay (DGD)

In an optical fiber, the variation in propagation delay that occurs because of the different group velocities of different modes. Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)

A field in an IP packet that enables different levels of service to be assigned to network traffic. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-17 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Digital multiplexer

Equipment that combines by time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a single composite digital signal. Digital section

A transmission span such as an STM-N signal. A digital section may contain multiple digital channels. Digital Signal - Level 1 (DS1)

A digital signaling rate of 1.544 Mb/s. Digital Signal - Level 3 (DS3)

A digital signal rate of 44.736 Mb/s Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

A specialized semiconductor device that converts analog signals into digital signals. Digital to Analog Converter (DAC)

A device that converts digital signals into analog signals. Directional coupler

A coupling device for separately sampling (through a known coupling loss) either the forward (incident) or the backward (reflected) wave in a transmission line. Directory System Agents (DSA)

An operating system application process that provides the directory functionality. Disassembly

Splitting up a signal into its constituents as payload data and overhead (an indication of the direction of a signal). Dispersion

The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects. Dispersion Compensating Fiber (DCF)

A special fiber with a negative chromatic dispersion coefficient used to compensate the positive chromatic disperion of the transmission fiber in the third optical window. Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and post-amplification. Dispersion Mangement (DM)

A technique that allows solitons to become more resistant to errors when they are propagating inside optical fibers. Dispersion-Shifted Fiber (DSF)

Used to improve on Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber by shifting the interface between the fiber .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-18 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

core and cladding. This fiber exhibits optimum attenuation performance at 1550 nm and optimum bandwidth at 1300 nm. Distortion

The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received). Divergence

When there is unequal amplification of incoming wavelengths, the result is a power divergence between wavelengths. DM

See “Delay Measurement” (p. GL-17) for definition. See “Dispersion Mangement” (p. GL-18) for definition. DNI

See “Dual Node Ring Interworking ” (p. GL-20) for definition. DNU

Do Not Use Doping

The addition of impurities to a substance in order to attain desired properties. Double Shelf (DS)

Two shelves with a fan assembly between them and a heat baffle below the lower shelf. Downstream

At or towards the destination of the considered transmission stream, for example, looking in the same direction of transmission. DPR

Data Plane Routing Drop and continue

A circuit configuration that provides redundant signal appearances at the outputs of two network elements in a ring. Can be used for Dual Node Ring Interworking (DNI) and for video distribution applications. DS

See “Double Shelf” (p. GL-19) for definition. DS1

See “Digital Signal - Level 1” (p. GL-18) for definition. DS3

See “Digital Signal - Level 3 ” (p. GL-18) for definition. DSA

See “Directory System Agents” (p. GL-18) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-19 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DSCP

See “Differentiated Services Code Point” (p. GL-17) for definition. DSF

See “Dispersion-Shifted Fiber” (p. GL-18) for definition. DSP

See “Digital Signal Processor” (p. GL-18) for definition. DTE

See “Data Terminating Equipment” (p. GL-16) for definition. Dual Node Ring Interworking (DNI)

A topology in which two rings are interconnected at two nodes on each ring and operate so that inter-ring traffic is not lost in the event of a node or link failure at an interconnecting point. DUS

Do not USe DWDM

See “Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing” (p. GL-17) for definition. Dynamic Gain Equalization Filter

A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal. Dynamic Gain Equalizer (DGE)

Device that flattens the output spectrum of an Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA). Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E

E-SNCP

Electrical Subnetwork Connection Protection Earth

The European term for electrical ground. EBCN

Ethernet-based communication network EBER

See “Excessive Bit Error Rate” (p. GL-24) for definition. EC

See “Equipment Controller” (p. GL-22) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-20 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ECC

Embedded Communication Channel EDFA

See “Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier” (p. GL-23) for definition. EEPROM

See “Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read-Only Memory” (p. GL-21) for definition. EIA

See “Electronic Industries Association” (p. GL-21) for definition. Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)

A kind of non-volatile memory often used to store inventory data. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

A measure of equipment tolerance to external electromagnetic fields. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing through the fields. Electronic Industries Association (EIA)

A trade association of the electronic industry that establishes electrical and functional standards. Electronically-Controlled Variable Optical Attenuator (eVOA)

eVOAs control optical power leveling through software provisioning. Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker. Electrostatic Discharge

ESD The spontaneous transfer of electrostatic charge. Element Management System (EMS)

System that manages NEs either directly attached to it or are remotely connected by using the DCN. Examples of these systems are the CIT and 1350 OMS. EMC

See “Electromagnetic Compatibility” (p. GL-21) for definition. EMI

See “Electromagnetic Interference” (p. GL-21) for definition. EML

See “Externally Modulated Laser” (p. GL-24) for definition. EMS

See “Element Management System” (p. GL-21) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-21 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN

See “European Norm” (p. GL-24) for definition. End Terminal (ET)

Optical equipment that terminates optical line signals. End-of-Life (EOL)

Defines the status or values at the end of the guaranteed lifetime of a component. EOL is reached when the wear-out failure rate dominates the component failure rate. Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT)

A software tool for automated design and planning of photonic networks based on the 1830 PSS portfolio of WDM products. Engineering rules

A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate, and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that can be supported. ENNI

External Network-Network Interface Entity

A specific piece of hardware (usually a circuit pack, slot, or module) that has been assigned a name recognized by the system. Entity identifier

The name used by the system to refer to a circuit pack, memory device, or communications link. EOL

See “End-of-Life” (p. GL-22) for definition. EOS

End of Sequence EPS

See “Equipment Protection Switching” (p. GL-22) for definition. EPT

See “Engineering and Planning Tool” (p. GL-22) for definition. Equipment Controller (EC)

In addition to system processing and communication for the shelf, the Equipment Controller module provides monitors the status of active and standby modules, maintains a database of all cards installed in the shelf, supports communications interfaces and LED indicators on the User Interface Panel, and communicates with sub-tending shelves. Equipment Protection Switching (EPS, EQPS) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-22 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Feature that restores equipment by switching over to redundant services. Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA)

Optical fibers doped with the rare earth element erbium that can amplify light in the 1550 nm region when pumped by an external light source. Errored Seconds (ES)

A performance monitoring parameter. ES “type A” is a second with exactly one error; ES “type B” is a second with more than one and less than the number of errors in a severely errored second for the given signal. ES by itself means the sum of the type A and type B ESs. ES

See “Errored Seconds” (p. GL-23) for definition. ESD

See “Electrostatic Discharge” (p. GL-21) for definition. ESP

Electrostatic Protection ESS

Ethernet Services Switch Establish

A user-initiated command, at the 1830 PSS ZIC, to create an entity and its associated attributes in the absence of certain hardware. ET

See “End Terminal” (p. GL-22) for definition. ETH

Ethernet MAC (layer 2) interface. Refer to ITU-T G.8010 for more information. ETH-DM

See “Ethernet Frame Delay Measurement” (p. GL-23) for definition. ETH-LM

See “Ethernet Frame Loss of Measurement” (p. GL-23) for definition. ETH-SLM

See “Ethernet Synthetic Loss Measurement” (p. GL-24) Ethernet Frame Delay Measurement (ETH-DM)

Ethernet performance monitoring measurement of frame delay and frame delay variation. Ethernet Frame Loss of Measurement (ETH-LM)

Ethernet performance monitoring measurement where the frame loss is calculated based on service frame counters. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-23 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet LAN

A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet broadcast to all devices on the LAN. Ethernet Synthetic Loss Measurement (ETH-SLM)

Ethernet Synthetic Loss Measurement Ethernet performance monitoring measurement where the frame loss is calculated based on synthetic frame counters. ETR

Extended Temperature Range ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute. ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European community. ETY

Ethernet PHY layer interface. Refer to ITU-T G.8010 and IEEE 802.3 for more information. European Norm (EN)

A German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm”. Event

A significant change. Events in controlled Network Elements include signal failures, equipment failures, signals exceeding thresholds, and protection switch activity. When an event occurs in a controlled Network Element, the controlled Network Element will generate an alarm or status message and send it to the management system. eVOA

See “Electronically-Controlled Variable Optical Attenuator” (p. GL-21) for definition. Excessive Bit Error Rate (EBER)

The calculated average bit error rate over a data stream. EXP

“experimental use” bits in the MPLS packet header, defined in IETF RFC 3032 and renamed in IETF RFC 5462 as the “Traffic Class” field. Externally Modulated Laser (EML)

When laser is modulated using a Mach-Zehnder modulator.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-24 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Extinction ratio

The ratio of two optical powers of a digital signal generated by an optical source. Extra traffic

Unprotected traffic that is carried over protection channels when their capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F

Fabric

The part of an optical system that is responsible for switching voice, data, or video from one place to another. Facility Protection Switching (FPS)

Protection schemes that involve switching traffic from a failed facility to a standby (protection) facility. Failure

When a fault cause persists for a certain period of time. Failure in Time (FIT)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion operating hours. Failure rate

The number of failures of a device per unit of time. Fall time

The time required for the trailing edge of a pulse to fall from 90% to 10% of its amplitude; the time required for a component to produce such a result. Typically measured between the 80% and 20% points or the 90% and 10% points. Also called turn-off time. Far End (FE)

Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or working on. Also called remote. Far-End Block Error (FEBE)

An indication returned to the transmitting node that an errored block has been detected at the receiving node. A block is a specified grouping of bits. Far-End Receive Failure (FERF)

An indication returned to a transmitting Network Element that the receiving Network Element has detected an incoming section failure. Also known as RDI. FAS

See “Frame alignment signal” (p. GL-28) for definition. Fast Variable Optical Attenuator (fVOA)

Since WaveTracker (WT) encoding requires a faster frequency response, fVOAs are required for .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-25 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WT keying. fVOAs modulate the power of the frequency to keep tone. WT keying enables the customer to identify a channel downstream because the frequency is known and the system can identify the modulation depth (amplitude of the modulation) of the channel power. Fault

Term used when a circuit pack or signal has a hard (not temporary) fault and cannot perform its normal function. For signals the fault may be temporary. Fault management

Collecting, processing, and forwarding of autonomous messages from network elements. FC

See “Fiber Optic Connector” (p. GL-27) for definition. FC/PC

A special curved polish on the connector for very low back reflection. FCC

Federal Communications Commission. The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable. FDA/CDRH

The Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health. FDDI

See “Fiber Distributed Data Interface” (p. GL-27) for definition. FDI

See “Forward Defect Indicator” (p. GL-28) for definition. FE

See “Far End ” (p. GL-25) for definition. FEBE

See “Far-End Block Error” (p. GL-25) for definition. FEC

See “Forward Error Correction” (p. GL-28) for definition. FEPROM

See “Flash EPROM” (p. GL-28) for definition. FERF

See “Far-End Receive Failure” (p. GL-25) for definition. Ferrule

A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-26 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FGOAM

Fixed gain optical amplifier module (+16 dBm power, 18-dB gain). FGPA

See “Field Programmable Gate Array” (p. GL-27) for definition. FIB

See “Forwarding Information Base” (p. GL-28) for definition. Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)

Fiber interface that connects computers and distributes data among them. A 100 Mb/s fiber optic LAN. Fiber optic cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers. Fiber Optic Fiber Optic Connector (FC)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low back reflection. Field Programmable Gate Array (FGPA)

A user-configurable logic device that holds user-defined logic constructs and interconnects in the form of a microprocessor. Examples include EEPROM and FLASH. File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using the Internet. First-Level Controller (FLC)

Card that provides functions such as communications between the NE and the managing system and/or neighboring NE, Debug LAN access for service personnel, management interfaces, and management agents including event reporting and logging, equipment database management, software download and management, performance monitoring management, alarm management, and security management. FIT

See “Failure in Time” (p. GL-25) for definition. FIT rate

The number of device failures in one billion device hours. Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (FOADM)

Type of OADM where the wavelength arrangement scheme can only input or output a single wavelength via the fixed port.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-27 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fixed-rate tributary operation of a port

Mode of operation of a port in which tributaries are provisioned for the expected signal rates. This provisioning information is used for cross-connection rate validation and for alarm handling (for example “Loss of Pointer”). Flash Disk Memory Module (FMM)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database. Flash EPROM (FEPROM)

A technology that combines the non-volatility of EPROM with the in-circuit re-programmability of EEPROM. FLC

See “First-Level Controller” (p. GL-27) for definition. FMM

See “Flash Disk Memory Module” (p. GL-28) for definition. FOADM

See “Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer” (p. GL-27) for definition. Folded rings

Folded (collapsed) rings are rings without fiber diversity. The terminology derives from the image of folding a ring into a linear segment. Forced

Term used when a circuit pack (either working or protection) has been locked into a service-providing state by user command. Forward Defect Indicator

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP label. Forward Error Correction (FEC)

An error correction technique in which redundant bits are added to the payload signal enabling the receiving station to detect and correct bit errors that unavoidably occur when an optical line signal is transmitted over longer distances over an optical fiber. FEC is used to increase the transmission span length. Forwarding Information Base (FIB)

Also known as a forwarding table, is most commonly used in network bridging, routing, and similar functions to find the proper interface to which the input interface should forward a packet. Frame

The smallest block of digital data being transmitted. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-28 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alignment signal

A sequence at the beginning of an SDH/SONET frame that detects the frame start. Framework

An assembly of equipment units capable of housing shelves, such as a bay framework. Free running

An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an internal synchronization reference and is using no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy. Fresnel reflection

A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. FTP

See “File Transfer Protocol” (p. GL-27) for definition. fVOA

See “Fast Variable Optical Attenuator ” (p. GL-25) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G

Gain

The increase in power and magnitude of a signal. Gain Flattening Filter (GFF)

When erbium-doped fibers are used to amplify the light traveling through the fiber, some wavelengths are amplified more than others. A gain-flattening filter restores all wavelengths to approximately the same intensity. Gateway Network Element (GNE)

A network element that passes information between other network elements and management systems through a data communication network. GBE

See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-30) for definition. GCC

General Communications Channel Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS)

A protocol suite (defined by IETF) that extends the label switching paradigm introduced in MPLS to include both packet-switched and circuit-switched networks and that provides the distributed intelligence required to build efficient and resilient multi-layer networks. Generic Mapping Procedure (GMP)

Client/server mapping scenario which provides the ability to map any client signal into any server regardless of differences in rate.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-29 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GFEC

Industry standard G.709 FEC. GFF

See “Gain Flattening Filter” (p. GL-29) for definition. Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many enterprise networks. Global Wait to Restore Time

Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back to the timing reference. It occurs after a timing link failure has cleared. This time applies for all timing sources in a system hence the name global. This can be between 0 and 60 minutes, in increments of one minute. GMP

See “Generic Mapping Procedure” (p. GL-29) for definition. GMPLS

See “Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching” (p. GL-29) for definition. GMRE

GMPLS Routing Engine GNE

See “Gateway Network Element” (p. GL-29) for definition. Grooming

In telecommunications, the process of separating and segregating channels, as by combing, such that the broadest channel possible can be assembled and sent across the longest practical link. The aim is to minimize de-multiplexing traffic and reshuffling it electrically. Ground Loop Noise

Noise that results when equipment is grounded at points having different potentials, thereby creating an unintended current path. The dielectric properties of optical fiber provide electrical isolation, which eliminates ground loops. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

H

Hard Failure

An unrecoverable non-symptomatic (primary) failure that causes signal impairment or interferes with critical network functions. HDB3 (High Density Bipolar 3 Code)

Line code for 2 Mbit/s transmission systems. HDLC (High Level Data Link Control) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-30 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OSI reference model data link layer protocol. HO

Higher Order Holdover

An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an external reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to the last known frequency comparison with a synchronization reference. Hot Standby

A circuit pack ready for fast, automatic placement into operation to replace an active circuit pack. It has the same signal as the service going through it, so that choice is all that is required. HPCFAP

High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I

I/O

Input/Output IAE

Incoming Alignment Error ICMP

See “Internet Control Message Protocol” (p. GL-33) for definition. ID

Identifier IEC

See “International Electrotechnical Commission” (p. GL-32) for definition. IEEE

See “Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers” (p. GL-32) for definition. IETF

Internet Engineering Task Force IGMP

See “Internet Group Management Protocol” (p. GL-33) for definition. ILA

See “In-Line Amplifier” (p. GL-31) for definition. In-Line Amplifier (ILA)

In some physically larger networks, the distance between two add/drop nodes may exceed the system’s single span optical reach. In such a case, an ILA can be installed at a mid-point, thereby .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-31 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

creating two shorter spans and boosting the signal strength before it gets too close to the noise floor. In-Service (IS)

A memory administrative state for ports. IS refers to a port that is fully monitored and alarmed. In-Service Upgradeable (ISUG)

It is unnecessary to shut down the system to upgrade it. Index of Refraction

Also refractive index. The ratio of the velocity of light in free space to the velocity of light in a fiber material. Symbolized by n. Always greater than or equal to one. Industrial temperature

Identifies equipment that is capable of sustaining normal operation in industrial temperature ranges, for example, -40°C to +85°C. Ingress

Traffic entering a network. Insert

To physically insert a circuit pack into a slot, thus causing a system initiated restore of an entity into service and/or creation of an entity and associated attributes. Insertion Loss

The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a previously continuous path. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

Helps advance global prosperity by promoting the engineering process of creating, developing, integrating, sharing, and applying knowledge about electrical and information technologies and sciences for the benefit of humanity and the profession. Interface Capacity

The total number of STM-1 equivalents (bidirectional) tributaries in all transmission interfaces with which a given transmission interface subrack can be equipped at one time. The interface capacity varies with equipage. Intermediate Reach (IR)

Optical sections from a few kilometers (km) to approximately 15 km. Intermediate System (IS)

A system which routes/relays management information. An SDH Network Element may be a combined intermediate and end system. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

The international standards and conformity assessment body for all fields of electrotechnology, including electricty and electronics. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-32 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

International Standards Organization (ISO)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of industrial and technical fields. International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunications Sector (ITU-T)

Formerly known as CCITT (Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique & Téléphonique) or International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee. Develops the worldwide telecommunications standards. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

The ICMP is one of the main protocols of the Internet Protocol Suite. It is used by network devices, like routers, to send error messages indicating, for example, that a requested service is not available or that a host or router could not be reached. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

A communications protocol used by hosts and adjacent routers on IP networks to establish multicast group memberships. IGMP is an integral part of IP multicast. Internet Protocol (IP)

A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks. Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)

A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks. IP

See “Internet Protocol” (p. GL-33) for definition. IPCP (IP Control Protocol)

Network Control Protocol for IPv4. IPL

Inter-processor link IPsec

See “Internet Protocol Security” (p. GL-33) for definition. IR

See “Intermediate Reach” (p. GL-32) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-33 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IS

See “Intermediate System” (p. GL-32) for definition. See “In-Service” (p. GL-32) for definition. ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network ISO

See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-32) for definition. ISU

In-Service Upgrade ISUG

See “In-Service Upgradeable” (p. GL-32) for definition. ITU

International Telecommunications Union ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J

Jacket

The outer, protective covering of the cable. Jitter

Short term variations of amplitude and frequency components of a digital signal from their ideal position in time. Jumper

A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L

L-Band (Long Band)

An optical spectrum range of frequences from 1570 to 1610 nm, where a wide range of wavelengths are possible with low loss. L-Band doubles the number of wavelengths best suited in DWDM applications, and uses newer, more expensive optical amplifiers. L-Span

See “Span Loss” (p. GL-67) for definition. L2

Layer 2 LACP

Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Refer to IEEE 802.1ax for more information. LAG

Link Aggregation. Refer to IEEE 802.1ax for more information. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-34 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lambda (λ)

The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an individual optical wavelength. See “Wavelength” (p. GL-78). LAN

See “Local Area Network” (p. GL-36) for definition. LAPD

See “Link Access Protocol on D-channel” (p. GL-36) for definition. Laser Bias Current (LBC)

Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced. LBC

See “Laser Bias Current” (p. GL-35) for definition. LBO

See “Lightguide Build-Out ” (p. GL-35) for definition. LC

See “Lucent Connector” (p. GL-38) for definition. LCP

See “Link Control Protocol” (p. GL-36) for definition. LCS

Local Customer Support LD

See “Line Driver” (p. GL-36) for definition. LDC

Local Data Controller LEAF (Large Effective Area Fiber)

A type of fiber manufactured by Corning. LED (Light-Emitting Diode)

A diode that translates electrical current into light. Made out of semiconductor material like Gallium-Arsenide. A semiconductor that emits incoherent light when forward biased. LH

See “Long Haul” (p. GL-37) for definition. Lightguide Build-Out (LBO)

An attenuating (signal-reducing) element used to keep an optical output signal strength within desired limits. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-35 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Line

A transmission medium, together with the associated equipment, required to provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive network elements. One network element originates the line signal; the other terminates it. Line Driver (LD)

An amplifier used to improve the strength of an analog or digital signal at its source by driving the input to the transmission line with a higher than normal signal level. Line Protection

The optical interfaces can be protected by line protection. Line protection switching protects against failures of line facilities, including the interfaces at both ends of a line, the optical fibers, and any equipment between the two ends. Line protection includes protection of equipment failures. Line Timing

Refers to a network element that derives its timing from an incoming STM-N signal. Link

The mapping between in-ports and out-ports. It specifies how components are connected to one another. Link Access Protocol on D-channel (LAPD)

A special protocol of the OSI Data Link Layer that provides the functional and procedural means to establish, maintain, and release data link connections for NEs. For NE-NE communications over the DCC, Layer 2 services are provided by LAPD. Link Control Protocol (LCP)

A subprotocol within the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) protocol suite that is responsible for link management. Link State Advertisement (LSA)

A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status. LLDP

Link Layer Discovery Protocol. Refer to IEEE 802.1ab for more information. LLM

Logical Lane Marker LMP

Link Management Protocol LO

Lower Order LOC (Loss of Clock)

Detected when the clock of the OT is damaged. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-36 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Local Area Network (LAN)

A communications network that covers a limited geographic area, is privately owned and user administered, is mostly used for internal transfer of information within a business, is normally contained within a single building or adjacent group of buildings, and transmits data at a very rapid speed. Location

An identifier for a specific circuit pack, interface module, interface port, or communications link. Lockout of Protection

The 1830 PSS ZIC command that prevents the system from switching traffic to the protection line from a working line. If the protection line is active when a “Lockout of Protection” is entered – this command causes the working line to be selected. The protection line is then locked from any Automatic, Manual, or Forced protection switches. Lockout State

The Lockout State is defined for each working or protection circuit pack. The two permitted states are: None – meaning no lockout is set for the circuit pack, set meaning the circuit pack has been locked out. The values (None & Set) are taken independently for each working or protection circuit pack. LOF (Loss of Frame)

A failure to synchronize an incoming signal. LOF (Loss of Frame)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time. LOM (Loss of Multiframe)

A failure declared when two consecutive multiframe alignment signals are received with an error. Long Haul (LH)

A 10-Gbps application for transmission of 128 channels, giving a capacity of 1.28 Tbps and a reach of up to 2000 km. Payload (per channel) can be one OC-192/STM-64 or four OC-48/STM-16 signals. Long Reach (LR)

An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration. Loop Timing

A special case of line timing. It applies to network elements that have only one STM-N/OC-N interface. For example, terminating nodes in a linear network are loop timed. Loopback

Type of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resulting received signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical external transmission signal is sent from a port or tributary input directly back toward the output. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-37 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOP (Loss of Pointer)

A failure to detect the signal structure in an incoming signal. LOS (Loss of Signal/Loss of Service)

A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold. Loss

The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber defects. Loss Budget

Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice losses). Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS)

Delivers high data rates while consuming significantly less power than competing technologies. In addition, it brings many other benefits including low-voltage power supply compatibility, low noise generation, high noise rejection, robust transmission signals, and ability to be integrated into system level ICs. LVDS technology allows products to address high data rates ranging from 100's of Mb/s to greater than 2 Gb/s. For all of the above reasons, it has been deployed across many market segments wherever the need for speed and low power exists. LR

See “Long Reach” (p. GL-37) for definition. LSA

See “Link State Advertisement” (p. GL-36) for definition. LTE

Line Terminating Equipment Lucent Connector (LC)

An optical fiber connector type according to IEC 61754-20 based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule. This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55 dB single mode). Also called “Little Connector” or “Local Connector” LVDS

See “Low Voltage Differential Signaling” (p. GL-38) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M

M1

The M1 card provides connectivity for the mesh paths in a WXC. It supports bi-directional mesh connections. On the receive side, it has a VOA for the purpose of building out the loss of the combination of the OD and M1 path to a specific minimum value. On the transmit side, it combines the even and odd channels of the system. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-38 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MAC

See “Media Access Control” (p. GL-39) for definition. Maintenance association End Point (MEP)

Points at the edge of the domain which define the boundary of the domain. Maintenance domain Intermediate Point (MIP)

Points internal to a domain, not at the boundary. Management Information Base (MIB)

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format. Manager

Capable of issuing network management operations and receiving events. The manager communicates with the agent in the controlled network element. Manual Switch State

A protection group enters the Manual Switch State upon the initiation and successful completion of the Manual Switch command. The protection group leaves the Manual Switch state by means of the Clear or Forced Switch commands. While in the Manual Switch state the system may switch the active unit automatically if required for protection switching. Mapping

The logical association of one set of values, such as addresses on one network, with quantities or values of another set, such as devices or addresses on another network. MC-LAG

Multi-Chassis LAG MD

See “Mediation Device” (p. GL-39) for definition. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours. Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours. MEC (Manufacturer Executable Code)

Network Element system software in binary format that after being downloaded to one of the stores can be executed by the system controller of the network element. Media Access Control (MAC)

The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols. Mediation Device (MD)

Allows for exchange of management information between Operations System and Network .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-39 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Elements. MEM

Memory MEP

See “Maintenance association End Point ” (p. GL-39) for definition. MESH

A type of configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as many as four degrees (bi-directional DWDM interfaces) that comprise 2 lines for the east and 2 for the west. Mesh Ready Optical Add Drop Multiplexer (MOADM)

Provides 64 channel 10G and 40G demultiplexing capability, with direct ports for 32 channels and a connection for 32 additional channels accessible by connecting the 100GHz offset Optical Demultiplexer (OD) to it. MFAS

MultiFrame Alignment Signal MIB

See “Management Information Base” (p. GL-39) for definition. MIP

See “Maintenance domain Intermediate Point ” (p. GL-39) for definition. MJ (Major (alarm))

Indicates a service-affecting failure, main or unit controller failure, or power supply failure. MMF

Multi-Mode Fiber MN (Minor (alarm))

Indicates a non-service-affecting failure of equipment or facility. MO

Managed Object MOADM

See “Mesh Ready Optical Add Drop Multiplexer” (p. GL-40) for definition. Modulation

A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal). Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded modulation (PCM). MPI

See “Multipath Interference” (p. GL-41) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-40 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MPLS

See “Multi Protocol Label Switching” (p. GL-41) for definition. MPLS-TP

Multiprotocol Label Switching. Refer to IETF RFC 5654 and related RFCs for more information. MS

See “MS” (p. GL-41) for definition. MSI

See “Multiplex Structure Identifier” (p. GL-42) for definition. MSOH

See “Multiplex Section Overhead” (p. GL-41) for definition. MSP

See “Multiplex Section Protection” (p. GL-41) for definition. MST

See “Multiplex Section Termination” (p. GL-41) for definition. MTBF

See “Mean Time Between Failures” (p. GL-39) for definition. MTTR

See “Mean Time To Repair” (p. GL-39) for definition. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS)

Network routing protocol that that can redirect (switch) packets as they travel through a network with the use of tag labels. Multimode Fiber

An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers. Multipath Interference (MPI)

Signal reflections and delayed signal images that interfere with the proper signal path. MPI is caused by reflections from dirty/damaged connectors, and return loss of the jumpers/patch cords. MPI may cause severe system degradation. Multiplex Section (MS)

A maintenance entity between two MS Trail Termination functions. Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH)

Part of the Section Overhead. Is accessible only at line terminals and multiplexers. Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)

Provides capability for switching a signal from a working to a protection section. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-41 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multiplex Section Termination (MST)

Function that generates the multiplexer section overhead in the transmit direction and terminates the part of the Multiplexer Section overhead that is acceptable in the receive direction. Multiplex Structure Identifier (MSI)

Used to encode the ODU multiplex structure in the OPU. Multiplexer (MUX)

A device (circuit pack) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combined signal on a shared medium. Multiplexing

A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path, or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. MUX

See “Multiplexer” (p. GL-42) for definition. Muxponder

A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals. MVAC

Multiple variable attenuator card ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N

NA

Not Applicable National Electric Code (NEC)

A standard governing the use of electrical wire, cable, and fixtures installed in buildings; developed by the NEC Committee of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), sponsored by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

A not-for-profit organization that works with the U.S. Congress and federal agencies to promote the adoption and use of fire protection codes and standards, and to promote a uniform national approach to fighting the problem of fires. NE (Network Element)

A node in a telecommunication network that supports network transport services and is directly manageable by a management system. NEBS

See “Network Equipment-Building System requirements” (p. GL-43) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-42 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NEC

See “National Electric Code” (p. GL-42) for definition. Network Element Management System (NMS)

Provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network, including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement (SLA) management. Network Equipment-Building System requirements (NEBS)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs). Network Node Interface (NNI)

The defined interface between functional elements (network nodes) in a system or network. Network Operation Center (NOC)

A place from which a telecommunications network is administered, operated and/or supervised. Network Time Protocol (NTP)

A networking protocol for clock synchronization between computer systems over packet-switched, variable-latency data networks. NF

See “Noise Figure” (p. GL-44) for definition. NFPA

See “National Fire Protection Association” (p. GL-42) for definition. NID

Network Interface Device NIM

See “Non-intrusive Monitor” (p. GL-44) for definition. NMI

Network Management Interface NMON (Not Monitored )

A provisioning state for equipment that is not monitored or alarmed. NMS

See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-43) for definition. NNI

See “Network Node Interface” (p. GL-43) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-43 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

No Request State

This is the routine-operation quiet state in which no external command activities are occurring. NOC

See “Network Operation Center” (p. GL-43) for definition. Node

A network element in a ring or, more generally, in any type of network. In a network element supporting interfaces to more than one ring, node refers to an interface that is in a particular ring. Node is also defined as all equipment that is controlled by one system controller. A node is not always directly manageable by a management system. Noise Figure (NF)

The ratio (in dB) between the signal-to-noise ratio applied to the input of the microwave component and the signal-to-noise ratio measured at its output. NF indicates the amount of noise added to a signal by the component during normal operations. Lower noise figures indicate less degradation and better performance. Non-intrusive Monitor (NIM)

A kind of sink termination point function that does not touch SDH/SONET signals but monitors quality of service. Non-Revertive Switching

In non-revertive switching, an active and standby line exist on the network. When a protection switch occurs, the standby line is selected to support traffic, thereby becoming the active line. The original active line then becomes the standby line. This status remains in effect even when the fault clears. That is, there is no automatic switch back to the original status. Non-Synchronous

The essential characteristic of time-scales or signals such that their corresponding significant instants do not necessarily occur at the same average rate. Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)

Memory that retains its stored data after power has been removed. An example of NVM would be a hard disk. NORM

Normal Operating Mode NRZ (Non-Return to Zero)

A binary encoding in which ones and zeroes are represented by opposite and alternating high and low voltages and where there is no return to a zero voltage between encoded bits. NSA

Non-Service Affecting NTP

See “Network Time Protocol” (p. GL-43) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-44 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NVM

See “Non-Volatile Memory ” (p. GL-44) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O

OA

See “Optical Amplifier” (p. GL-47) for definition. OADM

See “Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer” (p. GL-47) for definition. OAM

Operations and Maintenance OAM&P

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning OAMPDU

Operations and Maintenance Protocol Data Unit OC-n

See “Optical Carrier-level n” (p. GL-47) for definition. OCC

Optical Channel Carrier OCI

Open Connection Indication OCS

Optical Core Switch OD

See “Optical Demultiplexer” (p. GL-48) for definition. ODUk

See “Optical Channel Data Unit – k” (p. GL-47) for definition. ODUk-Xv X virtually concatenated ODUks ODUkP

Optical Channel Data Unit-k Path Monitoring level ODUkT

Optical Channel Data Unit-k Tandem Connection Monitoring level OEO

See “Optical-Electrical-Optical conversion” (p. GL-50) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-45 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OFCS

Optical fiber communications OH

Overhead OLAG

ODUk LAG OLS

See “Optical Line System” (p. GL-48) for definition. OM

See “Optical Multiplexer” (p. GL-48) for definition. OMD

Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex OMFI

OPU Multi-Frame Identifier OMS

See “Optical Management System” (p. GL-48) for definition. See “Optical Multiplex Section” (p. GL-48) for definition. OMSP

Optical Multiplex Section Level Protection OOB

See “Out of Band” (p. GL-51) for definition. OOBDCN

Out-of-band DCN OOF

See “Out-of-Frame” (p. GL-51) for definition. OOS

See “Out-of-Service” (p. GL-51) for definition. OOS-AU

See “Out-of-Service - Autonomous” (p. GL-51) for definition. OOS-AUMA

See “Out-of-Service - Autonomous and Management” (p. GL-51) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-46 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OOS-MA

See “Out-of-Service - Management” (p. GL-52) for definition. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

A hierarchical link-state protocol for network routing, developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant system. Operations Interface

Any interface providing you with information on the system behavior or control. These include the equipment LEDs, user panel, 1830 PSS ZIC, office alarms, and all telemetry interfaces. Operations Support System (OSS)

A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on mainframes or minicomputers. Operator

A user of the system with operator-level user privileges. OPR

See “Optical Path Restoration” (p. GL-49) for definition. OPS

See “Optical Protection Switch” (p. GL-49) for definition. Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (OADM)

A device used in WDM systems which has the capacity to add one or more new wavelength channels to an existing multi-wavelength WDM signal or to drop (remove) one or more channels, passing those signals to another network path. Optical Amplifier (OA)

A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form. Optical Carrier-level n (OC-n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric, typically 1, 3, 12, 48, 192, or 768, which represents the data rate. Optical Channel (OCH, OCh)

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications. A STM-n wavelength within an optical line signal. Multiple channels, differing by 1.5 μm in wavelength, are multiplexed into one signal. Optical Channel Data Unit – k (ODUk) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-47 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the ODUk is an information structure consisting of the information payload (OPUk, Optical Channel Payload Unit) and ODUk related overhead. ODUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s). Optical Channel Payload Unit (OPU)

Contains the encapsulated client data, and a header describing the type of that data. Optical Channel Payload Unit – k (OPUk)

According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the OPUk is the information structure used to adapt client information for the transport over an optical channel. It comprises client information together with any overhead needed to perform rate adaptation between the client signal rate and the OPUk payload rate and other OPUk overhead supporting the client signal transport. This overhead is adaptation specific. OPUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s). Optical Channel Transport Unit (OTU)

The Optical Transport Unit (OTU) frame carries different traffic types—including Ethernet, storage, digital video, as well as SONET/SDH. Optical Channel Transport Unit – k (OTUk)

According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the OTUk is the information structure used for the transport of an ODUk over one or more optical channel connections. It consists of the optical channel data unit and OTUk related overhead (FEC and overhead for management of an optical channel connection). It is characterized by its frame structure, bit rate, and bandwidth. OTUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s). Optical Demultiplexer (OD)

ODs extract individual wavelengths from the DWDM optical that is generated using an Optical Multiplexer (OM). Optical Line Signal

A multiplexed optical signal containing multiple wavelengths or channels. Optical Line System (OLS)

A lightwave transmission system that can multiplex to 8, 16, 80, or more wavelengths, transmit the resulting multiplexed signal, and then demultiplex the signal at the other end. Optical Management System (OMS)

An element management system that provides networks with operational functions such as configuration management, fault management, performance management, and security management. Optical Multiplex Section (OMS)

Used to describe the OADM line, spans, ILAs to the next OADM line. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-48 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optical Multiplexer (OM)

The process that combines two or more wavelengths onto a single fiber. Optical Path Restoration (OPR)

A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms). Optical Power Meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable. Optical Protection Switch (OPS)

An optical card that provides WDM protection. Optical Return Loss (ORL)

The ratio (expressed in units of dB) of optical power reflected by a component or an assembly to the optical power incident on a component port when that component or assembly is introduced into a link or system. Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR)

The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise signal. Optical Spectrum Analyser (OSA)

A device used to study light as electromagnetic waves. Conventional analyzers are primarily used to test optical fiber components, such as, lasers, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and the fiber itself. Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC)

A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic. The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and orderwire communication. Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)

An instrument that locates faults in optical fibers or infers attenuation by backscattered light measurements. Optical Transponder (OT)

An OT is a card that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion. OTs perform frequency adaptation between equipment and external equipment that is not optically compatible with 1830 PSS transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming, reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring (non-intrusive monitoring). Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH)

A standardized method for transparent transport of services over optical wavelengths in DWDM systems, as described in ITU-T G.709. Optical Transport Module (OTM)

Provides bi-directional electrical/optical signal conversions in point-to-point applications. Optical signals propagate at two wavelengths over a single fiber. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-49 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optical Transport Network (OTN)

ITU-T Recommendation G.709 sets a series of standards referred to as the Optical Transport Network (OTN), created to combine SONET/SDH with DWDM, aimed at building more functionality into optical networks. Optical Transport Segment (OTS)

The physical link between equipment at two different NEs; may be referred to the as OTS transmit line, or OTS receive line, or the OTS link. Optical-Electrical-Optical conversion (OEO)

The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical data. OPU

See “Optical Channel Payload Unit” (p. GL-48) for definition. OPUk

See “Optical Channel Payload Unit – k” (p. GL-48) for definition. Orderwire

A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites. ORL

See “Optical Return Loss” (p. GL-49) for definition. OS (Operations System)

A central computer-based system used to provide operations, administration, and maintenance functions. OSA

See “Optical Spectrum Analyser” (p. GL-49) for definition. OSC

See “Optical Supervisory Channel” (p. GL-49) for definition. OSI

See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-47) for definition. OSNR

See “Optical Signal to Noise Ratio” (p. GL-49) for definition. OSP

See “Outside Plant” (p. GL-52) for definition. OSPF

See “Open Shortest Path First” (p. GL-47) for definition. OSS

See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-47) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-50 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OT

See “Optical Transponder” (p. GL-49) for definition. OTDR

See “Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer” (p. GL-49) for definition. OTH

See “Optical Transport Hierarchy” (p. GL-49) for definition. OTL

Optical Channel Transport Lane OTLC

Optical Transport Lane Carrier OTM

See “Optical Transport Module” (p. GL-49) for definition. OTN

See “Optical Transport Network” (p. GL-49) for definition. OTS

See “Optical Transport Segment” (p. GL-50) for definition. OTU

See “Optical Channel Transport Unit” (p. GL-48) for definition. OTUk

See “Optical Channel Transport Unit – k” (p. GL-48) for definition. OTUkV

Functionally standardized Optical Channel Transport Unit – k (acc. to ITU-T Recommendation G.709) Out of Band (OOB)

A system that uses communication channels that are not part of their core communication capability to transfer commands or information. Out-of-Frame (OOF)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for several consecutive frames. Out-of-Service (OOS)

An equipment entity is not providing its normal service function (removed from either the working or protection state) either because of a system problem or because the pack has been removed from service. Out-of-Service - Autonomous (OOS-AU)

An equipment entity is in an out-of-service state caused solely by an autonomous event. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-51 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Out-of-Service - Autonomous and Management (OOS-AUMA)

An equipment entity is in an out-of-service state caused by both an autonomous event and a management event. Out-of-Service - Management (OOS-MA)

An equipment entity is in an out-of-service state caused solely by a management event. Outage

A disruption of service that lasts for more than 1 second. Outside Plant (OSP)

Refers to outside the central office/building premises. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P

Parameter

A variable that is given a value for a specified application. A constant, variable, or expression that is used to pass values between components. Parity Check

Tests whether the number of ones (or zeros) in an array of binary bits is odd or even; used to determine that the received signal is the same as the transmitted signal. Pass-Through

Paths that are cross-connected directly across an intermediate node in a network. Path

A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is disassembled. Path Overhead (POH)

Informational bytes assigned to, and transported with the payload until the payload is de-multiplexed. It provides for integrity of communication between the point of assembly of a virtual container and its point of disassembly. Path Terminating Equipment

Network elements in which the path overhead is terminated. PCB

Printed Circuit Board PCC

Protection Communication Channel PCMCIA

See “Personal Computer Miniature Communications International Association” (p. GL-53) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-52 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCMCIA (Personal Computer Miniature Communications International Association) Adapter

A slot on the Network Controller or on the PC where the flash disk is inserted PCS

See “Physical Coding Sublayer” (p. GL-53) for definition. PDL

See “Polarization Dependent Loss” (p. GL-54) for definition. PDU

See “Power Distribution Unit” (p. GL-55) for definition. See also, “Protocol Data Unit” (p. GL-56) for definition. PDU1C, PDU2C

The Power Distribution Unit is used to provide the 1830 PSS-36 subrack with power. PDU1C is the ETSI market version, PDU2C is used for the ANSI market. Performance Monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before an alarm would be generated). Personal Computer Miniature Communications International Association (PCMCIA)

An international standards body and trade association that establishes standards for Integrated Circuit cards and promotes interchangeability among mobile computers where ruggedness, low power, and small size are critical. PCMCIA publishes the PC Card standard, which contains all of the physical, electrical, and software specifications for the PC card technology. PFC

PSS-36 Power filter card Phase Locked Loop (PLL)

An electronic circuit that controls an oscillator so that it maintains a constant phase angle relative to a reference signal. PHB

Per-hop-behavior. Refer to IETF RFC 2475 for more information. Photodiode

A device that converts optical energy to electrical energy. Photonic Cross-connect (PXC)

A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one or more wavelengths on each fiber or port. Photonic Protection Switch (PPS)

By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are automatically created. Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-53 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports. PID (Password Identification)

A word or character string recognized by automatic means that permits a user access to protected storage, files, or input or output devices. Platform

A family of equipment and software configurations designed to support a particular application. Plenum

The air handling space between walls, under structural floors, and above drop ceilings that can be used to route intrabuilding cabling. Plenum Cable

A cable whose flammability and smoke characteristics allow it to be routed in a plenum area without being enclosed in a conduit. PLL

See “Phase Locked Loop” (p. GL-53) for definition. PM

See “Performance Monitoring” (p. GL-53) for definition. PMD

See “Polarization Mode Dispersion” (p. GL-54) for definition. POH

See “Path Overhead” (p. GL-52) for definition. Point to Point Protocol (PPP)

Connection oriented protocol established between two devices that carry data packets from one point to another. Polarization

The direction of the electric field in the lightwave. Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave). Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)

Output pulse broadening due to random coupling of the two polarization modes in an optical fiber. PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-54 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

received optical signal. POP

Point of Presence Port (also called Line)

The physical interface, consisting of both an input and output, where an electrical or optical transmission interface is connected to the system and may be used to carry traffic between network elements. The words “port” and “line” may often be used synonymously. “Port” emphasizes the physical interface, and “line” emphasizes the interconnection. Either may be used to identify the signal being carried. Port State Provisioning

A feature that allows a user to suppress alarm reporting and performance monitoring during provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not monitored) for low-speed ports. Power Distribution Unit (PDU)

Provides rack level power interface and circuit breakers. PPP

See “Point to Point Protocol” (p. GL-54) for definition. PPS

See “Photonic Protection Switch” (p. GL-53) for definition. PRBS

See “Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence ” (p. GL-56) for definition. PRC

See “Primary Reference Clock” (p. GL-55) for definition. Pre-provisioning

The process by which the user specifies parameter values for an entity in advance of some of the equipment being present. These parameters are maintained only in NVM. These modifications are initiated locally or remotely by a management system (such as 1830 PSS ZIC for example). Pre-provisioning provides for the de-coupling of manual intervention tasks (for example, install circuit packs) from those tasks associated with configuring the node to provide services (for example, specifying the entities to be cross-connected). Precision Time Protocol (PTP)

The PTP is a protocol used to synchronize clocks throughout a computer network. On a local area network, it achieves clock accuracy in the sub-microsecond range, making it suitable for measurement and control systems. Primary Reference Clock (PRC)

The main timing clock reference in SDH equipment. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-55 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proactive Maintenance

Refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiate protection switching or alarming, but indicative of an impending signal fail or signal degrade defect. Protection

Extra capacity (channels, circuit packs) in transmission equipment that is not intended to be used for service, but rather to serve as backup against equipment failures. Protection Access

To provision traffic to be carried by protection tributaries when the port tributaries are not being used to carry the protected working traffic. Protection Group Configuration

The members of a group and their roles, for example, working protection, line number, etc. Protection Path

One of two signals entering a path selector used for path protection switching or dual ring interworking. The other is the working path. The designations working and protection are provisioned by the user, whereas the terms active path and standby path indicate the current protection state. Protection State

When the working unit is currently considered active by the system and that it is carrying traffic. The “active unit state” specifically refers to the receive direction of operation — since protection switching is unidirectional. PROTN (Protection)

Parameter that indicates the protection facilities is currently carrying traffic. Protocol Data Unit (PDU)

A packet used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers. PROV (Provisioned)

Parameter that indicates a circuit pack is ready to perform its intended function. A provisioned circuit pack can be active (ACT), in-service (IS), standby (STBY), provisioned out-of-service (POS), or out-of-service (OOS). Provisioning

Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a customer record in a database to activate the services. Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence (PRBS)

A sequence of bits commonly used for testing. PSF3T8

PSS-64 Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-56 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSI

Payload Structure Identifier PT

Payload Type PTF

Path termination function PTM

Pluggable transmission module (commonly, SFP, XFP, or CFP) PTP

See “Precision Time Protocol” (p. GL-55) for definition. Pump Laser

A laser used in an optical fiber amplifier. PW

Pseudowire. Refer to IETF RFC 3916 for more information. PWR

Power PWR ON

Power On PXC

See “Photonic Cross-connect” (p. GL-53) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q

QL

See “Quality Level” (p. GL-57) for definition. QOS

See “Quality of Service” (p. GL-57) for definition. Quality Level (QL)

The quality of the timing signal(s) provided to synchronize a Network Element. In case of optical line timing the level can be provided by the Synchronization Status Message (S-1 byte). If the System and Output Timing Quality Level mode is “Enabled”, and if the signal selected for the Station Clock Output has a quality level below the Acceptance Quality Level, the Network Element “squelches” the Station Clock Output Signal, which means that no signal is forwarded at all. Quality of Service (QOS)

A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual connection. QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-57 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

such as signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R

Rack

The standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also called bay frames. RADIUS

See “Remote Authentication Dial In User Service ” (p. GL-59) for definition. RAM

See “Random Access Memory” (p. GL-58) for definition. Raman Amplification

A technique that transforms part of the outside plant fiber (OSP) into an amplifier by emitting high-power laser light into the OSP. Raman Pump (RP)

Provides amplification/gain in the outside plant fiber by supplying a counterpropagating signal. The amplification is provided by pumping high-intensity wavelengths (that are lower than the signal wavelength) into the fiber that carries the incoming DWDM signal. Random Access Memory (RAM)

Random Access Memory Type of computer memory where programs and current data are stored and can be quickly accessed by the processor. When the computer is turned off, RAM loses its data. When the computer it turned on again, the operating system and other files are once again loaded into RAM, usually from the hard disk. RDI

See “Remote Defect Indication” (p. GL-59) for definition. Re-configurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (ROADM)

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate resources to a new demand matrix). Reactive Maintenance

Refers to detecting defects/failures and clearing them. Receive-Direction

The direction towards the Network Element.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-58 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Receiver

A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an optical-to-electrical converter. Receiver overload

The maximum acceptable value of average received power for an acceptable BER or performance. Receiver sensitivity

The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate (BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or OSNR degradation). Refractive index

A numerical expression comparing the speed of light in a transparent medium, like glass, with the speed of light in air. The higher the index number, the thinner a given lens will be. Regeneration

The process of reconstructing a digital signal to eliminate the effects of noise and distortion. Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH)

Part of the Section Overhead (SOH) of a STM-1 signal, which contains information from the transmission system, used for various management functions such as monitoring transmission quality, detecting failures, managing alarms, data communication channels, and service channels. Regenerator Section Termination (RST) (RST)

Function that generates the Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) in the transmit direction and terminates the RSOH in the receive direction. REI

See “Remote Error Indication” (p. GL-59) for definition. Reliability

The ability of a software system performing its required functions under stated conditions for a stated period of time. The probability for an equipment to fulfill its function. Some of the ways in which reliability is measured are: MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) expressed in hours; Availability = (MTBF)/(MTBF+MTTR)(%) [where MTTR = mean time to restore]; outage in minutes per year; failures per hour; percentage of failures per 1,000 hours. Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)

RADIUS servers are network devices that authenticate the identity of each user of network services, provides authorization to use the requested service, and create event information for accounting purposes. Remote Defect Indication (RDI)

RDI signals convey the defect status of the trail signal at the trail destination (that is, at trail termination sink function) back to the trail origin (that is, trail termination source function). This mechanism allows alignment of the near-end and far-end performance monitoring processes. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-59 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remote Error Indication (REI)

REI signals contain either the exact or truncated number of error detection code violations detected in the trail signal at the trail termination sink. This information is conveyed to the trail termination source. This mechanism allows alignment of the near-end and far-end performance monitoring processes. Remote Network Element

Any Network Element that is connected to the referenced Network Element through either an electrical or optical link. It may be the adjacent node on a ring, or N nodes away from the reference. It also may be at the same physical location but is usually at another (remote) site. Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)

Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819. Repeater

A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend operating range. See “In-Line Amplifier” (p. GL-31) for related term. Request For Comment (RFC)

A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies. Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

Used to control the quality of service (QoS) for packet flow for specific communication sessions in a packet data network. Primarily used in sessions such as video or voice services. Restore Timer

Counts down the time (in minutes) during which the switch waits to let the worker line recover before switching back to it. This option can be set to prevent the protection switch continually switching if a line has a continual transient fault. Revertive

A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment returns to the nominal configuration (that is, the working equipment is active, and the protection equipment is standby) after any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur, clear, or after any external switch commands are reset. Revertive Switching

In revertive switching, there is a working and protection high-speed line, circuit pack, etc. When a protection switch occurs, the protection line, circuit pack, etc. is selected. When the fault clears, service “reverts” to the working line. RFC

See “Request For Comment” (p. GL-60) for definition. Ribbon Cable

Cable that contains many fibers embedded in a plastic material in parallel, forming a flat ribbon-like structure. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-60 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ring

A configuration of nodes comprised of network elements connected in a circular fashion. Under normal conditions, each node is interconnected with its neighbor and includes capacity for transmission in either direction between adjacent nodes. Path switched rings use a head-end bridge and tail-end switch. Line switched rings actively reroute traffic over the protection capacity. Rise Time

The time taken to make a transition from one state to another, usually measured between the 10% and 90% completion points of the transition. Alternatively, the rise time may be specified at the 20% and 80% amplitudes. Shorter or faster rise times require more bandwidth in a transmission channel. RJ45

Registered jack, standardized according to IEC60603-7. RMA

Remote Management Agent RMD

Remote Managed Device RMON

See “Remote Network Monitoring” (p. GL-60) for definition. ROADM

See “Re-configurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer ” (p. GL-58) for definition. Route

A series of contiguous digital sections. Router

An interface between two networks. While routers are like bridges, they work differently. Routers provide more functionality than bridges. For example, they can find the best route between any two networks, even if there are several different networks in between. Routers also provide network management capabilities such as load balancing, partitioning of the network, and trouble-shooting. RP

See “Raman Pump” (p. GL-58) for definition. RS

Regenerator Section Reed-Solomon RSOH

See “Regenerator Section Overhead” (p. GL-59) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-61 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RST

See “Regenerator Section Termination (RST)” (p. GL-59) for definition. RSVP

See “Resource Reservation Protocol” (p. GL-60) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S

SA

See “Service Affecting” (p. GL-63) for definition. SAN

See “Storage Area Network” (p. GL-69) for definition. SAPI

Source access point identifier SBS

See “Stimulated Brillion Scattering” (p. GL-69) for definition. SC

See “Shelf Controller” (p. GL-64) for definition. Scattering

The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting material. SCOT

See “Software Control of Transmission” (p. GL-67) for definition. SCTL

See “Shelf Controller Circuit Pack” (p. GL-64) for definition. SD

Signal Degrade SDH

See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-70) for definition. SDH Equipment Clock (SEC)

A timing device (equipment) used to synchronize network equipment that operates according to the principles governed by SDH. SEC

See “SDH Equipment Clock” (p. GL-62) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-62 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section

The portion of a transmission facility, including terminating points, between a terminal network element and a line-terminating network element, or two line-terminating network elements. Section Overhead (SOH)

Capacity added to either an AU-4 or assembly of AU-3s to create an STM-1. Contains always STM-1 framing and optionally maintenance and operational functions. SOH can be subdivided in MSOH (multiplex section overhead) and RSOH (regenerator section overhead). Secure Shell (SSH)

A UNIX based command interface and protocol for securely accessing remote NEs. It contains three utilities: slogin, ssh, and scp. Their function is the secure equivalent of UNIX utilities rlogin, rsh, and rcp. SSH commands are encrypted. SEEPROM

See “Serial Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory” (p. GL-63) for definition. Segment

A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites. Self-Healing

A network’s ability to automatically recover from the failure of one or more of its components. SELV

Safety extra low voltage. Serial Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (SEEPROM)

A device which can be erased and reprogrammed. Server

Computer in a computer network that performs dedicated main tasks which generally require sufficient performance. Service

The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is providing service. This designation will change with each switch action. Service Affecting

Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service. Service Level Agreement (SLA)

A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide. Services

Within the 1830 PSS system, services can be offered directly to end customers or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-63 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SES

See “Severely Errored Seconds” (p. GL-64) for definition. Severely Errored Seconds (SES)

This performance monitoring parameter is a second in which a signal failure occurs, or more than a preset amount of coding violations (dependent on the type of signal) occurs. SFC

See “Static Filter, CWDM” (p. GL-69) for definition. SFD

See “Static Filter, DWDM” (p. GL-69) for definition. SFP

See “Small Form-Factor Pluggable” (p. GL-66) for definition. SFTP

See “SSH File Transfer Protocol” (p. GL-68) for definition. SH

Short-Haul Shared Risk Group (SRG)

A group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault. Shelf

A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for cards. Shelves are housed in racks. An 1830 PSS node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node. The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management system. Connections between nodes use network links. See “Node” (p. GL-44) for related term. Shelf Controller (SC)

The SC card in a 1830 PSS shelf. Shelf Controller Circuit Pack (SCTL)

SCTL provides control at the double-shelf backplane level (half of a bay). SHG

Split Horizon Group - A configured group of ports that cannot exchange traffic among the ports that are part of the group. Short Reach (SR)

Optical sections of two km or less. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-64 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The relative strength of signal compared to noise. Signaling Transfer Point (STP)

A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

The protocol used to communicate between the 1830 PSS nodes and the NMS. The SNMP traffic is carried over the 1830 PSS control network. Simplex

A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector). Simplex Cable

Another name for a single-fiber cable. Simplex Transmission

Transmission in one direction only. Simulated Raman Scattering (SRS)

A broadband effect where power is transferred from a low-wavelength channel to a higher-wavelength channel. The short-wavelength source acts as a pump. Single Longitudinal Module (SLM)

An injection laser diode which has a single dominant longitudinal mode. Single Network Bay Frame (SNBF)

Rack type used in ANSI equipment. Single-Ended Operations

Provides operations support from a single location to remote Network Elements in the same SDH subnetwork. With this capability you can perform operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning on a centralized basis. The remote Network Elements can be those that are specified for the current release. Single-Mode Fiber (SM or SMF)

A low-loss, long-span optical fiber typically operating at either 1310 nm, 1550 nm, or both. This type of fiber is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal. Site

The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more glass-through connections. Site Address

The unique address for a Network Element. Sk

Sink .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-65 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SLA

See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-63) for definition. SLC

Second-level controller SLM

See “Single Longitudinal Module” (p. GL-65) for definition. Slot

A physical position in a subrack designed for holding a circuit pack and connecting it to the backplane. This term is also used loosely to refer to the collection of ports or tributaries connected to a physical circuit pack placed in a slot. Slow Variable Optical Attenuator (sVOA)

sVOAs are used for optical power leveling without WaveTracker (WT) encoding. SM or SMF

See “Single-Mode Fiber” (p. GL-65) for definition. Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP)

Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) are optical modular transceivers designed for use with small form factor (SFF) connectors, and offer high speed and physical compactness. They are hot-swappable. SFP transceivers perform at data speeds of up to five gigabits per second, and possibly higher. The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts. SNBF

See “Single Network Bay Frame” (p. GL-65) for definition. SNC

Subnetwork Connection SNC/I

Subnetwork Connection (protection) / Inherent monitoring SNC/N

Subnetwork Connection (protection) / Non-intrusive monitoring SNC/S

Subnetwork connection protection with sublayer monitoring SNCP

See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-69) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-66 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SNMP

See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-65) for definition. SNR

See “Signal-to-Noise Ratio” (p. GL-64) for definition. Software Backup

The process of saving an image of the current network element’s databases, which are contained in its NVM, to a remote location. Software Control of Transmission (SCOT)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps, DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs. Software Download

The process of transferring a software release generic from a remote file server to the network element’s memory. Software Generic (SW Generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release. Software ID

Number that provides the software version information for the system. SOH

See “Section Overhead” (p. GL-63) for definition. SONET

See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-70) for definition. Span

An uninterrupted bidirectional fiber section between two network elements. Span Growth

A type of growth in which one wavelength is added to all lines before the next wavelength is added. Span Loss

Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice losses). SPE

Synchronous Payload Envelope Spectral Width

A measure of the extent of a spectrum. For a source, the width of wavelengths contained in the output at one half of the wavelength of peak power. Typical spectral widths are 50 to 160 nm for an LED and 0.1 to 5 nm for a laser diode. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-67 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SPF (Single point of failure)

A single failure in the network that causes isolation of more than one node. The use of IS-IS areas, without obeying all rules and guidelines, increases the risk of a single point of failure in the network. SPI

Serial Peripheral Inventory Splice

A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means. SR

See “Short Reach” (p. GL-64) for definition. SR OS

Nokia's Service Router Operating System SRG

See “Shared Risk Group” (p. GL-64) for definition. SRS

See “Simulated Raman Scattering” (p. GL-65) for definition. SSH

See “Secure Shell” (p. GL-63) for definition. SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)

A network protocol that provides file transfer and manipulation functionality over any reliable data stream. It is typically used with the SSH-2 protocol to provide secure file transfer. See “Secure Shell” (p. GL-63) for related term. SSM

Synchronization Status Message SSMF

See “Standard Single-Mode Fiber” (p. GL-68) for definition. ST

See “Straight-Tip Connector” (p. GL-69) for definition. Standard Single-Mode Fiber (SSMF)

The most common type of fiber deployed, this fiber was designed to provide zero chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-68 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Standby Path

One of two signals entering a constituent path selector, the standby path is the path not currently being selected. State

The state of a circuit pack indicates whether it is defective or normal (ready for normal use). Operational state indicates dynamic system view: defective or normal. Administrate state indicates provisioned user view: in-service, out-of-service, maintenance. Alarms are generated only when administrative state is in-service. Static Filter, CWDM (SFC)

A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack. Static Filter, DWDM (SFD)

A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack. Status

The indication of a short-term change in the system. STBY (Standby)

The circuit pack is in service but is not providing service functions. It is ready to be used to replace a similar circuit pack either by protection or by duplex switching. Stimulated Brillion Scattering (SBS)

Occurs when the light launched into the fiber exceeds a threshold power level for each process. STM-n

See “Synchronous Transport Module, Level n” (p. GL-71) for definition. Storage Area Network (SAN)

A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users STP

See “Signaling Transfer Point” (p. GL-65) for definition. Straight-Tip Connector (ST)

Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling. STS, STS-n

See “Synchronous Transport Signal-n” (p. GL-71) for definition. Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)

An SDH version of UPSR. See “Unidirectional Path-Switched Ring” (p. GL-76) for related term. Supervisor

A user of the application with supervisor user privileges. Supervisory Pack (SUPVY) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-69 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A low-speed transmission pack that facilitates communication between NEs. Suppression

A process where service-affecting alarms that have been identified as an “effect” are not displayed to a user. SUPVY

See “Supervisory Pack” (p. GL-69) for definition. SVAC

Single Variable Attenuator Card sVOA

See “Slow Variable Optical Attenuator ” (p. GL-66) for definition. SW Generic

See “Software Generic” (p. GL-67) for definition. SYNC

Synchronizer Synchronization Messaging

Synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of network timing, internal timing status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork. Synchronous

The essential characteristic of time scales or signals such that their corresponding significant instances occur at precisely the same average rate, generally traceable to a single Stratum 1 source. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mbps to 40 Gbps that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world. SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment. Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical long-distance networks. SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 Mbps, called OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on an optical fiber.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-70 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronous Signal

A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal. Synchronous Transport Module, Level n (STM-n)

A building block information structure that supports SDH section layer connections, where N represents a multiple of 155.52 Mb/s. Normally N = 1, 4, 16, 64 or 256. Synchronous Transport Signal-n (STS, STS-n)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mbps for an STS-1 signal and a rate of n times 51.840 Mbps for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric). System Administrator

A user of the computer system on which the system’s OS software application can be installed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T

Tandem Connection (TC)

An arbitrary series of contiguous link connections and/or subnetwork connections. Tap

The entry point into a system module. Target Identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter that is used to identify a particular Network Element within a network. It is a character string of up 20 characters where the characters are letters, digits, or hyphens (-). The parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command. See “Transaction Language One” (p. GL-73) for related term. TC

See “Tandem Connection” (p. GL-71) for definition. TCA (Threshold-Crossing Alert)

A message type sent from a Network Element that indicates that a certain performance monitoring parameter has exceeded a specified threshold. TCM

Tandem Connection Monitoring TCP

See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-73) for definition. TCP/IP

See “Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol” (p. GL-73) for definition. TDC

See “Tunable Dispersion Compensator” (p. GL-75) for definition. TDM

See “Time Division Multiplexing” (p. GL-72) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-71 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TE

See “Thermoelectric” (p. GL-72) for definition. TEC

See “Thermoelectric Cooler” (p. GL-72) for definition. Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network. Terminal Multiplexer (TM)

An add/drop multiplexer with only one stream interface. Thermoelectric (TE)

A phenomenon that occurs whenever electrical current flows through two dissimilar conductors; depending on the direction of current flow, the junction of the two conductors will either absorb or release heat. Thermoelectric Cooler (TEC)

A solid-state heat pump used in applications where temperature stabilization, temperature cycling, or cooling below ambient is required. Through (or continue) cross-connection

A cross-connection within a ring, where the input and output tributaries have the same tributary number but are in lines opposite each other. TID

See “Target Identifier” (p. GL-71) for definition. TIM

Trace identifier mismatch Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to send several bit streams of information. TL1

See “Transaction Language One” (p. GL-73) for definition. TM

See “Terminal Multiplexer” (p. GL-72) for definition. TMN

See “Telecommunications Management Network ” (p. GL-72) for definition. TOADM

See “Tunable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer” (p. GL-75) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-72 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TOH

See “Transport Overhead” (p. GL-73) for definition. Topology

The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network topology database contains information regarding each link in the network. TPID (Tag protocol identifier, Ethertype)

Indicates the presence of a VLAN tag in a MAC frame. Furthermore, it indicates that the length/type field can be found at a different position in the frame (moved by 4 bytes). Traffic grooming

Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing. Trail Signal Degrade (TSD)

The TSD signal (generated by a trail termination sink function) informs the next function(s) of the "signal degrade" condition of the associated data signal. Trail Signal Fail (TSF)

The TSF signal (generated by a trail termination sink function) informs the next downstream function(s) of the "signal fail" condition of the associated data signal (which contains, due to that "signal fail" condition, the all-ONEs (AIS) pattern). Trail Termination (TT)

An atomic function within a layer that generates, adds, and monitors information concerning the integrity and supervision of adapted information. Transaction Language One (TL1)

A management protocol developed by Bellcore in 1984 for man-machine and machine-machine communications. TL1 is defined in Telcordia ® Requirement GR-831-CORE. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP. Transmit Direction

The direction outwards from the Network Element. Transport Overhead (TOH )

The overhead added to the STS SPE (synchronous transport signal synchronous payload envelope) for transport purposes. Transport overhead consists of line and section overhead. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-73 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traps (SNMP)

SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent (node) to a manager (EMS). Tributary

This term may refer to the following definitions: 1. A signal of a specific rate (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, STM-1 or STM-4) that may be added to or dropped from a line signal. 2. A path-level unit of bandwidth within a port, or the constituent signal(s) being carried in this unit of bandwidth, for example, an STM-1 tributary within an STM-N port. Tributary Unit (TU)

An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the higher path layer. Consists of a VC-n plus a tributary unit pointer (TU PTR). TRU

Top Rack Unit TrueWave® Fiber

Non-zero dispersion-shifted fiber manufactured by Nokia. See “TWC, TW+, TW-RS” (p. GL-75) for related terms. TS

Tributary Slot TSD

See “Trail Signal Degrade” (p. GL-73) for definition. TSF

See “Trail Signal Fail” (p. GL-73) for definition. TSI (Time Slot Interchange)

The ability of the user to assign cross-connections between any tributaries of any lines within a Network Element. Three types of TSI can be defined: Hairpin TSI, Interring TSI (between rings), and intra-ring TSI (within rings). TT

See “Trail Termination” (p. GL-73) for definition. TTI

Trail trace identifier TTP

Trail Termination Point TTT

Timing Transparent Transcoding

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-74 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TU

See “Tributary Unit” (p. GL-74) for definition. Tunable Dispersion Compensator (TDC)

A device that has negative chromatic dispersion where the amount of dispersion can be adjusted. It is used for compensation of the chromatic dispersion of the transmission fibers. Tunable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (TOADM)

A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers. TWC, TW+, TW-RS

Variants of TrueWave fiber, with low positive residual dispersion in the C band. True wave classic, enhanced TW, and reduced slope true wave with reduced dispersion slope (and higher dispersion at 1530 nm than TWC). Two-Way Point-to-Point Cross-Connection

A two-legged interconnection, that supports two-way transmission, between two and only two tributaries. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U

UAS

See “Unavailable Seconds” (p. GL-75) for definition. UDP

See “User Datagram Protocol” (p. GL-76) for definition. UFEC

See “Ultra Forward Error Correction” (p. GL-75) for definition. UID (User Identification)

A CIT user code that comprises one to ten alphanumeric, case-sensitive characters. UID identifies a user when he/she logs into a system. UL

See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-75) for definition. Ultra Forward Error Correction (UFEC)

An improved method to correct bit errors in a transmission signal. Additional information is put into the data signal to allow the correction of bit errors. There is no acknowledge information in the back direction. Unavailable Seconds (UAS)

In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or in which 10 consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when 10 consecutive non-SES occur. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-75 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components, assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety. UNEQ

Path Unequipped UNI

User-to-Network Interface Unidirectional Path-Switched Ring (UPSR)

A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction (for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR: •

is path-specific as opposed to line specific

•

does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)

•

requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network element can make all its decisions without involving the source)

Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)

A time-zone independent indication of an event. The local time can be calculated from the Universal Coordinated Time. UPSR

See “Unidirectional Path-Switched Ring” (p. GL-76) for definition. Upstream

At or towards the source of the considered transmission stream, for example, looking in the opposite direction of transmission. USB

Universal Serial Bus User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams. User Privilege

Permissions a user must perform on the computer system on which the system software runs. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-76 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User Services

Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service. UTC

See “Universal Time Coordinated ” (p. GL-76) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V

Value

A number, text string, or other menu selection associated with a parameter. Variable

An item of data named by an identifier. Each variable has a type, such as int or Object, and a scope. Variable Gain Optical Amplifier Module (VGOAM)

The Line Driver circuit packs contain VGOAMs with mid-stage access, and are thus variable gain mid-stage amplifiers circuit packs. Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA)

A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the receiving equipment. VOAs enable control optical power leveling through software provisioning. VC

See “Virtual Container” (p. GL-77) for definition. VCAT

See “Virtual Concatenation” (p. GL-77) for definition. VCG

Virtual Concatenation Group Very Short Reach (VSR)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300 meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems. VGOAM

See “Variable Gain Optical Amplifier Module” (p. GL-77) for definition. Virtual

Refers to artificial objects created by a computer to help the system control shared resources. Virtual Concatenation (VCAT)

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation do not. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-77 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Virtual Container (VC)

Within the SDH frame, carried within the information payload are administrative units. Within the administrative unit are one or more virtual containers, which contain path overhead and VC payload. Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS)

VPLS is a way to provide Ethernet-based multipoint to multipoint communication over IP or MPLS networks. VOA

See “Variable Optical Attenuator” (p. GL-77) for definition. Volatile Memory

Type of memory that is lost if electrical power is interrupted. VPLS

See “Virtual Private LAN Service” (p. GL-78) for definition. VSR

See “Very Short Reach” (p. GL-77) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W

Wait to Restore (WTR)

Applies to revertive switching operation. The protection group enters the WTR state when all Equipment Fail (EF) conditions are cleared, but the system has not yet reverted back to its working line. The protection group remains in the WTR state until the Wait-to-Restore timer completes the WTR time interval. WAN (Wide Area Network )

A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers an extended geographical area. Wave Key

A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual wavelengths through the network. A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a1830 PSS network is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys. Waveguide

A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave. Wavelength

The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave, typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and the frequency. (Also called lambda.) Wavelength Cross Connect (WXC)

A hydribd ROADM. See “Re-configurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer ” (p. GL-58) for related term. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-78 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM)

Merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals. See “Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing” (p. GL-17) for related term. Wavelength Interchange

The ability to change the wavelength associated with an STM-N signal into another wavelength. Wavelength Router (WR)

A type of 1830 PSS card which involves routing of optical channels in TOADM, ROADM , and ROADM CDC-F configurations. Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS)

Component of a WDM network used to route (switch) signals between optical fibers on a per-wavelength basis. Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability (WT)

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of 1830 PSS which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the 1830 PSS network, and for the measuring of the wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths. WDM

See “Wavelength Division Multiplexing” (p. GL-78) for definition. WDM Demand

The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network. WDM Line

A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. AWDM line can be a single span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs). Web User Interface (WebUI)

A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE). WebUI

See “Web User Interface” (p. GL-79) for definition. Wideband Communications

Voice, data, and/or video communication at digital rates from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s. Working (WRK)

Secondary state of system components or label attached to a physical entity.. In case of revertive switching the working line or unit is the entity that is carrying service under normal operation. In case of non-revertive switching the label has no particular meaning. Working/Protection assignments are provisioned and do not change dynamically. Active/Standby status changes dynamically. When the "working" entity is failed, the protection entity is active and the working entity is standby. Otherwise the working entity is active and the protection entity is standby. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-79 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

"Protection" is the label attached to the *other* entity, not one that is active when the "Working" entity is failed. WR

See “Wavelength Router” (p. GL-79) for definition. WRED

Weighted Random Early Detection WRK

See “Working” (p. GL-79) for definition. WRT (Wait to Restore Time)

Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back after a failure has cleared, in a revertive protection scheme. This can be between 0 and 15 minutes, in increments of one minute. WSS

See “Wavelength Selective Switch” (p. GL-79) WT

See “Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability” (p. GL-79) WTD

Wavelength Tracker Decoder WTE

Wavelength Tracker Encoder WTOCM

Wavelength Tracker Optical Channel Monitor pack WTR

See “Wait to Restore” (p. GL-78) WXC

See “Wavelength Cross Connect” (p. GL-78) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X

XC

See “Cross-connection” (p. GL-14) for definition. XFP

See “10-gigabit Small Form-factor Pluggable module” (p. GL-1) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z

Zero Installation Craft

The 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) is a web interface embedded in the NE software. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-80 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ZIC

See “Zero Installation Craft” (p. GL-80) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-81 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS GL-82 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Index

C Client installation on PC/MAC

hardware requirements, 2-2 Client window Action menu, description, 3-4 ............................................................. D Design options

new, 8-2 Document content, xxv .............................................................

power divergence, 14-6

Reports menu, description, 3-6

ROADM, 14-8

toolbar, 3-11

routing, 14-9, 14-11, 14-12, 14-14, 14-15

toolbar functionality, 3-2

SFD44, 14-17 span loss, 14-4 systems, 14-17 TOADM, 14-8 WDM links, 14-15 .............................................................

E Errors F Features, 1-2

amplifier, 14-6

cross OTs, 14-14 CWDM, 14-11, 14-12 demands, 14-9, 14-9, 14-10, 14-11, 14-11, 14-12, 14-14, 14-15 design file, 14-18, 14-18, 14-19 DFOADM, 14-17 DWDM, 14-12 link power, 14-4 NLP, 14-10 O-E-O, 14-14, 14-15 OSNR, 14-9

main window, 3-2 Menus Action, 3-4 Audit, 3-7 File, 3-2 Main window, 3-8 Reports, 3-5

.............................................................

.............................................................

H Hardware requirements

N Network element configurations

channel, 14-10 channels, 14-6, 14-8

Menu bar

client installation on PC/MAC, 2-2

design of, 1-3 .............................................................

............................................................. P PRBS M Main window

Action menu, 3-4 Audit menu, 3-7 Audit menu, description, 3-8

See: pseudo-random binary sequence pseudo-random binary sequence, GL-56 .............................................................

File menu, 3-2 File menu, description, 3-3 Help menu, 3-8 Help menu, description, 3-8 menu bar functionality, 3-2 Reports menu, 3-5

T Toolbar

buttons, merge, 8-25 icon description, 3-11 main window, 3-2 Main window, 3-11

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS IN-1 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016

Index ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic services design of, 1-3 ............................................................. U Uploading features, 1-3

Users tool, xxiv ............................................................. W Warnings

channels, 14-5

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Nokia 1830 PSS IN-2 8DG-63269-JAAA-TEZZA Release 9.0 Issue 1 August 2016